Home

Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator`s Guide

1. pnSPROFILESS PRINTER f PROFILESS FILENAME cPROFILESS CONC_COPIES l Fpasta_cupsl cfg You can refer to the existing printer driver definitions created by Oracle such as PASTA_LANDSCAPE PASTA_PORTRAIT or PASTA_LANDWIDE 9 30 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 4 Create a printer type for each server in Oracle E Business Suite For example Pasta printer CUPS1 Pasta printer CUPS2 Pasta printer CUPS3 Add the required print styles associated with the printer drivers to the printer type Example Printer Type Pasta printer for CUPS1 Print Style Printer Driver LANDSCAPE PASTA_LANDSCAPE_CUPS1 PORTRAIT PASTA_PORTRAIT_CUPS1 LANDWIDE PASTA_LANDWIDE_CUPS1 1 Register your printer with the print style For example if printer1 is defined on the server CUPS1 and you have created Pasta printer CUPSI printer type for the server register printer with the Pasta printer CUPSI printer type Related Topics Printers Window page 9 49 Printer Types Window page 9 47 Print Styles Window page 9 50 Printer Drivers Window page 9 53 Defining Configuration Files for Specific Printers page 9 11 Configuration File Options page 9 18 Customizing Printing Support in Oracle E Business Suite Oracle E Business Suite provides numerous predefined printer types with which you can identify your printers as well as print styles that define the dimensions of Oracle Reports o
2. ZZ J J N J vn W yY y For parameters that follow the CONCURRENT parameter and include spaces enclose the parameter argument in double quotes then again in single quotes Oracle Application Object Library requires this syntax because it parses the argument string Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 39 twice For example to pass this argument to a program This is an example pass this argument through CONCSUB This is an example Example Here is an example of the command to run CONCSUB CONCSUB APPS APPS SYSADMIN V System Administrator SYSADMIN V WAIT N CONCURRENT FND FNDFMRTC PROGRAM NAME Register Custom Tables Weekly REPEAT INTERVAL 7 REPEAT INTERVAL UNIT DAYS REPEAT INTERVAL TYPE START START 08 JUN 96 23 55 00 CGL APPLSYS ALL CGL Parameters The following entries explain the required and optional parameters for submitting a concurrent program with CONCSUB Default values are listed to the right username password Required The ORACLE username and password that provides access to the data that your program uses Alternatively an Oracle E Business Suite username and password for a user with the System Administrator responsibility responsibility application Required The application short name of the responsibility short name whose concurrent processing options you want to use
3. Define which documents a document sequence can number and then assign the document sequence to your definition A document sequence numbers documents generated by an Oracle E Business Suite product for example invoices generated by Oracle Receivables Documents can be defined by the application that generates them and their category the table in which they are stored Additional fields appear when the optional rules for defining documents Set of Books and Method of document entry are enabled Besides entering a document definition and assigning a sequence to it you can if you wish enter effective dates for the assignment Prerequisites Define the document sequence using the Document Sequences window See Document Sequences page 14 7 Sequence Assignments Block Specify documents by the application that generates them and the category of the document table where the documents are stored You can also include in your document definition the set of books they affect and the method by which the 14 12 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration document is entered Once a document definition is entered you select a sequence to assign it to and if you wish enter effective dates for the assignment There can only be one active sequence assigned to each unique combination of Application Category Set of Books and Method The last two criterion are optional and are set in the Document
4. R DEFAU R DE FAU T 75 iT 10 FND STATS VERIFY STATS schemaname tablelist days old column stat schemaname tablelist days old VARC VARC NUMB BOOLE T NULL A comma separated list of tables It should be of the form schema tablename A wildcard in the tablename is also allowed For example tablelist gt oe so head pa pa_exp ar ra customers The owner part is mandatory The factor for calculating the histograms Sample percent Degree of parallelization HAR2 DEFAULT NULL HAR2 DEFAULT NULL ER DEFAULT NULL AN DEFAULT FALSE The name of a schema If schemaname is NULL which is the default then the procedure reports on the given list of tables A comma separated list of tables If the tablename is not of the form lt schema gt lt tablename gt then the schema is the value of the schemaname parameter If the tablelist is NULL the default then the procedure reports on all the tables for the specified schemaname The procedure only reports those tables whose statistics are older than the days old number of days The default is 12 22 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration NULL which means the procedure will report on all the tables column_stat If TRUE the procedure reports column statistics for the export_table_stats table The default is FALS
5. Entity Sub entities if any Download Parameters FORM FORM APP SHORT NAME FORM NAME FUNCTION FUNC APP SHORT NAME FUNCTION NAME MENU ENTRY MENU ENTRY None The entity definition is Loaders B 21 DEFINE FOR KEY APPLICATION SHORT NAME VARCHAR2 50 KEY FORM NAME VARCHAR2 30 TRANS USER FORM NAME VARCHAR2 80 TRANS DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 240 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 D FORM ral DEFINE FUNCTION KE FUNCTION NAME VARCHAR2 30 BASE FORM REFERENCES FORM BASE TYPE VARCHAR2 30 BASE PARAMETERS VARCHAR2 2000 BAS EB HOST NAME VARCHAR2 80 BASE WEB AGENT NAME VARCHAR2 80 BASE WEB HTML CALL VARCHAR2 240 BASE EB SECURED VARCHAR2 1 BASE EB ICON VARCHAR2 30 TRANS USER FUNCTION NAME VARCHAR2 80 TRANS DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 240 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 ND FUNCTION W W W RES BASE WEB ENCRYPT PARAMETERS VARCHAR2 1 W W U D zal DEFINE MENU KEY ENU NAME VARCHAR2 30 TRANS USER MENU NAME VARCHAR2 80 TRANS DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 240 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 DEFINE ENTRY TRANS PROMPT VARCHAR2 60 TRANS DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 240 CTX SUBMENU REFERENCES MENU CTX FUNCTION REFERENCES FUNCTI
6. If a default printer or print style displays users may override the default if other printers or print styles are available Related Topics Overview of Printers and Printing page 9 1 Printer Types Print Styles and Printer Drivers page 9 2 Setting up Your Printers page 9 8 Printer Setup with Pasta page 9 10 Printers page 9 49 Print Styles page 9 50 Printer Drivers page 9 53 Postscript Printing in UNIX You can convert your report output files into postscript format when printing in some UNIX environments by using the enscript UNIX utility Important Refer to your UNIX documentation before using enscript Usage and the arguments employed by enscript may be specific to your platform Printers 9 43 Concurrent Manager Arguments The concurrent manager can supply four different values as arguments to an operating system print command or custom print program See the example of using all four values provided by the concurrent manager See Example Entering a Print Command and Arguments page 9 34 See the example of using the enscript UNIX utility and two of the values the concurrent manager supplies as arguments See Example Using the UNIX Enscript Command page 9 44 Enscript Arguments and Print Styles The following table lists some sample enscript arguments using the Courier font for converting a report s output into postscript for the portrait landscape landwide and A4 print styles Pri
7. If you need to remove the concurrent manager service ensure that it is not running To remove or delete the OracleConcMegr lt SID gt service use one of the following 2 methods Method 1 At the command prompt type C gt cd COMMON TOP admin install C gt adsvem cmd deinstall Method 2 Invoke the GUI program ccmsetup exe and choose the option to remove the service Once you have done this you will need to reinstall the concurrent manager service in order to process concurrent requests File Conventions The following tables list the locations and file naming conventions for log output and temporary files The location of product log and output files depends on whether you have set up a common directory For UNIX File Type Location Filename Internal Concurrent Manager FND_TOP APPLLOG with lt mgrname gt mgr Log Common Directory APPLCSF APPLLOG Concurrent Manager Log FND_TOP APPLLOG with w nnn mgr Common Directory APPLCSF APPLLOG Request Log Default I request ID gt req lt PROD gt _TOP APPLLOG with Common Directory APPLCSF APPLLOG 8 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration File Type Location Filename Request Output Default o lt request ID gt out lt PROD gt _TOP APPLOUT with Common Directory APPLCSF SAPPLOUT Temporary APPLTMP or OF abcd12345 t where REPORTS60 TMP abcd12345 is a random OS generated string Parameters
8. ssssseeeeeeeee ene 6 81 Concurrent Conflicts Domains Window sese 6 82 Concurrent Programs HEMEL Ul 3 e rote eee reete ta ae e te er seated ee 6 83 Search for Concurrent Programs tei rent rta deer tn ne a n RR rane Red 6 83 Create Concurrent Programi oed ete ec ease tete esse Piera tes 6 83 Concurrent Program Add Parameter sss 6 91 vi Defining Concurrent Managers Defining Managers and their Work Shifts in the Oracle Forms UI ssss 7 1 Work Shift Definitions ierse n m 7 3 Using Work Shifts to Balance Processing Workload ssssseeee 7 5 Using Time Based Queues sicir aerea aea a Eea e aE E EEE AAEE EEE EE AEE 7 7 Creating Services within Oracle Applications Manager 7 8 Completed Concurrent Requests Report ssssssssssse eene 7 15 Report Parameters zer oa ane a Tre FREE UR TIRE a cee E REOR ees ered dS 7 15 Report Headings resora ento pi dob uev a eye nenatis 7 15 Work Shift by Manager Report crs er insomnii eiir niaar a eme enne enn nnns 7 16 Report Parameters die d aed ingre n Ha epa sla Pa RR d Ta EX RT Pad 7 16 Report Headings cento tee pe eoe set en 7 16 Work Shifts Report neon m ei tb ip a d d d RR e E ean 7 16 Report Parameters eie cae ier e eris E eode Fee nde dede alu edd Id 7 16 Report Headings 13 2 4 edes tne met eee dont Nine cte tetas 7 16 Specializing Managers to Run Only Certain
9. 2 24 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 3 Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility Introduction to Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model The Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model formerly called the Oracle Applications Tablespace Model or OATM uses twelve consolidated tablespaces including three system tablespaces temporary system and undo segments and provides support for locally managed tablespaces OATM was introduced in Release 117 10 In prior 11i releases of Oracle E Business Suite each product was allocated two tablespaces one for data and one for indexes The Migration Utility is a menu based PERL program and a series of sizing estimate reports that enables conversion of Oracle E Business Suite applications schemas either in a single comprehensive migration or a phased schema by schema migration In general Oracle recommends performing a single comprehensive migration however this requires a sufficient amount of down time and disk space Oracle does not support partial migration of tablespaces You must still migrate all schemas when performing a phased schema by schema migration With OATM each database object is mapped to a tablespace based on its Input Output characteristics which include object size life span access methods and locking granularity This model allows for easier maintenance and reduced space usage for Oracle E Business Suite Another
10. Date fields without a time component cannot be represented in different time zones because no meaningful conversion is possible for a date that does not include a specific time Such a date is entered with respect to one time zone and in general must be viewed as a day in that time zone regardless of the location and possibly different time zone in which it is being viewed Oracle E Business Suite typically uses the corporate time zone for these day definitions dates without a time component represent the day with respect to the corporate headquarters corporate days There are some exceptions to the above rule For example dates without a time component may be held as ANSI dates to represent dates independently of the time zone in which they are being viewed In such a case a benefit that starts on 1st January will start on that date wherever in the world it is made available that is it will apply to anyone who is in a time zone where it is 1st January Many dates without a time component represent pointers to a financial period These dates are not meant to indicate the exact hour and minute that a transaction occurred but rather the financial period into which the transaction is accounted This is a financial bucketing from the perspective of the implementing company For example the invoice dates on Payables or Receivables invoices never change based on who is looking at them they are classified as invoices for that day and thus th
11. a configuration file The configuration file describes the structure of the data and also the access methods to use to copy the data into or out of the database The same configuration file may be used for both uploading and downloading When downloading the Generic Loader creates a second file called the data file that contains the structured data selected for downloading The data file has a standard syntax for representing the data that has been downloaded When uploading the Generic Loader reads a data file to get the data that it is to upload In most cases the data file was produced by a previous download but may have come from another source The data file cannot be interpreted without the corresponding configuration file available Download database information to a text file The text file is human readable and portable and can be examined and modified with any editor Generally a developer key is used to identify records written out to text files For example the PROFILE OPTION NAME not the PROFILE OPTION ID is used to identify records in the Profiles configuration file Upload merge the information in a text file to the database In uploading if a row exists but has different attributes the row is updated If a row does not exist a new row is inserted Depending on the configuration file a row that exists in the database but not in the text file may or may not be deleted when the text file is uploaded Refer to t
12. 16 Language Picker 32 e Corporate Policy Message 64 For example to show the Password Hint and the Forgot Password URL only set the Local Login Mask profile option to 10 02408 To show just the Language Picker set the 2 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration value to 32 which is also the default value for the profile option The values for the Username Hint Password Hint Forgot Password URL text Register URL text and the Corporate Policy Message as well as the Copyright text are stored in Message Dictionary You can update these messages using the Messages form or HTML page The table below lists the message names and their default values Login Page Message Names and Default Values Message Name Default value FND_SSO_HINT_USERNAME example michael james smith FND_SSO_HINT_PASSWORD example 4u99v23 FND_SSO_FORGOT_PASSWORD Forgot your password FND_SSO_REGISTER_HERE Register here FND_SSO_SARBANES_OXLEY_TEXT Corporate Policy Message FND_SSO_COPYRIGHT_TEXT Copyright c 2006 Oracle All rights reserved Personalizing the Oracle E Business Suite Home Page The Oracle E Business Home Page can be personalized to display the Worklist and to display the Applications Navigator in Tree or Flat mode By default the Applications Navigator is shown in Flat mode Refer to the Oracle Application Framework Personalization Guide for more information on personalizing Orac
13. Backing up the Database Oracle highly recommends that you perform a backup of your database twice as follows 1 Copy of previous tablespace model Back up your database before performing any of the migration steps Because Oracle does not support the rollback of migrated database objects this is the only available method for restoring your previous tablespace model 2 Copy of database that has been prepared for migration Backup your database after performing Step 3 Generate Migration Commands This enables you to migrate your database objects to OATM using your last good copy of a database that has been prepared for migration If you choose to use the menu option 8 Migration in Batch mode you should perform the database backup before the migration and or after the preparatory steps are completed if you choose to run the preparatory steps separately Phase 1 Preparatory Steps Step 1 Generate Migration Sizing Reports Select Step 1 Generate Migration Sizing Reports to access a list of reports that help you to gauge the space requirements for the new tablespace model and that assist you in determining which migration approach best suits your requirements The reports perform sizing estimation by executing a program that calculates the size of each object using package DBMS SPACE UNUSED SPACE and by populating table END TS SIZING The sizing reports use the data in this table to display the required information The Plan Migration
14. If the dimensions specified with the PAGESIZE parameter are smaller than what the report was designed for you will generate a REP 1212 error Overview of Printers and Printing page 9 1 Setting up Your Printers page 9 8 Creating Custom Printer Drivers page 9 31 Printers 9 7 Printer Drivers field help page 9 53 Setting Up Your Printers Oracle E Business Suite provides you with predefined printer types print styles and printer drivers Use the Printer Types form to query the combinations of print style and printer driver that support each type of printer you have Customize the predefined components as necessary See Customizing Printing Support in Oracle E Business Suite page 9 31 Important Predefined printing components may have to be modified for different printer types and or operating platforms Forms for Defining Printer Support You use four forms to define printer support Printer Types You must define any printer types used at your site that are not shipped with Oracle E Business Suite It is on this form that you associate the print style with a printer driver for the particular printer type Printers You register a printer so that Oracle E Business Suite recognizes the printer and can forward to it the output from a report program To register a printer you specify the printer s operating system name which uniquely identifies the printer and select the printer type The printer type must already be d
15. The key is composed of APPLICATION SHORT NAME and DESCRIPTIVE FLEXFIELD NAME Example gt FNDLOAD apps apps 0 Y DOWNLOAD GFND admin import afffload lct out ldt DESC FLEX APPLICATION SHORT NAME FND DESCRIPTIVE FLEXFIELD NAME FND FLEX TEST gt FNDLOAD apps apps 0 Y UPLOAD FND admin import afffload lct out ldt B 14 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Key Flexfields The entity KEY_FLEX includes the unique ID column structure column segment columns flexfield qualifier segment qualifier structure Account Generator workflow process shorthand alias cross validation rule cross validation rule line segment flexfield qualifier assignment and segment qualifier assignment details References VALUE_SET for the value set used by the given segment The key is composed of APPLICATION_SHORT_NAME and ID_FLEX_CODE Example gt FNDLOAD apps apps 0 Y DOWNLOAD GFND admin import afffload lct out ldt KEY FLEX APPLICATION SHORT NAME SQLGL ID FLEX CODE GL gt FNDLOAD apps apps 0 Y UPLOAD GFND admin import afffload lct out ldt Folders Configuration File The folder configuration file fndfold lct downloads and uploads folder definitions The following table lists the entities sub entities if any and download parameters for this configuration file Entity Sub entities if any Download Parameters FND FOLDERS
16. The variable parameters have the following values mgrname nnn PROD TOP request ID USERNAME abcd12345 Directory Privileges For UNIX the name specified with the mgrname parameter in the startmgr command If no name is specified the filename is std mgr For Windows the name specified with the mgrname parameter in the ccmsetup exe program If no name is specified the filename is std mgr A sequence number between 1 and 999 is generated by the concurrent processing facility The product s top environment variable such as GL TOP The number that identifies the concurrent request Up to eight characters uppercase of the application username of the user that requested the concurrent process Naming convention in which lt abcd gt are random letters and 12345 designate the operating system process ID of the concurrent process that generated the file Oracle recommends that you start the managers from the applmgr login to ensure that they inherit the correct directory privileges The user who starts the concurrent managers then owns the log and output files that the concurrent managers create Oracle recommends that you start the managers from the applmgr login to ensure that they inherit the correct directory privileges For UNIX any user who runs an environment file and has access to the startmgr script Setting Up and Starting Concurrent Managers 8 9 can start the concurrent managers For UNI
17. This book is intended for use by anyone who is responsible for installing or upgrading Oracle E Business Suite It provides instructions for running Rapid Install either to carry out a fresh installation of Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 or as part of an upgrade from Release 11 to Release 12 The book also describes the steps needed to install the technology stack components only for the special situations where this is applicable Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Documentation Set This documentation set provides planning and reference information for the Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration contains information on system configuration steps including defining concurrent programs and managers enabling Oracle Applications Manager features and setting up printers and online help Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance provides information for frequent tasks such as monitoring your system with Oracle Applications Manager administering Oracle E Business Suite Secure Enterprise Search managing concurrent managers and reports using diagnostic utilities including logging managing profile options and using alerts Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security describes User Management data security function security auditing and security configurations Oracle E Business Suite User s Guide This
18. based on the profile option GL SET OF BOOKS Multiple installations referred to as MSOB e Multiple Operating units determined by profile option MO OPERATING UNIT referred as MULTIORG e Multiple Orgs determined by profile option INV ORGANIZATION ID Used by Manufacturing Applications e HR may use business group as a conflict resolution domain e FA may use FA book etc A conflict domain is an abstract representation of the groupings used to partition your data There is no limit to the number of domains that can be defined but excessive domains may hurt performance All programs are assigned a conflict domain when they are submitted If a domain is defined as part of a parameter the concurrent manager will use it to resolve incompatibilities If the domain is not defined by a parameter the concurrent manager uses the value defined for the profile option Concurrent Conflicts Domain Lastly if the domain is not provided by a program parameter and the Concurrent Conflicts Domain profile option has not been defined the Standard domain is used The Standard domain is the default for all requests All programs use the Standard conflict domain unless a value is defined for the profile option Concurrent Conflicts Domain or a conflict domain is defined through a program parameter Each request submitted uses parameters which identify the records that it will access For programs that are defined with incompatability rules an addi
19. colname partname statid ESTORE VARC VARC VARC VARC VARC HAR2 HAR2 HAR2 HAR2 DI COLUMN STATS EFAULT NULL HAR2 Dl EFAULT NULL STORE VARC COLU HAR2 DI N STATS EFAULT NULL Name of the schema Name of the table Name of the column Optional identifier to associate with these statistics within FND STATTAB Name of the table partition If the table is partitioned and if partname is NULL then global and partition table statistics are exported Optional identifier to associate with these statistics within FND STATTAB Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite 12 11 ENABLE_SCHEMA_MONITORING Procedure Syntax Parameters This procedure should be used for enabling the Monitoring option for all tables in the specified schema Monitoring option should be enabled before using the GATHER AUTO or LIST AUTO option of GATHER SCHEMA STATS If the value of the schemaname argument is ALL then the Monitoring option is enabled for all tables that belong to all schemas registered in Oracle E Business Suite FND STATS ENABLE SCHEMA MONITORING schemaname VARCHAR2 DEFAULT ALL schemaname Name of the schema for which Monitoring should be enabled DISABLE SCHEMA MONITORING Procedure Syntax Parameters This procedure should be used for disabling the Monitoring option for all tables in the specified schema If the value
20. 7 BASE START DATE ACTIVE VARCHAR2 11 BASE END DATE ACTIVE VARCHAR2 11 TRANS USER NAME VARCHAR2 30 END FND DOCUMENT DATATYPES Concurrent Program Configuration File The concurrent program configuration file afcpprog lct downloads and uploads concurrent program definitions It takes as parameters program name and application name The following table lists the entities sub entities if any and download parameters for this configuration file Loaders B 11 Entity Sub entities if any Download Parameters PROGRAM INCOMPATIBILITY CONCURRENT PROGRAM NAME APPLICATION SHORT NA ME EXECUTABLE EXECUTABLE NAME The entity definition is B 12 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration DEFINE PROGRAM KEY CONCURRENT PROGRAM NAME VARCHAR2 30 KEY APPLICATION VARCHAR2 50 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 TRANS USER CONCURRENT PROGRAM NAME VARCHAR2 240 BASE EXEC APPLICATION VARCHAR2 50 BASE EXECUTABLE NAME VARCHAR2 30 BASE EXECUTION METHOD CODE VARCHAR2 1 BASE ARGUME
21. ALL COLUMN STATS Procedure ssssssssssse eene 12 19 ANALYZE ALL COLUMNS Procedure sssssssssseeeeeee eene 12 20 LOAD XCLUD STATS Procedure itat c tea it ni d n a En 12 21 PURGE STAT HISTORY Procedure sss eene nennen 12 21 CHECK HISTOGRAM COLS Procedure sse eee eee eene 12 21 VERIFY STATS Procedure iiia teirelitiede iste tipi ena eben iacet ipd 12 22 13 Oracle E Business Suite and Oracle Real Application Clusters Introduction to Oracle Real Application Clusters ssssssssesee 13 1 Prerequ isites i ico iciei turi i i ad iin a eer dre AT ep RA teu HA penna de 13 1 Migrating to Oracle RA Coreinae etandan iiaiai aptae innata inniti natns 13 2 Establishing the Oracle E Business Suite Environment for Oracle RAC 13 2 Configuring Parallel Concurrent Processing with Oracle RAC sssessssss 13 2 14 Document Sequences What is a Document Sequence ssssssssssssssssseee eene eene nre nnns 14 1 Defining a Document Sequence sssssssssesseseseeneeeereene entren 14 1 Defining Document C tegOtleS sisia iige eee aitriai enne nennen 14 4 Assigning a Document SequenC nrei irise ese aeia a eeii aea e ei 14 5 Document Numbering vs Document Entry ee en enne 14 7 Document Sequences Window sse eene nnne 14 7 Document Sequences Blocks ainina bias he sacle Mol eee ep EE 14 8 Document Cat
22. CONC Manager Startup Threshold Limit to 0 This setting will cause the Threshold functionality to be ignored when managers are being checked for restarting Controlling Managers from the Administer Managers form Use the Administer Concurrent Managers form to issue commands to your concurrent managers You can also have the Internal Concurrent Manager manually verify the status of your individual managers and restart individual managers See Administer Concurrent Managers page 7 50 The following table describes control functions for the Internal Manager Control Function Description Activate concurrent manager Activates the Internal manager and all other managers except managers that were deactivated individually using Deactivate concurrent manager Defining Concurrent Managers 7 37 Control Function Description Verify concurrent manager status Deactivate concurrent manager Terminate requests and deactivate manager Manually executes the process monitoring PMON cycle Deactivates the Internal manager and all other managers All running requests running concurrent programs are terminated and all managers are deactivated The following table describes control functions for any other manager Control Function Description Activate concurrent manager Restart concurrent manager Deactivate concurrent manager Terminate requests and deactivate manager If the manager is
23. E Business Suite Installation Guide Using Rapid Install Example Printer Drivers Form s Arguments field lp d PROFILESS PRINTER n PROFILES CONC_ COPIES t PROFILES TITLE SPROFILESS FILENAME The following table lists arguments and their contents for the UNIX Ip print command 9 34 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Argument Syntax Token and Value Retrieved d PROFILES PRINTER d calls out the PROFILES PRINTER retrieves the destination printer operating system name of the printer associated with the request n PROFILES CONC_COPIES n calls out PROFILES CONC_COPIES retrieves the the number of copies to print value of the profile option Concurrent Report Copies unless this value is updated at runtime t PROFILES TITLE t calls out the report PROFILES TITLE retrieves the title of the title to print on a banner or header page output file typically titled as Application username Request ID For example if user John Smith ran a report whose concurrent request ID was 64225 the title would be JSMITH 64225 This is operating system dependent PROFILES FILENAME PROFILES FILENAME calls out the filename of the report to be printed The value retrieved is the output file name including the path to the file Note that this file is a temporary file created from information from the Printer Driver definition from the Printer Dri
24. Node that does not branch into other nodes but simply links to a help file Version identifier of the help file Customizing Help in a Global Environment The Oracle E Business Suite help system contains files translated into many different languages and localized for diverse countries and regions If your enterprise crosses linguistic and cultural boundaries or if you use Oracle Human Resources the following information may apply when customizing your help files 10 16 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Linking Between Different Languages One level up the virtual directory hierarchy used in Oracle E Business Suite help URLs are the application directories used to construct cross application links Two levels up are the language directories which you can use to construct cross language links To create a link that goes to a help file in a different language use the following link syntax lt A HREF language code shortname anchorname anchorname gt link text lt A gt For example to link to All About Widgets in the French version of Oracle Payables help you would use the following link where AP is Oracle Payables short name and F is the French language code For more about French widgets see lt A HREF _ F AP widgets widgets gt Qu est ce qu un widget lt A gt When used in this fashion language codes are case insensitive Note After following a link t
25. Printer Enter the name your operating system specifies for the printer Printers 9 49 Type Select your printer type i e manufacturer and model Some reports require a printer of a specific type in order to print correctly You can only select a previously defined printer type Use the Printer Types button to open a window to define a printer type Related Topics Overview of Printers and Printing page 9 1 Printer Types Print Styles and Printer Drivers page 9 2 Setting up Your Printers page 9 8 Printer Types field help page 9 47 Print Styles field help page 9 50 Printer Drivers field help page 9 53 Print Styles Window 9 50 s Oracle Applications iof x File Edit View Falder Tools Window Help ORACLE ZAAN ET FIE Er A Print Styles User Style SRW Driver Description Layout Columns Orientation Use this window to define print styles A print style describes how your report should be printed For example print style determines the e Number of lines per page e Width of each line Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration e Page orientation e g portrait or landscape Oracle E Business Suite reports are designed to work with standard shipped print styles The following print styles are predefined e Portrait e Landscape e Landwide e A4 e Dynamic Portrait Not all reports work with all print styles You may define additional
26. Syntax FND STATS CREATE STAT TABLE FND STATS CREATE STAT TABLE Schemaname IN VARCHAR2 tabname IN VARCHAR2 tblspcname IN VARCHAR2 Parameters schemaname Name of the schema tabname Name of the table tblspcname Tablespace in which to create the statistics tables If none is specified then the tables are created in the user s default 12 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration tablespace BACKUP_TABLE_STATS Syntax Parameters This procedure backs up the statistics for the given table in the FND_STATTAB table Setting cascade to TRUE results in all index and column statistics associated with the specified table to be stored as well An identifier commonly referred to as STATID can be associated with the backup up statistics This STATID allows you to restore a particular version of the statistics using the RESTORE_TABLE_STATS procedure FND STATS BACKUP TABLE STATS Schemaname VARCHAR2 tabname VARCHAR2 statid VARCHAR2 DEFAULT BACKUP partname VARCHAR2 DEFAULT NULL cascade BOOLEAN DEFAULT TRUE schemaname Name of the schema tabname Name of the table statid Optional identifier to associate with these statistics within END STATTAB partname Name of the table partition If the table is partitioned and if partname is NULL then global and partition table statistics are exported cascade If TRUE then column and index statistics for this table are
27. a tH PTA e he genet ROLE a Record 1 1 Use the Territories window to review and modify information for the country values used in Oracle E Business Suite Territories Block Each record includes the two letter uppercase territory Code such as US the Short Name for the territory such as United States the NLS Code the ISO numeric entity code an Alternate territory code and a longer description Description such as United States of America Normally you would not want to update the seeded data that comes with your products but you may wish to modify the way the country is represented in List of Values through out your applications You can update the description of the Territory to change the territory value displayed in List of Values used in Oracle E Business Suite products Administering Globalization 18 11 19 Integration of Oracle E Business Suite with Other Products Integration of Oracle E Business Suite with Other Products Oracle E Business Suite can be integrated with other Oracle products This chapter lists some of the integration points Note Oracle E Business Suite integrates with many other products and these are discussed elsewhere For example see the Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security for information on integration with Oracle Single Sign On Linking to Application Development Framework Applications You can l
28. also exported BACKUP SCHEMA STATS Procedure Syntax This procedure can be used to backup the statistics for an entire schema The statistics are backed up into the FND STATTAB table A different version can be stored by specifying a different statid An identifier commonly referred to as STATID can be associated with the backup up statistics This STATID allows you to restore a particular version of the statistics using the RESTORE SCHEMA STATS procedure FND STATS BACKUP TABLE STATS Schemaname VARCHAR2 statid VARCHAR2 DEFAULT NULL Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite 12 9 Parameters schemaname statid Name of the schema ALL means all Oracle E Business Suite schemas Optional identifier to associate with these statistics within FND_STATTAB RESTORE SCHEMA STATS Procedure This procedure restores statistics for the given schema that were previously backed up in the FND_STATTAB table into the dictionary Statid can be provided to distinguish between different sets of statistics for the same object Syntax FND STATS RESTORE SCHEMA STATS Schemaname VARCHAR2 statid VARCHAR2 DEFAULT NULL Parameters schemaname Name of the schema ALL means all Oracle E Business Suite schemas statid Optional identifier to associate with these statistics within END STATTAB RESTORE TABLE STATS Procedure This procedure restores statistics for the given table from the FND STATTAB table for
29. branch that has been expanded the item will be pasted as a child of the selected node If the node selected is a branch that has not been expanded the item will be pasted as a sibling beneath the selected node Deletes the selected item Allows you to update the properties of the selected item via the Properties window The Properties window is identical to the Properties Pane See Help Builder Window Reference page 10 15 for descriptions of the Properties fields 10 10 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Help Builder Tasks Preferences Allows you to set interface preferences via the Preferences window The preferences you can set are Background Color Line and Box Color Default Node Color Default Node Text Color Font Name Font Size View Menu The View Menu provides the following functions Node Properties Enable the check box to display the Node Properties pane enabled is the default Toolbar Enable the check box to display the Toolbar enabled is the default Statusbar Enable the check box to display the Status Bar enabled is the default Find Documents Opens the Find Documents window Find Trees Opens the Find Trees window Help Menu The View Menu provides the following functions About Displays information about the Help Builder Library Opens the Oracle E Business Suite Help Library Opening a tree for editing To open a tree for editing 1 Open the Find Trees
30. concurrent processing starts a number of these managers Rather than polling the concurrent requests table to determine what to do a transaction manager waits to be signalled by a client program The execution of the requested transaction program takes place on the server transparent to the client and with minimal time delay At the end of program execution the client program is notified of the outcome by a completion message and a set of return values Communication with a transaction manager is automatic The transaction manager mechanism does not establish an ongoing connection between the client and the transaction manager processes The intent of the mechanism is for a small pool of server processes to service a large number of clients with real time response Each transaction manager can process only the programs contained in its program library Oracle E Business Suite developers using Oracle Application Object Library can register transaction programs with a program library Related Topics Administer Concurrent Managers page 7 50 Concurrent Managers page 7 59 Work Shift Definitions page 7 3 Using Work Shifts to Balance Processing Workload page 7 5 Using Time Based Queues page 7 7 Work Shift by Manager Report page 7 16 Work Shifts Report page 7 16 Work Shifts page 7 66 Overview of Concurrent Processing Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance Work Shift Definitions When you define a co
31. customize open the document in the Oracle E Business Suite Help System Use the 10 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration view source function of your browser to view the HTML source code The source information will include the file name To identify the language and product of the help file use the source document URL The final three nodes of the source document URL are the language the product name and the anchor or target name Using this document again as an example you will see the final three nodes of the URL are US FND ht_updown ht_updown This identifies the language as US the product group as FND Oracle Application Object Library and the target name as ht_updown Note The syntax in the URL ht_updown ht_updown is an example of the Oracle E Business Suite special syntax used to link documents by anchorname For more information about this syntax see Linking Help Files page 10 5 The Oracle E Business Suite Help System also provides reports to cross reference target names and help file names See Creating Reports page 10 4 Downloading Help Files You download help files by language and by product That is you select the language for example US for U S English and you select the product for example AR Oracle Receivables It is important to note the two letter code for the product in this example the two letter code is AR because the product code determines the download dir
32. diagnose AOL setup issues These JSPs exercise various features of AOL J and provide feedback on the results The test suite is accessed from the URL http host name port number OA HTML jsp fnd aoljtest jsp where host name and port number correspond to the host name and port number of your instance s Apache listener The host name and port number values are normally found in the APPS SERVLET AGENT profile option When you access the test suite you will be asked to provide login information for your instance e Applications Schema Name e Applications Schema Password TWO TASK e Host Name Port Number The following is a list of functions and tests you can run with your instance e Connection Test e Locate DBC File e Verify DBC Settings e AOL J Connection Test e Virtual Directory settings e APPS WEB AGENT e Virtual Directory Settings e FND WEB PING e Custom Authentication e GFM Generic File Manager 2 20 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration APPS_SERVLET_AGENT e Virtual Directory Settings e Servlet Ping e Jsp Ping APPS_FRAMEWORK_AGENT e Virtual Directory Settings e Servlet Ping e Jsp Ping e Cabo Setup Tests e X Server Accessibility e OA Framework System Info e Versions for Loaded Classes HELP_WEB_AGENT TCF e Test Connection Tool Launcher Profile Settings e CX FORMS LAUNCHER CX REPORT LAUNCHER e CX DISCOVERER LAUNCHER Application Login
33. e Assign a predefined library of immediate concurrent programs to your manager Immediate concurrent programs are subroutines associated with concurrent managers All other concurrent programs are spawned as independent processes at run time e Assign work shifts to your manager which determines what days and times the manager works e For each work shift you define the maximum number of operating system processes the manager can run concurrently to read requests start programs during the work shift Defining Concurrent Managers 7 1 e Specialize your manager to read only certain kinds of requests Program Libraries For a program that is spawned a concurrent manager initiates or spawns another operating system process program that is immediate runs as part of the concurrent manager s operating system process A program library contains immediate concurrent programs that can be called by your manager An immediate concurrent program must be registered with a program library Application developers using Oracle Application Object Librarycan register concurrent programs with a program library The Oracle Application Object Library FNDLIBR program library contains Oracle E Business Suite immediate concurrent programs and is assigned to the Standard concurrent manager In most cases you will include the FNDLIBR library with your manager s definition The Internal and the Standard concurrent managers Oracle E Business S
34. e Login Page e Show Responsibilities e Show Session Properties An optional and recommended alternative to AOL J is the Oracle Universal Connection Pool UCP for JDBC Basic Configuration Tasks 2 21 Note For further details refer to My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 1077727 1 Using Universal Connection Pool UCP in Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 1 3 Using Oracle Application Framework Oracle Application Framework is an Oracle E Business Suite development and deployment platform It is a 100 Java and XML middle tier application framework and services for the rapid development and deployment of HTML based applications For information on Oracle Application Framework see My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 1087332 1 Oracle Application Framework Release Notes Release 12 1 3 The following user interface features are enabled by default but can be disabled via the profile options listed in the table below Note See the Oracle E Business Suite User s Guide for additional information on these features Feature Profile Option Profile Option Default Value on Values Site Level Configurable FND Disable True False False Homepage Configurable Home Page Slideout Menu for FND Disable True False False Navigator and Navigator and Favorites Favorites Rich Menu Inline Attachments FND Disable Inline True False False Attachments Look ahead LOV FND Disable Look True False False Ahead LOV Note The pr
35. e modify a work shift s target number of processes modify its specialization rules e change a concurrent program s incompatibility rules Deactivating Individual Managers When you shut down an individual manager you can choose whether to abort all requests and deactivate the manager immediately or to allow it to finish processing its current requests before deactivating If you choose to Deactivate the manager requests that are currently running are Defining Concurrent Managers 7 35 allowed to complete When you terminate requests and deactivate an individual manager requests that are currently running are immediately stopped and marked for resubmission when the manager is activated Oracle E Business Suite concurrent programs are designed so that no data is lost or duplicated when a terminated request is resumed after a shut down This applies for shutdowns that are normal e g using the Deactivate concurrent manager request or abnormal e g after a hardware failure Important When a manager is selected and explicitly deactivated it remains that way until you select and explicitly activate that manager As a prerequisite the Internal manager must be activated beforehand Controlling the Internal Concurrent Manager When you activate the Internal Concurrent Manager you activate all other managers as well except those managers that were deactivated on an individual basis When you deactivate the Internal Concu
36. etc Rather than overwrite a concurrent program s definition you should customize a program by copying and renaming an existing program then modifying the new program to suit your needs The figure below illustrates the basic steps in copying and modifying a new concurrent program As the figure illustrates you can copy parameters and then modify the behavior of the parameters Or you can copy the list of incompatible programs and then modify the list Finally you can change the associated printer and or print style Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 45 Modifying a Concurrent Program COPY AN EXISTING PROGRAM AND RENAME IT COPY COPY ARGUMENTS INCOMPATIBLE YES PROGRAMS LISTING YES MODIFY THE MODIFY CHANGE BEHAVIOR OF THE LIST OF PRINTER PARAMETERS INCOMPATIBLE AND OR PROGRAMS PRINT STYLE Related Topics Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests page 6 1 Copying and Modifying Program Definitions page 6 44 Example of modifying a program s parameters page 6 54 Concurrent Programs page 6 65 Alter Program Priority You may wish to control the priority of some requests on a program level rather than at the user level Setting the priority for a program allows any request to run that concurrent program to use your selected priority rather than the priority of the user submitting the request For example a user can submit a variety of requests at the standard priority determined by the value
37. have assigned work shifts and are activated and deactivated by the Internal Concurrent Manager Concurrent Programs and Requests You can optionally define a target node for a concurrent program When a request for the program is submitted only available managers running on the specified node will pick it up If no specification is made for the target node of a concurrent program a request for it will be picked up by any manager available to run it If a node specification is made for a concurrent program and the node is up only available managers running on the specified node will pick up the request However if the target node is down any available manager will pick up the request for processing and log an appropriate message in FND_LOG_MESSAGES If no specification is made for the target instance of a concurrent program a request for it will be picked up by the first manager available to run it and will be run in the instance where the manager is already connected If an instance specification is made for a concurrent program and the instance is up it will be picked up by the first manager available to run it and the manager will run the request in the specified instance However if the target instance is down the manager will run the request in the instance where it is already connected and log an appropriate message Log and Output File Access The concurrent log and output files from requests that run on any node are accessible
38. responsibility name Required The name of your responsibility If the name of your responsibility includes spaces enclose that name in double quotes username Required The uppercase username of the application user whose concurrent processing options you want to use WAIT Optional A flag that indicates whether to wait for the submitted request to complete If you leave this parameter out the default value of N makes CONCSUB return you to 6 40 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration CONCURRENT program application short name program name PROGRAM_ NAME the operating system prompt without waiting for your request to complete Set WAIT Y to have CONCSUB check the request status every 60 seconds and return you to the operating system prompt when your request is completed You can also enter an integer value for a number of seconds as in WAIT 30 for CONCSUB to check for request completion every lt number gt seconds Important Using WAIT Y or WAIT lt number gt requires that your request completes before CONCSUB returns you to the operating system If the concurrent manager is down your CONCSUB process waits indefinitely until the concurrent manager is started and the request completes Required A flag that separates the program specific parameters from the operating system parameters Required The application short name of your concurrent program Required The uppercase name of you
39. the application name and the name you define for your combined specialization rule uniquely identifies the rule The application name does not prevent a concurrent manager from starting programs associated with other applications Specialization Rules Block Include Exclude Type Define the individual rules statements that make up your combined specialization rule e Each rule in this block defines one statement e The sum of all the specialization rules defines your combined specialization rule Select from the poplist whether to include or exclude those requests that are based on the rule to run Select the type of specialization rule you want to enforce on a concurrent manager You cannot combine two Include rules of the same type For example you cannot include programs to be associated with an ORACLE ID then on another line include programs to be associated with a second different ORACLE ID Based on a rule s action exclude or include programs can be run by your manager according to a e ORACLE ID For example programs with a certain ORACLE ID are excluded from running Or conversely a concurrent manager only includes programs with a specific ORACLE ID Program For example only the program you select is excluded from running Or conversely a concurrent manager only includes the programs you select You can also include or exclude all programs belonging to a specific application using the Program type
40. the given statid optional and transfers them back to the dictionary Setting cascade to TRUE results in all index and column statistics associated with the specified table being imported also Syntax FND STATS R ownname tabname statid partname cascade Parameters ownname ESTORE TABLE STATS VARCHAR2 VARCHAR2 VARCHAR2 DEFAULT NULL VARCHAR2 DEFAULT NULL BOOLEAN DEFAULT TRUE Name of the schema 12 10 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration tabname statid partname cascade Name of the table Optional identifier to associate with these statistics within FND_STATTAB Name of the table partition If the table is partitioned and if partname is NULL then global and partition table statistics are exported If TRUE then column and index statistics for this table are also exported RESTORE COLUMN STATS Procedure This procedure restores statistics for the given column from the FND_STATTAB table for the given statid optional and transfers them back to the dictionary There are two versions of this procedure One first one requires the table owner table name and column name to be supplied The second version restores the statistics for all the columns seeded in the FND_HISTOGRAM_COLS table Syntax Parameters FND STATS R ownname tabname colname partname statid FND STATS RE statid ownname tabname
41. then navigate to the Segments window and enable the segments Freeze your flexfield after you set it up and save and compile the new definition Related Topics Descriptive Flexfields Concepts Oracle E Business Suite Flexfields Guide What is a Document Sequence page 14 1 Document Sequences page 14 7 Document Categories page 14 10 14 14 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 15 Overview Logging The Oracle E Business Suite Logging Framework provides the ability to store and retrieve log messages for debugging error reporting and alerting purposes You can set up view and purge log messages through HTML based user interface pages that are located in Oracle Applications Manager These messages must be written into the code by developers For more information refer to the Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide How to Configure Logging Using Middle tier Properties to Configure Logging Using Java All middle tier property settings take precedence over profile option settings Configuring logging using Java system properties usually by setting the Apache JServ system properties in the jserv properties file or oc4j properties for OC4J is a quick way to turn on logging for all sites or users regardless of current profile option settings Middle tier properties only affect the middle tier code and do not affect the PL SOL layer logging Java system properties can be defined for
42. 1 END FND DEFAULT FOLDERS Additional Considerations Please note the following when working with folder definitions e To change the language you are downloading set the environment variable NLS LANG before running the loader Language is a striping column Folder data is never seeded or translated As users operate the screen and make customizations their changes are saved in their current language Do not for example create folders in the English language download the folder definitions and then upload them into another language because all the prompts would remain in English and the WHERE clause saved with the folder may be language sensitive B 16 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Download Exampl The user who is logged in and creates a given folder is by default the owner of that folder A system administrator can change an owner of a folder using the Administer Folders form under the System Administrator responsibility A default folder can be assigned to users and responsibilities The default folder assignments are also handled by the folder loader Make sure the owner and responsibility that is assigned to a folder is in the destination database If the owner or assigned responsibility of a folder is only on the source database it will not be uploaded to the destination database es To download all folders FNDLOAD username password database 0 Y DOWNLOA
43. ADFX function type Set the Web HTML call as appropriate e Function Type External ADF Application ADFX e Web HTML Call GWY jsp targetPage an ADF page such as faces ModelerHome jsp gt For example set the HTML call to GWY jsp targetPage faces MyADFShoppingAppDashboard 3 Incorporate the new function into Oracle E Business Suite security by adding it to a menu and creating appropriate roles responsibilities and grants For example add the function to a menu add the menu to a responsibility and assign the responsibility to a user 4 Loginas that user and access a responsibility from the step above The ADF application link should appear Select the link to go to the ADF application Related Topics Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security Developer Tools 16 9 17 Administering Process Navigation Overview of Process Navigation A process is a series of actions taken to achieve a specific result The Process Navigator utilizes Oracle Workflow to depict each of your business processes with a workflow diagram A process diagram contains an icon for each step in the process each icon acts as a visual cue and as an access point for the actual form associated with each step You can navigate to any form involved in the process simply by clicking on the appropriate icon What is Oracle Workflow Oracle Workflow allows you to define business processes using a drag and drop designer You
44. AdminAppServer is used to create the dbc files Prior to running AdminAppServer you must ensure that e JDBC classes are in the CLASSPATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH e JAVA TOP is in the classpath Creating a dbc file Use the AdminAppServer utility to create a dbc file for the application server to access the database server In addition to creating the dbc file this utility registers the application server with the database for the Applications Server Security feature To access additional database servers from the same application server you must rerun the AdminAppServer utility for each additional database You must run the AdminAppServer utility each time you create a dbc file and each dbc file only allows access to one database To create a dbc file for an application server 1 Youmust set the username password value for the GUEST USER PWD parameter Create a valid username guest for example in Oracle E Business Suite Then use the username password combination as the value for GUEST USER PWD The syntax is illustrated in the following example Basic Configuration Tasks 2 13 GUEST USER PWD guest guest Oracle recommends that you do not assign any responsibilities for this user 2 From the command line enter the appropriate command for your platform For UNIX platforms java oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps dbname ADD DB HOST database host name DB PORT database port DB NAME database
45. Administrator Setup Tasks This chapter describes some common system administrator setup tasks typically done through the Oracle E Business Suite user interface Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager This chapter introduces the Oracle Applications Manager framework Oracle Applications Manager provides a powerful set of features for managing all aspects of an Oracle E Business Suite system It provides a comprehensive summary of the system including configuration changes infrastructure usage performance required maintenance activities potential security issues and diagnostic test results It also includes utilities to help you manage Oracle Workflow patching configuration utilities and concurrent processing Defining Concurrent Programs and Reports This chapter explains how to define concurrent programs and organize those programs into groups and sets This chapter also explains how to modify concurrent program definitions modify the behavior of parameters the programs refer to and define incompatibility rules among different programs Setting Up Concurrent Processing and Concurrent Managers Concurrent managers run processes in the background concurrent processes on a server machine You must set up and start concurrent managers for each product group before you can use the Oracle E Business Suite products Setting Up Printers This chapter describes how to set up printers and printing in Oracle E Business Suite Ora
46. Business Suite User s Guide Users can enter translations for multiple languages at once in the Translations window Translated values should be entered using the Translations window Users should be aware of which fields are allowed to be translated Users can click on the translation icon to identify if a field is translatable If a user types into a field that was not meant to be translated the value in the source language will be overwritten and the translated value will be the only entry for that field All users will see the data in that language and the value in the original language will be lost Currencies Window For information on how to define currencies using this window see Defining Currencies Oracle General Ledger User s Guide 18 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Languages Window File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help ORACLE ZAINA E E E g Languages Language NLS NLS ISO s Language Territory Language Territory Code Use the Languages window to review information about the languages available for use in Oracle E Business Suite Languages Record Each record includes the Language Code ID NLS Language NLS Territory ISO Language ISO Territory Default Code Set Installed flag Local Date Language UTF8 Date Language and Description The columns Local Date Language and UTF8 Date Language are used in date ren
47. E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Status This field cannot be updated The following are valid status values Active Deactivated Migrating Terminating Terminated Manager Identifiers Concurrent Currently running manager processes display as Active Manager processes that are no longer running display as Deactivated These processes were deactivated by you choosing the Deactivate button in the Administer Concurrent Managers block or by the Internal Concurrent Manager deactivating a concurrent manager at the end of that manager s work shift Managers that are migrating between primary and secondary nodes display as Migrating In a parallel concurrent processing environment concurrent managers run on either the primary or secondary node assigned to them Managers migrate to the secondary node if the primary node or the database instance on the primary node is unavailable Managers migrate back to the primary node once it becomes available Manager processes that are being terminated display as Terminating These processes were terminated by you choosing the Terminate button in the Administer Concurrent Managers block or by a user selecting Terminate in the Concurrent Requests form Manager processes that have been terminated display as Terminated These processes were terminated by you choosing the Terminate button in the Administer Concurrent Managers block or by a
48. FND FOLDER COLUMNS NAME FND DEFAULT FOLDERS OBJECT The entity definition is Loaders B 15 DEFINE FND FOLDERS KEY FOLDER_ID NUMBER KEY OBJECT VARCHAR2 30 KEY FOLDER NAME VARCHAR2 80 KEY LANGUAGE VARCHAR2 4 KEY CREATED BY VARCHAR2 4000 KEY CREATOR VARCHAR2 4000 BASE WINDOW WIDTH VARCHAR2 4000 BASE PUBLIC FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE AUTOQUERY FLAG VARCHAR2 1 CTX LAST UPDATE DATE VARCHAR2 11 CTX OWNER varchar2 4000 BASE WHERE CLAUSE VARCHAR2 2000 BASE ORDER_ BY VARCHAR2 30 DEFINE FND FOLDER COLUMNS KEY FOLDER ID NUMBER KEY ITEM NAME VARCHAR2 30 BASE DISPLAY MODE VARCHAR2 1 BASE SEQUENCE VARCHAR2 4000 CTX LAST UPDATE DATE VARCHAR2 11 CTX OWNER varchar2 4000 BASE ITEM WIDTH VARCHAR2 4000 TRANS ITEM PROMPT VARCHAR2 80 BASE X POSITION VARCHAR2 4000 BASE Y POSITION VARCHAR2 4000 END FND FOLDER COLUMNS DEFINE FND DEFAULT FOLDERS KEY FOLDER ID NUMBER KE OBJECT VARCHAR2 30 KEY USER RESP TYPE varchar2 10 KEY USER ID varchar2 240 CTX LAST UPDATE DATE VARCHAR2 11 CTX OWNER varchar2 4000 BASE APPLICATION SHORT NAME VARCHAR2 4000 BASE BEHAVIOR MODE VARCHAR2
49. Flexfield However the same sequence the same numbering scheme and initial value can be assigned to more than one combination of Application Category Set of Books and Method as long as the Application and Category remain the same Application Select the application that generates the documents you wish to number For example to number sales invoices you select Oracle Receivables Category Select a document category to identify a logical subset of documents For example if you do not want to number all invoices in Oracle Receivables you can choose to number only the category of sales invoices Assignment Region Start Date End Date Sequence Since the effective dates for an assignment must fall within the sequence s start and end dates the list of available sequences depends on the start and end dates specified for the assignment Enter the dates on which the sequence assignment to your document definition takes effect is no longer enabled The Start Date field automatically defaults to the current date and once a sequence assignment is defined the start date cannot be changed If you leave the End Date field blank your sequence assignment does not expire and if you enter an end date and define your sequence assignment the end date cannot be modified later If there is no end date defined and there are no active assignments for a sequence you can disable the sequence assignment by entering the current date as th
50. GATHER INDEX STATS ownname VARCHAR2 indname VARCHAR2 percent NUMBER DEFAULT NULL r partname VARCHAR2 DEFAULT NULL backup flag VARCHAR2 DEFAULT NULL hmode VARCHAR2 DEFAULT LASTRUN invalidate VARCHAR2 DEFAULT Y ownname indname percent partname backup flag Hmode Schema of index to analyze Name of index The sampling percentage If left blank the default value of 10 is used The valid range is from 0 to 100 Partition name The backup flag indicates whether to backup statistics Set this flag to BACKUP if you wish to back up the current column statistics into the FND STATTAB table If left blank it defaults to NOBACKUP This parameter controls the amount of history records that Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite 12 15 Invalidate GATHER_TABLE_STATS Procedure This procedure gathers table column and index statistics It attempts to parallelize as much of the work as possible This operation does not parallelize if the user does not have select privilege on the table being analyzed Syntax FND STATS GATH ownname tabname percent degree N partname backup fla cascade granularit ER TABLE VARCHAR2 VARCHAR2 are created LASTRUN History records for each index are maintained only for the last gather statistics run Each subsequent run will overwrite the previous history record for the index This is the defau
51. HTTP Server powered by Apache routes the request to mod jserv 3 mod jserv takes requests and forwards them to Apache Jserv the servlet engine 4 Theservlet engine generates the response communicating with the database as required If the servlet needs to execute any Java Server Pages JSP it will contact Oracle JSP Oracle JSP is a translator and runtime environment for JSPs Oracle JSP can run as a standalone translator or as part of a servlet engine to dynamically compile JSPs as required 5 The response is returned to mod_jserv 6 The HTTP Server returns the response to the client Web Applications Dictionary Overview The Web Application Dictionary is an active data dictionary that enables you to define applications for the web and generate many of the application s characteristics at runtime The data dictionary stores key information about your application including appearance language security requirements navigation and data Because this information is stored in an active data dictionary you can create an inquiry application for the web specifically designed to meet your business needs An Oracle Forms user interface is provided for you to enter your application s characteristics in the active data dictionary Through this user interface you can customize existing inquiry applications for the web or create new ones without programming effort You can create applications that are customizable extensible and multili
52. History Records Gather Table Statistics The Gather Table Statistics program gathers the table statistics for the specified table This program can optionally backup the existing statistics in the FND STATTAB table before gathering new statistics If the value of backup flag is BACKUP then END STATS exports the old statistics using dbms stats export table stats before gathering the new statistics The exported data is stored in FND_STATTAB If the value of backup flag is anything other than BACKUP then the old table statistics are not saved This program also gathers index statistics for the table by default For a detailed description of the procedure used by this concurrent program see GATHER TABLE STATS Procedure Parameters Owner Name The owner of the table Table Name The name of the table Estimate Percent The sampling percentage If left blank a default value of 10 is used The valid range is from 0 to 100 12 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Degree Partition Name Backup Flag Granularity History Mode Invalidate Dependent Cursors Backup Table Statistics The degree of parallelism to be used for gathering statistics If a Degree is not provided it defaults to the minimum of parallel_max_servers and cpu_count The name of the partition The backup flag indicates whether to backup statistics Set this flag to BACKUP to back up your statistics The granularity of
53. If the page size you specify with the PAGESIZE parameter is smaller than what the report was designed for your report fails with a REP 1212 error Executable Executable Method The execution method your concurrent program uses appears here Valid values are Spawned Host Immediate Oracle Reports PL SQL Stored Procedure Java Stored Procedure Java Concurrent Program Multi Language Function SQL Loader SQL Plus Request Set Stage Function Your concurrent program is a stand alone program in C or Pro C Your concurrent program is written in a script for your operating system Your concurrent program is a subroutine written in C or Pro C Immediate programs are linked in with your concurrent manage and must be included in the manager s program library Your concurrent program is an Oracle Reports script Your concurrent program is a stored procedure written in PL SQL Your concurrent program is a Java stored procedure Your concurrent program is a program written in Java A multi language support function MLS function is a function that supports running concurrent programs in multiple languages as well as territories and numeric character settings You should not choose a multi language function in the Executable Name field If you have an MLS function for your program in addition to an appropriate concurrent program executable you specify it in the MLS Function field Your concurrent program
54. Managers 7 9 Work Shifts Sleep Seconds Processes Failover Processes Nodes e Name e Description To edit any of this information use the Edit button Use the Remove button to remove a rule from the list To create a new rule use the Create New dropdown list and click Go Use the Work Shifts section to assign work shifts to your manager A work shift defines the dates and times the manager is enabled as well as the number of processes the manager can start running during the work shift To add a work shift use the Add from Available Shifts button For each work shift listed the following is displayed The sleep time for your manager during this work shift Sleep time is the number of seconds your manager waits between checking the list of pending concurrent requests concurrent requests waiting to be started Tip Set the sleep time to be very brief during periods when the number of requests submitted is expected to be high The number of operating system processes you want your work shift to run simultaneously Each process can run a concurrent request For example if a work shift is defined with three 3 target processes the manager can run up to three requests simultaneously In the case of node failover the maximum number of processes that the work shift can run simultaneously Nodes can become overloaded when a middle tier node fails and service instances on that node failover to their secondary nodes Th
55. PRINTER retrieves the operating system name of the printer associated with the request Concurrent manager token PROFILES FILENAME calls out the filename of the report to be printed The value retrieved is the output file name including the path to the file Note that this file is a temporary file created from information from the Printer Driver definition from the Printer Drivers window and the actual output for the report In this example the UNIX enscript command is entered along with two arguments that a concurrent manager can supply values for e Since the argument PROFILE CONC_COPIES is not used the number of copies to be printed is set by the enscript default which is usually one e Since the argument PROFILE TITLE is not used the concurrent manager does not provide a value for printing the report title on a banner or header page The following table lists additional arguments and their contents in the cases of an original print request and reprint requests Printers 9 45 Argument Syntax Original Print Request Value Retrieved Reprint Value Retrieved PROFILE ORIGREQID Request ID Original request ID PROFILE ORIGUSERNAM User name Original user name E PROFILE REPREQID 0 zero Reprint request ID PROFILE REPUSERNAME NULL Reprint request user name PROFILE OUTFILENAME Output file path and filename Output file path and filename Note that the file here contains only the
56. Request Completed Possible parameters for each event are Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 71 REQUEST ID REQUESTED BY PROGRAM APPI LICATION ID CONCURRENT PROGRAM ID STATUS COM ETION 1 TEXT Dp TIME STAMP Concurrent Programs Buttons Copy to Session Control Incompatibilities Parameters Copy to Window Choose this button to create another concurrent program using the same executable request and report information You can elect to copy the incompatibility and parameter details as well Choose this window to specify options for the database session of the concurrent program when it is executed Choose this button to open the Incompatible Programs window Choose this button to open the Concurrent Program Parameters window Create another concurrent program using the same executable request and report information as the current program You can optionally copy the incompatibility and parameter details information as well Related Topics See Incompatible Programs Window page 6 74 Concurrent Program Parameters Window page 6 76 Concurrent Program Executables page 6 61 Session Control Window Use this window to specify options for the database session of the concurrent program when it is executed Consumer Group Optionally specify the resource consumer group for the concurrent program See Resource Consumer Groups in Oracl
57. Server with Oracle E Business Suite B Loaders C Functional Administrator and Functional Developer Tasks D Oracle Self Service Web Applications E Time Zone Support F Controlling Access to the Oracle Forms based Applications Diagnostics Menu ONOaARWHD 2 Related Information Sources This book is included on the Oracle E Business Suite Documentation Library which is supplied in the Release 12 1 Media Pack You can download soft copy documentation as PDF files from the Oracle Technology Network at http www oracle com technology documentation The Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 1 Documentation Library contains the latest information including any documents that have changed significantly between releases If substantial changes to this book are necessary a revised version will be made available on the virtual documentation library on My Oracle Support formerly OracleMetaLink If this guide refers you to other Oracle E Business Suite documentation use only the latest Release 12 1 versions of those guides Online Documentation All Oracle E Business Suite documentation is available online HTML or PDF Online Help Online help patches HTML are available on My Oracle Support e PDF Documentation See the Oracle E Business Suite Documentation Library for current PDF documentation for your product with each release The Oracle E Business Suite Documentation Library is also available on My Oracle Support and is updated
58. Shutting down the Internal Concurrent Manager from the Operating System From the operating system prompt you can use the CONCSUB utility to submit a concurrent request under the SYSADMIN username and the System Administrator responsibility The CONCSUB utility submits a concurrent request and returns you to the operating system prompt You must wait until the concurrent request completes To check on the status of your concurrent request use the Concurrent Requests form 7 40 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Parameters CONCSUB username password Responsibility application shortname Responsibility name Username WAIT Y N n CONCURRENT Program application shortname PROGRAM username password Responsibility application shortname Responsibility name Username WAIT YN n Program application shortname PROGRAM The ORACLE username and password that connects to Oracle Application Object Library data Alternatively an Oracle E Business Suite username and password for a user with the System Administrator responsibility The application shortname of the responsibility For the System Administrator responsibility the application shortname is SYSADMIN The name of the responsibility For the System Administrator responsibility the responsibility name is System Administrator The application username of the person who submits the request For example SYSADMIN is
59. This chapter provides information on the Form Personalization Work Directory Portlet Generator and other features that can help system administrators and developers create and debug customizations Administering Process Navigation The Process Navigator provides users with diagrams of business processes as a whole as well as the individual steps in each process The Process Navigator also provides direct access to the form associated with each step in a process Administering Globalization This chapter describes some of the features of internationalization support in Oracle E Business Suite including language values for user sessions and multilingual external documents Introduction 1 3 Integration of Oracle E Business Suite with Other Oracle Products This chapter introduces some of the integration points between Oracle E Business Suite and other Oracle products Oracle Application Server with Oracle E Business Suite Oracle Application Server offers the industry s fastest most complete and integrated J2EE certified application server Refer to this section to learn about configuring Oracle E Business Suite with Oracle Application Server Loaders Oracle E Business Suite provides loader programs to help you move Oracle E Business Suite data between database and text file representations Functional Administrator and Functional Developer Tasks Specific system administrator and application developer tasks using HTML based pa
60. Using Combined Rules page 7 29 Differences Between Specialization and Combined Rules page 7 32 Concurrent Managers field help page 7 59 Combined Specialization Rules field help page 7 68 Examples Using Specialization Rules Following are examples of using specialization rules to define what requests a concurrent manager can read When multiple rules are used to specialize a manager the words OR and AND appear between each rule to clarify the relationship among multiple specialization rules Using Include and Exclude actions Include Program Oracle Assets No entry for Name field Result The manager only reads requests to run concurrent programs for the application Oracle Assets Include Program Oracle Assets No entry for Name field OR Include Program Oracle Payables No entry for Name field Net Result The manager only reads requests to run concurrent programs for the application Oracle Assets or for the application Oracle Payables 7 22 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Exclude Result Exclude AND Exclude Net Result Simplifying your work The use of multiple Include actions expands the manager s ability to read requests beyond that of a single Program single Include action Oracle ID APPS2 The manager reads requests to run concurrent programs that connect to any Oracle ID except those programs that connect to Oracle ID APPS2 Oracle ID APP
61. a List of Schemas 3 Migrate CTXSYS Schema Return to the OATM menu is possible as soon as all migration processes sequential parallel and java process for tables with LONG and LONG RAW columns have started and you get the prompt Press Return key to continue Returning to the menu does not mean that migration has been completed The migration processes are running in the background but you can return to the menu in order to monitor migration status errors by running the migration progress report Migration sessions are internally spawned using nohup and are immune to any hangup signals Therefore VPN connection expiration etc should not pose any problems Caution You should not execute migration commands if migration is already in progress The OATM utility will prevent generating migration commands as well as starting additional migration execution processes while migration process is in progress Starting additional migration process can cause errors that can result in data corruption and will seriously impact migration process performance Oracle does not 3 18 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration recommend manually updating table FND TS MIG CMDS especially while you are generating or executing migration commands Option 1 Execute Migration Commands for all Schemas Select Option 1 to migrate the objects in all the schemas to the correct tablespaces You are prompted for the number of parallel p
62. a configuration file pasta cfg option This option uses infile and outfile e infile is the file generated by Pasta to be used as input to the preprocessing command It is a temporary file and will be deleted after it is passed to the preprocessing command e outfile is the output file generated by the preprocessing command Pasta names it temporarily and it will be deleted after it is passed to the printing command If you want to keep the outfile you can name it by using the outFile pasta configuration file option see Configuration File Options page 9 18 or the o command line option see Command Line Parameters page 9 24 Pasta will copy outfile to the file you specify Example for Generating PCL Output In this example gs is Ghostscript and pxlmono is a device used with HP black and white PCL XL printers Laserjet 5 and 6 family In the pasta cfg file enter the following for the preprocess option preprocess gs q dNOPAUSE dBATCH sDEVICE pxlmono sOutputFile outfile infile To get a list of output devices available in Ghostscript go to http www gnu org software ghostscript devices html Example for Generating PDF Output In this example ps2pdf is a shell script bundled with Ghostscript The ps2pdf script can convert a PostScript file to a PDF file In most cases you cannot send a PDF file to the printer command because the printer command cannot understand PDF Set the n
63. a database session starts up or when it is re initialized You specify this code using a profile option The code is executed by FND_GLOBAL INITIALIZE and APPS_INITIALIZE immediately after initializing global variables profiles and the contents of client_info on session startup Profile Option Initialization SQL Statement Custom Using the profile option Initialization SQL Statement Custom you can add site specific initialization code such as optimizer settings This profile value must be a valid SQL statement or a PL SQL block for more than one statement that is to be executed once at the startup of every database session This profile option can be set at any level by the System Administrator and is reserved for use by customers Profile Option Initialization SQL Statement Oracle This profile option is used by Oracle E Business Suite This profile option and its value settings are delivered as seed data and must not be modified Related Topics Oracle E Business Suite and Cost Based Optimization page 12 1 Overview of Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties page 11 1 ORACLE Users Window page 11 12 Resource Consumer Groups in Oracle E Business Suite The Database Resource Manager introduced in Oracle8i is used to allocate and manage resources among database users and applications Resource consumer groups and resource plans provide a method for specifying how to partition processing resources among different users A reso
64. a given list of comma separated schema names into the correct tablespace The migration commands are stored in the table FND TS MIG CMDS You can check the generated log file Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility 3 17 fndgmcmd lt timestamp gt log for errors during the generation process A threshold object size is calculated based on the sizing data in FND_TS_SIZING to determine whether an object will be moved sequentially or in parallel Migration commands for all objects with total blocks greater than or equal to threshold blocks are generated with the PARALLEL clause and are executed sequentially Migration commands for objects with total blocks less than threshold are generated with NOPARALLEL clause and are executed in parallel using multiple processes Partitioned objects are always executed sequentially regardless of their size Example Enter a comma separated list of schema names HR AP Caution Oracle highly recommends that you back up your database after performing Step 3 which is the final preparatory step You should have a backup copy of your database before performing the subsequent migration steps Phase 2 Migration Steps Step 4 Execute Migration Commands Select Step 4 Execute Migration Commands to execute migration commands for your schemas The Execute Migration Commands menu contains the following options 1 Execute Migration Commands for all Schemas 2 Execute Migration Commands for
65. a printer type for the CUPS printer Example Printer Type Pasta printer for CUPS Print Style Printer Driver LANDSCAPE PASTA LANDSCAPE CUPS PORTRAIT PASTA PORTRAIT CUPS LANDWIDE PASTA LANDWIDE CUPS 5 Register your printer with the print style Scenario 2 Multiple CUPS distributed servers with printers connected to each CUPS server The following figure displays multiple CUPS distributed servers with multiple printers attached to each Printers 9 29 E Business Suite Concurrent Node In this scenario one printer type is required for each server on which a CUPS process is running with a physical printer 1 Create a Pasta configuration file in the F ND_TOP resource directory for each server on which the CUPS process is running For example pasta_cups1 cfg pasta_cups2 cfg pasta_cups3 cfg 2 For each configuration file make the following change printCommand lp h cupshost d printername where lt cupshost gt is replaced with the actual server name Make sure that the lp command is a CUPS Ip command You can specify the full path to the command if you maintain both the UNIX standard lp command and the CUPS Ip command Leave printername as is This parameter will be replaced by Pasta at runtime with the actual printer name 3 Create a set of printer drivers for each print style with the configuration file created in Step 1 Example Printer Driver Name PASTA LANDSCAPE CUPS1 Arguments
66. aaa aaaea E Ka ELLE EE READ E SRR G 6 55 Defining Logical Databases ssssssssss eene enne nennen nnne 6 56 Concurrent Program Details Report eee eee enne 6 57 Report Parameters sss een ener nne nre nnne rennen enn enne 6 57 Report Headings ui oret bate tete catene esee eso 6 57 Concurrent Programs Report ee eee eene nennen enne 6 57 Report Parameters 2 2 er ee pepe edd ied eer eai Pe ri Eak 6 58 Report Headings tedio ptite decet eie ete riter 6 58 Request Groups Wind wW ssia na a ae a aa er ener Eae aT 6 59 Request Groups Block ie ep e ce n e ete ei bea ier ren 6 60 Requests Block uui c dais ee tes Et e tee dd diee Ah Aud ete a oce eti de quae 6 60 Concurrent Program Executable Window sss eee 6 61 Concurrent Program Executable Block sse 6 61 Stage Function Parameters Window sssssssseeeeeneen nennen 6 64 Concurrent Programs Window ssssssssssssssee eene 6 65 Concurrent Programs Block ince ni had te eR e ba ut b kat 6 65 COpy to Wind OW ir ci ae eec Ge dines vend dod ed dr oed i rund rene Nude 6 72 Session Control Window nesusi use dede eund eed rede i sed er redes ege e dede 6 72 Incompatible Programs Window sss eene 6 74 Concurrent Program Parameters Window 6 76 Data Groups Window enia reb dri E aedis 6 80 Data Groups Block iere teen eee tet ateliers 6 81 Application ORACLE ID Pairs Block
67. access the Help Builder use the seeded responsibility System Administration and navigate to the Help Builder under Help Administration The Help Builder User Interface File Edit View Help AVARO cE oracle Payables Application Language Overview of Oracle Applications Oracle Payables E Starting Oracle Applications ele AP US Oracle Payables Using Menus Using Keyboard Shortcuts Getting Help Exiting Oracle Applications eE window References SHE Overview amp Payables Overview amp Payables Workbenches E The Invoice Workbench E The Payment Workbench Properties f A Getting Started PiE Setup E Getting started Setting Up Oracle Payables Data E Choosing a Set Of Books Icon eE Payment Terms Type Node Application Node Key P_GETSTART Parent Application Parent Key Tax Groups Language Withholding Tax Groups Custom Level 5 Maintain Tax amp Certificates E Invoice Tolerances gt E Tax Recovery Rules oE Tax Codes ii h 3 D m o D 2 m e The Help Builder window default view consists of three panes The left pane displays the tree that is currently selected Use this area to manipulate your tree by adding nodes deleting nodes and dragging nodes into the positions desired The top right pane displays items matching the searches you have performed using the Find Documents or Find Trees functions Click on the Trees or Document
68. activate the Internal Concurrent Manager from the PC client The Internal Concurrent Manager is only activated from the server You can also activate an individual concurrent manager that is currently deactivated so long as the Internal manager is active If the manager is defined to work in the current work shift then the Internal manager starts it immediately You can view the details of the processes of a given concurrent manager Processes that are currently active migrating or terminating as well as processes that have been terminated or deactivated are displayed For a selected manager you can view all running and pending requests handled by the manager The following actions are available only for certain services managed Generic Service Management These services must be defined to accept commands to suspend their operations Suspend Resume Suspend the operations of the service Resume the operations of the service Concurrent Processing Window page 7 54 Defining Managers and their Work Shifts page 7 1 Controlling Concurrent Managers page 7 35 Defining Concurrent Managers 7 53 Overview of Parallel Concurrent Processing page 7 43 Life cycle of a concurrent request Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance Concurrent Processes Window B Oracle Applications ioj x File Edit View Folder Tool Window Help ORACLE le 2 S Concurrent Processes xX EErEE Internal Manager
69. allow your system administrator to specify programs that this stage is incompatible with may not run with Leave Allow Incompatibility unchecked to specify that this stage of the request set may run with all other concurrent requests or request sets Choose Requests Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 13 Stage Requests Window In the Stage Requests window you define which requests you want to include in the stage 1 Select the report or program you want to include in your request set A description of the request you choose and its associated application appears in the Description and Application fields The list of requests you can choose includes the requests that your responsibility s request group lets you access from the Submit Requests form 2 Use the Allow Stage Function to Use This Program s Results check box to indicate which programs or reports should be included 3 The Print Options region reflects the options for the current request Specify the number of Copies of output to print the Style to print the Printer to print to and whether to save the output to an operating system file Standard Request Submission saves these options so you do not have to specify them again when you run the request set If you do not wish to specify these options for each request when you define the set Standard Request Submission uses the values of your personal profile options as the default when you submit the request set S
70. an individual Oracle E Business Suite user s password FNDCPASS lt logon gt 0 Y lt system password gt USER lt username gt lt new_password gt Use the above command with the following arguments When specifying the USER token FNDCPASS expects the next arguments to be an Oracle E Business Suite username and the new password logon The Oracle username password system password The username and password for the System DBA account username The Oracle E Business Suite username For example VISION new_password The new password For example if you were changing the password for the user VISION to WELCOME you would use the following command FNDCPASS apps apps 0 Y system manager USER VISION WELCOME FNDCPASS Example Here is an example of changing an Oracle user s password where lt username gt is the Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 11 7 Oracle schema name 1 Use the FNDCPASS utility to change the password FNDCPASS lt APPS username gt lt APPS password gt 0 Y lt SYSTEM username gt lt SYSTEM password gt ORACLE username new password When changing the APPS or APPLSYS passwords replace ORACLE with SYSTEM Important Passwords for APPLSYS and the APPS schemas including the MRC schema must be the same If you change the password for one FNDCPASS automatically changes the others Verify the new password If you changed the password for APPS and APPLSYS
71. and mod_perl Common Gateway Interface CGI The industry standard technique for running applications on a web server Oracle HTTP Server supports this standard HTML HyperText Markup Language A format for encoding hypertext documents that may contain text graphics and references to programs and references to other hypertext documents HTML is a subset of Standard Generalized Markup Language SGML HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol A protocol used to request documents from the web server JavaBeans A reusable Java class which has specific naming conventions for its methods and variables JavaBean components can be used to perform well defined tasks such as connecting to a database maintaining client information or rendering a screen page Javascript Javascript is a scripting language that adds significant power to HTML files without the need for server based CGI programs Java Server Pages JSPs allow for the embedding of servlet code within HTML pages The operation of JSPs is similar to that of server side includes D 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Java Servlets mod_cgi mod_jserv A small pluggable extension to a server that will enhance the server s functionality Java servlets are a key component of server side Java devlopment An Apache module that provides for the execution of Common Gateway Interface CGI applications through the invocation of an operating s
72. and define incompatibility rules for individual request sets See Request Set Incompatibilities page 6 19 After you define a request set you can assign a user to be its owner if you want the user to be able to run or edit this request set from any responsibility Request sets without an owner cannot be edited or updated by any end users In this way you can guarantee print options and report parameters for a request set You can also later edit the request set to remove or change its ownership properties Other users can also run a request set if you as System Administrator assign the request set to their responsibility s request security group If you do not assign a request set to a request security group then only the owner can run the request set In this way you can grant access to reports and concurrent programs on a user by user basis Request Security Groups Request Sets and Reports As System Administrator you can add any request set including private request sets to a request security group This allows you to provide members of a responsibility access to reports and programs outside their request security group Request set editing and report viewing privileges are different for reports that belong to a user s request security group than they are for reports that are not in the user s request security group 6 18 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration cannot edit the request set cannot run
73. appropriate log level 4 Optionally enter a module filter criteria such as jtf In URLs use the asterisk symbol as a wildcard character not the percent sign Enabling Logging to Screen in CRM Technology Foundation Pages For security reasons this feature is only accessible if the FND Diagnostics Profile is set to Yes To enable logging to screen in pages based on the CRM Technology Foundation append the following to the page s URL 15 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration jtfdebug jtfdebugfilter Specify the logging level that should be displayed on the current screen Optional If desired this parameter can be used as a filter to display messages based on a Java package name For example current url amp jtfdebug STATEMENT amp jtfdebugfilter jtf In URLs use the asterisk symbol as a wildcard character not the percent sign Startup Behavior At startup applications do not have access to profile values If middle tier properties are not set then at startup the system defaults to logging as follows Logs are stored in the file aferror log in the current directory e Logs are stored at the level UNEXPECTED Logs are stored for all modules After a connection to the database has been established the site level log profiles are read When the user responsibility and application have been established the Oracle Application Object Libr
74. are located in the FND_TOP APPLREP directory e P prt Portrait style e L prt Landscape style e W prt Landwide style e Avprt A4 style The program should not misinterpret the commands for bold on bold off and page size that the standard drivers imbed in Oracle E Business Suite reports If necessary you can create customized Oracle Reports drivers as described below Location of Program When you have compiled and linked the source code or written a shell script move the program to the APPLBIN subdirectory under the top directory of your custom development area Keep copies of the source file in your custom development area as a backup Creating Customized Character Mode Oracle Reports Print Drivers The Oracle Reports print drivers set the font styles for italics underlining and bolding If your executable printing program cannot use the standard Oracle Reports drivers create a customized driver for each print style you will use with the program To create a customized driver copy L prt P prt A prt or W prt from FND TOP SAPPLREP to your custom development area Modify a standard driver as Setting Up and Starting Concurrent Managers 8 13 needed for your executable printing program Give the customized driver a new filename but keep the prt extension Then copy the customized driver to FND_TOP APPLREP Tip Use the executable program name and print style letter as the driver name For example use HPLJ3P prt for
75. at HQ and server in Orlando T1 line sDBG gt You can use the Network Test form to monitor the latency and bandwidth of the network for forms applications or to help create a baseline for use in comparing response times from within the application This information enables you to make comparisons between locations or at different times of day at the same location The form shows the time taken to perform one or more Oracle Forms round trips and the throughput used The latency shown on the form represents a combination of the round trip time needed to traverse the physical network including any devices and the Forms overhead to process a packet The network test form is designed to more closely measure the network latency and bandwidth of an actual forms user Note that the results are not expected to match the times returned by ping traceroute or other diagnostic network commands To test the network latency a short sequence of packets is sent from the client application to the application server then on to the database server and back to the client You need to specify the number of sequences iterations you want to send and the number of times you want to send each set of iterations trials The default setting is 5 trials of 100 iterations each The average latency is the total time for all round trips in a trial divided by the number of iterations 11 18 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide C
76. begins with XX Enter the name of an environment variable that represents the top directory of your application s directory tree Oracle E Business Suite searches specific directories beneath the basepath for your application s files and scripts In general your application s basepath should be unique so that separate applications do not write to the same directories However you may define custom applications that will be used only for naming your custom responsibilities menus and other data components In this case you can use the basepath of the Oracle application that uses the same forms as your application For example if you are defining a Custom_GL application you could use the GL_TOP basepath for your custom application In this case however you should not create custom components in the directory structure such as custom forms and reports because they will be difficult to isolate for maintenance and upgrading See Oracle E Business Suite Concepts Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 11 17 Network Test Window B Oracle Applications ojx File Edit View Falder Tools Window Help ORACLE avolG GS 2s oe RI 4g 2 Network Test Latency Bandwidth Results Test Date Batch Latency Results Bandwidth Results Round Trip Time milliseconds Data Rate kbits per second Trial Sample Data Sample Data LAN Test LAN Client at HQ Redwood Shores and Server at HQ on LAN WAN Client
77. belongs 5 Specify the customization level 100 and above indicates a custom file below 100 indicates a file from Oracle 6 Select Upload Follow these steps to upload multiple help files 1 Copy the customized files to the appropriate product folder in the upload directory 2 Specify the application under which these help files belong 3 Specify the customization level 100 and above indicates a custom file below 100 indicates a file from Oracle 4 Select Upload Creating Reports The Help System Utility provides two reports for you to cross reference help targets and file names Help Target to File Names Report This report lists by target each file that contains the target the document title of the file and the product File Name to Help Targets Report This report lists every file name and document title by language and product and all the targets found within each file Follow these steps to run these reports 1 Navigate to the Help Reports page This page is listed under Help Administration 10 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration available under the seeded System Administration responsibility 2 Select the report you want to run 3 Select the desired application language and output format 4 ClickGo Linking Help Files The Oracle E Business Suite help system supports a special syntax for hypertext links that keeps them working even when files are renamed or spl
78. by entering the application in the Application field and leaving the Name field empty Defining Concurrent Managers 7 69 e Request Type of the program For example programs of a certain request type are excluded from running Or conversely a concurrent manager only includes programs with the request type you select e User application username at sign on For example all programs submitted by a certain user are excluded from running Or conversely a concurrent manager includes only programs submitted by the user you select Related Topics Specializing Managers to run only certain programs page 7 17 Defining Specialization Rules page 7 17 Defining Combined Specialization Rules page 7 27 Using Combined Rules page 7 29 Differences Between Specialization and Combined Rules page 7 32 Grouping Programs by Request Type page 7 33 Administer Concurrent Managers field help page 7 50 Concurrent Managers field help page 7 59 7 70 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Concurrent Request Types Window File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help ORACLE AINETE AE A Concurrent Request Types Application Description D m l Use this window to identify several concurrent programs as a group by assigning each program a common request type You assign a request type defined here to a concurrent program using the Concurrent Program
79. can route relevant information to decision makers automate processes deliver electronic notifications to users in a given workflow and monitor your processes as they are implemented You can display any workflow diagram as a process in the Process Navigator For more information see the Oracle Workflow documentation What are Seeded Processes A seeded process is one that is delivered to you ready to use Oracle E Business Suite includes several seeded business processes which you can use as they are Modifying Your Menu Before you begin you should be aware that simply referencing a form from a process does not provide the required permissions for the responsibility to access the forms in the process Form Functions for each form referenced from a process must be added to the Function Security Menu for the responsibility If the Form Function is not accessible the user will receive an error when attempting to access the form from the process in the Process Navigator Administering Process Navigation 17 1 Creating Process Navigator Processes You must use Oracle Workflow Builder to create or customize any of the processes that are displayed in the Process Navigator These instructions describe how to create new processes for the Process Navigator The following table lists the terms components of a Process Navigator process and the corresponding components in Oracle Workflow Builder that define them Process Navigator Descrip
80. can view its status and configuration You can also bring it online or offline or disable it e AutoConfig View and update your AutoConfig settings here For more information on this feature see Oracle E Business Suite Maintenance Utilities e License Manager With the License Manager you can license additional products country specific functionalities and languages You can also generate reports on the licenses for your installation For more information on this feature see Oracle E Business Suite Maintenance Utilities Application Services Use these links to see information on various types of application services e Generic Services e Request Processing Managers e Transaction Managers Workflow Use these links to navigate to the Oracle Workflow Manager e Home e Work Item Metrics e Agent Activity e Background Engines 5 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration e Notification Mailer Service Components e Purge Concurrent Request Use these links to submit a new concurrent request or to view details on existing requests e Submit New this link launches the Oracle Application Framework Schedule Request page in a separate window e Pending Running e Completed Last Hour Service Fulfillment Manager Use this link to access the Service Fulfillment Manager Service Fulfillment Manager SFM provides a complete set of tools to automate step by step fulfillment activities and i
81. change in the application code where you hardcode your application short name For example if you pass program arguments through the menu that have application name hardcoded you will also have to update them Important You should not change the name of any application that you did not develop as you cannot be sure of the consequences You should never change the name of any Oracle E Business Suite application because these applications may contain hardcoded references to the application name This user friendly name appears in lists seen by application users Oracle E Business Suite uses the application short name as an internal key for example when identifying forms menus concurrent programs and other application components The short name is stored in hidden fields while the name displays for users 11 16 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Basepath Your short name should not include spaces You use an application short name when you request a concurrent process from a form and when you invoke a subroutine from a menu Tip Although your short name can be up to 50 characters we recommend that you use only four or five characters for ease in maintaining your application and in calling routines that use your short name To reduce the risk that your custom application short name could conflict with a future Oracle E Business Suite short name we recommend that your custom application short name
82. configuration supported with Locally Managed Tablespaces User Extent Management is only relevant when Dictionary Tablespaces have been migrated to Locally Managed Tablespaces Because migration to OATM is performed at the object level and not at the tablespace level User Extent Management is not relevant The default recommended configuration in OATM is Uniform Extent Management Advantages of Migrating to OATM Migrating database objects to OATM provides the following benefits Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility 3 1 e Fewer and more consolidated tablespaces e Locally Managed Tablespaces e Accounts for the I O characteristics of an object e Reclaims space after migration e Real Application Cluster RAC Support Fewer and More Consolidated Tablespaces OATM contains twelve locally managed tablespaces for all products including temporary tablespace system tablespace and undo segments The previous tablespace model contained two tablespaces for each Oracle product resulting in hundreds of tablespaces Locally Managed Tablespaces This model provides support for either Uniform or Auto allocate extent management available with Locally Managed Tablespaces Locally Managed Tablespaces have benefits over Dictionary Tablespaces in the previous model and allow for the sizes of extents to be determined automatically by the system Auto allocate Alternatively all extents can have the same size Uniform in and
83. controlling logging for each JVM The following examples show how to turn on logging for all modules and levels using Java system properties For this example we assume that the JVM has write permission for the file path to apps log This file can be changed to any other file for which the JVM has write permission Logging 15 1 If you plan to log to a file it is highly recommended that you explicitly override the default file aferror log by setting AFLOG_FILENAME The default does not specify a full file path and may not be writable by the middle tier process in some cases Command Line JVM System Properties To enable logging for an application for example MyClass that is run from the command line add the parameter values to the command line local java jdk1 2 2 bin java DAFLOG ENAB ED TRUE DAFLOG LEVEL STATEMENT DAFLOG ODU Apache JServ Java System Properties E DAFLOG FILENAME path to apps log MyClass To enable logging using Apache JServ JVM system properties add the following to the jserv properties file typically located in 1AS_ORACLE_HOME Apache Jserv etc wrapper wrapper wrapper wrapper bin p bin p bin p bin p arameters DAFLOG ENABLED TRUE arameters DAFLOG LEVEL STATEMENT arameters DAFLOG MODULE arameters DAFLOG FILENAME path to apps log A convenient location
84. critical stage then the completion status of the set will be the same as the completion status of the critical stage This can be useful if the final stage of the set is a clean up stage and is not considered important to the overall status of the set e Ifa request set has more than one critical stages defined the worst completion status of all the critical stages is considered the completion status of the set Printing Request Sets On a report by report basis you can select a different printer for each report in a request set When you define a request set print options such as the printer a report is sent to are saved so you do not have to specify them again when you run the request set Important If a printer is defined for a concurrent program using the Concurrent Programs form then that value cannot be updated either by a user profile option setting a request set definition or when running the program or request set Note Defining a printer for a request set concurrent program for example Request Set Payables Aging Reports in the Concurrent Programs form has no effect the printer definition is not referred to Holding Request Sets In some circumstances such as when a request set has a large number of stages and takes a long time to execute administrators may want to yield a request set to higher priority requests By utilizing the Hold Request Set feature users can place a running 6 10 Oracle E Business Suite
85. database server or alternatively to a cluster of database servers For example a simple networked environment could consist of multiple Sun SPARCstations connected via a LAN to a single Sequent server In a more complex networked environment multiple Sun SPARCstations could connect to a cluster of Sequent servers With parallel concurrent processing in a networked environment concurrent managers run on multiple workstations A single database server runs a single instance of ORACLE or a cluster of database servers runs multiple ORACLE instances using RAC How Parallel Concurrent Processing Works Concurrent Managers With parallel concurrent processing each node with concurrent managers may or may not be running an ORACLE instance On a node that is not running ORACLE the concurrent manager s connect via Net8 to a node that is running ORACLE Parallel concurrent processing is activated along with Generic Service Management GSM it can not be activated independently of GSM With parallel concurrent processing implemented with GSM the Internal Concurrent Manager ICM tries to assign valid nodes for concurrent managers and other service instances Primary and secondary nodes need not be explicitly assigned However you can assign primary and secondary nodes for directed load and failover capabilities Note In previous releases you must have assigned a primary and secondary node to each concurrent manager Initially a concurr
86. de d eraut E er eta neges 9 48 Printers Window oa edet tees Lett tette den teen d Y e idee 9 49 Printers Block i cvsezstcecutanwseckascteseshdsteavad oe etehvadotedenan cad tiiatastesstaneiervetatueseistenved mittetavsdene 9 49 Print Styles Window tenente ee e mee ban el oda i nd ED ape 9 50 Brine Styles Dlock s nn e a tie sed te ERES nete se Pee Eon ite 9 51 Layout Block ete ee eo ate ee dv e SL e d once peas 9 52 Printer Drivers Window eee erster eee tede e ees gilda Dh o eed ed ak nddads 9 53 Printer Drivers Window Fields 2 trt tetti er dr 9 54 Driver Method RELION oett eee x SanL tiep EA t 9 54 Driver Method Parameters Region sssssssssseeeeeeeee ene 9 55 Oracle E Business Suite Help Setting Oracle E Business Suite Help Profile Options ssssssseeee 10 1 Customizing Oracle E Business Suite Help ssssssssssssee eee 10 1 Downloading and Uploading Help Files sss 10 2 Winking Help bles comine inedito Co bte pH pU petente sed 10 5 11 12 Updating the Search Index 2 2 eese et teer ra eb tree ede tenta ede ai 10 8 Customizing Help Navigation Trees sse eene 10 8 The Help Build r User Interface eeepc iie 10 9 Customizing Help in a Global Environment sss 10 16 Using Oracle T utor 2 eoe edi eie diete tst 10 17 Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties Overview of Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duti
87. defined to work in the current work shift it starts immediately Cancels Deactivate concurrent manager and Terminate requests and deactivate manager Internal manager rereads the manager s definition and the rules for concurrent program incompatibilities You should restart a manager when you Change work shift assignments Modify the number of target processes Modify specialization rules Change concurrent program incompatibilities Deactivates the manager All requests concurrent programs currently running are allowed to complete before the manager shuts down A manager will not restart until you select the manager and choose Activate concurrent manager All running requests running concurrent programs handled by the manager are terminated Once deactivated a manager will not restart until you select the manager and choose Activate concurrent manager 7 38 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Controlling the Internal Concurrent Manager from the Operating System To start the Internal Concurrent Manager use the shell script adcmctl sh Alternatively use one of two other commands you may use from the operating system to control the Internal Concurrent Manager STARTMGR which starts the Internal Concurrent Manager and CONCSUB which can be used to deactivate or abort the Internal Concurrent Manager or to instruct the Internal Concurrent Manager to verify the operating system pr
88. e Applsys The installation process registered the Oracle Application Object Library ORACLE username with the Applsys privilege 11 14 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Install Group The value of the installation group associated with your ORACLE username Install group numbers should be consecutive whole numbers where 1 represents the first set of books or first set of product installations 2 is the second set of books 3 is the third set of books and so on Install group number 0 represents products that need only single installations Important Since the installation process does not affect ORACLE usernames also known as schemas for custom applications this value is for your reference only and is currently not used Applications Window E Oracle Applications ORACLE Basepath Description Use this window only if you are creating a custom application to isolate custom code and or data from shipped Oracle E Business Suite applications When you define a custom application you supply several pieces of information to Oracle E Business Suite You must register your application name application short name application basepath and application description with Oracle Application Object Library Oracle Application Object Library uses this information to identify application objects such as responsibilities and forms as belonging to your application This identification
89. e the parameter is displayed to the end user e a default value is automatically provided for the parameter If you wish to define or modify a value set you must first carefully plan your value set s purpose and implementation Using the Concurrent Programs form you can see a concurrent program s parameters by choosing Parameters Each parameter has a value set that defines what values are permissible for the parameter To see the name of a parameter s value set look at the Value Set field in the Argument Details block Related Topics Copying and Modifying Program Definitions page 6 44 Control the Behavior of Request Parameters page 6 48 Example of modifying a program s parameters page 6 54 Concurrent Programs page 6 65 Control the Behavior of Request Parameters The behavior of parameters in programs running individually may differ from when those programs are run as part of a request set You define how a program s parameters behave when you define the program using the Concurrent Programs form Using the Request Set form you can also define how a program s parameters behave when the program is run as part of a request In addition you can define parameters in different programs in a request set to all share the same value by labeling them as 6 48 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Shared Parameters See Sharing Parameters in a Request Set page 6 20 Warning Modifying a concurrent pr
90. engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensing it on behalf of the U S Government the following notice is applicable U S GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs software databases and related documentation and technical data delivered to U S Government customers are commercial computer software or commercial technical data pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such the use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract and to the extent applicable by the terms of the Government contract the additional rights set forth in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software License December 2007 Oracle USA Inc 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications including applications which may create a risk of personal injury If you use this software in dangerous applicati
91. error when attempting to submit this report Changing responsibility to see changes take effect Modifying parameter behavior for example changing whether a parameter is displayed to the end user takes effect immediately after you commit your change However some changes do not appear to you unless you change responsibility or select your current responsibility again Behavior of Program Parameters The following table describes how a parameter s details affect its behavior in the Concurrent Programs form and the Run Requests form Parameter Details Concurrent Programs form Run Requests form Required Yes Parameter requires a value entered by user or a default Display Yes Parameter is displayed Display No Parameter is not displayed and cannot be modified Default Type amp Value Yes Default Type and Value A default value displays and entered can be changed by the user Default Type and Value No default entered No default value is displayed The following table describes how a parameter s details affect its behavior in the Request Sets form and Run Requests form Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 51 Parameter Details Concurrent Programs form Request Set form Run Requests form Required Display Display Display Modify Modify Default Type amp Value Default Type amp Value Default Type amp Value Yes Yes Yes n a n a Yes Default Type and Val
92. executes faster than the Command method but cannot access shell commands like PRINT on MS DOS Subroutine The printer driver executes a predefined Oracle E Business Suite routine Subroutines are specific to operating platforms and are invoked directly by a system call from the concurrent manager Driver Method Parameters Region Spool File Standard Input Program Name Arguments Select whether the printer driver creates its own copy of a file for printing If this check box is checked when the Driver Method is set to Program the print program creates its own spool file e Anexample of spool files is the UNIX lpr command which creates its own copy of a file if you do not specify the s option Select whether the printer driver accepts standard input Uncheck this check box when the Driver Method is set to Program Unless the program accepts standard input this check box should always be unchecked e Anexample is the UNIX command lpr which accepts standard input when a filename is not specified If the driver method is Program enter the full path to the program that the driver invokes The path is not necessary if the program s location can be identified by the operating system s PATH environment variable See Location for Custom Print Programs page 9 34 If the driver method is Subroutine enter the subroutine name that the driver invokes When the Driver Method is set to Program enter any generic arguments that mus
93. fails due to whatever reasons the concurrent request can be re submitted and it will pick up where the failed run left off if you provide the concurrent request id of the failed run History Mode This parameter controls the amount of history records that are created The history records stored in FND STATS HIST can be queried to find out when stats were gathered on a particular object and the amount of time it took to gather statistics on that object e Last Run History records for each object are maintained only for the last gather statistics run Each subsequent run will overwrite the previous history record for the object This is the default behavior e Full This mode does not overwrite any history information History records are created for each run and are identified by the Request ID If a Request ID is not provided one is generated automatically If this mode is used the Purge FND STATS History Records concurrent program should be run periodically to Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite 12 5 purge the FND_STATS_HIST table e None This mode does not generate any history information If this mode is used the run cannot be restarted Gather Options This parameter specifies how objects are selected for statistics gathering e GATHER All tables and indexes of the schema schemaname are selected for stats gathering This is the default e GATHER AUTO Tables of the schema schemaname for which the per
94. files links to these topics from other files always go to the proper file and to the precise spot within the file where the topic occurs Caution Do not use case to make distinctions between anchornames Unlike most web browsers the Oracle E Business Suite help system treats anchornames in a case insensitive fashion Cross Application Links In the Oracle E Business Suite help system all help files associated with a particular application exist in the same directory as far as their URL is concerned Help files associated with other applications exist in directories named after the application s short name All these application directories are at the same level in the help system To create a link that goes to a help file associated with a different application you create a relative link that goes up a level to the parent of all help application directories and then back down through the other application s directory before concluding with Oracle E Business Suite s special link syntax This results in the following cross application link syntax lt A HREF shortname anchorname fanchorname gt link text lt A gt For example if the All About Widgets topic illustrated above were an Oracle Payables help topic and you wanted to link to it from an Oracle General Ledger help file you 10 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration would use a link like the following where AP is Oracle Payables
95. frequently e Release Notes For information about changes in this release including new features known issues and other details see the release notes for the relevant product available on My Oracle Support e Oracle Electronic Technical Reference Manual The Oracle Electronic Technical Reference Manual eTRM contains database diagrams and a detailed description of database tables forms reports and programs for each Oracle E Business Suite product This information helps you convert data from your existing applications and integrate Oracle E Business Suite data with non Oracle applications and write custom reports for Oracle E Business Suite products The Oracle eTRM is available on My Oracle Support Related Guides You should have the following related books on hand Depending on the requirements of your particular installation you may also need additional manuals or guides Maintaining Oracle E Business Suite Documentation Set This documentation set provides maintenance and patching information for the Oracle E Business Suite DBA Oracle E Business Suite Maintenance Procedures provides a description of the strategies related tasks and troubleshooting activities that will help ensure the continued smooth running of an Oracle E Business Suite system Oracle E Business Suite Maintenance Utilities describes the Oracle E Business Suite utilities that xix are supplied with Oracle E Business Suite and used to maintain the applic
96. functions A default folder can have one of the following values for Behavior Mode e No restrictions End user can perform all folder functions e Restrict fields and folder functions End user cannot perform any folder functions This is Restricted Mode Runtime Scenarios with Restricted Mode End user runs folder form with restrictions When the user opens the restricted default folder form all folder functions are disabled For example the user cannot open any other folders or move or resize fields Within a folder block once a restricted default folder loads all folder functionality will become disabled even if that block supports other folder objects System Administrator wants to change the default restricted folder Once a default folder is assigned with the Behavior Mode Restrict fields and folder functions to any user or responsibility it no longer appears in the list of available folders for opening by any user even though this folder is defined as Public To change this default folder you should first assign the default folder to yourself Then run the folder form and navigate to the folder block so that the default folder will load You can then make modifications and save the folder Even though the Behavior Mode is restricted the folder functions can still be performed since you have become the owner of the folder Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 11 23 12 Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Sui
97. inl ap283sun Concurrent Processes LJ Manager IDs Request IDs e Er m 7 ao 7 Start Date 18 JAN 2001 17 JAN 2001 17 JAN 2001 17 JAN 2001 Request Log Internal Manager Log Manager Log Concurrent System Running 08762 08399 1722 430 erminated mi E activated minated rminated rminated erminated ill eactivated erminated erminated amp ll ess NIN 2 8 a S 8 PS 91S E G o w oO m L w w w Wow eo w Sz E E 3 E LE L 06687 eo erminated View status information about the processes of a specific concurrent manager whose name and node are identified near the top of the window Displaying this window automatically queries all processes that are currently active migrating or terminating as well as processes that have been terminated or deactivated Display order is by status value Active Migrating Terminating Terminated Deactivated and within status by the order in which processes were started If you wish to reduce the number of displayed processes you can delete records by submitting the Purge Concurrent Request and Managers report from the Run Requests form You can delete records according to the number of days since the processes were started However you cannot delete the records of currently active managers 7 54 Oracle
98. is a SOL Loader program Your concurrent program is a SQL Plus or PL SQL script PL SQL Stored Function that can be used to calculate the completion statuses of request set stages You can switch between Spawned and Immediate overriding the execution method defined in the Concurrent Program Executable window only if either method appears Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 67 when the executable is selected and both an execution file name and subroutine name have already been specified in the Concurrent Program Executable window See Concurrent Program Executables page 6 61 Executable Priority You can assign this program its own priority The concurrent managers process requests for this program at the priority you assign here If you do not assign a priority the user s profile option Concurrent Priority sets the request s priority at submission time Request Type If you want to associate your program with a predefined request type enter the name of the request type here The request type can limit which concurrent managers can run your concurrent program Request Incrementor For use by Oracle E Business Suite internal developers only The incrementor function is shown here Request MLS Function The MLS function if any used by the program The Multilingual Concurrent Request feature allows a user to submit a request once to be run multiple times each time in a different language If this program utili
99. managers whenever you start the Oracle8i Server database or change the concurrent manager startup parameters On UNIX platforms concurrent managers append to their own log file if the log files exist when they restart Therefore the user who restarts the concurrent managers must either own the existing files have write privilege for them or delete them before restarting On Windows the concurrent manager logs are overwritten when the concurrent managers are restarted Checking the Save Log History option in the ccmsetup GUI 8 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration tool saves the previous log files The concurrent managers delete temporary files when each concurrent process finishes If the concurrent managers stop abnormally however they may not delete these files Tip Delete temporary files only if they have not been accessed more recently than a few days ago This helps to prevent the loss of files required by the operating system or the concurrent managers Ideally delete temporary files during maintenance windows when the database is down and no applications programs are active Network Failure Recovery As part of its shutdown process the ICM determines if it s being forced to shutdown due to losing its database connection This is done by looking for specific error messages ORA 3113 ORA 3114 or ORA 1041 If one of these error messages is detected the ICM spawns the reviver process whi
100. may not enter values for the Days of Week fields for this row e Time Enter the times of day at which your concurrent shift begins ends The time format is HH24 MM For example if your work shift name is Week Days you could enter 09 00 9 00 am as the start time and 17 00 5 00 pm as the end time Note that Oracle E Business Suite uses a 24 hour clock List of Work Shifts This page displays the available work shifts Navigation Site Map Administration Request Processing Managers under Applications Systems gt Create New or Edit Service gt Workshifts region B Add from Available Shifts The following columns are shown Name Start Day End Day Start Time End Time Date and Description 7 14 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration You can use the buttons to edit or delete an existing work shift or create a new one Completed Concurrent Requests Report This report displays how long concurrent programs actually run Use this report to segregate requests based on their typical time to complete by specializing concurrent managers to only read requests for certain programs Use this report to record parameters and error messages associated with concurrent programs that have been run Report Parameters If you do not enter any parameters the report returns values for all completed concurrent requests Program Application Name Choose the application name associated with the pro
101. menu contains the following options 1 Calculate total space required by each new tablespace to migrate all Oracle E Business Suite product schemas Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility 3 13 Calculate total space required by each new tablespace to migrate each Oracle E Business Suite product schema relevant for a schema by schema migration Calculate total space required by each Oracle E Business Suite schema with details for each object Display Sizing Exception report Option 1 Calculate Total Space Required by Each New Tablespace to Migrate all Oracle E Business Suite Product Schemas Choose option 1 to calculate the total space required by each new tablespace when performing a single comprehensive migration of all Oracle E Business Suite product schemas and to generate the report fndtrep1 txt Before running the report the program prompts you to specify whether the information in the sizing table is current or must be updated Enter the following to calculate space requirements for performing a single comprehensive migration of all schemas Whether the sizing information is current or must be gathered before running the report If you selected Y for the previous option provide the extent management type for the tablespaces since the space requirements are dependent on this If Uniform Extent Management provide the uniform extent size for the tablespaces or choose the default value provided on th
102. more than one execution option each option should be separated by a single space There should be no spaces before or after the options For example ORIENTATION LANDSCAPE PAGESIZE 7 5x9 9 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Running Bitmap Oracle Reports Programs Oracle Reports Application Oracle Reports Program Enter name of execution file Define report program Execution Method Oracle Reports Define report orientation Define units of measure and page size Define Executable System Administration Application Define Concurrent Program Register parameters and incompatible programs Output Options Format Field PS Execution Options ORIENTATION LANDSCAPE overrides report definition PAGESIZE 7 5x9 overrides report definition Notes about PAGESIZE in the Execution Options field Related Topics In Oracle Reports when defining a report the units and size of the report are specified in the menu under Report gt Global Properties gt Unit of Measurement For bitmapped reports lt width gt x lt height gt for PAGESIZE is usually in inches however this depends on the particular report definition You can enter the PAGESIZE parameter in the Execution Options field of the Concurrent Programs form for bitmapped reports only when you want to override the values specified in the report definition For example PAGESIZE 7 5x9
103. name including the full pathto the program should be entered in the Program Name field The path to the program name is not necessary if the program s location can be identified by the operating system s PATH environment variable i e is in the PATH variable name For platforms where the equivalent of a PATH variable doesn t exist then use the full path name A path can be up to 255 characters Custom print programs are not registered as concurrent programs with Oracle Application Object Library but are called after the concurrent process has completed Using Operating System Shell Scripts For operating system shell scripts the printer driver method can be either command or program as long as you populate the argument field correctly The script for a command shell procedure should reside in SFND_TOP SAPPLBIN Arguments That a Concurrent Manager Can Supply Values For The concurrent manager can supply four different values as arguments to the operating system print command it issues or to a custom print program that it calls An example of using these values as arguments follows Example Entering a Print Command and Arguments In this example the UNIX print command Ip is entered along with the arguments that a concurrent manager can supply values for While print commands vary the tokens for which values are retrieved are always the same Because print commands are operating system dependent please refer to Oracle
104. name and application you specify must uniquely identify a concurrent program Your list displays the user friendly name of the program the short name and the description of the program Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 85 Scope Type Request Request Settings Enter Set or Program Only to specify whether your concurrent program is incompatible with this program and all its child requests Set or only with this program Program Only Choose the type of incompatibility either Domain or Global For information on incompatibility types see Incompatible and Run Alone Programs page 6 28 Enter the following Enter the following Type If you want to associate your program with a predefined request type enter the name of the request type here The request type can limit which concurrent managers can run your concurrent program Incrementor For use by Oracle E Business Suite internal developers only The incrementor function is shown here MLS Function The MLS Multi Lingual Support function if any used by the program The Multilingual Concurrent Request feature allows a user to submit a request once to be run multiple times each time in a different language If this program utilizes this feature the MLS function determines which installed languages are needed for the request Beginning with Release 12 1 multiple territories and numeric character settings are also supported See the Oracle E Busi
105. node where the Internal Concurrent Manager is running In the case where the ICM is not on a concurrent processing server node the ICM chooses an active concurrent processing server node in the system If no concurrent processing server node is available no target node will be assigned Note that if a concurrent manager does have an assigned primary node it will only try to start up on that node if the primary node is down it will look for its assigned secondary node if one exists If both the primary and secondary nodes are unavailable the concurrent manager will not start the ICM will not look for another node on which to start the concurrent manager This strategy prevents overloading any node in the case of failover The concurrent managers are aware of many aspects of the system state when they start up When an ICM successfully starts up it checks the TNS listeners and database instances on all remote nodes and if an instance is down the affected managers and services switch to their secondary nodes Processes managed under GSM will only start on nodes that are in Online mode If a node is changed from Online to Offline the processes on that node will be shut down and switch to a secondary node if possible Concurrent processing provides database instance sensitive failover capabilities When an instance is down all managers connecting to it switch to a secondary middle tier node However if you prefer to handle instance failover
106. of the schemaname argument is ALL then the Monitoring option is disabled for all tables that belong to all schemas registered in Oracle E Business Suite FND STATS DISABLE SCHEMA MONITORING schemaname VARCHAR2 DEFAULT ALL schemaname Name of the schema for which Monitoring should be disabled GATHER SCHEMA STATS Procedure This procedure gathers statistics for all objects in a schema Statistics are gathered with the granularity of DEFAULT This procedure is also available through the concurrent program Gather Schema Statistics If this procedure fails at any time during operation supplying the request ID for the request that failed can restart it The request ID can be captured when the program is started from concurrent manager or can be queried from the FND STATS HIST table GATHER SCHEMA STATS cannot be executed directly in sqlplus because of an OUT parameter The procedure GATHER SCHEMA STATISTICS has been provided for gathering schema statistics from the sqlplus prompt 12 12 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Syntax Parameters FND STATS GATHER SCHEMA STATS Schemaname VARCHAR2 stimate percent degree internal flag N Errors OUT Error O request id NUMBER hmode VARCHA options in VARCHA modpercent NUMBER invalidate VARCHA UMBER DEFAULT NULL UMBER DEFAULT NULL UMBER DEFAULT NULL ut default null R2 default LA
107. online from any other node Users need not log onto a node to view the log and output files from requests run on that node Integration with Platform Specific Queuing 7 46 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Some cluster or massively parallel systems have their own mechanisms for queuing batch processes for example IBM LoadLeveler Because users may wish to manage all processing with these mechanisms and not just Oracle E Business Suite processing parallel concurrent processing is designed to integrate with them Thus you can match your concurrent process management to the specific capabilities of your operating platform For more information on integrating with platform specific queuing refer to the installation documentation for your platform Managing Parallel Concurrent Processing This section describes how to manage parallel concurrent processing Parallel concurrent processing is always active when Generic Service Management GSM is active Parallel concurrent processing can no longer be activated independently of Generic Service Management However automatic activation of PCP does not additionally require that primary nodes be assigned for all concurrent managers and other GSM managed services If no primary node is assigned for a service instance the Internal Concurrent Manager ICM assigns a valid concurrent processing server node as the target node In general this node will be the same
108. only for the last gather statistics run Each subsequent run will overwrite the previous history record for the index This is the default behavior FULL This mode does not overwrite any history information History records are created for each run and are identified by the Request ID If a Request ID is not provided one is generated automatically If this mode is used the Purge FND STATS History Records concurrent program should be run periodically to purge the FND STATS HIST table NONE This mode does not generate any history information If this mode is used the run cannot be restarted This flag indicates whether cursors dependent on the index being analyzed should be invalidated By default dependent cursors are invalidated 12 20 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration LOAD XCLUD STATS Procedure This procedure has been made obsolete PURGE_STAT_HISTORY Procedure Syntax Parameters This procedure should be used for purging the unwanted history records from the fnd_stats_hist table There are two versions of this procedure The first one takes in a range of request ids and deletes all history records that fall within that range The second version takes a range of dates as arguments and all the history records falling in between that range are deleted The delete takes place as an autonomous transaction FND STATS PURGE STAT HIST From req id NUMBER To req id NUMBER
109. output format Two output formats are supported PostScript ps and text text Defining Configuration Files for Specific Printers page 9 11 Modify Add Printer Type to Use Pasta page 9 12 Setting Margins page 9 13 Printing a Report Using the noprint Option page 9 14 Generating Other Formats Using the Preprocessing Option page 9 15 Font Source page 9 16 Language Specific Font Support page 9 17 Configuration File Options page 9 18 Using PrintForms PrintForms is a feature of the E Business Suite that allows you to create your own background template for a report and use it at print time either as a background image such as your company logo or as a standard form such as an invoice The PrintForm process combines the input report file and the background template file to generate one PostScript file which is then passed to a PostScript printer Because this process is executed at print time the need to customize report definitions is eliminated which also simplifies maintenance Moreover using the PrintForm as a standard form can replace printing solutions that require expensive preprinted stationery and specialized printers There are two phases to using PrintForms 1 Create the PrintForm 2 Deploy the PrintForm to Oracle E Business Suite Note The following instructions are general guidelines for creating Printers 9 25 and using PrintForms For more detailed instructions see the Pasta User s Guide Re
110. override object storage options OATM implements Automatic segment space management a simpler and more efficient way of managing space within a segment It completely eliminates any need to specify and tune the PCTUSED FREELISTS and FREELISTS GROUPS storage parameters for schema objects created in the tablespace Automatic segment space management delivers better space utilization than manual segment space management and is self tuning because it scales by increasing the number of users as well as instances For a Real Application Clusters environment automatic segment space management enables dynamic affinity of space to instances which avoids the hard partitioning of space inherent with using free list groups Uniform Extent Size The value for uniform extent size should be carefully selected based on system requirements For production environments and large tablespaces like transaction tables transaction indexes interfaces summaries archives and media a uniform extent size of 1MB or 10MB with caution should be considered Choosing an extent size that is too small can result in frequent extensions and performance degradation of the system The Release 12 Rapid Install production database is delivered out of the box with locally managed tablespaces with uniform extent sizes of 128Kb If this size is not the best match for the characteristics of your system you can follow subsequent 3 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrato
111. path is the absolute path to the error log file f lt filename gt lt filename gt specifies the input file name Example fmyfile txt F lt cfgfile gt Specifies the configuration file s path and name h rate Adjusts the space between lines The default value is 1 0 If rate is larger than 1 the space between lines will be larger wsrate gt Adjusts the space between characters The default value is 1 0 If lt rate gt is larger than 1 0 the space between characters will be larger l Print in landscape mode The default is portrait o lt filename gt lt filename gt specifies the output file name s lt size gt Overrides the font size option in pasta cfg bs lt size gt Overrides the font size in s and fontsize for bold font np No print option ph lt height gt lt height gt specifies the paper height in inches pw lt width gt lt width gt specifies the paper width in inches pform lt psfile gt lt pf file gt Converts a PostScript file lt ps file gt to a PrintForm file lt pf file gt 9 24 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Related Topics pf lt pf file gt lt pf file gt specifies a PrintForm file to be merged in a Pasta output at runtime pn lt printername gt printername specifies the printer name t lt banner title Banner option for use with the Unix lp command V Displays the version number x lt ps text charset auto gt Specifies the
112. print styles to customize your reports Once defined a print style cannot be deleted Print Styles Block Style Name Sequence User Style Define a print style The combination of Name and User Name uniquely identifies a print style Important You should issue a Restart concurrent manager command for all currently active managers whenever you edit an existing Printer Type Print Style or Printer Driver See Controlling Concurrent Managers page 7 35 Multiple print styles display alphabetically in a list window You cannot update a print style s name Enter a number that determines the display sequence for your print style when performing a query in this window A negative sequence number appears before zero and zero appears before a positive sequence number This user name does not appear anywhere except this window Printers 9 51 SRW Driver Enter the name of the Oracle Reports SRW driver to be called when printing an applications report generated by Oracle Reports This field is used only by applications reports generated by Oracle Reports Layout Block Columns Enter the number of columns your print style defines Rows Enter the number of rows your print style defines Suppress Header Reports may print with a header page that indicates who requested the report and when Check the Supress Header check box to define a print style that suppresses printing of this header page For example suppr
113. processes the manager can run up to three requests simultaneously If you are operating in a parallel concurrent processing environment and you want your manager to operate on a specific node select the name of the node The primary node if available is the node your concurrent manager operates on If the primary node or the database instance on it goes down your concurrent manager migrates to its secondary node Your concurrent manager migrates back to its primary node when that node becomes available Nodes must be previously registered with Oracle E Business Suite using the Nodes window in Oracle E Business Suite Creating and Editing an Internal Monitor General Enabled Use this page to create a new Internal Monitor Internal Monitors monitor the Internal Concurrent Manager in a parallel concurrent processing environment If the Internal Concurrent Manager exits abnormally for example because its node or its database instance goes down an Internal Monitor restarts it on another node Enter the following information Check this box if this internal monitor is enabled 7 12 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Manager Short Name Application Program Library Work Shifts Sleep Seconds Processes Nodes The name of the internal monitor The short name for your internal monitor The application associated with the internal monitor The combination of an applicati
114. program 6 90 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Summary information is collected when a request is completed and stored in the table fnd_conc_prog_onsite_info Concurrent Program Add Parameter General Enabled Sequence Parameter Validation Value Set Default Type Enter and update the program parameters that you wish to pass to the program executable Program parameters defined here should match the variables in your execution file Enter the following Disabled parameters do not display at request submission time and are not passed to your execution file Choose the sequence numbers that specify the order in which your program receives parameter values from the concurrent manager Enter the parameter name The value is case insensitive Enter the following Enter the name of the value set you want your parameter to use for validation You can only select from independent table and non validated value sets The maximum size of your value set is 240 characters Important If you are using a value set of dates this value set should have a format type of either Standard Date or Standard DateTime if you are using the Multilingual Request feature If you want to set a default value for this parameter identify the type of value you need Valid types include Constant The default value can be any literal value Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 91 Default V
115. program The program must be written as NLS Compliant to utilize this feature See the Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide Note that this option should be set only by the developer of the program The program must be written as NLS Compliant to utilize this feature Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 69 Output Format Select the output format from the following e HTML e PCL HP s Printer Control Language e PDF e PS Post Script e Text Important If you choose HTML or PDF as the output type with Oracle Report programs you must use an appropriate printer driver that handles HTML or PDF files Output Save Indicate whether to automatically save the output from this program to an operating system file when it is run This value becomes the default for all requests submitted for this program The output of programs with Save set to No is deleted after printing If this is a Standard Request Submission program users can override this value from the Submit Requests window Output Print If you enter No your concurrent program s output is never sent to the printer Output Columns Rows Enter the minimum column and row length for this program s report output Oracle E Business Suite uses this information to determine which print styles can accommodate your report Output Style The print style you select depends on your system and printer setup Print styles include e 132 columns and 6
116. program 37 and Do not run requests by User Sam Net result Do not run anyone s requests for program 37 and do not run any of Sam s requests Include and Exclude Rules Result Include User Sam AND Exclude 37 Include X Run only requests by User Sam and Do not run program 37 Net result Run all of Sam s requests except requests to run program 37 Run program X Defining Concurrent Managers 7 19 Include and Exclude Rules Result OR Include User Sam Exclude 37 AND Exclude User Mary Or Run requests by User Sam and Do not run program 37 and Do not run requests by User Mary Net result Run program X except when requested by Mary and run all of Sam s requests except requests to run program 37 The following table gives examples of the action types associated with specialization rules Rule Action Type Example Explanation INCLUDE Combined Rule INCLUDE ORACLE ID INCLUDE Program Oracle Project Manager only reads Accounting Tim s requests to start Budgets programs defined by the Combined Rule Tim s Budgets APPS2 Manager only reads requests to start programs that connect to the APPS2 a single install in a multiple install schema Oracle ID Oracle Project Manager only reads Accounting Sales requests to start the Forecast concurrent program named Sales Forecast 7 20 Oracle E Business Suite Sy
117. reads the printer value using the following hierarchy concurrent program definition report set definition printer user profile option value and value specified by user during report submission The concurrent manager reads the print style value using the following hierarchy concurrent program definition report set definition and value specified by user during report submission Printers 9 39 Order of Reading Printer or Print Style Settings PRINTER PRINT STYLE CONCURRENT CONCURRENT PROGRAM PROGRAM DEFINITION DEFINITION REPORT SET REPORT SET DEFINITION DEFINITION PRINTER USER PROFILE OPTION VALUE USER SUBMITS USER SUBMITS REPORT TO RUN REPORT TO RUN Hierarchy of Printer Assignments As System Administrator you can restrict concurrent programs and reports to direct their output to a specific printer Restricting a program or report s output to a specific printer overrides user profile option settings and prevents report set or user runtime printer choices If a printer is not included as part of a concurrent program s definition then default printer settings may be entered as indicated in the table below Users can override any default setting at runtime The following table describes the printer assignment hierarchy Form Explanation Concurrent Programs System Administrator As System Administrator you can define a concurrent program to always direct its output to only one specific printer This se
118. region items 1 In the Web Applications Dictionary navigate to the Region Items folder window Do this by selecting a region in the Regions window and choosing the Region Items button Select the attribute type either attribute or object attribute to associate to a region An attribute is usually reserved for use with a button Select the name of an existing attribute or object attribute Enter a display sequence for the region item This determines the order of the region items whether they display or not If you do not want a region item displayed select the Hidden item style in the next step Select an item style either Button or Text Note The Checkbox Hidden and Poplist item styles are not supported Optionally indicate whether the region item can be queried Optionally indicate whether the underlying column of the region item should D 12 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration determine the order in which data is displayed and whether that order is ascending or descending This generates a web query form Oracle Self Service Web Applications D 13 E Time Zone Support User Preferred Time Zones Release 12 of Oracle E Business Suite includes as standard a feature called User Preferred Time Zone Support In most existing E Business Suite implementations all users interact with the system in the corporate time zone which will normally be the time zone of the headqu
119. report output PROFILE OUTFILEHOST Host name Host name Related Topics Overview of Printers and Printing page 9 1 Setting up Your Printers page 9 8 Hierarchy of Printer and Print Style Assignments page 9 39 9 46 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Printer Types Window s Oracle Applications iof x File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help ORACLE ZAMMET KIE E 217 Printer Types Description Printer Drivers Driver Name l Style es as _ d a O Use this window to define a printer type and to assign print styles and their corresponding printer drivers to the printer type Defining printer types allows you to assign print style and printer driver definitions to any number of printers by registering the printers as a specific type When users choose a printer to send a report to the available print styles are normally determined by the printer type Concurrent programs however can be defined to require their report output in a specific print style For example some Oracle Reports programs may require a specific print style in order to print correctly Important You should issue a Restart concurrent manager command for all currently active managers whenever you edit an existing Printer Type Print Style or Printer Driver See Controlling Concurrent Managers page 7 35 Printers 9 47 Printer Types B
120. requires a thorough knowledge of both printer operation and a computer programming language Follow the guidelines in this section if you need to create an executable printing program Printer Styles An executable program should be able to format report output for various print styles including these e Portrait 80 columns wide 66 lines per page e Landscape 132 characters wide 66 lines per page 62 lines per page on A4 style paper e Landwide 180 characters wide 66 lines per page 62 lines per page on A4 style paper Formatting Arguments If the program handles formatting for various print styles internally you can pass arguments from the printer drivers to the program to determine which print style to use If the program does not contain print style formatting commands you can define the commands in a command file that calls the program You then define the cmd file as the printing program in a printer driver and pass arguments that determine the print style from the driver to the script The printer driver that calls the executable program or cmd file must be able to pass the following arguments e Name of the destination printer e Number of copies to print e Banner on title page Filename Initialization and Reset You do not have to add printer initialization and reset strings to your program if you can define these strings in the Printer Drivers form Character Mode Oracle Reports Commands We recommend that yo
121. restart all concurrent managers then log on to Oracle E Business Suite to test the new password Note When changing APPS or APPLSYS and APPLSYSPUB passwords do not restart the system until the entire password change process has been completed AFPASSWD Utility AFPASSWD is an enhanced version of FNDCPASS and includes the following features AFPASSWD only prompts for passwords required for the current operation allowing separation of duties between applications administrators and database administrators This also improves interoperability with Oracle Database Vault In contrast the FNDCPASS utility currently requires specification of the APPS and the SYSTEM usernames and corresponding passwords preventing separation of duties between applications administrators and database administrators When changing a password with AFPASSWD the user is prompted to enter the new password twice to confirm AFPASSWD can be run from the database tier as well as the application tier In contrast FNDCPASS can only be run from the application tier FNDCPASS will continue to be shipped with Oracle E Business Suite and customers can migrate to the AFPASSWD utility at their discretion Important The FNDCPASS utility must still be used to migrate the password hashing scheme as described in My Oracle Support Document 457166 1 FNDCPASS Utility New Feature Enhance Security With Non Reversible Hash Password 11 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Admin
122. run in one language or in any subset of the installed languages Your Italian customer for example can receive invoices printed in Italian while your Korean customer receives packing slips printed in Korean Oracle Shipping e Bill of Lading e Commercial Invoice e Pack Slip Oracle Order Management e Price List e Sales Order Acknowledgment Oracle Receivables e Dunning Letter Print 18 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Print Statements Transaction Print Oracle Purchasing Oracle Sourcing Oracle Payables Printed Change Order Report Landscape Printed Change Order Report Portrait Printed Purchase Order Report Landscape Printed Purchase Order Report Portrait Printed RFQ Report Landscape Printed RFQ Report Portrait Dispatch Purchase Order Negotiation PDF Invalid PO Supplier Notice Prepayment Remittance Notice Print Invoice Notice Supplier Open Balance Letter Oracle Human Capital Management Human Resources Full Person Details Full Applicant Details Full Assignment Details Full Work Details Administering Globalization 18 7 Oracle Payroll e Check Writer e Deposit Advice e Third Party Checks Translations Window In windows with an enabled translation icon users can click on the icon to bring up a Translations window to enter or update translated values for specific records in the database See Creating Translations for a Record Oracle E
123. s report security group This report lists the actual start date and time and actual completion date and time for concurrent programs that completed running See Completed Concurrent Requests Report page 7 15 Tip Run your concurrent programs at different times perhaps late at night and then again during the midafternoon to determine processing time during different workload periods For example based on actual time to completion you can specialize different managers to run the following types of programs e inventory pick lists e payable check runs postings invoice imports Augment this approach by defining an overflow manager for example a manager who can accommodate programs directed to one or more of the managers above but whose work shift is restricted to say 2 00am 4 00am 02 00 04 00 If some of your long running programs have not started running before the overflow work shift begins then an additional manager is enabled to accommodate those programs Further augment this approach with an exception manager defined for must have requests For example a manager that can run certain programs that must complete by a certain time The must have manager can be specialized to only read requests for certain programs Defining Concurrent Managers 7 7 Related Topics programs submitted by a particular user for example the Company Controller You can specialize a manager to only read requests from a sin
124. separately from such middle tier failover for example using TNS connection time failover mechanism instead use the profile option Concurrent PCP Instance Check When this profile option is set to OFF Parallel Concurrent Processing will not provide database instance failover support however it will continue to provide middle tier node failover support when a node Defining Concurrent Managers 7 47 goes down Defining Concurrent Managers You define concurrent managers either in the Create New Request Processing Manager page in Oracle Applications Manager or in the Concurrent Managers form When you define a manager you specify the manager type which may be either Concurrent Manager Internal Monitor or Transaction Manager There are three other types of managers that Oracle E Business Suite predefines for you the Internal Concurrent Manager which describes the Internal Concurrent Manager process the Conflict Resolution Manager and the Scheduler For the Conflict Resolution Manager and Scheduler you can assign the primary and secondary nodes For the Internal Concurrent Manager you assign the primary node only To each concurrent manager and each Internal Monitor Process you may assign a primary and a secondary node You may also assign primary and secondary system queue names if a platform specific queue management system is available on your platform See Concurrent Managers page 7 59 Administering Concurrent Managers Ta
125. sequences to document definitions 14 5 14 6 auditability 14 1 automatic document numbering initial value 14 2 automatic numbering 14 8 automatic vs manual 14 7 category 14 5 14 12 category application 14 10 category code 14 10 category identifies database table 14 10 14 10 defining a sequence 14 1 defining document categories 14 10 defining documents to be numbered 14 5 differences document numbering vs entry 14 7 disabling a sequence assignment 14 13 document categories explained 14 4 document definition 14 12 Document Flexfield 14 5 enabling segments in the document flexfield 14 14 end date document definition 14 13 end date document flexfield 14 13 examples document categories 14 4 examples sequence definitions 14 2 initial value of sequence 14 8 manual numbering 14 8 message displayed by document 14 8 method in document flexfield 14 5 14 14 segments and the document flexfield 14 14 sequence names 14 8 sequences and audit records 14 8 sequences explained 14 1 sequence start date 14 8 sequence type 14 8 set of books in document flexfield 14 5 14 14 start date document definition 14 13 start date document flexfield 14 13 type of document numbering 14 8 type of sequence numbering 14 2 E ENABLE SCHEMA MONITORING procedure CBO 12 12 Environment variable 11 16 External documents 18 6 F FND STATS package 12 8 FNDCPASS utility 11 5 FNDGFU B
126. set Request Set with Multiple Requests Running in Parallel within a Stage Request Set Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 request 1 ante 2 request 4 request 6 request 3 request 6 Using Stage Status Like request sets and concurrent requests stages can complete with different statuses Each stage can complete with a status of Success Warning or Error You can use these completion statuses to structure your request set by defining which stage will follow the current stage based on its completion status For example a request set always begins with Stage 1 If Stage 1 completes with the status Success then the Success link is followed and Stage 2 is submitted After Stage 2 completes the set ends If Stage 1 completes with Warning then the Warning link is followed and Stage 3 is submitted After Stage 3 completes the set ends If Stage 1 completes with Error then the Error link is followed and Stage 4 is submitted After Stage 4 completes the request set ends Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 7 Request Set Using Stage Statuses Request Set Stage 2 request 4 Success Stage 1 Stage 3 request 1 request 2 request 6 request 3 Stage 4 request 6 In this example the stage status is determined using the Standard stage function The Standard stage function uses the statuses of the requests within the stage to calculate the status for the stage If all of the requests in a stage comple
127. statistics to collect only relevant for tables that are partitioned Valid values are e DEFAULT Gather global and partition level statistics e SUBPARTITION Gather subpartition level statistics PARTITION Gather partition level statistics e GLOBAL Gather global statistics e ALL Gather all subpartition partition and global statistics This parameter controls the amount of history records that are created Valid modes are LASTRUN FULL and NONE The default is LASTRUN For an explanation of the different modes please refer to the GATHER TABLE STATS Procedure This flag indicates whether cursors dependent on the table being analyzed should be invalidated or not This parameter is ignored if you are running a database prior to Oracle 9i Release 2 9 2 x This concurrent program backs up the current statistics of the given table into the END STATTAB table This program also backs up the related index and column statistics by default An identifier commonly referred to as STATID can be associated with the backup up statistics This STATID allows you to restore a particular version of the statistics using the Restore Table Statistics concurrent program Statistics for the same object can be backed up with different STATIDs You can even backup different versions of the statistics for the same object by assigning different STATIDs For a detailed description of the procedure used by this concurrent Query Optimizat
128. that this request is incompatible with may not run with Leave Allow Incompatibility unchecked to specify that this request set may run with all other concurrent requests or request sets 10 Choose Define Stages or Link Stages if you have finished defining your stages Follow this procedure to define stages 1 The value for the Display Sequence is defaulted in sequence as you enter your stages You may change the display order of the stages by modifying this field Enter a Name for the stage Enter a Description of your stage if you like Enter a Stage Code for the stage This code is used internally to reference the stage In the Function field of the Function region use the List of Values to select a function The default value for this field is the Standard Stage Evaluation function This function bases its completion status on the normal completion status of the requests it contains Other functions may be provided by your Oracle product For a description of these functions refer to the user s guide for that product Use the The Return Value of this Stage Affects the Set Outcome check box if you want to ensure that the request set s completion status is equal to the completion status of this stage Note If you choose this check box for more than one stage the completion status of the request set will equal the completion status of the last of these stages to run within the set Use the Allow Incompatibility check box to
129. the Oracle E Business Suite architecture and technology stack it focuses on strategic topics giving a broad outline of the actions needed to achieve a particular goal plus the installation and configuration choices that may be available Oracle E Business Suite CRM System Administrator s Guide This manual describes how to implement the CRM Technology Foundation JTT and use its System Administrator Console Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide This guide contains the coding standards followed by the Oracle E Business Suite development staff It describes the Oracle Application Object Library components needed to implement the Oracle E Business Suite user interface described in the Oracle E Business Suite User Interface Standards for Forms Based Products It provides information to help you build your custom Oracle Forms Developer forms so that they integrate with Oracle E Business Suite In addition this guide has information for customizations in features such as concurrent programs flexfields messages and logging Oracle E Business Suite Flexfields Guide This guide provides flexfields planning setup and reference information for the Oracle E Business Suite implementation team as well as for users responsible for the ongoing maintenance of Oracle E Business Suite product data This guide also provides information on creating custom reports on flexfields data Oracle E Business Suite Installation Guide Using Rapid Install
130. the Submit Requests Window using Codes sss 6 26 Report Group Responsibilities Report sssssssssssee eee 6 27 Report Parameters sss ee eene enne enne enhn eaaa enr nenne 6 27 Defining Program Incompatibility Rules sess 6 28 Incompatible and Run Alone Programs ee 6 28 Concurrent Conflict Domains enr e feseaseiag eaa a a a TEE 6 29 Enforcing Incompatibility RULES is ett arae TAa ei bee 6 31 Custom Concurrent Programis eese ettet acdc eee se ai 6 32 Log arid Output Filenames eau eee dee Hh Te tit ir be eH pe HE desee 6 33 Oracle Tool Concurrent Prograims ett eet ttg tet er rne dean 6 34 Pro C Concurrent Programs dee une eee ries 6 35 Host Language Concurrent Programs esses eee e nnne 6 38 Submitting Concurrent Requests CONCSUB sssseseseeeeee ee ene 6 39 Copying and Modifying Program Definitions ssssssssss eee 6 44 Copying and Renaming a concurrent program sss eee 6 45 Alter Program Priority e ero e Ue Uie ede teet cies bere Ee uenis 6 46 Modifying an Incompatible Programs List sessssseseee eneen 6 47 Concurrent Program Parameters ssssssssssssesseeeeeennre en een nennen tens 6 47 Control the Behavior of Request Parameters eee eme 6 48 Example of modifying a program s parameters sssssssssseeee e 6 54 Conflict Domains ciconia e iiaeaa
131. the following command all on one line substituting the appropriate parameters for your instance orapki wallet add wallet dn CN server us oracle com OU Unit O Org L Orlando ST Florida C US keysize 1024 self signed validity 3650 pwd welcomel 2 Your wallet is now ready for use in environments where security is not required as mentioned in the warning note above self certification is by definition not secure Configure Apache for SSL Connections using AutoConfig Ensure that the following parameters are correctly set in your Oracle E Business Suite applications context file Basic Configuration Tasks 2 9 Variable Non SSL Value SSL Value s_url_protocol http https s_local_url_protocol http https s_webentryurlprotocol http https s_active_webport s_help_web_agent s_login_page Same as s_webport URL constructed with http protocol and s_webport URL constructed with http protocol and s_webport Same as s_webssl_port URL constructed with http protocol and s_webport same as non SSL URL constructed with https protocol and s_webssl_port Run AutoConfig either through the Oracle Applications Manager interface or by using the adautocfg sh script in the application tier A DMIN_SCRIPTS_HOME directory Note For more details see My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 387859 1 Using AutoConfig to Manage System Configurations with Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 Test Startup of Apache and Or
132. the tablespace name of any default OATM tablespaces or registered custom tablespaces Example Enter the tablespace type CUSTOM TABLESPACE TYPE Enter the new tablespace name CUSTOM TBLSP Tablespace name for CUSTOM TABLESPACE TYPE changed to CUSTOM TBLSP Do you want to continue changing tablespace names Y Selecting the default Y prompts you to enter next existing new tablespace pair Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility 3 23 Selecting N returns you to the previous menu Option 3 Register object classification Select Option 3 Register object classification to register new object tablespace classifications This is relevant only for objects such as tables that require explicit classification These can include custom tables residing in Oracle E Business Suite product schemas or those residing in custom schemas If object classification for the object is already registered a message will be displayed stating that classification already exists and will prompt you to enter a new object name Existing classification can be modified by selecting option 4 from the Run Customization Steps menu Example Enter the application short name FND Enter the object name FND TABLES Enter the tablespace type CUSTOM TABLESPACE TYPE Tablespace type CUSTOM TABLESPACE TYPE for object FND TABLES registered Do you
133. this program can also create a backup of the current statistics depending on the value of the Backup Flag If for some reason the earlier statistics need to be restored that can be done using the Restore Schema Statistics concurrent program The STATID used for this backup is NULL This program also creates histograms on the columns seeded in the 12 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration FND_HISTOGRAM_COLS table For a detailed description of the procedure used by this concurrent program see information on the GATHER SCHEMA STATS procedure Parameters Schema Name Schema for which statistics are to be gathered Specify ALL for all Oracle E Business Suite schemas all schemas that have an entry in the END PRODUCT INSTALLATIONS table Percent The sampling percentage If left blank the default value of 10 is used The valid range is from 0 to 100 Degree The degree of parallelism to be used for gathering statistics If a Degree is not provided it defaults to the minimum of parallel max servers and cpu count Backup Flag The backup flag indicates whether to backup statistics Set this flag to BACKUP if you wish to back up the current statistics into the FND STATTAB table If NOBACKUP is used then the GATHER SCHEMA STATS procedure will not backup the current statistics This way the GATHER SCHEMA STATS procedure will run faster Restart Request ID In the case where the Gather Schema Statistics run
134. to a directive may cause Apache to behave in an unintended fashion The Apache configuration files are installed as part of the Oracle E Business Suite Rapid Install process On UNIX for example the files will be placed in INST_TOP ora 10 1 3 Apache A pache conf Secure Sockets Layer Configuration Secure Sockets Layer SSL allows the Apache listener to encrypt HTML pages and transmit them on the network using the HTTPS protocol for secure transmissions SSL uses an encrypting method called public key cryptography where the server provides the client with a public key for encrypting information The server s private key is required to decrypt this information The client uses the public key to encrypt and send information to the server including its own key which identifies it to the Basic Configuration Tasks 2 7 server In order for the Oracle HTTP Server powered by Apache to function in secure mode it is also necessary to utilize certificates which validate the server s identity These certificates are used to ensure that the owner of a public key is who they say they are Typically you will want to use a private key with an officially signed certificate validated by a Certificate Authority CA The CA validates the company details sets expiration dates on the certificates and may place policies on what information is contained within the certificate A number of CAs exist and include such authorities as Verisign RSA and GTE
135. to be created always overwriting any existing one Deleting a dbc file To delete a dbc file enter on the command line UNIX java oracle apps fnd security AdminA ppServer apps appsedbname V DELETE 2 14 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration DBC FND_TOP secure file dbc Windows jre classpath CLASSPATH X oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps appsedbname DELETE DBC FND_TOP secure file dbc This deletes the dbc file and disallows access to the indicated database if Server Security is active Troubleshooting The following are possible problems you may encounter and suggested solutions e Database connection failed Check to see if your JDBC environment is correct See AdminAppServer Utility page 2 11 e File I O error while adding the server Check to see if the path you supplied as SECURE_PATH exists and that you have write permissions on it e Unable to read environment file A value for SECURE_PATH may not have been specified If a value is not specified the AdminAppServer utility assumes you are running from JAVA_TOP and looks for the file JAVA TOP oracle apps env html to find the value of FND TOP Retry the command specifying the value of SECURE PATH e Database error Unique constraint violated There can be only one entry for each application server per database If you do not specify the value for SERVER ADDRESS the AdminAppServer utility will default the IP addr
136. to not display it does not appear in the Details block of the Concurrent Requests form These displayed parameter values exactly match the values that the concurrent manager passes to the concurrent program and may or may not correspond to the displayed value that the user chose For example in the Submit Requests form the user may choose Oracle General Ledger as a parameter but the corresponding application ID displays in the Concurrent Requests form Tip If your users encounter errors when running a program you can Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 49 look at the exact values that the concurrent program uses to help you diagnose the problem Setting Default Values for Parameters Parameter default values can be changed by users when they submit a program or request set to run You can set a default value for a parameter using the e Default Type and Default Value fields in the Concurrent Programs form These values cannot be changed on the Request Set form e Default Type and Default Value fields in the Request Set form This default definition applies only when the program is run as part of a request set e Shared Parameter and Default Value fields in the Request Set form This default definition applies only when the program is run as part of a request set All parameters labeled with the same shared parameter label default to the value you set in the Default Value field Entering erroneous default val
137. to view client configuration data about the hardware and software of your computer For more information about using the Client System Analyzer from the Oracle E Business Suite see My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 277904 1 Troubleshooting Wizards e Concurrent Manager Recovery e Service Infrastructure e GCS and Forms Monitoring e CP Signature e Dashboard Collection Configuration Overview Overview This page contains configuration information for the Oracle E Business Suite system s configuration This page provides information on the following e Database Configuration 5 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Database Operating Units Registered Oracle Schemas Registered Applications Base and Installed Languages Localization Modules The Database section lists the database instances for the system with this information Host Name Instance Name Version Instance Number Click on NLS Parameters to see a list of these parameters and their values Click on Initialization Parameters to see a listing of these parameters Concurrent Processing This section lists general information related to concurrent processing for this Oracle E Business Suite system and its concurrent processing settings A list of concurrent processing servers with their host names and platforms is shown Also the following site level values for the Internal Concurrent Manager ICM are shown
138. tte td 17 1 Modifying Your Menu oett sii nte ted dag eet dee t RR IRR PT ene ea aate 17 1 Creating Process Navigator Processes sssssssssssesee eee eme eene 17 2 Creating Process Navigator Processes 17 2 Administering Globalization Overview of Globalization Support nennen 18 1 Language Values for User Sessions ssssssssssssee eene 18 1 Language Values for User Sessions using AppsLocalLogin jsp sess 18 1 Language Value from Login External to Oracle E Business Suite ssus 18 3 Language Values for Oracle Workflow Notifications 18 3 Date Formats in NLS Implementations ssesssssssssse eee 18 4 Support for Calendars 5 itd dtl tenet e tco ete Rec a dd 18 4 Numeric Format Support ebd eti ca a eee Ra RR DR 18 5 Multilingual External Documents ssssssssssseeee eene eene 18 6 Translations Window addu Valete d er exiens be eek ubt 18 8 Currericies Window iiio ge eei ed t i Re EPA E REESE ea gts 18 8 Languages WindOw eiiis aree ette d it ee a e iege ren 18 9 Languages Record cu eee ee tede e ce edet o e ete rhe 18 9 Natural Languages Window ssssssssssssseeeee nennen nennen nennen 18 10 Natural Languages Record eun ORE 18 10 xi 19 Territories WindOWw 3 eter conet etat dee eee ae A ee aed AS 18 11 Tetritories Block unu eiie 18 11 Integration of Oracle E Business Suite with O
139. values concatenated length exceeds 240 you may experience truncation of your data in some forms Window Information Description Size Enter the display length in characters for the parameter value description Your window may show fewer characters of your description than you specify here if there is not enough room determined by the sum of your longest prompt plus your display size for this parameter plus seven However your window does not display more characters of the description than you specify here Window Information Prompt A user sees the prompt instead of the parameter name in the Parameters window of the Submit Requests window Window Information Concatenated Description Size Enter the display length in characters for the parameter value description The user sees the parameter value in the Parameter Description field of the Submit Requests and View Requests forms The Parameter Description field concatenates all the parameter values for the concurrent program Tip We recommend that you set the Concatenated Description Size for each of your parameters so that the total Concatenated Description Size for your program is 80 or less since most video screens are 80 characters wide Window Information Token For a parameter in an Oracle Reports program the keyword or parameter appears here The value is case insensitive For other types of programs you can skip this field Related Topics Concurrent Programs pa
140. want to continue registering tablespace types for other objects YJ Selecting the default Y prompts you to register the next object classification and selecting N returns you to the previous menu Option 4 Change object classification Select Option 4 Change object classification to change any existing object tablespace classifications If object classification for the object is not already registered a message will be displayed stating that classification does not exist and you will be prompted to enter a new object name New object classification can be entered by selecting Option 3 from the Run Customization Steps menu Example Enter the application short name FND Enter the object name FND LOBS Enter the tablespace type MEDIA Tablespace type for object FND LOBS changed to MEDIA Do you want to continue changing tablespace types for other objects Y Selecting the default Y prompts you to enter the next object classification modification and selecting N returns you to the previous menu Step 8 Batch Mode Execution of Migration 3 24 Note Please note that Step 8 Run Migration in Batch Mode is an alternative step to the earlier migration steps If you have followed OATM menu steps 1 7 you don t need to perform step 8 Select Step 8 Run Migration in Batch Mode to execute both preparatory steps and migration commands as a single flow The OATM menu based design provides you Oracle E Busin
141. window using one of the following menu options M File Open M View Find Trees 2 Enter your search criteria in the Find Trees window and click Find For example enter Payables in the Prompt field to find the Oracle Payables tree Oracle E Business Suite Help 10 11 Find Trees SM 2X sinn Payables96 Description Data Node Application Node Key IIT ROOT See Help Builder Window Reference page 10 15 for descriptions of the Find Trees search fields 3 Trees matching your criteria will be displayed in the upper right pane of the Help Builder window on the Trees tab Select a tree in the list to see its properties displayed in the Properties pane below Double click a tree to open it The tree s top level node will appear in the left pane Expand and contract nodes to display the part of the tree you want to edit Adding new help files to a tree To add new help files to a tree 1 Upload the help files to the database page 10 2 2 Openthe tree for editing page 10 11 3 Click the Find Documents icon on the toolbar or select Find Documents from the View Menu The Find Documents window appears 10 12 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Imi S Uploading Target Application 7 Exclude documents already on a tree Find Documents MAX J J See Help Builder Window Reference page 10 15 for descriptions of the
142. with Common Directory SAPPLCSF APPLLOG Output Default Default PROD TOP APPLOUT lt USERNAME gt lt request ID with Common Directory or O request D gt out or SAPPLCSF SAPPLOUT user out based on value of APPCPNAM The variable parameters shown in this table have the following values e PROD TOP The application s top environment variable e Request ID The number that identifies the concurrent request e USERNAME Up to eight characters uppercase of the application username of the person who requested the concurrent process On UNIX platforms the filenaming works as described in the following table APPCPNAM Variable Assignment in UNIX Output File Format APPCPNAM REOID 0999999 0ut APPCPNAM USER Applications user gt out Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 33 APPCPNAM Variable Assignment in UNIX Output File Format APPCPNAM USER REQID lt Applications user gt 999999 unset or unrecognized syntax 0999999 out In the above table lt Applications user gt refers to an Oracle E Business Suite user name and 999999 stands for a concurrent request ID On Windows platforms the default format is o lt request ID gt out Setting APPCPNAM to USER on a Windows platform results in the output files having the format lt user ID gt out Oracle Tool Concurrent Programs If you write concurrent programs in PL SQL SQL Plus or Oracle Reports name the pro
143. with your custom application allows Oracle E Business Suite to preserve your application objects and customizations during upgrades The application basepath tells Oracle Application Object Library where to find the files associated with your Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 11 15 Prerequisites custom application You can use your custom application to name your custom menus concurrent programs custom responsibilities and many other custom components For some objects the application part of the name only ensures uniqueness across Oracle E Business Suite For other components the application you choose has an effect on the functionality of your custom object e If you are creating a custom application Define an environment variable that translates to your application s basepath see Oracle E Business Suite Concepts for your operating system e If you are creating a custom application Set up a directory structure for your application see Oracle E Business Suite Concepts for your operating system e If you are using this window with Oracle Alert If your application resides in a database other than the database where Oracle Alert resides you must create a database link Applications Block Application Short Name When you register a custom application you provide the information Oracle uses to identify it whenever you reference it Although you can change the application short name of an application doing so may cause a
144. zone and starting to interact with the system in this time zone Failing to set a user level time zone preference at user level will result in the standard corporate time zone continuing to be used By entering data in the local time zone and using a custom solution to resolve any issues that arise when comparing data across transactions initiated in different time zones In this case enabling the user preferred time zone feature could result in unwanted date with time conversions whereby local dates with time are converted to the user preferred time zone this is because the system assumes that all dates with time are stored in the corporate time zone For further details refer to Oracle E Business Suite Upgrade Guide Release 11i to Release 12 Implementation Details This section provides the technical considerations involved in implementing the user preferred time zone feature Technology Stack Requirements For user preferred time zone support to operate correctly all of the following must be true The operating system time zone setting for the database server must be set to the standard corporate time zone The database must be configured to use the time zone file timezlrg dat rather than the timezone dat file The database must be started in the standard corporate time zone Every application tier JVM Java Virtual Machine must be started in the standard corporate time zone This can be achieved by setting the applica
145. 00 9 00 am as the start time and 17 00 5 00 pm as the end time Note that Oracle E Business Suite uses a 24 hour clock Days of Week From Days of Week To Enter the first and last days of this shift For instance if your shift name is Week Days 7 66 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Date you could enter Monday in the Days of Week From field and Friday in the Days of Week To field If you enter a value in the Days of Week From field you must enter a value in the Days of Week To field You may not use the Date field for this row Enter a date here to create a date specific workshift For instance you can name a workshift Memorial Day and enter the date in this field to enable this workshift only on the Memorial Day holiday Date specific workshifts override workshifts that do not specify a specific date If you want to enter a value in this field specify a date you may not enter values for the Days of Week fields for this row See Overlapping Work Shifts Priority Levels page 7 4 Related Topics Defining Managers and their Work Shifts page 7 1 Work Shift by Manager Report page 7 16 Work Shifts Report page 7 16 Administer Concurrent Managers field help page 7 50 Concurrent Managers field help page 7 59 Defining Concurrent Managers 7 67 Combined Specialization Rules Window B Oracle Applications ioj x File Edit View Falder Tools Window Help ORACLE SP e IO
146. 14 Request security groups 6 2 Request sets print options 6 13 request parameters 6 14 running reports in parallel 6 12 shared parameters 6 14 Request type 7 33 Resource consumer groups 11 3 Responsibilities reporting on reports and report sets 6 27 RESTORE COLUMN STATS procedure CBO 12 11 RESTORE SCHEMA STATS procedure CBO 12 10 RESTORE TABLE STATS procedure CBO 12 10 Role Based Access Control RBAC with concurrent programs 6 2 Run Reports form customizing using codes 6 26 Run Requests form example customizing 6 26 S SEC CASE SENSITIVE LOGON database initialization paramater 11 5 Secure Sockets Layer use in Oracle HTTP Server 2 6 Security server administering 2 15 server trust level 2 19 Index 7 Server security 2 15 2 19 Server trust level 2 19 Setting the folder mode D 6 Shared parameters behavior of Report Sets 6 20 changing a value 6 14 request sets 6 14 Sharing parameters in request sets 6 14 Specializing managers actions 7 17 action types 7 17 defining combined rules 7 27 defining specialization rules 7 17 examples of action types 7 20 examples of combined rules 7 29 examples of rules 7 22 explained 7 17 introduction 7 17 specialization vs combined rules 7 32 using more than one rule 7 18 Specific user errors 15 6 ssl conf SSL configuration file 2 6 Standard Report Submission explained 6 1 Standard Request Submission print options 6 13 request
147. 17 7 34 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Administer Concurrent Managers page 7 50 Concurrent Managers page 7 59 Controlling Concurrent Managers This essay explains how to control your concurrent managers Manager States Individual managers read requests to start concurrent programs and actually start programs running when certain conditions are satisfied such as the manager s work shift definition number of target processes and specialization rules You can start shut down or reset the concurrent managers at any time Oracle E Business Suite provides an Internal Concurrent Manager that processes these commands You can issue commands either to individual managers or by altering the state of the Internal Concurrent Manager you can control every manager at once Note Start your concurrent managers on machines with hostnames of 30 or fewer characters Managers may fail to start on machines with longer hostnames Starting Individual Managers You can restart or activate managers on an individual basis Restarting a concurrent manager forces the Internal Concurrent Manager to reread the definition for that concurrent manager Activating a manager cancels a previous command to deactivate it and allows the Internal Concurrent Manager to submit a request to start that manager when its work shift starts You should restart an individual manager when you e modify its work shift assignments
148. 17 Command Line Parameters page 9 24 Defining Configuration Files for Specific Printers The pasta cfg file controls many printing options You can use the default file for many printers for multiple languages However if you have printers that require special setup you can customize these options by creating a configuration file for each printer Copy the pasta cfg file to pasta_ lt printer name gt cfg Make the necessary changes to the file Pasta automatically looks for a printer specific file name If it does not find one Pasta then uses the default file pasta cfg For example suppose you have a printer named hqprinter for which you want to set the page height and width to letter size 1 Copy FND_TOP resource pasta cfg to F ND_TOP resource pasta_hqprinter cfg where hqprinter is the name of the printer as defined on the operating system 2 In the pasta hqprinter cfg file edit the paper size options Set pagewidth 8 5 Set pageheight 11 Pasta will now use the options as defined in the pasta hqprinter cfg file when printing to the hqprinter For more information on setting options in the Pasta configuration file see Configuration File Options page 9 18 Using a Different Configuration File as the Default You can change the file that is defined as the default configuration file for Pasta by using the F command line parameter For example suppose you create a PCL print specific configuration file named pcl cfg Set t
149. 17 Specializing managers 7 1 Standard manager 7 2 time based queues 7 7 viewing actual number of processes 7 51 viewing manager control processes 7 54 viewing manager request queue 7 57 viewing number of running requests 7 51 viewing status of 7 50 viewing target number of processes 7 51 work shifts 7 3 work shifts and target processes 7 5 7 62 work shifts hours 7 4 work shifts overlap 7 4 work shifts overlap same priority 7 5 work shifts past midnight 7 4 Concurrent processing programs 6 65 6 83 viewing incompatible tasks 6 65 Concurrent programs behavior of program parameters 6 48 behavior of report set parameters 6 48 changing responsibility to see changed effects 6 48 CONCSUB 6 39 copying and modifying 6 44 custom 6 32 database session control 6 72 defining 6 83 defining incompatibility rules 6 28 disabling 6 65 displaying parameters programs vs report sets 6 48 enforcement of incompatibility rules 6 31 example modifying program parameters 6 54 execution method 6 61 6 65 grouping as a request type 7 71 Index 2 grouping as request types 7 33 incompatible 6 65 6 74 modifying incompatible programs list 6 47 modifying parameters 6 47 multiple language support 6 61 6 65 not displaying parameters 6 48 parameter sequence 6 76 program libraries 7 2 reporting on enabled programs 6 57 reporting on incompatible programs 6 57 reporting on program definitions 6 57 report set i
150. 22 Copying and Modifying Program Definitions page 6 44 Running Reports and Programs Oracle E Business Suite User s Guide Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 1 Controlling Access to Concurrent Programs and Limiting Active Requests for a User You can restrict users access to submit and view concurrent requests Controlling Access to Concurrent Programs with Request Security Groups Note This method is used in releases prior to Release 12 A request security group is a collection of reports or concurrent programs A System Administrator defines request security groups in order to control user access to reports and concurrent programs Only a System Administrator can create a request security group e The reports and concurrent programs that may be selected by a user in Standard Request Submission belong to a request security group which is a request group assigned to a responsibility Important The use of request security groups is for backward compatibility only e The reports and concurrent programs that may be selected from a customized SRS form or window belong to a request security group that uses a code See Customizing the Submit Request Window using Codes page 6 26 Controlling Access to Concurrent Programs using Role Based Access Control RBAC RBAC allows administrators to have more granular control in securing data related on concurrent programs and requests Submitting Requests Administrators c
151. 230048 10g for errors Press Return key to continue Option 2 Execute Migration Commands for a List of Schemas Select Option 2 to migrate the objects in a given list of schemas to the correct tablespaces You are prompted for a list of comma separated schema names and then for the number of parallel process as input This option executes the generated commands from FND TS MIG CMDS table which generates the following events in sequence Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility 3 19 1 All constraints triggers policies are disabled first and then the queues are stopped 2 Java program oracle apps fnd tsmig TSMigration is executed to migrate all the tables with LONG and LONG RAW columns along with their indexes A log file for the migration of tables with LONG is generated as fndmlong lt timestamp gt log 3 A sequential process is started that executes the script fndemseq sql to move all the objects generated with execution mode as sequential A log file for the sequential process is generated as fndemseq timestamp log 4 Multiple processes are started to execute the SQL script fndemcmd sql to migrate the objects generated with execution mode as parallel A log file is generated as fndemcmd lt timestamp gt log Example Enter a comma separated list of schema names HR AP Enter the maximum number of parallel processes 4 10 Note If your migration process terminates before it is completed
152. 24 FNDLOAD B 1 B 3 Folder Administration 11 20 Folder Set 11 20 Foreign keys defining D 10 Form passing arguments to 6 23 Form Personalization 16 1 Forms Administer Concurrent Managers 7 50 Applications 11 15 Concurrent Conflicts Domains 6 82 Concurrent Request Types 7 71 Define Combined Specialization Rules 7 68 Define Concurrent Manager 7 59 Define Data Group 6 80 Define Printer Driver 9 53 Index 3 Define Printer Types 9 47 Define Print Style 9 50 Define Report Group 6 59 Define Work Shifts 7 66 Languages 18 9 Natural Languages 18 10 Register Nodes 7 74 Register ORACLE IDs 11 12 Register Printers 9 49 Territories 18 11 Functional Administrator C 1 Functional Developer C 1 G GATHER_ALL_COLUMN_STATS procedure CBO 12 19 GATHER_COLUMN_STATS procedure CBO 12 18 GATHER_INDEX_STATS procedure CBO 12 15 GATHER SCHEMA STATS procedure CBO 12 12 GATHER TABLE STATS procedure CBO 12 16 Generic File Manager B 24 B 27 Generic Loader B 1 Oracle Application Object Library configuration files B 8 Globalization support 18 1 H Help system customizing Oracle E Business Suite help 10 1 Help System Utility 10 2 File Name to Help Target Report 10 4 Help Target to File Name Report 10 4 Uploading help files 10 3 Hijrah calendar support 18 4 Hypertext Markup Language HTML defined D 2 Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP defined D 2 ICX Language profile opti
153. 24 MI SS as in 07 APR 02 18 32 05 Because this date format includes a space you must enclose the date in double quotation marks and single quotation marks If you do not specify a start time your program submits immediately and is processed by the next available concurrent manager The default value is the current time Optional Whether to show this concurrent request on the View Requests form Specify NO YES ERROR or WARNING The value IMPLICIT NO allows the request to appear on the View Request form The default value is NO The value IMPLICIT YES means that only the System Administrator s privileged View Concurrent Requests form displays this request Use this value if the request is not interesting to the user Specify IMPLICIT ERROR or IMPLICIT WARNING respectively if you want the request to appear only if it fails or completes with warnings Optional The number of days after which to repeat the concurrent request calculated from the last requested start date The number can be a positive integer or real number For example REPEAT DAYS 1 5 resubmits your request every 36 hours Important Do not use REPEAT DAYS Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 43 with other resubmission parameters except for the optional parameters REPEAT_END and START Tip REPEAT_DAYS will become obsolete in a future release You may therefore want to use REPEAT_INTERVAL REPEAT_INTERVAL_TYPE and REPEAT INTERVAL UNIT instead o
154. 30 B 10 Oracle E Business Suite System Admin istrator s Guide Configuration BASE PK4 COLUMN VARCHAR2 30 BASE PK5 COLUMN VARCHAR2 30 TRANS USER ENTITY NAME VARCHAR2 240 TRANS USER ENTITY PROMPT VARCHAR2 40 END FND DOCUMENT ENTITIES DEFINE FND DOCUMENT CATEGORIES KEY CATEGORY NAME VARCHAR2 30 BASE APP SHORT NAME VARCHAR2 50 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 BASE START DATE ACTIVE VARCHAR2 11 BASE END DATE ACTIVE VARCHAR2 11 BASE ATTRIBUTE CATEGORY VARCHAR2 30 BASE ATTRIBUTE1 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE2 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE3 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTEA VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTES VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE6 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE7 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTES8 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE9 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE10 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE11 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE12 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE13 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE14 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE15 VARCHAR2 150 BASE DEFAULT DATATYPE ID VARCHAR2 50 BASE APP SOURCE VERSION VARCHAR2 255 TRANS USER NAME VARCHAR2 255 END FND DOCUMENT CATEGORIES DEFINE FND DOCUMENT DATATYPES KEY DATATYPE ID VARCHAR2 50 KEY NAME VARCHAR2 30 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2
155. 6 lines Landscape e 180 columns and 66 lines Landwide e 80 columns and 66 lines Portrait 6 70 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration e 132 columns and 62 lines A4 Your list is limited to those styles that meet your program s columns and row length requirements Output Style Required Output Printer If your program requires a specific print style for example a checkwriting report use this check box to enforce that print style If you want to restrict your program s output to a single printer enter the name of the printer to which you want to send your output If your program has minimum or maximum columns or rows defined your list of values is limited to those printers that can support your program s requirements Users cannot override your choice of printer from the Submit Requests or Requests windows Business Events Region Concurrent programs can be integrated with the Business Event System in Oracle Workflow Business events can be raised at key points of the life cycle of a request to run a concurrent program Users can subscribe to the business events and create their own business processes interacting with the concurrent programs Here you specify the points at which business events are enabled The possible points are e Request Submitted e Request On Hold e Request Resumed e Request Running e Program Completed e Post Processing Started e Post Processing Ended e
156. 7 printer drivers defining 9 53 printer drivers explained 9 3 printer drivers introduction 9 2 printer drivers predefined for printers 9 53 printer drivers predefined for styles 9 53 printer drivers when to define new drivers 9 53 Index 6 printers operating system name 9 49 printers registering 9 49 printer types modifying a printer type to use Pasta 9 12 printer types defining 9 47 printer types introduction 9 2 print style assignments 9 41 print styles columns 9 52 print styles defining 9 50 print styles explained 9 3 print styles introduction 9 2 print styles predefined 9 50 print styles rows 9 52 Program driver method 9 33 Program driver method example 9 33 program name 9 55 reset 9 56 reset string 9 31 reset string editing 9 31 sequence of printing events 9 4 setting up forms used 9 8 setting up printers 9 8 setting up printers using Pasta 9 10 shell scripts 9 34 spool file 9 31 9 55 SRW driver 9 54 SRW driver customizing 9 31 SRW drivers how used 9 38 SRW drivers location 9 38 standard input 9 36 9 55 Subroutine driver method 9 33 System Administrator privileges 9 42 verifying printer drivers 9 32 PrintForms 9 25 Printing 8 11 Print options for reports 6 13 Process Navigator overview 17 1 PURGE_STAT_HISTORY procedure CBO 12 21 Purge Debug Log and System Alerts concurrent program 15 8 Purg
157. ACLE usernames that the installation process registers other than changing the passwords If you are registering a change to an existing ORACLE password make the password change in the database immediately AFTER you register the password change in Oracle E Business Suite Until you register the password changes in Oracle E Business Suite 11 12 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration and implement them in the database responsibilities using this ORACLE username cannot connect to the database Your password must follow the guidelines for creating passwords discussed in the Oracle database documentation Remember that if you use non character values in your password you may need to use quotation marks around your password when changing it in the database Note Use FNDCPASS to change the password not the ORACLE Users window gt Warning If you are changing the password to the applsys ORACLE username which contains the Oracle Application Object Library tables you must not change the passwords to any other ORACLE usernames at the same time As soon as you change and save the password you should immediately log out of the Oracle E Business Suite make the applsys password change in the database and then sign on again before you do anything else You should also ensure that no other users are logged on to the Oracle E Business Suite while you are changing the applsys password Important For passwords for
158. AF OG ENABLED Y OG LEVEL STATEMENT LOG MODULE OG FILENAME path to apps log C Executable Using Oracle Application Object Library Profile Options to Configure Logging You can configure logging by setting Oracle Application Object Library FND profile options The following table lists profile option names and sample values Profile Options Profile Option Name User Specified Name Sample Value AFLOG ENABLED AFLOG MODULE AFLOG LEVEL AFLOG FILENAME FND Debug Log Enabled FND Debug Log Module FND Debug Log Level FND Debug Log Filename myn oy ERROR path to apps log The available levels are Site Application Responsibility and User User settings override Responsibility settings Responsibility settings override Application settings and Application settings override Site settings To emphasize this point the following is a summary of the impacts of the different profile option levels e User Affects only the given user e Application Affects all users for the specific application e Responsibility Affects all users in any application for that responsibility e Site Affects all users applications and responsibilities Note When setting up logging at the Site level we strongly recommend that you set the logging level to UNEXPECTED ERROR or EXCEPTION are also possibilities We strongly discourage setting the logging level for a site to
159. AULT Y Parameters appl id Application ID ownname Owner of the table colname Column name tabname Table name partname Name of the partition 12 18 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration percent degree hsize backup_flag errors hmode Invalidate The sampling percentage If left blank the default value of 10 is used The valid range is from 0 to 100 The degree of parallelism to be used for gathering statistics If a degree is not provided it defaults to the minimum of parallel_max_servers and cpu_count Number of buckets in the histogram The backup flag indicates whether to backup statistics Set this flag to BACKUP if you wish to back up the current column statistics into the FND_STATTAB table If left blank it defaults to NOBACKUP User defined Type for holding the Error messages This parameter controls the amount of history records that are created LASTRUN History records for each index are maintained only for the last gather statistics run Each subsequent run will overwrite the previous history record for the index This is the default behavior FULL This mode does not overwrite any history information History records are created for each run and are identified by the Request ID If a Request ID is not provided one is generated automatically If this mode is used the Purge FND_STATS History Records concurrent program should be run periodically to
160. Administrator s Guide Maintenance Defining Concurrent Managers 7 73 Nodes Window amp Oracle Applications File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help ORACLE db be Deel 4508 Z Platform Description Base Path Var cS LE A node consists of one or more processors and their associated memory In parallel concurrent processing environments such as cluster massively parallel and homogeneous networked environments each node operates independently of other nodes except when sharing resources such as a disk You can assign concurrent managers to different nodes to spread your concurrent processing workload and increase throughput A concurrent manager runs its processes on the nodes to which it is assigned Nodes Block Node Enter the operating system name of a node Platform Select the operating system platform that your node resides on Base Path Variable Consult your installation manual to determine the correct base path variable for your 7 74 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration platform to determine the location of the concurrent managers log and out files for this node Related Topics Overview of Parallel Concurrent Processing page 7 43 Concurrent Managers field help page 7 59 Defining Concurrent Managers 7 75 8 Setting Up and Starting Concurrent Managers Concurrent Managers Oracle E Business Suite concurrent man
161. C 13 2 proprietary queuing systems 7 46 Pasta add a new printer type 9 13 basic setup for printers 9 10 configuration file setup defining configuration files for different printers 9 11 setting margins 9 13 using a different configuration file as the default 9 11 defining the configuration file 9 11 executable 9 10 Index 5 modifying a printer type to use Pasta 9 12 pasta cfg file 9 11 setting margins 9 13 Pasta Universal Printer 9 10 Personalization Oracle Application Framework C 1 PMON cycle concurrent managers 7 36 Portlet Generator 16 3 Primary keys defining D 10 Printer setup printer types modify an existing printer type to use Pasta 9 13 Printer support arguments 9 55 arguments for print command 9 34 caching of definitions 9 9 Command driver method 9 33 concurrent managers restarting 9 9 concurrent program print definitions 9 39 custom print programs location 9 34 drivers styles printer types and platforms 9 4 end user settings 9 43 fast track printer setup with Pasta 9 10 header pages 9 52 initialization 9 56 initialization string 9 31 initialization string editing 9 31 introduction to printing 9 1 page break problems 9 32 platform 9 54 postscript printing 9 43 predefined types styles drivers 9 31 print command amp arguments example 9 34 printer style assignments 9 39 printer assignments 9 40 printer driver method 9 33 printer drivers assigning 9 4
162. Concurrent GSM Enabled This profile option indicates whether the Generic Service Management GSM feature is enabled The default value is Yes Concurrent Attach URL If this profile option is set to Yes a URL is attached to request completion notifications When a user submits a request and specifies people to be notified in the Defining Completion Options region everyone specified is sent a notification when the request completes If this profile option is set to Yes a URL is appended to the notification that enables them to view the request results online Concurrent Sequential Requests You can force your requests to run one at a time sequentially according to the requests start dates and times or allow them to run concurrently when their programs are compatible A value of Yes prevents your requests from running concurrently Requests run sequentially in the order they are Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager 5 9 Forms Web Other submitted A No value means your requests can run concurrently when their concurrent programs are compatible Sleep Time The duration of time in seconds that the ICM should wait before checking for new requests PMON Cycle Time The duration of time in seconds between process monitor checks checks for failed workers Queue Sizing Interval The duration of time in seconds between worker quantity checks checks for the number of active workers Click on ICM Environment to s
163. Content regions do not have a standalone property so there is no requirement for such a property setting for content regions The following region types can be portletized e advancedTable e bulletedList e cellFormat e contentContainer e defaultDoubleColumn e defaultFormStack e defaultSingleColumn e defaultStack e flowLayout footer e gantt e graphTable e hgrid e header e hideShow e hideShowHeader e labeledFieldLayout e messageComponentLayout 16 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Prerequisites to query e rowLayout e shuttle e stackLayout e subTabLayout e table e tableLayout e tree The Portlet Generator uses the materialized view FWK_PORTLET_GEN_MV to determine which regions are available for portletization This view must be refreshed periodically to include any new regions Oracle E Business Suite provides the Refresh Portlet Generator Materialized Views concurrent program FWKPRTMV to refresh the view Run the Refresh Portlet Generator Materialized Views program regularly to ensure that all eligible regions appear when you search for regions to portletize This program does not require any parameters Using the Portlet Generator You can access the Portlet Generator by two different methods e From the Oracle E Business Suite Navigator choose the Functional Administrator responsibility and select Home Then select the Portletization tab In this
164. CyberTrust To obtain a CA approved certificate it is necessary to generate a certificate request which includes details of the organization applying as well as the public key to be distributed this is then sent to the CA validated and returned Authorities may also require proof of ownership of the company applying for the certificate as well as proof of ownership of the domain name specified in the certificate request It is possible to generate a self signed certificate that can be used to test SSL operation Most browsers are configured to accept certificates from a number of recognized authorities Receiving a certificate from an organization other than one of these will generate a warning and the user will be prompted to accept or reject this certificate A self signed certificate will generate this warning Creating a self signed certificate The SSL module provides two utilities Oracle Wallet Manager and the Oracle Wallet Manager Command Line Interface orapki that can be used to create a self signed certificate for testing purposes Warning Self signed certificates are inherently insecure and should not be used in a environment where security is required In order to generate a self signed certificate perform the steps below using the Oracle Wallet Manager Command Line Interface Temporary SSL Environment Setup 2 8 Follow these steps for the temporary SSL environment setup 1 Source your environment 1 Log on to
165. D SFN D TOP patch 120 import fndfold lct name of file gt 1ldt FND FOLDERS To download folders by friendly names FND LOAD username password database 0 Y DOWNLOAD SFND TOP patch 120 import fndfold lct name of file gt 1ldt FND FOLDERS NAME lt name of folder gt Example FNDLOAD username password database 0 Y DOWNLOAD SFN NA D TOP patch 120 import fndfold lct name of file 1dt FND FOLDERS E Receipts Summary Basic Note The name of the folder is case sensitive To download folders by internal object names FND SFN OBJI LOAD username password database 0 Y DOWNLOAD D TOP patch 120 import fndfold lct name of file gt 1ldt FND FOLDERS ECT internal object name Example FND SFN OBJI Upload Example LOAD username password database 0 Y DOWNLOAD D TOP patch 120 import fndfold lct name of file 1dt FND FOLDERS ECT ARXRWRCT To upload folders FNDLOAD username password database 0 Y UPLOAD SFND TOP patch 120 import fndfold lct name of file gt ldt Loaders B 17 Lookups Configuration File Use the file aflvmlu lct for loading Lookup types and Lookups values The following table lists the entities sub entities if any and download parameters for this configuration file Entity Sub entities if any Download Parameters FND_LOOKUP_TYPE FND_LOOKUP_VALUE VIEW_APPSNAME LOOKUP_TYPE SECURITY_GROUP The entity definition is DEFI
166. D Exclude Program Oracle Project Accounting Expenditure Status Net Result The manager only reads requests to run programs belonging to the Oracle Project Accounting request type Reports run against the Oracle ID APPS2 excluding the program Expenditure Reports Related Topics Specializing Managers to run only certain programs page 7 17 Defining Combined Specialization Rules page 7 27 Differences Between Specialization and Combined Rules page 7 32 Concurrent Managers field help page 7 59 Combined Specialization Rules field help page 7 68 Differences Between Specialization and Combined Rules The primary difference between a specialization rule and a combined specialization rule is in how the use of multiple actions affects the outcome of the rule as described in the following table Rule Action Effect of Multiple Relationship to Actions Other Rules Specialization Rule INCLUDE With each additional Each rule establishes Include rule the an OR condition manager can read OR INCLUDE MORE REQUESTS 7 32 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Related Topics Rule Action Effect of Multiple Relationship to Actions Other Rules Specialization Rule EXCLUDE With each additional Each rule establishes Exclude rule the an AND condition manager is excluded AND EXCLUDE from and reads FEWER REQUESTS Combined Rule EXCLUDE With each additional Each line within a S
167. DATE_ACTIVE columns These value sets normally allow you to query disabled or outdated values but not enter them in new data For Standard Request Submission this means that a user would not normally be allowed to enter disabled values as report parameter values when submitting a report even if the report is a query only type report Restart on System Failure Use this option to indicate that this concurrent program should automatically be restarted when the concurrent manager is restored after a system failure NLS Compliant The NLS National Language Support box is checked if the program allows for a user to submit a request of this program that will reflect a language and territory that are different from the language and territory that the users are operating in For example users can enter orders in English in the United Kingdom using the date and number formats appropriate in the United Kingdom then generate invoices in German using the date and number formats appropriate to their German customers If this box is left blank then a user can associate any installed language with the request but the territory will default to the territory of the concurrent manager environment Note that this option should be set only by the developer of the program The program must be written as NLS Compliant to utilize this feature See Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide Output Preferences Enter the following Save Indicate whether t
168. Development Framework integration with 16 8 Application Development Framework ADF 19 1 Application environment variable 11 16 Application Server Security 2 15 applsys ORACLE ID 11 12 APPS accounts password 11 12 AppsDataSource 19 1 Assign default folders 11 20 Attribute defined D 6 Attributes assigning to objects D 8 defining D 9 Index AutoConfig 2 23 B BACKUP SCHEMA STATS procedure CBO 12 9 BACKUP TABLE STATS CBO 12 9 C Caching Framework C 1 Changing passwords with AFPASSWD utility 11 5 FNDCPASS utility 11 5 CHECK HISTOGRAM COLS procedure CBO 12 21 Common Gateway Interface CGI defined D 2 Common UNIX Printing System CUPS 9 28 CONCSUB 6 39 Concurrent Report Access Level profile obsolete 6 2 Concurrent managers 8 1 activating a manager 7 35 activating and other control states 7 51 assigning work shifts 7 62 controlling 7 35 7 50 8 6 defining 7 1 7 48 7 59 defining combined specialization rules 7 68 defining work shifts 7 66 disabling a work shift 7 3 Internal concurrent manager 7 39 operating system process ID number 7 56 Oracle process ID number 7 56 Index 1 PMON cycle 7 36 program libraries 7 2 reporting on work shifts 7 16 7 16 restarting a manager 7 35 role of application name in combined rules 7 69 role of application name when defining 7 59 sleep time 7 63 specializing Define Managers form 7 64 specializing managers 7
169. Directory feature for alternate files of forms and concurrent programs only Implementation To implement this feature set up a directory to hold the alternate files for your forms or concurrent programs To use an alternate file set the profile option FND Override Directory with the path for the directory containing the alternate file Important This profile option should usually be set at the User level only If you set FND Override Directory at the Site level for example you will affect all users at that site using the particular forms Using the Work Directory After you have created the alternate directory and set the profile option FND Override 16 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Directory with the appropriate value you can use files in that alternate directory In searching for the appropriate file path for a form or concurrent program Oracle E Business Suite will first check to see if the profile option FND Override Directory is set and if a given file exists in the specified directory If the above two conditions are true then the alternate file is used If the profile option is not set or if the necessary file does not exist in that directory then the default usual file path is used Note The Oracle E Business Suite Navigator caches the paths to files that have been successfully opened If the standard form has been opened then that form will be used for the remainder of the s
170. Do you need more examples If you find any errors or have any other suggestions for improvement then please tell us your name the name of the company who has licensed our products the title and part number of the documentation and the chapter section and page number if available Note Before sending us your comments you might like to check that you have the latest version of the document and if any concerns are already addressed To do this access the new Oracle E Business Suite Release Online Documentation CD available on My Oracle Support and www oracle com It contains the most current Documentation Library plus all documents revised or released recently Send your comments to us using the electronic mail address appsdoc_us oracle com Please give your name address electronic mail address and telephone number optional If you need assistance with Oracle software then please contact your support representative or Oracle Support Services If you require training or instruction in using Oracle software then please contact your Oracle local office and inquire about our Oracle University offerings A list of Oracle offices is available on our Web site at www oracle com XV Preface Intended Audience Welcome to Release 12 1 of the Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration This guide assumes you have a working knowledge of the following e The principles and customary practices of your busin
171. E Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite 12 23 13 Oracle E Business Suite and Oracle Real Application Clusters Introduction to Oracle Real Application Clusters This section gives an overview of the steps required to install Oracle E Business Suite in an environment that uses Oracle Real Application Clusters Oracle RAC For full details of using Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 1 with Oracle RAC see My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 745759 1 1 Oracle E Business Suite and Oracle Real Application Clusters Documentation Roadmap This document lists release specific documentation you should refer to according to the Oracle E Business Suite and Oracle Database releases you are using Prerequisites Several steps must be followed to prepare your system for utilizing Oracle RAC to support Oracle E Business Suite Key steps are as follows 1 Install requisite Oracle Clusterware 2 Install requisite Oracle Database software 3 Configure TNS listener 4 Create ASM instances diskgroups optional 5 Convert Oracle Database to Oracle RAC using rconfig 6 Perform post conversion steps 7 Enable AutoConfig on database tier Oracle E Business Suite and Oracle Real Application Clusters 13 1 8 Establish Applications environment for Oracle RAC 9 Configure Parallel Concurrent Processing Migrating to Oracle RAC Conversion of an Oracle database to utilize Oracle RAC is accomplished by running the rconfig utility aga
172. E like is null or is not null and SECURITY GROU CURITY GROU and ds LOOKU and SG and STANDARD Cs LOOKUP TYPE P TYPE Ei E S or P ID LT SI SECURITY GROUP is not null and SG SECURITY GROUP K order by 1 Boe P is null and SG S VIEW APPSNAME LT LOOKUP TYPE ECURITY GRO EY SECURITY GROUP like UP ID ER Fl LOOKUP_ TYP ECURITY GROUP KEY Download statements for child entities may reference any key attribute of the parent entity or any command line parameter UPLOAD Statement The UPLOAD statement is a SOL statement or PL SOL anonymous block which accepts file data and applies it to the database The statement is executed once for each record read from the data file Bind values in the statement are satisfied by attributes from the file data or command line parameters B 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Example Example Data File UPLOAD FND LOOKUP TYPE BEGI be if N gin UPLOAD MODE fnd lookup ty NLS t LOOKUP_TYE nen pes pkg TRANSLATE ROW DI i Bm x lookup type gt X Security group x view application x owner gt x meaning gt x description gt else fnd lookup types pkg LOAD ROW x 1l x view application ookup type gt X Security group x owner gt x m
173. ECURITY GROUP NAME NUMBER BASE RESOURCE CONSUMER GROUP VARCHAR2 30 BASE ROLLBACK SEGMENT VARCHAR2 30 BASE OPTIMIZER MODE VARCHAR2 30 END PROGRAM Loaders B 13 Flexfields Setup Data Configuration File Use the file afffload lct for loading flexfields data Warning Do not modify the data files you download using the flexfields configuration file You risk corrupting your flexfields data Oracle E Business Suite does not support any changes you make to the data files The configuration file includes the following entities e Value sets e Descriptive flexfields e Key flexfields Flexfield Value Sets The entity VALUE SET includes the following table details of table validated value sets and user exit details of special pair validated value sets It includes the values the normalized value hierarchy value qualifier values security rules security rule lines security rule usage details rollup groups or value hierarchies for the value set The key for this entity is FLEX VALUE SET NAME Example gt FNDLOAD apps apps 0 Y DOWNLOAD GFND admin import afffload lct out ldt VALUE SET FLEX VALUE SET NAME Loader Test gt FNDLOAD apps apps 0 Y UPLOAD GFND admin import afffload lct out ldt Descriptive Flexfields The entity DESC FLEX includes context column attribute columns context and segment details This entity references the VALUE SET for the value set used by a given SEGMENT
174. END_TOP APPLUSR Rename the files and globally replace SUBROUTINE_NAME with the name of your subroutine EXMAIN c is the skeleton used for your spawned programs EXPROG c is the skeleton used for your program s logic This module can be used to create a spawned or an immediate program For immediate programs you must include your copy of EXPROG c in a program library See below for information on building a program library You can use programs written with these skeleton programs as spawned or immediate concurrent programs Spawned programs run as a separate process while immediate programs run linked in with a concurrent manager Important Oracle provides information on immediate concurrent programs for backwards compatibility only We strongly recommend that you do not create any new immediate concurrent programs You should define your new Pro C concurrent program executables as spawned Naming Your Executable File Name your program s executable file exactly as you identified it in the Execution File field of the Concurrent Program Executable window Put your executable file in the APPLBIN directory under your application s TOP directory Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 35 Building Your Program Library Register a new program library with the Register Concurrent Program Library form and register all the programs you want to include in this library Then enter Yes in the Rebuild field and commit This creates a reques
175. FND STATS PURGE STAT HIST Purge from date VARCHAR2 Purge to date VARCHAR2 from req id Start Request ID to req id End Request ID purge from date Start Purge Date purge to date End Purge Date CHECK HISTOGRAM COLS Procedure For a given list of comma separated tables this procedure checks the data in all the leading columns of all the non unique indexes of those tables and determines if histograms need to be created for those columns The algorithm for this procedure is select decode floor sum tot max cnt FACTOR 0 YES NO HIST from select count col cnt count tot from tab sample PERCENT where col is not null group by col The decode statement determines whether a single value occupies 1 FACTOR or more of the sample PERCENT If sum cnt is very small a small non null sample the results may be inaccurate A count of at least 3000 is recommended The procedure is run from a SOL prompt after setting the server output on Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite 12 21 Syntax Parameters FND STATS CHECK HISTOGRAM COLS tablelist VARCHAR2 factor NUMBE BE R DEFAU percent NU degree NUMBE tablelist factor percent degree VERIFY STATS Procedure For a given list of comma separated tables or for a given schema name this procedure reports the statistics in the data dictionary tables for the tables indexes and histograms Syntax Parameters
176. Find Documents search fields 4 Enter your search criteria select Exclude documents already on a tree and click Find Files corresponding to the information you entered appear on the Documents tab of the upper right pane of the Help Builder window Select a document to view its properties in the Properties Pane 5 To add the file to the tree drag it from the Documents tab and drop it on the tree in the the position desired Note Files containing multiple named anchors appear multiple times Each Target will have its own listing Choose the Target that corresponds to the topic you want to add If the topic you want to add is not the header target of the file but a target within the document you must supply the special link syntax in the Data field of the Properties Pane For example the target name might appear in the Data field as ht_updown To link directly to this anchor you would add ht_updown to the end of the anchorname The resulting entry in the Data field will be eht updown ht updown For more information about this syntax see Linking Help Files page 10 5 Adding new nodes to a tree To add new nodes to a tree Oracle E Business Suite Help 10 13 1 Open the tree for editing page 10 11 2 Select the node beneath which you want to add a new node and click New Node on the toolbar or select New Node from the Edit Menu Note The New Node feature will add a node that is like the node selected For example
177. Formats in NLS Implementations The storage space for month name abbreviations is limited to 3 bytes For some language and character set combinations the month name abbreviation requires more than 3 bytes For this reason when a language is used in which any month name abbreviation exceeds 3 bytes in the current character set all month name abbreviations for that language are automatically replaced by numeric representations that conform to the 3 byte space limit The languages affected in a UTF8 implementation are Albanian Bulgarian Canadian French Croatian Czech German Greek Hungarian Icelandic Polish Russian Simplified Chinese Slovak Thai Traditional Chinese Turkish and Vietnamese The languages affected in their local character sets are Simplified Chinese Thai Traditional Chinese and Vietnamese Support for Calendars By default the calendar in the Date Picker in an application shows the Gregorian calendar However users can change their calendar display by setting profile options as described below The Hijrah and Thai Buddhist calendars are supported for Oracle Forms based and Oracle Application Framework applications as well as Oracle Workflow notifications Gantt charts and other graphs and Oracle XML Publisher reports The support is added as an output display format only Internal date object representation stays as for the Gregorian calendar Concurrent processing and descriptive flexfields also support
178. Forms based applications and HTML based applications Request sets are a quick and convenient way to run several reports and concurrent programs with predefined print options and parameter values Request sets group requests into stages that are submitted by the set The order in which the stages are submitted is determined by the status of previous stages Request sets can also be used by a System Administrator to customize access to reports and concurrent programs Using request sets a System Administrator can e grant users of a responsibility the ability to run selected reports and concurrent programs that are outside their request security group e grant access to requests and other concurrent programs on a user by user basis guarantee that reports in the set run with print options and parameter values that cannot be edited by end users As System Administrator you have privileges beyond those of your application users including a privileged version of the Request Set window Defining Request Sets You can run the same set of concurrent requests regularly by defining a request set and then submitting the request set from the Submit Requests form Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 5 As System Administrator you can include any Standard Request Submission report or concurrent program in the request sets you define When end users define a request set they can only select from reports and programs that belong to thei
179. GRAM_APPL_SHORT_NAME used with CONCURRENT_PROGRAM_NAME REQUEST SET NAME SET APPL SHORT NAME used with REQUEST SET NAME SUBMIT ONCE default N SUBMIT ONCE can be set to either Y or N N is the default SUBMIT ONCE is used in conjunction with CONCURRENT PROGRAM NAME or REQUEST SET NAME If SUBMIT ONCE is set to Y then the form will exit after the Submit button is clicked TITLE LOOKUP default N USE ORG ORG ID ORG NAME ORG CODE CHART OF ACCOUNTS ID five parameters If USE ORG is set to Y default is N then the Submit Requests form checks to see if the other ORG parameters are set If the parameters are not set then it attempts to Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 25 populate the parameters from the globals GLOBAL FND ORG ID GLOBAL FND ORG NAME etc If the globals have not yet been set the an ORG LOV shows and both the parameters and the globals are populated from the LOV Values sets should always reference the parameters not the globals e CHARI CHAR2 CHAR3 CHAR4 CHARS DATEI DATE2 DATE3 DATE4 DATES e NUMBERI NUMBER2 NUMBER3 NUMBER4 NUMBER5 In your value sets refer to these parameters as PARAMETER CHARI PARAMETER DATE 1 PARAMETER NUMBERI eU Customizing the Submit Requests Window using Codes You can give the Submit Requests Window a different title and define the form so that it allows user
180. Guide Configuration Delete from the Edit Menu 4 To change a prompt select the node enter the new prompt in the Prompt field of the Properties pane and click Apply Other node properties can be changed in a similar fashion Note If the same node appears elsewhere in the tree your changes will not appear there until you click the Reload button on the toolbar For one node to be the same as another the Node Key and Node Application of their parent nodes must be the same as well as all their own properties Their grandparent nodes and above can be different Creating a new navigation tree To create a new navigation tree 1 Choose File New The Root Node Properties window appears Enter information for the tree s root node and click Apply Add new nodes to the tree page 10 13 Add new help files to the tree page 10 12 Add nodes from other trees to the tree page 10 14 To view the new tree with context sensitive help enter its root as the Help Tree Root for some application responsibility or user To view it stand alone substitute its root in the root parameter at the end of your site s Oracle E Business Suite Help URL Include the application short name For example for a root named ROOT INV belonging to the Oracle Inventory product you would use root INV ROOT INV in the URL Help Builder Window Reference Field names and descriptions for the Help Builder window are given below Application Applicat
181. HP 256X line printer e EPOCH e EPSON FX1050 and DMTX1 e QMS PS 825 925 Define additional printer drivers if you have different types of printers or define additional print styles Printer Drivers Window Fields Driver Name The printer driver name must be unique for a given platform User Driver This user name is referenced by Oracle E Business Suite and must be unique for a given platform SRW Driver Enter the name of the Oracle Reports SRW printer driver if any that will be invoked by your printer driver Only Oracle Reports programs require this information Enter the entire path to the file or just the file name If you enter only the file name Oracle E Business Suite assumes the file is located in the F ND_TOP APPLREP directory Platform Select the platform for which the printer driver is defined Do not assign platform codes to printer drivers unless you have multiple drivers of the same name If it cannot find a specific platform code associated with a driver the concurrent manager will default to the driver with a null platform code Driver Method Region Command The printer driver executes within an operating system shell An example is the lpr command in UNIX Program The printer driver executes directly as a program not 9 54 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration through an operating system shell e Anexample is a C standalone program for printing e This method
182. Input is set to No the print command issued by the concurrent manager runs asynchronously That is the concurrent manager issues the command and does not wait for an operating system response Using Initialization and Reset Strings Use the initialization and reset strings to set and reset the orientation character set and line density for your printer Initialization and reset strings consist of control characters and escape sequences e A control character can be represented by followed by another character e An escape sequence can be identified by either e or Ve Important You see e for escape sequences defined using the 9 36 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Printer Drivers form because you cannot enter the backslash character into a form when your terminal definition uses backslash as the Menu key You see Ve for escape sequences originally defined in pdf files that were later upgraded in Oracle E Business Suite printer drivers For nonprintable characters you may represent their value in octal mode For example 0x26 is represented as 046 As an example if you need to represent the escape sequence L I6D 0x26 you can represent it as e L el6D 046 Using a Spool File When Spool File is set to No then a temporary file is created where the initialization and reset strings are inserted and the file is sent to the print command or program
183. LBACK lt plsql procedure specifies the procedure to execute once for each uploaded file The B 24 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration lt filenames gt Download files from the GFM procedure must accept file_id as its only parameter FNDGFU will call the specified procedure after each uploaded file passing in the new file identifier for example PLS_CALLBACK mypackage myprocedure CONTENT_TYPE lt mime_type gt specifies the default mime type to use for uploaded files not qualified by a content map CONTENT_MAP lt contentmapfile gt specifies a text file that maps filename suffixes onto content types The text file consists of lines of the form lt suffix gt lt mime_type gt where suffix is any string matched against the end of the filename For example txt text plain html text html and ps application postscript Specifies the files to upload Any number of files may be uploaded To download a file using the FNDGFU utility use the following syntax FNDGFU lt logon gt DOWNLOAD lt fileid gt LINE BREAKS lt mode gt filename where lt logon gt lt fileid gt lt mode gt filename Example of FNDGFU Upload Specifies a standard Oracle logon string of the form username password To specify a particular database append an sign and the database SID database Specifies the identifier of the large object LOB to download Specifie
184. NE FND LOOKUP TY Fl i rg KEY VIEW APPSNAMI VARCHAR2 50 KEY LOOKUP TYPE VARCHAR2 30 CTX APPLICATION SHORT NAME VARCHAR2 50 BASE CUSTOMIZATION LEVEL VARCHAR2 1 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 6 TRANS MEANING VARCHAR2 80 TRANS DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 240 DEFINE FND LOOKUP VALUE KEY OOKUP CODE VARCHAR2 30 BASE ENABLED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE START DATE ACTIVE VARCHAR2 10 BASE END DATE ACTIVE VARCHAR2 10 BASE TERRITORY CODE VARCHAR2 2 BASE TAG VARCHAR2 30 BASE ATTRIBUTE CATEGORY VARCHAR2 30 BASE ATTRIBUTE1 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE2 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTES3 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE4 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTES VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE6 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE7 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTES8 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE9 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE10 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE11 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE12 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE13 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE14 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE15 VARCHAR2 150 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 6 TRANS MEANING VARCHAR2 80 TRANS DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 240 END FND LOOKUP VALUE ti z D FND LOOKUP TYPE B 18 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Messages Configuration File Use the file
185. NOSTICS FND Diagnostics TRACE Diagnostics _TRACE Trace NO TRACE No Trace REGULAR Regular Trace BINDS Trace with Binds WAITS Trace with Waits FND DIAGNOSTICS VALUES FND DIAGNOSTICS VALUES RO FND DIAGNOSTICS CUSTOM FND Diagnostics Values FND Diagnostics Values Read Only FND Diagnostics Custom BINDS AND W AITS PLSOL PROFILI NG PROPERTIES MENU ITEM FOLDER PROPERTIES MENU ITEM FOLDER CUSTOM CODE ME NU NORMAL OFF CORE SHOW EVENTS Trace with Binds and Waits PL SQL Profiling Diagnostics Properties tem Folder Diagnostics Properties tem Folder Diagnostics Custom Code Normal Off Core Code Only Show Custom Events Controlling Access to the Oracle Forms based Applications Diagnostics Menu F 3 Securing Function Name Securing Function User Friendly Name Internal Menu Name Runtime Menu Name FND_DIAGNOSTICS _PERSONALIZE FND_DIAGNOSTICS _PERSONALIZE_RO FND Diagnostics Personalize FND Diagnostics Personalize Read Only CUSTOM_CODE_ME NU CUSTOMIZE CUSTOM_CODE_ME NU CUSTOMIZE Diagnostics Custom Code Personalize Diagnostics Custom Code Personalize The following table lists seeded permission sets Permission Set Name Permission Set Code Permissions Assigned FND Diagnostics Examine Menu FND Diagnostics Examine Rea
186. NT METHOD CODE VARCHAR2 1 BASE QUEUE CONTROL FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE QUEUE METHOD CODE VARCHAR2 1 BASE REQUEST SET FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE ENABLED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE PRINT FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE RUN ALONE FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE SRS FLAG VARCHAR2 1 TRANS DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 240 BASE CLASS APPLICATION VARCHAR2 50 BASE CONCURRENT CLASS NAME VARCHAR2 30 BASE EXECUTION OPTIONS VARCHAR2 250 BASE SAVE OUTPUT FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE REQUIRED STYLE VARCHAR2 1 BASE OUTPUT PRINT STYLE VARCHAR2 30 BASE PRINTER NAME VARCHAR2 30 BASE MINIMUM WIDTH VARCHAR2 50 BASE MINIMUM LENGTH VARCHAR2 50 BASE REQUEST PRIORITY VARCHAR2 50 BASE ATTRIBUTE CATEGORY VARCHAR2 30 BASE ATTRIBUTE1 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE2 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE3 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTEA VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTES VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE6 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE7 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTES8 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE9 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE10 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE11 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE12 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE13 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE14 VARCHAR2 150 BASE ATTRIBUTE15 VARCHAR2 150 BASE OUTPUT FILE TYPE VARCHAR2 4 BASE RESTART VARCHAR2 1 BASE NLS COMPLIANT VARCHAR2 1 BASE CD PARAMETER VARCHAR2 240 BASE INCREMENT PROC VARCHAR2 61 BASE S EXECUTABLE APPLICATION VARCHAR2 50 BASE 1S EXECUTABLE NAME VARCHAR2 50 BASE ENABLE TIME STATISTICS VARCHAR2 1 BASE S
187. ON CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 END ENTRY END MENU Message Dictionary Generator The Message Dictionary Generator FNDMDGEN is a concurrent program that generates binary runtime files from the database for Oracle E Business Suite Message Dictionary messages The following sections describe the operation of the Message Dictionary Generator For more information on using the Message Dictionary and creating messages see the Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide Note Use the Generic Loader and corresponding configuration file for uploading and downloading message text files into a database Message Repositories Message information is stored in two different repositories each of which has its own B 22 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Database Runtime Usage Wildcards format and serves a specific need Following is a description for each of the message repositories including the message attributes they store The FND NEW MESSAGES table in the database stores all Oracle E Business Suite messages for all languages Database messages are directly used only by the stored procedure Message Dictionary API Database message data can be edited using the Messages form Database Attributes are APPLICATION LANGUAGE NAME NUMBER TEXT DESCRIPTION A runtime binary file stores the messages for a single application and a single language The file is optimized for rapid lookup o
188. ORACLE Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Release 12 1 Part No E12893 04 June 2010 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Release 12 1 Part No E12893 04 Copyright 1994 2010 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved Primary Author Mildred Wang Robert Farrington Contributing Author Ahmed Alomari George Buzsaki Anne Carlson Steve Carter Steven Chan Siu Chang Lauren Cohn Jennifer Collins Ivo Dujmovic Elanchelvan Elango Osama Elkady Mark Fisher Clara Jaeckel Ramkarthik Kalyanasundaram Takafumi Kamiya Senthil Madhappan Teresa Mak Revathy Narasimhan Sarita Nori Mladena Novakovic Muhannad Obeidat Gursat Olgun Richard Ou Lisa Parekh Jan Smith Dana Spradley Seth Stafford Susan Stratton Leslie Studdard Suchithra Upadhyayula Venkat Vengala Mark Warren Aaron Weisberg Sara Woodhull Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse
189. OUT typically out directory or directories APPLCSF common directory for log and output files APPLTMP temporary directory REPORTS60 TMP temporary directory for Oracle Reports files e Write privilege for these directories tmp and usr tmp You can verify that a login has the necessary privileges on a certain directory with this command 8 10 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Printing ls ld lt directory Here is an example ls ld usr tmp drwxrwxrwx 3 root 22880 Mar 10 11 05 usr tmp The three letters marked in the sample response indicate that all users have read write and execute privilege for the directory This section contains printer reference material including information on how to create and register executable printing programs To register printers in the Printers window of Oracle E Business Suite your Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator needs to know each printer s operating system name Your installation update tells you where to find the printer names for your platform Installation updates may also contain other information on setting up your printers Printing for UNIX This section contains printer reference material specific to the UNIX operating system including information on how to create and register executable printing programs Standard Print Subroutine The standard printing subroutine that you can select in the Printer Drivers form u
190. Oracle RAC To take full advantage of Parallel Concurrent Processing PCP you will need to have more than one Concurrent Processing node in your environment If you do not have more than one node refer to My Oracle Support for details of cloning the application tier 13 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration The key steps in configuring concurrent parallel processing are as follows 1 Configure PCP on all concurrent processing nodes 2 Setup transaction managers 3 Setup load balancing on concurrent processing nodes and run AutoConfig Related Topics Overview of Parallel Concurrent Processing page 7 43 Managing Parallel Concurrent Processing page 7 47 Oracle E Business Suite and Oracle Real Application Clusters 13 3 14 Document Sequences What is a Document Sequence A document sequence uniquely numbers documents generated by an Oracle E Business Suite product Using Oracle E Business Suite you initiate a transaction by entering data through a form and generating a document for example an invoice A document sequence generates an audit trail that identifies the application that created the transaction for example Oracle Receivables and the original document that was generated for example invoice number 1234 Document sequences can provide proof of completeness For example document sequences can be used to account for every transaction even transactions that fail Documen
191. P UPDATE ALLOWED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE USER ENABLED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE USER UPDATE ALLOWED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE START DATE ACTIVE VARCHAR2 11 BASE END DATE ACTIVE VARCHAR2 11 BASE SQL VALIDATIO VARCHAR2 2000 DEFINE FND PROFILE OPTION VALUES KEY LEVEL VARCHAR2 50 KEY LEVEL VALUE VARCHAR2 100 KEY LEVEL VALUE APP VARCHAR2 50 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 BASE PROFILE OPTION VALUE VARCHAR2 240 END FND PROFILE OPTION VALUES END PROFILE Request Groups Configuration File Use the file afcpreqg lct for loading request group data The following table lists the entities sub entities if any and download parameters for this configuration file B 20 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Entity Sub entities if any Download Parameters REQUEST_GROUP REQUEST_GROUP_ UNIT REQUEST_GROUP_NAME APPLICATION_SHORT_NA ME The entity definition is DEFINE REQUEST GROUP KEY REQUEST GROUP NAME VARCHAR2 30 KEY APPLICATION SHORT NAME VARCHAR2 50 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 TRANS DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 800 BASE REQUEST GROUP CODE VARCHAR2 30 END REQUEST GROUP Security Information Configuration File Use the file afsload lct for downloading and uploading forms functions menus and menu entries The following table lists the entities sub entities if any and download parameters for this configuration file
192. Posting program used to post journal entries If the Posting program s incompatibility with other Oracle E Business Suite concurrent programs were not enforced other financial reports running simultaneously with the Posting program could contain incorrect account balance information Logical databases ensure that this does not happen Defining Logical Databases The installation process automatically defines logical databases and assigns ORACLE schemas to them A Standard logical database can be assigned to every Oracle E Business Suite product so that every concurrent program if incompatible with any other program does not run concurrently with that program regardless of which ORACLE schema those two programs connect to Assigning every ORACLE schema to the same e g Standard logical database is a fail safe method of enforcing program incompatibility rules You must define new logical databases only if you build a custom application whose data do not interact with data found in existing logical databases As a general rule you should define a logical database for each custom application and assign that application s ORACLE schema s to the corresponding logical database However if a custom application s data interacts with another application s data you should assign the two applications ORACLE schemas to the same logical database Registering your custom application s tables ensures that the table names appear as QuickPick
193. Programs s esses 7 17 Introduction to Specialization Rules sse 7 17 Defining Specialization Rules z uren bierki d atiina anean Taa aa Haea eaii TEE EEA 7 17 Examples Using Specialization Rules sss 7 22 Defining Combined Specialization Rules sss 7 27 Using Combined Rules ze ceptis tete tet ae Oa ea Eaa Ea aaa araa Aat 7 29 Differences Between Specialization and Combined Rules sss 7 32 Grouping Programs by Request Type sssssssssssee eee ne nennen nre 7 33 Controlling Concurrent Managers osina nanana iaiia eme enne enne ens 7 35 Manager States 7 35 Controlling Managers from the Administer Managers form sss 7 37 Controlling the Internal Concurrent Manager from the Operating System 7 39 Overview of Parallel Concurrent Processing sssssessessee eee eee 7 43 What is Parallel Concurrent Processing sssssssssessseeeeenee ee 7 43 Parallel Concurrent Processing Environments sss 7 44 How Parallel Concurrent Processing Works 7 45 Managing Parallel Concurrent Processing sss eee 1 47 Defining Concurrent Managers ssssssssseseeeeeeneeen enn ener 7 48 Administering Concurrent Managers 7 48 Administer Concurrent Managers Window sss eee 7 50 Administer Concurrent Manag
194. Programs and Requests 6 37 Instead of the Oracle username and password you can use an Oracle E Business Suite username and password if the corresponding user has the System Administrator responsibility The program name must be uppercase and the same name that you entered in the Execution File field of the Concurrent Program Executable window The 0 and Y arguments are required If any of your program specific parameters includes spaces enclose that parameter in double quotes If a parameter contains a literal double quote precede that mark with a backslash V Host Language Concurrent Programs Name your program lt name gt prog where lt name gt is the value you enter in the Execution File field of the Concurrent Executable window Then make a symbolic link using your execution file name without an extension to fndcpesr which is located in the FND_TOP APPLBIN directory Put your executable file and the linked file in the APPLBIN directory under your application s TOP directory For example name your custom shell script CUSTOM prog Create a symbolic link to fndcpesr named CUSTOM Place both files in your APPLBIN directory Create your concurrent program executable using the execution file CUSTOM Host Program Parameters The concurrent manager running your program puts your program name in 0 the four arguments orauser pwd userid username and request id in 1 to 4 and your program specific parameters in 5 and beyon
195. RI 41 S Combined Specialization Rules Combined Rule Application Description Specialization Rules Include Exclude Application Name CE nares CNN E2 L_ PS iii TY ey Sa Ee rE pA d d _ a IEEE SEE Ce re Define rules identifying which requests a concurrent manager can read With the rules you define here you may specialize the function of a concurrent manager Using this window you can define several Include and Exclude statements each referred to as a specialization line and combine the lines into a single specialization rule referred to as a Combined Rule Unlike the individual rules you define using the Specialization Rules window from within the Concurrent Managers window the combined rules you define here differ in two ways e You can combine Include and Exclude statements This enables you to identify very specific requests for running concurrent programs e Within a combined rule using multiple Include statements restricts a concurrent manager more With individual rules you define using the Specialization Rules window within the Concurrent Managers window the more Include rules you define the less restricted a manager becomes See Concurrent Managers page 7 59 7 68 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Combined Specialization Rules Block Application Together
196. Reference APPS TS SEED Reference and setup data and indexes Interface APPS TS INTERFACE Interface and temporary data and indexes Summary APPS TS SUMMARY Summary management objects such as materialized views fact tables and other objects that record summary information Nologging APPS TS NOLOGGING Materialized views not used for summary management and temporary objects 3 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Tablespace Type Tablespace Name Content Advanced Queuing AQ Media Archive Undo Temp System APPS_TS_QUEUES APPS_TS_MEDIA APPS_TS_ARCHIVE UNDO TEMP SYSTEM Advanced Queuing and dependent tables and indexes Multimedia objects such as text video sound graphics and spatial data Tables that contain archived purge related data Automatic Undo Management AUM tablespace UNDO segments are identical to ROLLBACK segments when AUM is enabled Temporary tablespace for global temporary table sorts and hash joins System tablespace used by the Oracle Database Tablespace Classification OATM relies on specific explicit and implicit classification rules that are determined based on storage considerations for the object type in question The Oracle Tablespace Migration Utility migrates objects based on these rules The following table contains rules for implicit classifications that are applied in OATM based on object types O
197. S are handled by the Communication Services component of AS The Oracle HTTP Server powered by Apache Web Server technology accepts and processes these requests The Apache technology adopted by Oracle HTTP Server provides an extremely stable scalable and extensible platform on which to deploy web based applications The modular design of the Apache server allows for extension of the capabilities of the Oracle HTTP Server In addition to the standard Apache modules often referred to as modules or simply mods a number of Oracle specific modules are provided along with an extension to the functionality of several standard modules These modules include mod ssl This module provides secure listener communications using an Oracle provided encryption mechanism using 128 bit Secure Sockets Layer SSL The mod ossl module replaces mod ssl In contrast to the OpenSSL module mod ossl is based on the Oracle implementation of SSL which supports SSL version 3 and uses the Oracle Wallet Manager for Certificate Management The Apache HTTP Server SSL configuration file ssl conf is located in INST TOP ora 10 1 3 Apache Apache conf directory mod oc4j This module routes all servlet requests to the Apache OC4J servlet engine embedded within Oracle HTTP Server Servlets can be shared across multiple zones 2 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration e mod_perl This module forwards Perl requests to the Perl Inte
198. S2 Program Oracle Payables No entry for Name field The manager reads requests to run concurrent programs that connect to any Oracle ID except programs that connect to Oracle ID APPS2 and programs for the application Oracle Payables Multiple rules may not always be necessary or the number or complexity of rules can be simplified Consider the example below Include OR Include Net Result Exclude rules override Include rules Include AND Exclude Program Oracle Sales and Marketing No entry for Name field Request Type Sales Forecasts The manager only reads requests to run concurrent programs for the application Oracle Sales and Marketing or programs whose request type is Sales Forecasts In this example both rules are not necessary when programs belonging to the request type Sales Forecasts all connect to the Oracle ID OSM There is no need for the second Type Include rule Program Oracle Payables No entry for Name field Program Oracle Payables Invoice Aging Report Defining Concurrent Managers 7 23 Net Result The manager reads all requests for concurrent programs for the application Oracle Payables but does not read requests to run the Oracle Payables program Invoice Aging Report Include Program Signon Audit Forms AND Exclude Request Type Signon Audit Reports Net Result If the System Administrator program Signon Audit Forms belongs to the Request Type Signon A
199. SMigration is executed to migrate all the tables with LONG and LONG RAW columns along with their indexes A log file for the migration of tables with LONG is generated as fndmlong lt timestamp gt log 3 20 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 3 A sequential process is started that executes the script fndemseq sql to move all the objects generated with execution mode as sequential A log file for the sequential process is generated as fndemseg lt timestamp gt log 4 Multiple processes are started to execute the SQL script fndemcmd sql to migrate the objects generated with execution mode as parallel A log file is generated as fndemcmd lt timestamp gt log Step 5 Run Migration Status Report Select Step 5 Run Migration Status Report to run progress and error reports on the migration process The Run Migration Status Report menu contains the following options 1 Run Migration Status Report 2 Run Migration Error Report Option 1 Run Migration Status Report Select Option 1 to generate a report containing the number of successfully migrated objects objects in error if any and the percentage of completion per schema or for all the schemas and a breakdown of the objects per object type This option prompts you to enter the schema name and generates report fndtrep8 txt Example Enter the Schema name lt HR gt Option 2 Run Migration Error Report Select Option 2 to generate a report t
200. STRUN R2 default GATHER default 10 R2 default Y FND STATS GATHER SCHEMA STATISTICS schemaname VARCHAR2 stimate percent N UMBER DEFAULT NUL p degree NUMBER DEFAULT NULL internal flag NUMBER DEFAULT NULL request id NUMBER DEFAULT NULL hmode VARCHAR2 DEFAULT LASTRUN options in VARCHAR2 DEFAULT GATHER modpercent NUMBER DEFAULT 10 invalidate VARCHAR2 DEFAULT Y schemaname estimate percent degree internal flag errors Request id Schema to analyze ALL means all Oracle E Business Suite schemas The sampling percentage If a value is not provided the default value of 10 is used The valid range is from 0 to 100 The degree of parallelism to be used for gathering statistics If a degree is not provided it defaults to the minimum of parallel max servers and cpu count The backup flag indicates whether to backup statistics Set this flag to BACKUP if you wish to back up the current statistics into the FND STATTAB table If NOBACKUP is used then the GATHER SCHEMA STATS procedure will not backup the current statistics This way the GATHER SCHEMA STATS procedure will run faster User defined Type for holding the Error messages A request id can be provided to identify the history records for a given statistics gathering run This parameter is also used for providing restart a
201. Set the Spool File to Yes only if the print program creates its own temporary file This option is recommended when using the Program driver method and the print program creates its own temporary file This option helps to reduce the creation of temporary files since the concurrent manager will not create a temporary file when Spool File is set to Yes When Spool File is set to Yes it is recommended that the e Standard Input be set to No e nitialization and reset fields are null This option does not apply to the Subroutine driver method Creating Custom SRW Drivers SRW drivers are read by Oracle Reports when a report is generated and insert control characters that tell the destination printer where to set page breaks and which characters to format as bold or underlined SRW drivers only pertain to Oracle Reports output files An SRW driver is used during the generation of a report A printer driver is used when the completed output file is sent to the printer SRW drivers are designed for the DEC LNO03 printer and all printers that understand the same control characters as the LNO3 Printers 9 37 Location and Content of SRW Driver Files SRW driver files reside in FND_TOP APPLREP and have the file extension prt The predefined SRW file names are e A prt e Pprt e Lprt e PD prt e W prt Creating a Custom SRW Driver You can customize any of the SRW driver files to support a printer type that is not correc
202. System Administrator s Guide Configuration request set on hold and effectively control the execution of request set stages The Hold and Remove Hold buttons are available on the OAM View Running Requests page To hold a request set simply select the request set and click the Hold button Click Remove Hold when you want the request set to continue executing Request Sets as Concurrent Programs When you define a request set or a stage within a request set that allows incompatibilities a concurrent program is created to run the requests in your request set according to the instructions you enter All concurrent programs that run request sets are titled Request Set lt name of request set gt and programs that run request set stages are titled Request Set Stage lt name of request set stage gt In the Concurrent Programs form to query request set or request set stage concurrent programs on the basis of a program s name enter the following in the Name field Request Set or Request Set Stage before the name of the concurrent program e Request Set or Request Set Stage to perform a query on all request set programs Request set and request set stage concurrent programs create log files documenting the execution of the request set or stage Each report or concurrent program within a request set or stage also creates its own log file Note The recorded actual start time for a request is the start time the request s status is
203. T PUT LINE del rows rows deleted D Viewing Log Messages This section summarizes the different user interfaces that can be used to view and work with log messages and how to access log messages from each UI CRM System Administrator Console Navigate to Settings System Debug Logging Oracle Application Framework Pages When working in Oracle Application Framework pages you can use the following procedure to view log messages 1 Pages based on the Oracle Application Framework have a global button labeled Diagnostics Click this button to open a window where you can choose Show Log Note that this Diagnostics global button does not refer to the Diagnostics feature in Oracle Applications Manager that enables management and execution of diagnostic tests Select Show Log to open the Logs page within Oracle Applications Manager The Logs page is part of the System Alerts and Metrics feature Note For the Diagnostics global button to be visible the profile option FND DIAGNOSTICS must be set to YES Oracle Applications Manager The Logging features in Oracle Applications Manager can be accessed in the following ways From the global Diagnostics button in Oracle Application Framework select Show Log Using the System Administration responsibility navigate to Oracle Applications Manager gt Logs From the Oracle Applications Manager Site Map navigate to Monitoring gt Logs Under Current Activity Logg
204. VARCHAR2 61 BASE SET OF BOOKS CONTEXT FIELD VARCHAR2 61 BASE BUSINESS UNIT CONTEXT FIELD VARCHAR2 61 BASE CONTEXT1 FIELD VARCHAR2 61 BASE CONTEXT2 FIELD VARCHAR2 61 BASE CONTEXT3 FIELD VARCHAR2 61 DEFINE FND ATTACHMENT BLK ENTITIES KEY BLK ENTITY REFERENCES FND DOCUMENT ENTITIES BASE DISPLAY METHOD VARCHAR2 1 BASE INCLUDE IN INDICATOR FLAG VARCHAR2 1 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 BASE PK1 FIELD VARCHAR2 61 BASE PK2 FIELD VARCHAR2 61 BASE PK3 FIELD VARCHAR2 61 BASE PK4 FIELD VARCHAR2 61 BASE PK5 FIELD VARCHAR2 61 BASE SQL STATEMENT VARCHAR2 2000 BASE INDICATOR IN VIEW FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE QUERY PERMISSION TYPE VARCHAR2 1 BASE INSERT PERMISSION TYPE VARCHAR2 1 BASE UPDATE PERMISSION TYPE VARCHAR2 1 BASE DELETE PERMISSION TYPE VARCHAR2 1 BASE CONDITION FIELD VARCHAR2 61 BASE CONDITION OPERATOR VARCHAR2 50 BASE CONDITION VALUEl VARCHAR2 100 BASE CONDITION VALUE2 VARCHAR2 100 END FND ATTACHMENT BLK ENTITIES END FND ATTACHMENT BLOCKS DEFINE FND DOC CATEGORY USAGES KEY CATEGORY USAGE REFERENCES FND DOCUMENT CATEGORIES BASE ENABLED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 END FND_DOC_CATEGORY_USAGES END FND_ATTACHMENT FUNCTIONS DEFINE FND DOCUMENT ENTITIES KE DATA OBJECT CODE VARCHAR2 30 BASE APP SHORT NAME VARCHAR2 50 BASE TABLE NAME VARCHAR2 30 BASE ENTITY NAME VARCHAR2 40 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 BASE PK1 COLUMN VARCHAR2 30 BASE PK2 COLUMN VARCHAR2 30 BASE PK3 COLUMN VARCHAR2
205. X Warning Always start the concurrent managers from the applmgr login if you are using parallel concurrent processing on multiple nodes This section describes directory privileges for UNIX Setting the startmgr User ID with setuid in UNIX To ensure that startmgr inherits the applmgr directory privileges you can use the UNIX setuid facility to set startmgr to the applmgr login s UNIX user ID The concurrent managers then inherit the applmgr privileges no matter which login runs startmgr This allows you to start or restart concurrent managers using the Administer Concurrent Managers form regardless of the originating UNIX login Note that you must reset the user ID with setuid if you modify or copy startmgr Refer to your online UNIX documentation for information on setuid Note The use of the setuid command may cause unexpected behavior on certain platforms that employ dynamic linking of libraries Please refer to the Oracle E Business Suite Installation Update for your platform for any information regarding this problem Directory Privileges for Logins other than applmgr If you do not set the startmgr script to the applmgr user ID and you start the managers from a login other than applmgr that login needs to have these privileges e Read and execute privileges on all Oracle E Business Suite directories e Write privilege for all directories defined by the following variables APPLLOG typically log directory or directories APPL
206. a NR 4 2 Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager sssssssss eee 5 1 Oracle Applications Manager Setup ssssssssssssssse eee eee eene enne 5 2 The Site Map eere eie ee oe e ev vede rides apg a Ur c deve a eode 5 4 Config ration Overview dave deditque ee eine ei ade diag ek bee e pred does 5 8 Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 1 Controlling Access to Concurrent Programs and Limiting Active Requests for a User 6 2 Organizing Programs into Request Sets sssssssssssssssee eee 6 5 Defining Requestetss 2 n e E eot c ele os et eps teer 6 5 Request Sets and OWners 5d ee De eel sedan ela eae did ent 6 17 System Administrator Request Set Privileges sess 6 18 Regiiest Set Incompatibilities 2 ei time EUR dd epe Regit 6 19 Sharing Parameters in a Request Set 6 20 Request Sets Report ee eecnen io ee epe oie e 6 21 Report Parameters sss eene enne nren a aa A aa enn nenne 6 22 Report Headings 36e ect pt dose petiti et edt tet oett 6 22 Organizing Programs into Request Groups ssssssssseeee eee eene 6 22 Request Security Groups epii ect eue pee tefte tb ee pe e de Pub ore eaa iei E 6 23 Using Codes with Request Groups sss een rennen enne 6 23 Customizing the Submit Requests Window sss 6 24 Customizing
207. a manager to only running programs associated with certain applications go to the Rules section The combination of an application and the name you define for your manager uniquely identifies the manager Enter the number of requests your manager remembers each time it reads which requests to run For example if a manager s work shift has 1 target process and a cache value of 3 it will read three requests and try to run those three requests before reading any new requests Tip Enter a value of 1 when defining a manager that runs long time consuming jobs and a value of 3 or 4 for managers that run small quick jobs Select a library of immediate concurrent programs to make available to your manager Your manager can only run immediate concurrent programs that are registered in the selected program library Concurrent managers can run only those immediate concurrent programs listed in their program library They can also run concurrent programs that use any other type of concurrent program executable Optionally enter the resource consumer group for this manager Use the Rules section to specialize your manager to run only certain kinds of requests Without specialization rules a manager accepts requests to start any concurrent program A listing of available rules is displayed Check the Include check box for a rule to include it The following information is also given for each rule e Type e Application Defining Concurrent
208. aaea tda akaitia D 8 Dehinitig uc MN D 9 D firnitige Unique Keys ceti dan pede ge adea de esce oT e iet Maciel esee uit D 10 Defining Foreign Keys ete te dee atte a e eode E EA D 10 Defining Regions ceo ee tee ato UTILIS eie nei D 11 Creating Region Item Ss oni ea nennen nnne nennen enne D 12 E Time Zone Support User Preferred Time Zones eite edere te ba eir ra intei e a dede dn E 1 Time Zone Concepts sss nennen ennt nnne a e enne nne nnns E 1 Upgrade Considerations usce ne eed ead esee Ide tbi e beds E 2 Implementation Details eee recede eto eee EL t pe ee e eee aet E 3 F Controlling Access to the Oracle Forms based Applications Diagnostics Menu Controlling Access to the Oracle Forms based Applications Diagnostics Menu F 1 Index xiii Send Us Your Comments Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Release 12 1 Part No E12893 04 Oracle welcomes customers comments and suggestions on the quality and usefulness of this document Your feedback is important and helps us to best meet your needs as a user of our products For example e Are the implementation steps correct and complete e Did you understand the context of the procedures e Did you find any errors in the information e Does the structure of the information help you with your tasks e Do you need different information or graphics If so where and in what format e Are the examples correct
209. acle E Business Suite Sign On Restart the application tier Apache services using the adapcct1 sh script in the ADMIN_SCRIPTS_HOME directory Ensure that Apache can startup successfully and that you successfully get an SSL connection to the default Apache banner screen using https lt host domain gt lt SSL_port gt where lt host domain gt is the fully qualified name of the machine running Apache and lt SSL_port gt is the SSL port number defined in ssl conf Once you have signed on to Oracle E Business Suite select a responsibility and process that will launch a Forms based application For example System Administrator responsibility and the Define User process Note For further details of using SSL see My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 376700 1 Enabling SSL with Oracle Application Server 10g and E Business Suite Release 12 and Knowledge Document 376694 1 Using the Oracle Wallet Manager Command Line Interface with Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 2 10 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration AdminAppServer Utility Important The following details are provided for reference only You should not need to carry out manual maintenance on dbc files as they are managed by AutoConfig which runs AdminAppServer automatically See Using AutoConfig to Manage System Configurations with Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 Knowledge Document 387859 1 on My Oracle Support Because Release 12 is dep
210. additional information e Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance e Oracle Workflow Administrator s Guide e Oracle E Business Suite Maintenance Procedures e Oracle E Business Suite Maintenance Utilities e Oracle E Business Suite Patching Procedures Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager 5 1 The Service Fulfillment Manager may optionally be installed For more information see http www oracle com appsnet products service index htm Function Security and Oracle Applications Manager Oracle Applications Manager uses with Oracle Application Object Library s function security model You can create custom responsibilities and menus to control access to specific OAM features These features can thus be directly available from the Oracle E Business Suite Home Page Oracle Applications Manager Setup Oracle Applications Manager OAM allows you to customize how certain components are monitored and how metrics are collected Navigation Setup global icon The Dashboard Setup page displays a summary of data collection for metrics and services For each metric you can see whether collection is enabled and whether you have alerting enabled for the metric If alerting is enabled you see the condition which must be met for an alert to be raised To update the setup for the data collection use the Dashboard Setup Wizard MetaLink Credentials You maintain your My Oracle Support formerly OracleMetaLink use
211. afmdmsg Ict for uploading and downloading messages in a database Use the Generic Loader and afmdmsg lct for transferring messages between databases only Use the Message Dictionary Generator for moving messages into binary runtime files and readable text files See Message Dictionary Generator page B 22 The following table lists the entities sub entities if any and download parameters for this configuration file Entity Sub entities if any Download Parameters FND NEW MESSAGES APPLICATION SHORT NA ME MESSAGE NAME The entity definition is Note to change the language you are downloading set the environment variable NLS_LANG before running the loader DEFINE FND NEW MESSAGES KEY APPLICATION SHORT NAME KEY ESSAGE NAME CTX OWNER CTX ESSAGE NUMBER TRANS MESSAGE TEXT CTX DESCRIPTIO CTX TYPE CTX AX LENGTH END FND NEW MESSAGES VARC VARC VARC VARC VARC VARC VARC NUMBE HAR2 50 HAR2 30 HAR2 7 HAR2 50 HAR2 2000 HAR2 240 HAR2 30 ER Profile Options and Profile Values Configuration File Use the file afscprof lct for loading profile options and profile values Note For downloading in previous releases a NULL profile option value in the database downloaded as a value of NULL now if a NULL value exists in the database nothing is downloaded for it For uploading in previous release
212. age Function This button is only enabled when you select Request Set Stage Function as your Execution Method Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 63 Stage Function Parameters Window B Oracle Applications File Edit View Fo Jar Tools Window Help ORACLE ER SM DIEA el 451 Js 2 Ez Stage Function Parameters Parameter Short Name Description List the Parameters that your custom Stage Function uses Parameter Enter a name for the Parameter This name will be displayed in the Stage Functions Parameter window of the Request Set form Short Name Enter a short name that will be used by the function to reference the parameter Related Topics Concurrent Programs page 6 65 6 64 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Concurrent Programs Window Prerequisites Concurrent Programs Program M Enabled Short Name Application Description Executable Name Options Method Priority Request Output Type Format Text M Incrementor M Save C MLS Function M Print Columns v Use in SRS L Allow Disabled Values Rows Run Alone M Restart on System Failure Style Enable Trace v NLS Compliant Style Required Printer Business Events _ Request Submitted Post Processing Ended Request On Hold Request Running L Program Completed Request Completed Request Resumed L Post Processing Started Copy to Incompatibilities Para
213. ager A combined rule combines more than one action to generate a single rule Each action is defined by one line within the rule Combining the lines or individual actions defines the overall combined rule Tip You can use a combined specialization rule as one of many rules to specialize a manager Using single Exclude and Include actions A single Exclude action within a combined rule acts the same way as a single Exclude action that defines a specialization rule Both instruct a manager to read all requests to run concurrent programs except those identified by the action Exclude Oracle ID APPS Result The manager reads requests to run concurrent programs Defining Concurrent Managers 7 29 that connect to any Oracle ID except those programs that connect to Oracle ID APPS A single Include action within a combined rule acts the same way as a single Include action that defines a specialization rule Both actions instruct a manager to read only the requests that satisfy the action Include Oracle ID APPS2 Result The manager only reads requests to run concurrent programs that connect to Oracle ID APPS2 Using multiple Exclude actions Using multiple Exclude actions as multiple lines within a combined rule is equivalent to using multiple Exclude actions as multiple specialization rules You can exclude more kinds of requests by adding more Exclude lines to your combined rule Exclude Program Oracle Sales amp Mark
214. agers run processes in the background on a server machine You must set up and start the concurrent managers for each product group before you can use your Oracle E Business Suite products Refer to the Maintaining Oracle E Business Suite documentation set for more information on the adcmctl script for starting and stopping concurrent managers The instructions in this section apply whether you are installing or upgrading Note Run your concurrent managers on machines with hostnames of 30 or fewer characters Managers may fail to run on machines with longer hostnames Setting Up Concurrent Managers For UNIX Keep the following in mind when you start the concurrent managers e Concurrent managers inherit directory privileges from the user who starts them If you plan to start the managers from a login other than the main applications login applmgr ensure that the login has the appropriate directory privileges For more information on directory privileges see Oracle E Business Suite Concepts Parameter values set in startmgr override any other values Command line values override environment and default values and so on Another section in this manual contains more information on editing the startmgr script You can change directory privileges while the managers are running and the changes Setting Up and Starting Concurrent Managers 8 1 For Windows Method 1 Method 2 Parameters will be effective immediately You can chang
215. ain Menu The Tablespace Migration Utility main menu lists six required sequential steps and one optional step to migrate your database objects to OATM These steps are categorized in three phases In Phase 1 you perform the necessary preparation steps for migrating your objects to OATM In Phase 2 you perform the necessary steps to migrate your objects to OATM and in Phase 3 you run the required post migration steps 1 Preparatory Step Generate Migration Sizing Reports 2 Preparatory Step Create New Tablespaces 3 Preparatory Step Generate Migration Commands 4 Migration Step Execute Migration Commands 5 Migration Step Run Migration Status Reports 6 Post Migration Step Run Post Migration Steps 7 Optional Run Customization Steps 3 12 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 8 Optional batch mode Run Migration in Batch Mode Steps 1 2 3 can be executed while Oracle E Business Suite is still available to users Step 4 must be executed when Oracle E Business Suite is not available to users and steps 5 and 6 must be completed before making Oracle E Business Suite available to users again If you choose to perform optional Step 7 you should do so before the other steps Caution Oracle highly recommends that you back up your database after performing Step 3 which is the final preparatory step You should have a backup copy of your database before performing the subsequent migration steps
216. alue Required Enable Security Profile The default value is the current value in the user profile option defined in the Default Value field Use the profile option name not the end user name You do not need to include PROFILE SQL Statement The default value is determined by the SQL statement you defined in the Default Value field Segment The default value is the value entered in a prior segment of the same parameter window You can enter a default value for the parameter This default value for your parameter automatically appears when you enter your parameter window You determine whether the default value is a constant or a context dependent value by choosing the default type Your default value should be a valid value for your value set Otherwise you see an error message when you enter your parameter window on the Run Request window and your default value does not appear Valid values for each default type include Constant Enter any literal value for the default value Profile The default value is the current value of the user profile option you specify here Enter the profile option name not the end user name Segment The default value is the value entered in a prior segment of the same flexfield window Enter the name of the segment whose value you want to copy SQL Statement The default value is determined by the SQL statement you enter here Your SQL statement must return exactly one row and one column in all
217. am looks at the same stage from the previous run and determines which programs need to be rerun only those that ended in error and runs those programs If this stage completes successfully or has a Warning status the system proceeds to the next stage using the normal mechanism of restarting the request set program Note Users may restart a request set multiple times The logs for each stage and individual programs are maintained independent of the number of runs as each stage and program submission generates a new request However the logs and associated files for a request set are rewritten each time the set is restarted Related Topics Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests page 6 1 Request Sets and Owners There are significant differences between end user and System Administrator privileges when defining or editing request sets End users own the request sets they create An end user can create a request set by selecting reports other request sets or concurrent programs that are part of the report security group assigned to his or her responsibility When an end user creates a request set the user automatically becomes the owner of the request set Ownership is identified by the person s application username End users use the Request Set form to create a new request set or to query and update any request sets they own End users can only edit request sets they own We sometimes refer to a request set that an en
218. ame A Updating the Search Index Oracle interMedia Text enables the search feature provided by the Oracle E Business Suite help system Run the concurrent program Rebuild Help Search Index to rebuild the search index after uploading customized documents This ensures that they will be included in any searches your users perform Customizing Help Navigation Trees You use the Help Builder applet to customize the help navigation trees that appear in your browser window s navigation frame when help is invoked Caution With each new release of Oracle E Business Suite and each patch you accept you will need to reapply your changes to any updated help navigation trees you have modified if you want access to the latest information In addition Oracle does not provide any mechanism for identifying changes between releases of Oracle E Business Suite help navigation trees You can use the Help Builder to perform the following tasks e Open a tree for editing page 10 11 e Add new help files to a tree page 10 12 e Add new nodes to a tree page 10 13 e Add nodes to one tree from another page 10 14 e Change the organization of a tree page 10 14 e Create a new navigation tree page 10 15 For help understanding the information associated with each of the Help Builder s fields see Help Builder Window Reference page 10 15 10 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Accessing the Help Builder To
219. ams for backwards compatibility only We strongly recommend that you do not create any new immediate concurrent programs You should define your new Pro C concurrent program executables as spawned Make sure the environment variable LUSRLIB includes the modules that define the functions for the immediate concurrent programs and your program library Set the LUSRPRG variable to include the object modules of your library catalog The file devenv in the directory FND_TOP APPLUSR defines the variables LUSRLIB and LUSRPRG The file fndenv executes devenv The files devenv and fndenv are UNIX shell scripts that set up the necessary environment variables We recommend that you make a copy of the working program library before linking your new immediate concurrent program library in case your new program library does not function as expected To link your program library execute this command from the operating system adrelink force y fnd UFNDLIBR This creates your new program library as UFNDLIBR You can rename it but the name of your new program library must be eight characters or less Testing Pro C Concurrent Programs You can use the following method to test your program You must pass each argument needed by your program To pass parameters enter the following at the operating system prompt program name ORACLE username gt lt ORACLE password 0 Y lt parameter 1 parameter 2 gt Defining Concurrent
220. an assign individual programs sets all programs sets in a request group programs sets belonging to one or more applications and so on either to the user directly or to a role that can then be assigned to one or more users For more information on RBAC see Overview of Access Control with Oracle User Management Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security If applications are included in the request groups all programs requests sets that are created in these applications will also be automatically included Please note that request submission applies to both programs and request sets The following types of instance sets can be used for assignment but administrators can create new instance sets based on their needs 6 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration All programs in a particular request security group All request sets in a particular request security group To enable this functionality the following are seeded Permission Submit Request Permission View Request Permission Set Request Operations containing the permissions Submit Request and View Request Object Concurrent Programs Object Instance Set Programs that can be accessed Object Instance Set Request sets that can be accessed To grant access to a request security group to a role follow these steps 1 Define your role User Management responsibility Define your request security group Sys
221. an individual report by itself but can only run the entire request set can add any other requests in their request security group to the request set can delete any request from the request set regardless of whether that report is in their request security group can update print options or parameters for an individual report in the request set if the report is in their request security group cannot run an individual report by itself but can only run the entire request set System Administrator Benefits from Request Sets Request sets offer three main benefits to System Administrators 1 Request sets offer a means of controlling access to concurrent programs ona user by user basis By defining a request set assigning it an owner and then not assigning the request set to any request security group the reports and programs in the request set are only available to the owner By leaving the Owner field blank System Administrators can create request sets whose individual programs and parameters cannot be edited or updated by end users Only a System Administrator can edit a request set that has no owner System Administrators can provide members of a responsibility access to reports and programs outside their request security group By defining a request set that contains reports or programs not in a request security group and assigning that request set to the request security group users can be granted run but not edit privi
222. anagers 7 25 Specializing according to Application User run the programs you can define a resubmission interval for example 1 month to resubmit the programs to run every month You can specialize managers to only read requests from specific users Include Net Result Include OR Include OR Include Net Result User Markus Kalkin The manager only reads requests submitted by the application user Markus Kalkin User Markus Kalkin Program Oracle Inventory Process Demand Interface Program Oracle Inventory Summarize Demand Histories The manager reads both requests submitted by user Markus Kalkin and requests to run the Oracle Inventory programs Process Demand Interface and Summarize Demand Histories Tip If you want specific programs submitted by a specific user to jump ahead of other requests waiting to be run you can define and specialize a manager as in the example above and set the user profile option Concurrent Priority for the user to a high priority Concurrent Priority sets the priority of requests submitted by the user e Define a manager and give it a descriptive name e Specialize the manager as in the example above e Set the user profile option 7 26 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Related Topics Concurrent Priority for user Markus to 10 Specializing Managers to run only certain programs page 7 17 Defining Specializatio
223. ant the program by itself to be incompatible or whether you want the program and all child requests that is concurrent programs started by the program as part of a request set to be incompatible e Delete programs from the list Important To immediately effect any changes you make in the Incompatible Programs zone you must navigate to the Administer Concurrent Managers window and choose Verify for the Internal Concurrent Manager Related Topics Copying and Modifying Program Definitions page 6 44 Concurrent Programs page 6 65 Administer Concurrent Managers page 7 50 Concurrent Program Parameters Parameters also referred to as arguments are assigned to standard submission concurrent programs To define a program as standard submission set the value of the Standard Submission field in the Concurrent Programs form to Yes Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 47 Important All the mechanisms for parameter defaulting including references to values of other parameters user profiles etc are evaluated only at submission time There are two aspects to a parameter associated with a concurrent program its value set and its behavior Parameter value set The valid values the parameter can accept The set of valid values is referred to as a value set Parameter behavior How the parameter behaves within an application For example whether anentry value for the parameter is required in order for the program to work
224. anything other than UNEXPECTED ERROR or EXCEPTION Logging 15 3 Using Logging to Screen In addition to the above methods where log messages are written to a file or the database Logging to Screen provides e The ability to enable logging on a per HTTP request or per HTTP session basis e Dynamic configuration which does not require restarting any servers or changing any log profiles e A convenient lightweight mechanism to diagnose performance issues Each message is timestamped to the millisecond If Logging to Screen is enabled then the Java log messages generated for a particular HTTP Request Response are buffered in memory and appended to the end of the generated HTML page This feature does not affect any existing configurations of file or database logging File or database logging continues to behave per the configured middle tier log properties and or log profile values Note that this mechanism currently provides only Java layer messages Regular file or database logging should be used if messages from other layers e g PL SOL are needed Enabling Logging to Screen in Oracle Application Framework Pages For security reasons this feature is only accessible if the FND Diagnostics Profile is set to Yes Use the following procedure to enable Logging to Screen in pages based on the Oracle Application Framework 1 Click the Diagnostics button 2 Select Show Log to Screen from the drop down list 3 Choose an
225. ard Oracle Forms functions such as Clear Record as well as Oracle E Business Suite specific functions For more information on the Oracle E Business Suite pulldown menus for Forms based applications see Pulldown Menus and the Toolbar Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide The Diagnostics menu can be found under the Help menu gt Diagnostics In previous releases access to the Diagnostics menu and submenu items was controlled by two profile options Hide Diagnostics Menu Entry and Utilities Diagnostics e Hide Diagnostics Menu Entry If this profile is set to Yes the Diagnostics menu is hidden from the user Utilities Diagnostics Utilities Diagnostics determines whether a user can automatically use the following Diagnostics submenu items Examine Trace Debug Properties and Custom Code If Utilities Diagnostics is set to Yes then users can automatically use these features If Utilities Diagnostics is set to No then users must enter the password for the APPS schema to use these Diagnostics features When the user no longer needs to use these features he or she can select the menu entry Disable Secured Diagnostics Beginning with Release 12 1 3 access to the above Diagnostics submenu items can be controlled by the profile Utilities Diagnostics or by security functions using Role Based Access Control RBAC Whether or not a submenu item is available is checked on an Controlling Access to the Oracle Forms based Applica
226. arters of the implementing company and the time zone in which the database runs This means that remote users have to be aware of the time difference between their location and that of the corporate headquarters Employing the user preferred time zone feature enables users to specify their local time zone for both display and entry of date with time fields Key consequences of this are e Users see date with time fields in their preferred local time zone and can enter dates with time in this time zone e Date fields without a time component are not affected by this feature e The data in the database continues to be stored in the standard corporate time zone This appendix discusses the capabilities limitations and implementation details of the user preferred time zone feature Time Zone Concepts Conceptually there are two types of date fields e Dates with a time component used to indicate a specific point in time within a particular day e Dates without a time component used to denote a particular day but not a specific point in time within that day Date fields with a time component can be represented in any time zone and thus displayed in whichever time zone is most meaningful to the end user Generally users Time Zone Support E 1 prefer to view dates in their own local time zone With the user preferred time zone feature enabled date with time fields will be converted to the user s preferred time zone for display
227. ary FND profiles are read for that user For Java and PL SQL applications the logging system is initialized by FND GLOBAL INITIALIZE which is called from APPS INITIALIZE which is called normally as part of the startup of every Java application session form report or concurrent program At that point it has user information and will log with the proper user profiles Before the FND GLOBAL INITIALIZE if the logging system is called it will self initialize and log with the site level profile values For Java applications this is the sequence of startup steps 1 If any of the log parameters are set as Java system properties then use them 2 Logging is not disabled using the Java system property AFLOG ENABLED FALSE and if any of the remaining log parameters are not set as system properties then retrieve the corresponding Oracle Application Object Library FND profile option values from the database User level profile values override responsibility level profile values which override application level profile values which override site level profile values 3 Ifany of the log parameters are not set either as system properties or as profile values or they are not accessible due to an error then use the default values Logging 15 5 Logging Guidelines Set up your system for logging according to the following guidelines We recommend that you use Oracle Applications Manager as the user interface for any log management task
228. assword was originally specified and stores it as a hash value in the data dictionary table that holds user information However new or changed database account passwords will continue to be case insensitive until the mixed case feature is explicitly enabled Mixed case feature enabled After the feature is enabled database passwords created or changed since the upgrade to Oracle 11g will need to be entered in the case specified originally Only database passwords that remain unchanged in the Oracle 11g database will continue to be case insensitive The database stores a case sensitive version of the password created or changed in Oracle 11g whether the mixed case feature is enabled or not The case sensitive version of the password is therefore ready for immediate use as soon as the feature is enabled This new case sensitivity capability for Oracle E Business Suite database passwords is analogous to the way the SIGNON PASSWORD CASE profile is used to determine how new or changed Oracle E Business Suite Application user passwords will be stored Enabling Case Sensitive Database Passwords Case sensitivity is controlled by the setting of the Oracle 11g database initialization parameter SEC CASE SENSITIVE LOGON The default for Oracle E Business Suite databases is FALSE which means that new existing and changed database passwords will all remain case insensitive The feature is enabled by setting SEC CASE SENSITIVE LOGON to TRUE then shutt
229. at period regardless of the viewer or his local time zone For further details of setting up Oracle E Business Suite to use multiple time zones see My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 402650 1 User Preferred Time Zone Support in Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 For a discussion of time zones in the context of other globalization related topics see Globalization Support in Oracle E Business Suite Concepts Upgrade Considerations There are no upgrade considerations for E Business Suite customers upgrading from 11 5 10 CU2 or higher who have already enabled user preferred time zone support The upgrade will be transparent and the relevant functionality will not change For E Business Suite customers who are upgrading to Release 12 from a release in which the user preferred time zone feature was not enabled or not used existing time zone practices must be taken into account when enabling user preferred time zone support Prior to Release 11 5 10 with CU2 users could deal with time zone differences in one of two ways e By entering data in the standard corporate time zone as recommended by Oracle The choices in this case are between E 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 1 Enabling the user preferred time zone feature and allowing users to continue working in the standard corporate time zone as before the upgrade 2 Enabling the user preferred time zone feature setting a preferred time
230. ated Topics Concurrent Programs Window page 6 65 Concurrent Program Parameters Window page 6 76 Defining Program Incompatibility Rules page 6 28 Modifying an Incompatible Programs List page 6 47 Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 75 Concurrent Program Parameters Window ORACLE File Edit View Fodar Tools Window Help avolg G8l 6 Bug 75 17 S Concurrent Program Parameters Application E Enabled Description Description Default Value Default Type Required M Enable Security Range Display Display Size MES Description Size Concatenated Description Size 235 Prompt Token sDBG gt Enter and update the program parameters that you wish to pass to the program executable Program parameters defined here should match the variables in your execution file Conflicts Domain Parameter Enter the parameter which will hold the value of the conflict domain of the program For information on conflict domain parameters see Concurrent Conflict Domains page 6 29 Enter the parameter which will hold the value of the conflict domain of the program Security Group This field is for HRMS security only See Customizing Reporting and System Administration in Oracle HRMS Sequence Choose the sequence numbers that specify the order in which your program receives 6 76 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration paramete
231. ation file system and database It also provides a detailed description of the numerous options available to meet specific operational requirements Oracle E Business Suite Patching Procedures explains how to patch an Oracle E Business Suite system covering the key concepts and strategies Also included are recommendations for optimizing typical patching operations and reducing downtime Oracle Alert User s Guide This guide explains how to define periodic and event alerts to monitor the status of your Oracle E Business Suite data Oracle Application Framework Developer s Guide This guide contains the coding standards followed by the Oracle E Business Suite development staff to produce applications built with Oracle Application Framework This guide is available in PDF format on My Oracle Support and as online documentation in JDeveloper 10g with Oracle Application Extension Oracle Application Framework Personalization Guide This guide covers the design time and run time aspects of personalizing applications built with Oracle Application Framework Oracle Diagnostics Framework User s Guide This manual contains information on implementing and administering diagnostics tests for Oracle E Business Suite using the Oracle Diagnostics Framework Oracle E Business Suite Concepts This book is intended for all those planning to deploy Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 or contemplating significant changes to a configuration After describing
232. be tailored to suit the needs of different organizations Oracle E Business Suite Login page Users log in to Oracle E Business Suite using a client web browser From the Oracle E Business Suite Login page users access the Oracle E Business Suite Home Page Basic Configuration Tasks 2 1 which provides a single point of access to HTML based applications forms based applications and Business Intelligence applications Users access the Oracle E Business Suite Login page from the following URL http lt server port gt OA HTML AppsLogin For example http oraappsl oracle com 8000 0A HTML AppsLogin From this URL you will be redirected to the central login page AppsLocalLogin jsp Central Login Page lere p User Name sysadmin example michael james smith Password example 4u99v23 Cancel Login Assistance Register here Accessibility None Le Select a Language English About this Page Privacy Statement Copyright c 2006 Oracle All rights reserved The following features are displayed in the default login page Username field Password field Login button and the Language Picker if more than one language is installed The following user interface features can be turned on or off through the Local Login Mask profile option Hints for username password e Register URL this link allows the user to perform self service registration in User Management e For
233. bility In case a statistics gathering run fails due to whatever reasons subsequent Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite 12 13 submission can pick up where the failed run left off if you provide the request_id of the failed run Hmode This parameter controls the amount of history records that are created The history records stored in FND_STATS_HIST can be queried to find out when statistics were gathered on a particular object and the amount of time it took to gather statistics on that object LASTRUN History records for each schema are maintained only for the last gather statistics run Each subsequent run will overwrite the previous history record for the index This is the default behavior FULL This mode does not overwrite any history information History records are created for each run and are identified by the Request ID If a Request ID is not provided one is generated automatically If this mode is used the Purge FND_STATS History Records concurrent program should be run periodically to purge the FND_STATS_HIST table NONE This mode does not generate any history information If this mode is used the run cannot be restarted Options This parameter specifies how objects are selected for statistics gathering GATHER All tables and indexes of the schema schemaname are selected for stats gathering This is the default GATHER AUTO Tables of the schema schemaname for which the percentage of mod
234. bjects that do not have an implicit classification rule or an explicit object classification are migrated to the default tablespaces of the schema in which they reside Explicit Classification Rules Explicit object classifications are seeded by Oracle based on the I O characteristics of the object Implicit Classification Rules The following table contains implicit classification rules for the Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Migration Utility Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility 3 7 Implicit Classification Rules Object Type Tablespace_Type AQ Tables AQ IOTs Index Organized Tables Transaction_Tables Materialized Views Summary Materialized View Logs Summary All other Indexes Same Tablespace type as the table Domain Indexes Transaction_Indexes Indexes on Transaction Tables Transaction_Indexes Customizations and Extensions The Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Migration Utility is primarily designed to migrate tables indexes materialized views materialized view logs and other database objects that are owned by standard Oracle E Business Suite schemas from their existing tablespace model to OATM Custom or third party schemas can also be migrated using the Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Migration Utility customer preferred methods or a database management tool such as the Oracle Enterprise Manager OEM Custom objects in standard Oracle E Business Suite product schemas are migrat
235. case the Portlet Generator initially displays the Portlet Search page to let you search for the region you want to portletize e Select a Portletize link within the page where the region appears Portletize links appear in the same area where Personalize links appear within a page Note Portletization and personalization are mutually exclusive You can either portletize or personalize a region but not both In the Portlet Search page search for the region you want using the full region path the application short name or the region type as search criteria The search criteria fields are case insensitive Developer Tools 16 5 Standalone Region Search Note that the search is case insensitive Region Path Application Short Name FND Q Type advancedTable Go Clear Name Path Application Short Name Type Portletize AdvancedSummaryRN oracle apps fnd oam pat report webui AdvancedSearchPG AdvancedSummaryRN fnd advancedTable d MidTierSummaryRN Joracle apps fnd oam pat report webui MidTierSummaryPG MidTierSummaryRN fnd advancedTable AF SessionSummaryRN J nd oam it webui ionSumm E ionSumm fnd advancedTable E In the search results list you can click a region link in the Region Path column to display a pop up preview of the region 16 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Note that the search is case insensitive Region Path Application Shor
236. cases If the program executable file requires an argument you should require it for your concurrent program If the value set for this parameter does not allow security rules then this field is display only Otherwise you can elect to apply any security rules defined for this value set to affect your parameter list 6 92 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Range Display Display Token Description Size Display Size Choose either Low or High if you want to validate your parameter value against the value of another parameter in this structure Parameters with a range of Low must appear before parameters with a range of High the low parameter must have a lower number than the high parameter For example if you plan two parameters named Start Date and End Date you may want to force users to enter an end date later than the start date You could assign Start Date a range of Low and End Date a range of High In this example the parameter you name Start Date must appear before the parameter you name End Date If you choose Low for one parameter you must also choose High for another parameter in that structure and vice versa Otherwise you cannot commit your changes If your value set is of the type Pair this field is display only The value defaults to Pair Enter the following Indicate whether to display this parameter in the Parameters window when a user submits a reques
237. ce describes tasks you might perform on frequent basis such as monitoring your system reviewing concurrent requests and setting profile options The following areas are covered in this manual Managing Concurrent Processing and Concurrent Programs Oracle Workflow Manager Monitoring Oracle E Business Suite Administering Oracle E Business Suite Secure Enterprise Search Technology Inventory Utility Diagnostics and Repair License Manager Patching and Maintenance User Profiles and Profile Options in Oracle Application Object Library Using Predefined Alerts Introduction 1 5 2 Basic Configuration Tasks Oracle E Business Suite Setup Steps Proper setup is required before a number of Oracle E Business Suite features will operate correctly The following steps are carried out automatically during or after installation 1 Run Rapid Install 2 Test Web listener virtual directories 3 Test Oracle HTTP Server configuration 4 Create DBC files 5 Test Java Servlet setup 6 Set Web Server profile options The above is not an inclusive list of the installation and post installation tasks that may be needed on a particular system Rapid Install is the installation program Refer to Oracle E Business Suite Installation Guide Using Rapid Install for detailed information on running Rapid Install Configuring the Login Page for Oracle E Business Suite Oracle E Business Suite uses a configurable login page which can
238. centage of modifications has exceeded modpercent are selected for statistics gathering Indexes of these tables are selected by default Table monitoring needs to be enabled before using this option e GATHER EMPTY Statistics are gathered only for tables and indexes that are missing statistics LIST AUTO This option does not gather statistics It only provides a listing of all the tables that will be selected for statistic gathering if the GATHER AUTO option is used e LIST EMPTY This option does not gather statistics It only provides a listing of all the tables that will be selected for statistics gathering if the GATHER EMPTY option is used Modifications Threshold Applicable only to GATHER AUTO and LIST AUTO options This parameter specifies the percentage of modifications with respect to the total rows that have to take place on a table before it can be picked up for AUTO statistics gathering Invalidate Dependent Cursors This flag indicates whether cursors dependent on the table being analyzed should be invalidated or not By default dependent cursors are invalidated This parameter is ignored if you are running a database prior to Oracle 9i Release 2 9 2 x 12 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Gather Column Statistics This concurrent program should be used for gathering the Column Statistics i e creating a histogram on a given column The procedure takes a backup into th
239. ch attempts to make a database connection If unsuccessful it sleeps for a period before trying again This continues until either a successful connection is made or it receives a signal to shut itself down When a successful connection is made the process kills the old ICM database session and then starts a new ICM using the normal start manager script Once the ICM is restarted it starts up any other managers that had also shut down and normal processing resumes Shutting Down the Concurrent Manager Service Windows The OracleConcMgr SID service may be shut down from the Control Panel Services applet It can also be stopped from the command line using the following command C gt net stop OracleConcMgr lt SID gt Although you can shut down concurrent managers from Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s responsibility this does not stop the concurrent manager service You must still stop the concurrent manager service from the Windows Control Panel Services applet before you can restart the concurrent managers Note The OracleConcMer lt SID gt service may take several minutes to shut down because it needs to finish processing currently running requests Warning Do not use the Task Manager to stop the concurrent manager service or other Applications processes unless you are advised to do so by Oracle Worldwide Support Setting Up and Starting Concurrent Managers 8 7 Removing the Concurrent Manager Service Windows
240. changed to Running A request may need to wait to start until it has necessary information from child process es When you run a request set that allows incompatibilities you submit a request to run the concurrent program that defines the request set The request set concurrent program submits a request set stage concurrent program The request set stage concurrent program submits the requests for the individual programs and reports within the stage A request to run the request set concurrent program or the request set stage concurrent program is a Parent request while the requests to run the programs and reports are Child requests You can review the status of a request set and the programs it contains using the Concurrent Requests form The following table displays information pertaining to request sets in the Running phase Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 11 Status Description Paused Parent request pauses for all its Child requests to complete For example a request set stage pauses for all reports in the stage to complete Resuming All requests submitted by the same Parent request have completed running The Parent request resumes running Modifying Request Sets A request set can only be modified by its owner or by a System Administrator To make modifications query the request set you want to modify in the Request Set window Note If you wish to retain modifications to request sets provided by
241. cific Printers 9 11 Using a Different Configuration File as the Default 9 11 Modify an Existing Printer Type to Use Pasta 9 12 Add a New Printer Type to Use Pasta eee 9 13 Setting Ma tgins a 9 13 Printing a Report Generated Using the noprint Option sse 9 14 Generating Other Formats Using the Preprocessing Option 9 15 FOntSOUECe cu e tede erstes bt eee Loue ge Lei o se be ers ta dede 9 16 Language Specific Font Support enn nerenren ennt 9 17 Configuration File Options tec eetu e eet ce 9 18 Command Line Parameters seen enn enne enne 9 24 j hrAginpqIntp t 9 25 Create the PrintFOrmi uitiis enl t i ee PRA RC HIR ERU FIERE LT Eaa EATER ada 9 26 Common UNIX Printing System CUPS Integration sssssesesseeeR 9 28 Customizing Printing Support in Oracle E Business Suite 9 31 Hierarchy of Printer and Print Style Assignments ssssssssssse eme 9 39 Hierarchy of Printer Assignments ionien en ene ener 9 40 Hierarchy of Print Style Assignments enne 9 41 System Administrator Printer and Print Style Settings sss 9 42 End User Printer and Print Style Settings 9 43 Postscript Printing in UNIX icerige atinata eme enne nennen nennen nnn 9 43 Printer Types Window a tete d qon itg e dee e qid eret deed dbi quede 9 47 Printer Types Blocket ras itu een Agen Ute ete e deletis 9 48 Printer Drivers Block ieu ete ate ttt mu a dama dida
242. cified printer for example a printer in a secure office using the Concurrent Programs form You can also require a report to generate its output in a specific print style Assigning Default Printers and Print Styles to Reports in a Set As System Administrator you can identify a default printer for each report within a report set and assign a default print style for each report using the Request Set form Assigning Default Printers Using Profile Options As System Administrator you can identify a printer as a default printer for your installation site a specific Oracle Application a specific responsibility or any of your end users by setting the Printer user profile option in the System Profile Values window Users can override a default profile option value by 9 42 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration e Setting their own personal Printer profile option using their Personal Profile Values form Selecting another available printer at runtime when submitting a report End User Printer and Print Style Settings End users may e Set default print styles for reports in their report sets using their Request Set form e Identify a default printer of their own by using the Personal Profile Values form Users may override the default profile option setting their System Administrator defines e Choose any available printer and print style when running reports when using the Run Reports form
243. cle E Business Suite Online Help The Oracle E Business Suite online help files can be customized as explained in this chapter Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties This chapter explains Oracle E Business Suite tasks that require a database administrator to perform explicitly or assist in by performing prerequisite tasks 1 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite Oracle E Business Suite uses the cost based optimizer CBO in order to choose the most efficient execution plan for SQL statements Using this approach the optimizer determines the most optimal execution plan by costing available access paths and factoring information based on statistics for the schema objects accessed by the SOL statement Oracle E Business Suite and Oracle Real Application Clusters This chapter describes the steps required to install Oracle E Business Suite in an environment that uses Oracle Real Application Clusters Oracle RAC Document Sequences This chapter explains how to assign unique numbers to documents created in Oracle E Business Suite Logging The Oracle E Business Suite Logging Framework provides to ability to store and retrieve log messages for debugging error reporting and alerting purposes This chapter describes administrative tasks related to logging Additional information on logging is in the Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide Developer Tools
244. commands Select Option 1 to generate a report listing all the indexes which are invalid in the Oracle E Business Suite schemas This report is stored in fndinvld txt You must correct or drop all invalid indexes before generating migration commands for all schemas or for a given schema This is especially relevant for context indexes Invalid indexes on an object may cause errors during migration of the base table and invalid context indexes will not be moved Option 2 Generate Migration Commands for all Schemas Select Option 2 to generate the commands for migrating the objects in all the schemas to the correct tablespace The migration commands are stored in the table END T5 MIG CMDS You can check the generated log file fndgmcmd lt timestamp gt log for errors during the generation process A threshold object size is calculated based on the sizing data in FND TS SIZING to determine whether an object will be moved sequentially or in parallel Migration commands for all objects with total blocks greater than or equal to threshold blocks are generated with the PARALLEL clause and execution mode as sequential Migration commands for objects with total blocks less than threshold are generated with NOPARALLEL clause and execution mode as parallel Partitioned objects are always executed sequentially regardless of their size Option 3 Generate Migration Commands for a List of Schemas Select Option 3 to generate the commands for migrating the objects in
245. count Name of the partition The backup flag indicates whether to backup statistics Set this flag to BACKUP if you wish to back up the current table statistics into the FND_STATTAB table If left blank it defaults to NOBACKUP When set to TRUE index statistics are gathered in addition to gathering statistics for the specified table Index statistics gathering is not parallelized Using this option is equivalent to running the GATHER_INDEX_STATS procedure on each of the table s indexes The granularity of statistics to collect only relevant for tables that are partitioned Valid values are DEFAULT Gather global and partition level statistics SUBPARTITION Gather subpartition level statistics PARTITION Gather partition level statistics GLOBAL Gather global statistics ALL Gather all subpartition partition and global statistics This parameter controls the amount of history records that are created LASTRUN History records for each index are maintained only for the last gather statistics run Each subsequent run will overwrite the previous history record for the index This is the default behavior FULL This mode does not overwrite any history information History records are created for each run and are identified by the Request ID If a Request ID is not provided one is generated automatically If this mode is used the Purge FND STATS History Records concurrent program should be run periodically to p
246. cripts Site Map Maintenance These features help you maintain your Oracle E Business Suite installation Note that most of these features are described in detail in the Oracle E Business Suite Maintenance Procedures and the Oracle E Business Suite Maintenance Utilities guides Patches and Utilities e Applied Patches e File History e Patch Wizard e Timing Reports e Manage Downtime Schedules Cloning e Clones Status e Simple Clone e Advanced Clone Purging e Setup e Monitor Site Map Diagnostics and Repair Use these features in diagnostics and troubleshooting Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager 5 7 Diagnostics The Diagnostics tab provides links to the following Oracle E Business Suite Diagnostics pages in which you can run and manage tests and view reports Execute Diagnostic Tests e View Diagnostics Reports e View Scheduled Diagnostics Tests e Diagnostics Configuration For more information on Oracle E Business Suite Diagnostics see the Oracle Diagnostics Framework User s Guide In addition the Debug Workbench enables you to centrally control and monitor the debugging of Oracle E Business Suite components Using the Debug Workbench you can set up debug rules for system components and view the debug information that has been collected For more information see Debug Workbench Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance The Client Configurations link allows you
247. ct Then use the STARTMGR command to restart the Internal Concurrent Manager which starts the concurrent managers Example nightly shutdown using CONCSUB You can use the token WAIT with value Y WAIT Y if you want to use CONCSUB to issue a concurrent request from within a shell script containing a sequence of steps Using the token WAIT insures the managers deactivate abort or verify status before the shell script proceeds to the next step See Controlling the Internal Concurrent Manager from the Operating System page 7 39 1 Shell script customized for specific operating system starts 2 CONCSUB username password SYSADMIN System Administrator SYSADMIN WAIT Y CONCURRENTFND DEACTIVATE When the shell script passes control to CONCSUB CONCSUB waits until the program DEACTIVATE is complete before it returns control to the shell script 3 Script issues the command to shut down the database 4 Script issues the command to backup the database 5 Script issues the command to startup the database 6 startmgr sysmgr apps fnd mgrname std printer hqseq1 mailto jsmith restart N logfile mgrlog sleep 90 pmon 5 quesiz 10 7 42 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration The shell script passes control to STARTMGR which starts up the Internal manager and all the other managers 7 Shell script completes Hiding the password using CONCSUB If the username password are still supplie
248. cuments 18 6 N Network latency testing 11 18 Network Test window 11 18 Node explained 7 74 Nodes explained 7 44 manager s target node 7 48 primary and secondary 7 45 O Object defined D 6 Object attribute defined D 6 Objects defining D 7 Oracle Access Manager 19 1 Oracle Application Framework 2 22 C 1 Oracle Application Object Library AOL J Setup Test Suite 2 20 Oracle Applications Manager 5 1 AutoConfig 2 23 Configuration Overview 5 8 creating services managers 7 8 Setup 5 2 Site Map 5 4 Oracle Applications Tablespace Model See Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model Oracle E Business Suite Home Page personalizing 2 5 Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model 3 1 Oracle GoldenGate 19 1 Oracle HTTP Server 2 6 ORACLE ID applsys password warning 11 12 explained 11 1 Oracle username 11 12 registering 11 2 11 12 requirement for database access 11 2 Oracle RAC Real Application Clusters 13 2 Oracle Real Application Clusters Oracle RAC 13 1 Oracle Reports bitmapped 6 65 ORACLE schemas 11 1 Oracle Self Service Web Applications D 1 Oracle Self Service Web Applications Architecture D 1 Oracle Tutor 10 17 Oracle Universal Connection Pool 2 21 ORACLE usernames 11 1 P Parallel concurrent processing explained 7 43 Internal manager 7 45 introduced 7 43 log files and multiple nodes 7 46 managing 7 47 operating environments 7 44 Oracle RA
249. curement Internet Receivables Self Service Time Web Suppliers iStore iPayment iSupport iMarketing and eTravel from Oracle extend the functionality of Oracle E Business Suite by adding a browser based walk up and use functionality that supplements Oracle E Business Suite The Oracle Self Service Web Applications can be either inquiry or transactional Inquiry modules read but do not update the Oracle E Business Suite database transactional modules update the database Oracle Self Service Web Applications Architecture The architecture consists of the following components e A web browser e Oracle HTTP Server powered by Apache e HTML documents e Java Server Pages JavaBeans and Servlets Oracle Self Service Web Applications D 1 Definitions The following definitions will help you to understand the big picture of Oracle Self Service Web Applications Oracle HTTP Server The Oracle HTTP Server powered by Apache is based on the open source HTTP server created by the Apache Software Foundation Information on the Apache Server can be found at http www apache org This provides the communication services of Oracle Internet Application Server iAS The Apache Server is modular In addition to the standard Apache modules often referred to as mods the Oracle HTTP Server adds a number of Oracle specific modules along with an extension to the functionality of several of the standard mods Theses include mod_cgi mod_ssl mod_jserv
250. current Program Executable Block The combination of application name plus program name uniquely identifies your concurrent program executable See Concurrent Programs Window page 6 65 Executable Enter a name for your concurrent program executable In the Concurrent Programs window you assign this name to a concurrent program to associate your concurrent program with your executable logic Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 61 Short Name Enter a short name for your concurrent program executable Application The concurrent managers use the application to determine in which directory structure to look for your execution file Execution Method The execution method cannot be changed once the concurrent program executable has been assigned to one or more concurrent programs in the Concurrent Programs window The possible execution methods are Host Oracle Reports PL SQL Stored Procedure Java Stored Procedure Java Concurrent Program Multi Language Function SQL Loader SQL Plus Spawned Immediate Request Set Stage Function The execution file is a host script The execution file is an Oracle Reports file The execution file is a PL SOL stored procedure The execution file is a Java stored procedure The execution file is a program written in Java The execution file is a function MLS function that supports running concurrent programs in multiple languages as well as territories and numeric c
251. current processing node e Multiple CUPS distributed servers with printers connected to each CUPS server Scenario 1 All printers connected to a single CUPS server residing on the E Business Suite concurrent processing node This scenario is graphically depicted in the following diagram E Business Suite Concurrent Node There are no special configuration steps required if the printer system has been replaced with CUPS on the server If you maintain both the System V printing system and CUPS you must define a new 9 28 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration printer type with the required print styles and printer drivers 1 Create a new Pasta configuration file for CUPS in the F ND_TOP resource directory example pasta_cups cfg 2 Ensure that the Ip command that is set for the printCommand parameter in the Pasta configuration file is a CUPS Ip command You can specify the full path to the command if you maintain both the UNIX standard Ip command and the CUPS Ip command 3 Create a set of printer drivers for each print style with the configuration file created in Step 1 Example Printer Driver Name PASTA LANDSCAPE CUPS Arguments pn PROFILESS PRINTER f PROFILESS FILENAME cPROFILESS CONC COPIES l Fpasta cups cfg You can refer to the existing printer driver definitions created by Oracle such as PASTA LANDSCAPE PASTA_PORTRAIT or PASTA LANDWIDE 4 Create
252. d Each of these arguments can be at most 50 characters For example if you pass two parameters into your program you use 5 to refer to the first parameter and 6 to refer to the second parameter Protecting Your Oracle User Password In some cases there are security concerns with passing your Oracle username and password directly to your HOST program If you do not want the concurrent manager to pass your username password to your program you can have the manager pass it as an environment variable instead Or you can pass an Oracle E Business Suite username password for a user with the System Administrator responsibility Alternatively you can not pass it at all First define your concurrent program executable as a HOST program in the Concurrent Program Executable form To have the username password passed as an environment variable enter the term ENCRYPT in the Execution Options field of the Concurrent Programs window when defining a concurrent program using this executable ENCRYPT signals the concurrent manager to pass the username password in the environment variable fcp login The 6 38 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Success Codes argument 1 is left blank If you do not want the username password passed to the program at all enter SECURE in the Execution Options field The concurrent manager will not pass the username password to the program By default a shell script retur
253. d the CONCSUB utility will work as usual If username only is supplied no password in the first argument it will prompt you for an Oracle E Business Suite username and password In the following example CONCSUB would connect using the dbc file and then only run if the Oracle E Business Suite user sysadmin with password sysadmin is successfully authenticated CONCSUB Apps User SYSADMIN System Administrator SYSADMIN sysadmin CONCURRENT FND VERIFY The user can put the password in a file and then redirect it to standard input stdin In UNIX the command would be executed as follows CONCSUB Apps User SYSADMIN System Administrator SYSADMIN CONCURRENT FND FNDMNRMT Y 0 20221 lt password file where password file is an ASCII file that contains the password This method is recommended for use in shell scripts or batch processes Overview of Parallel Concurrent Processing This essay explains what parallel concurrent processing is describes the environments it runs in and explains how it works What is Parallel Concurrent Processing Parallel concurrent processing allows you to distribute concurrent managers across multiple nodes in a cluster massively parallel or networked environment Instead of operating concurrent processing on a single node while other nodes are idle you can spread concurrent processing across all available nodes fully utilizing hardware resources Benefits of Parallel Concurrent P
254. d Only FND Diagnostics Custom Menu FND Diagnostics Personalizations Menu FND Diagnostics Personalizations Menu Read Only FND Diagnostics Properties Menu FND Diagnostics Properties Menu Read Only FND_DIAGNOSTICS_E XAMINE_PS FND_DIAGNOSTICS_E XAMINE RO PS FND DIAGNOSTICS C USTOM PS FND DIAGNOSTICS F ORMS PERS PS FND DIAGNOSTICS F RM PERS RO PS FND DIAGNOSTICS P ROPERTIES PS FND DIAGNOSTICS P ROP RO PS FND Diagnostics Menu Examine FND Diagnostics Menu Examine Read Only FND Diagnostics Custom FND Diagnostics Personalize FND Diagnostics Personalize Read Only FND Diagnostics Values FND Diagnostics Values Read Only F 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Permission Set Name Permission Set Code Permissions Assigned FND Diagnostics Trace Menu FND Diagnostics Menu Developer FND Diagnostics Menu Support FND_DIAGNOSTICS_T RACE_PS FND_DIAGNOSTICS_D EVELOPER_PS FND_DIAGNOSTICS_S UPPORT_PS FND Diagnostics Trace FND Diagnostics Examine FND Diagnostics Personalize FND Diagnostics Trace FND Diagnostics Values FND Diagnostics Custom FND Diagnostics Examine Read Only FND Diagnostics Personalize Read Only FND Diagnostics Trace FND Diagnostics Values Read Only FND Diagnostics Custom To give a user access to a secured menu item using RBAC grant a permission set containing a permission f
255. d its download statement must include filter parameters in its WHERE clause for each of its key attributes Also the parameter names must match the key attribute names exactly Note that entity definitions can be nested to indicate master detail relationships Nested entity definitions inherit the key attributes of their parent entities and should not redefine them DOWNLOAD Statement The DOWNLOAD statement is a SOL statement that selects rows to download The statement can join to other tables to resolve sequence generated ID numbers into developer keys where possible The DOWNLOAD statement may also contain bind values of the form NAME which are substituted with parameter values from the command line DOWNLOAD statements have the form DOWNLOAD entity select attribute expressions from Loaders B 5 Example DOWNLOAD FND LOOKUP_TYPE select VA APPLICATION SHORT NAME VIEW APPSNAME LT LOOKUP TYPE OA APPLICATION SHORT NAME LT CUSTOMIZATION LEVEL decode LT LAST UPDATED BY 1 SEED CUSTOM OWN T MEANING iT DESCRIPTION from FND LOOKUP TYPES VL LT FND APPLICATION VA FND APPLICATION OA FND SECURITY GROUPS SG where VA APPLICATION ID LT VIEW APPLICATION ID and OA APPLICATION ID LT APPLICATION ID and VIEW APPSNAME is null or VIEW APPSNAME is not null and VA APPLICATION SHORT NAM
256. d user owns as a private request set Private request sets are not automatically added to a request security group That is other users cannot access your private request sets using the Submit Requests window unless the System Administrator assigns that request set to a request security group Request sets owned by an end user are always available to that user regardless of what responsibility the user is operating under However a standard submission form customized to display only reports in a request group using a code does not display private request sets Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 17 When a user signs on to Oracle E Business Suite the user can run requests request sets and concurrent programs included in e his or her responsibility s request security group e any request sets they own End User Benefits from Private Request Sets Private request sets offer two main benefits to end users 1 The request sets that users own are always available to them regardless of which responsibility they are working under 2 Users can create as many request sets as they want without adding request set choices to the list of standard submission concurrent programs that other users must select from System Administrator Request Set Privileges As System Administrator you can create request sets that include any reports or concurrent program e query and edit all request sets using the Request Set form e permit
257. dar Week Start Day profile option to their preferred first day of the week Sunday is the default first day of the week FND Tooltip Calendar Profile Option Users can set the FND Tooltip Calendar profile option to a calendar other than the preferred calendar Within the Date Picker a given date will be displayed in this calendar s format as a tooltip Note This feature applies to Oracle Forms based products only Numeric Format Support In addition to the decimal period dot and comma the space and single quote characters are supported as number group separators Users can choose these number group separators from the Number Format LOV in the Preferences Page Examples of formats that are supported are listed in the table below Group Separator Decimal Separator Example Comma Period 1 000 00 Administering Globalization 18 5 Group Separator Decimal Separator Example Period Comma 1 000 00 Space Comma 1 000 00 Single Quote Period 1 000 00 Space Period 1 000 00 Single Quote Comma 1000 00 Note The JTF applications support only the decimal period and comma as number group separators Multilingual External Documents Oracle E Business Suite ships with a set of external documents or those documents directed toward your customers and trading partners for which we model the data multilingually Any document for which the data model is multilingual can be submitted through a single request to
258. dering For some languages the length in bytes of the month short name is longer than the prepared buffer in a UTF8 database for these languages the UTF8 Date Language is used as the date language in UTF8 environments In databases using other character sets the Local Date Language is used Administering Globalization 18 9 Natural Languages Window File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help ORACLE CAESA A Natural Languages _ Language Code Language Name Description ISO Language Territory Enabled I SUBSE i n ES op t cuum ses es ommno ee amem es ee sem Record 1 1 The Natural Languages window allows you to review information about the languages available for use in Oracle E Business Suite The Natural Languages table allows you to associate the name of a language with another entity such as a person or company e You can add new languages in this window Prefix the language code for new languages with an x e You can update the enabled status of seeded languages e You cannot delete saved records Natural Languages Record Each record includes the Language Code Language Name ISO Language and Territory for each language You can use Oracle Applications Manager OAM License Manager to enable a licensed language 18 10 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Territories Window NLS Code ISO Alternate Description Obsolete
259. description appear in this zone automatically All data groups automatically include an entry for Application Object Library Within each data group an application can be listed only one time Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 81 Oracle ID Select the ORACLE ID you want to assign to an application An application uses an ORACLE ID to access tables in the database Each ORACLE ID allows access to a predefined set of tables in the database Copy Applications From Use this button to copy an existing data group then add or delete application ORACLE username pairs to create a new data group Related Topics Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests page 6 1 Concurrent Conflicts Domains Window amp Oracle Applications OF x File Edit View Folder Tool Window Help ORACLE E olmocgmggsgdumuts mg2 5 ES Concurrent Conflicts Domains o S 3 2 E Short Name Description tandard STANDARD Default conflicts resolution domain u N e N N ele 8 wi NS HE e T c ec Concurrent conflicts domains ensure that incompatible concurrent programs are not allowed to run simultaneously using related information For example a conflict domain could be a range of numbers Two concurrent programs could be incompatible if they used the same range of numbers but compatible if they used different ranges of numbers Co
260. directory 7 Add the arguments that Oracle E Business Suite passes to the program or command file The driver must pass the following to the executable program e Name of the destination printer e Number of copies to print e Banner on title page e Filename e Add the initialization and reset strings to the appropriate fields if the program does not send these strings to the printer Related Topics Overview of Printers and Printing page 9 1 Printer Drivers Window page 9 53 8 18 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 9 Printers Printers and Printing Overview Oracle E Business Suite offers two printing solutions to handle all your printing requirements For most printing needs the Pasta Utility offers quick setup and easy maintenance For additional flexibility Oracle E Business Suite allows you to define your own printer drivers and print styles e To set up your printers using Pasta see Printer Setup with Pasta page 9 10 Note Pasta is required to print using UTF8 e To set up your printers using a custom solution see Customizing Printing Support in Oracle E Business Suite page 9 31 When you run an Oracle E Business Suite report Oracle Reports generates and formats the output A completed report is sent to the operating system by the concurrent manager which issues an operating system print command or calls a custom print program or subroutine that issues an operating sy
261. displaying dates in these calendars based on user preferences The following features are supported e Users can choose a preferred calendar by setting the profile option FND Forms User Calendar FND_FORMS_USER_CALENDAR e For the Hijrah calendar users can display both Hijrah and Gregorian calendars by clicking on a button in the calendar window e With the two calendars displayed a user can pick a date from either the Hijrah or Gregorian calendar in Oracle Forms based products e The displayed Hijrah and Gregorian calendars are synchronized Initially only the preferred calendar is displayed in the Date Picker e Users can choose the first day of week in a Date Picker by setting the profile option FND Calendar Week Start Day FND CALENDAR WEEK START DAY e Dates in a secondary calendar can be displayed as tooltip text in Oracle 18 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Forms based products if the profile option FND Tooltip Calendar FND_TOOLTIP_CALENDAR FND Forms User Calendar Profile Option Users can set the FND Forms User Calendar profile option to their preferred calendar Valid values are e Arabic Hijrah e English Hijrah e Gregorian e Thai Buddha By default the user calendar displays the Gregorian calendar but if this profile option is set to another value that calendar is used FND Calendar Week Start Day Profile Option Users in countries can set the FND Calen
262. displays the top level menu associated with that responsibility Users must have access to this responsibility and menu to use the portlet Integration with Application Development Framework You can integrate an Application Development Framework ADF application from the Oracle E Business Suite home page regardless of how or if the ADF application integrates with Oracle E Business Suite data on the back end For more information on using ADF applications with Oracle E Business Suite see My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 563047 1 Using Oracle Application Framework OAF and Application Development Framework ADF The ADF application must be located on a separate application tier server machine from the Oracle E Business Suite application server The ADF application must be deployed using Oracle WebLogicServer 11g or another appropriate application server 1 Set the value for the profile External ADF Application URL internal name 16 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration FND_EXTERNAL_ADF_URL to the context root of the URL for the application such as https lt host gt lt port gt lt context root gt For example set it to http www myhost com 7001 my context root The profile External ADF Application URL can be viewed and updated on all four access levels by a system administrator Users cannot see or update this profile 2 Create a new Oracle E Business Suite function using the
263. dows operating 8 14 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration system It also explains how to create and register executable printing programs Operating System Names for Printers To register printers in the Printers window of Oracle E Business Suite your Oracle E Business Suite system administrator needs to know each printer s operating system name For Windows you can obtain the printer s name from the Printers folder in My Computer If you register an invalid printer the operating system s default printer will be used instead Standard Print Subroutine The standard printing subroutine that you can select in the Printer Drivers form uses Oracle Application Object Library routines to print reports This requires fewer machine resources than printing through a customized executable program DOS command such as PRINT Executable Printing Programs Oracle E Business Suite supports the use of executable programs for printing However we recommend that you use executable programs only to provide features unavailable through Oracle E Business Suite printer drivers such as e Interpreting special characters in the text passed to the printer For example you need a program to interpret 8 bit characters sent to a 7 bit compatible printer Interpreting arguments passed by Oracle E Business Suite For example you need a program to perform different actions based on different output filenames If you do not need t
264. driver you assign to the new print style for any printer type you use Verify and if necessary Customize Oracle Reports SRW Drivers If you have a printer type that does not properly interpret the control characters in the SRW driver files that set page breaks bold on off and underline on off attributes in your Oracle Reports files you can copy the SRW driver file and modify it Creating Custom Printer Drivers If necessary edit the Initialization string and the Reset string for the printer type you are using Refer to your printer s user guide for instructions The Initialization and Reset fields appear on the Printer Drivers form Edit your Initialization string or Reset string if Your printer type requires different control characters 9 32 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration e The control characters have a different meaning due to your operating system and platform Language translation changes the meaning of the control characters The printer needs special control characters to select different character sets e You want to change the printer s default font for the report Initialization string only Printer Driver Methods There are three methods to invoke a printer driver Command Program Subroutine Example Using the Program Driver Method The concurrent manager can issue an operating system print command and its arguments An operating system print command alo
265. ds the process definition from the database to display the process and its information and provide you access to the related Oracle E Business Suite forms Creating a New Process Navigator Process Note For more information on creating a process see the Oracle Workflow Developer s Guide 1 Open Oracle Workflow Builder 2 Create an item type An item type is a repository that will contain all the components associated with the process you wish to build 3 Create an Item Attribute of type role whose internal name is USER NAME Note Enter a new display name for the message using the format lt Verb gt lt Form Title If the form title already contains a verb then simply use the form title as the display name If the form title does not contain a verb then consider using one of the following verbs Define Assign Run Load Convert Open Set Generate Review 4 Create a message to describe the task that is to be accomplished by a Process Navigator process step 5 Create a form type for the message The seeded processes generally assign these message attributes an internal name of Open Form but this is not required 6 Createa notification activity to represent a Process Navigator process step 7 Create a process activity to represent a Process Navigator Process Note Enter a display name for your process This name appears in the Process Navigator s process list The naming convention for the process sho
266. e oracle default context Description If you set this option to unicode Pasta follows the Unicode BiDi algorithm Setting the value to oracle will use Oracle s algorithm Options are Itr left to right rtl right to left and default depends on NLS_LANGUAGE setting To layout the text set mom this option to y If man not set it to n To shape the text set mom this option to y If not set it to n This option is for Arabic only Possible values are arabic for Arabic numerals hindi for Hindi numerals or context to use Arabic or Hindi depending on the context Required for Arabic data only Equivalent Command Line Option N A N A N A N A N A Setup for Basic Printing with Pasta page 9 10 Defining Configuration Files for Specific Printers page 9 11 Modify Add Printer Type to Use Pasta page 9 12 Setting Margins page 9 13 Printers 9 23 Printing a Report Using the noprint Option page 9 14 Generating Other Formats Using the Preprocessing Option page 9 15 Font Source page 9 16 Language Specific Font Support page 9 17 Command Line Parameters page 9 24 Command Line Parameters When using the Pasta utility from the command line you can use the options below FNDPSTAX options c lt number gt lt number gt specifies the number of copies to print el lt logfile gt Specifies the error log file s path and name The
267. e see Print Styles Window page 9 50 1 Query your existing printer type in the Printer Types window 2 IntheStyle field select the style to which you want to assign a Pasta driver Or if you are assigning Pasta to a style already defined for the printer type delete the driver in the Driver Name field currently associated with the style 3 Inthe Driver Name field select the appropriate Pasta driver For more information on the Printer Types window see Printer Types Window page 9 47 9 12 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Add a New Printer Type to Use Pasta Related Topics If you want to add a new Printer Type you can also add Pasta to your new printer type 1 Navigate to the Printer Types window 2 Enter the Type of printer 3 IntheStyle field use the list of values to select the style to which you want to assign a Pasta driver 4 Inthe Driver Name field select the appropriate Pasta driver from the list of values 5 PASTA LANDSCAPE 6 PASTA PORTRAIT 7T PASTA LANDWIDE 8 PASTA DYNAMIC For more information on the Printer Types window see Printer Types Window page 9 47 Setup for Basic Printing with Pasta page 9 10 Defining Configuration Files for Specific Printers page 9 11 Setting Margins page 9 13 Printing a Report Using the noprint Option page 9 14 Generating Other Formats Using the Preprocessing Option page 9 15 Font Source page 9 16 Language Specific F
268. e 4 2 Set Up Your Printers page 4 2 Specify Your Site level and Application level Profile Options Required with Defaults page 4 3 Define Your Concurrent Managers Optional page 4 3 Define Request Sets Optional page 4 3 Set Up AuditTrail Optional page 4 4 Define Globalization Options Optional page 4 4 Specify Preferences for Oracle Workflow Notifications page 4 4 System Administration Setup Tasks 4 1 Setup Steps Create Accounts for Implementors to Complete Setting Up Create individual Oracle E Business Suite accounts for users who will be completing the implementation of your Oracle E Business Suite Assign these users the full access responsibilities for the products they will be implementing Note Updates by the SYSADMIN user are treated as seed data when applying patches See Overview of Oracle E Business Suite Security Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security Create New Responsibilities Optional A responsibility in Oracle E Business Suite is a level of authority that determines how much of an application s functionality a user can use what requests and concurrent programs the user can run and which applications data those requests and concurrent programs can access Oracle E Business Suite provides a set of predefined responsibilities that you can use You can also define your own responsibilities if the ones provided do not meet your needs See Overview of Oracle E Business S
269. e Concurrent Managers form The default value is 1 Number of sleep cycles integer the internal concurrent manager waits between times it checks for concurrent managers that have failed while running a concurrent request The default value is 20 Name of the printer to which the concurrent managers send request output where the requests are submitted from within a concurrent program if the submitting program parent request does not have a printer associated with it Check this box to enable distributed concurrent processing Shuts down the concurrent managers using normal shutdown methods When shutting down the concurrent managers aborts the concurrent managers Setting Up and Starting Concurrent Managers 8 3 Note This option is currently disabled Checking this box will have no effect File Logging Activation Log The name of the log file generated upon startup of the Internal Concurrent Manager Defaults to CM_ lt SID gt log Deactivation Log The name of the log file generated upon shutdown of the Internal Concurrent Manager Defaults to CS_ lt SID gt log Record Diagnostic Messages Checking this box will cause concurrent managers to produce diagnostic output regularly Note that leaving this box unchecked prevents large log files Save Log History Checking this box prevents log files from being overwritten when the concurrent manager is started Starting the Concurrent Managers Before starting the concurrent
270. e E Business Suite page 11 3 6 72 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Rollback Segment Optionally specify a rollback segment to be used with the concurrent program This rollback segment will be used instead of the default and will be used up until the first commit Important If you specify a rollback segment here your concurrent program must use the APIs END CONCURRENT AF COMMIT and END CONCURRENT AF ROLLBACK to use the specified rollback segment See the Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide Optimizer Mode Optionally specify an optimizer mode You can choose ALL ROWS FIRST ROWS Rules or Choose You would specify an optimizer mode only for a custom program that may not perform well with the default cost based optimizer CBO and needs tuning You can use a different optimizer mode until your program is tuned for CBO Target Node If you are on a PCP RAC environment optionally specify the target node on which requests for this program will run When requests for this program are submitted they run on this node if possible If no specification is made for the concurrent program a request will be picked up by any manager able to run it If the target node is down any available manager will pick up the request for processing and log a message to FND LOG MESSAGES Target Instance Optionally specify a Real Application Cluster RAC instance on which the program will run When requests for
271. e FND STATTAB table before gathering the statistics For a detailed description of the procedure used by this concurrent program see GATHER COLUMN STATS Procedure Parameters Table Owner The owner of the table Table Name The name of the table Column Name The name of the column Estimate Percent The sampling percentage If left blank a default value of 10 is used The valid range is from 0 to 100 Parallel Degree The degree of parallelism to be used for gathering statistics If a Degree is not provided it defaults to the minimum of parallel max servers and cpu count Bucket Size The number histogram buckets Backup Flag The backup flag indicates whether to backup statistics Set this flag to BACKUP if you wish to back up the current column statistics into the FND STATTAB table If left blank it defaults to NOBACKUP Gather All Column Statistics This concurrent program is obsolete Purge FND STATS History Records This program can be run to purge the history records from the FND STATS HIST table This program should be scheduled to run periodically if statistics are being gathered with History Mode as FULL You do not need to run this program if you gather statistics with History Mode as NONE or the default LASTRUN Parameters Purge Mode The Purge Mode can take one of the two values DATE or REQUEST If the mode chosen is DATE history records are Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite 12 7 purged based
272. e Failover Processes value should be smaller than the normal Processes value to lessen the impact on the existing resources allocated on a secondary node When failover occurs the ICM uses the Failover Processes value in place of the normal running processes value as it iterates through service instances to perform queue sizing If you are operating in a parallel concurrent processing environment and you want your manager to operate on a specific node select the name of the node 7 10 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration The primary node if available is the node your concurrent manager operates on If the primary node or the database instance on it goes down your concurrent manager migrates to its secondary node Your concurrent manager migrates back to its primary node when that node becomes available Nodes must be previously registered with Oracle E Business Suite using the Nodes window in Oracle E Business Suite Creating and Editing a Transaction Manager General Enabled Manager Short Name Application Program Library Work Shifts Use this page to create a new Transaction Manager Transaction Managers handle synchronous requests from client machines Navigation Site Map gt Transaction Managers under Application Services gt B Create New or B Edit Enter the following information Check this box if this transaction manager is enabled The name of the transaction mana
273. e Obsolete Generic File Manager Data concurrent program B 27 R Real Application Clusters 13 2 Region defined D 6 Region item defined D 6 Region items creating D 12 Regions defining D 11 Register application 11 15 concurrent program 6 65 6 83 Report Groups defining 6 59 example using a code 6 26 may consist of 6 22 Report Security Groups 6 23 report security groups report sets reports 6 18 responsibility level vs form level 6 22 using 6 22 using a code to customize 6 60 using a code with 6 23 vs report sets 6 1 Report parameters sharing in a report set 6 20 Reports Completed Concurrent Requests 7 15 Concurrent Program Details 6 57 Concurrent Programs 6 57 Report Group Responsibilities 6 27 Report Sets 6 21 Work Shift by Manager 7 16 Work Shifts 7 16 Report Security Groups Report Groups 6 23 Report Sets as concurrent programs 6 11 behavior of program parameters 6 48 defining 6 5 displaying parameters programs vs report sets 6 48 example shared parameters 6 20 incompatibility rules 6 19 6 28 owners of 6 17 preventing parameters from being changed 6 48 printing 6 10 querying in Define Concurrent programs form 6 19 reporting on 6 27 reporting on definitions 6 21 report security groups report sets reports 6 18 request phase and status 6 11 sharing parameters in a set 6 20 System Administrator privileges 6 18 vs report groups 6 1 Request parameters 6
274. e Oracle Application Object Library database tables that you want this ORACLE username to have The Oracle Application Object Library tables contain information for Oracle Application Object Library features such as menus help text and flexfields If you do not have access to these tables you cannot use these features The default value for this field is Enabled e Enabled An enabled ORACLE username has full privileges insert query update and delete to the Oracle Application Object Library database tables e Restricted A restricted ORACLE username has only query privileges to the Oracle Application Object Library database tables This ORACLE username can view Oracle Application Object Library data but cannot insert update or delete information e Disabled A disabled ORACLE username has no privileges to the Oracle Application Object Library database tables This ORACLE username cannot insert query update or delete Oracle Application Object Library information and cannot use Oracle Application Object Library features Two additional privilege types appear associated with ORACLE usernames configured at installation However these privilege types cannot be selected from your list of values e Public The installation process registered an ORACLE username with the Public privilege allowing all users to access the Application Sign On Security form where they must enter a valid Oracle E Business Suite username and password
275. e System Administrator s Guide Configuration Executable Enter the following Name Select the concurrent program executable that can run your program You define the executable using the Concurrent Program Executables window You can define multiple concurrent programs using the same concurrent program executable Parameters Parameters for the concurrent program are listed here To add a parameter click on the Create button Incompatibilities Identify programs that should not run simultaneously with your concurrent program because they might interfere with its execution You can specify your program as being incompatible with itself Conflict Domain Parameter Enter the parameter which will hold the value of the conflict domain of the program For information on conflict domain parameters see Concurrent Conflict Domains page 6 29 Run Alone Indicate whether your program should run alone relative to all other programs in the same logical database If the execution of your program interferes with the execution of all other programs in the same logical database in other words if your program is incompatible with all programs in its logical database including itself it should run alone You can enter any specific incompatible programs in the Incompatible Programs windows Application Although the default for this field is the application of your concurrent program you can enter any valid application name Name The program
276. e System Administrator s Guide Configuration ICX Report Launcher ICX Report Server ICX Report Link These profile options are used by the Oracle Business Intelligence System BIS reports For more information on these see the Oracle Business Intelligence System Implementation Guide Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager 5 11 6 Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests A concurrent program is an executable file that runs simultaneously with other concurrent programs and with online operations fully utilizing your hardware capacity Typically a concurrent program is a long running data intensive task such as posting a journal or generating a report Standard Request Submission SRS is an Oracle E Business Suite feature that allows you to select and run your concurrent programs from a single standard form Submit Request or window Schedule Request Requests to run concurrent programs are called concurrent requests There are two main ways to group concurrent programs Request sets are defined to run several concurrent program in a single request Request groups are used to control access to concurrent programs via responsibilities Both request sets and request groups are discussed in later sections Related Topics Organizing Programs into Request Sets page 6 5 System Administrator Request Set Privileges page 6 18 Organizing Programs into Request Groups page 6
277. e and start the associated concurrent programs A more complex example users may have submitted one request with incompatibility rules and another request to run a program that must be run alone In this case these requests are added to the request table but the Conflict Resolution Manager then checks the statuses of the requests in the table and marks which requests are ready to be run The concurrent managers then read only the ready requests and start their concurrent programs Simple Run Program Request Request Table Standard Concurrent Manager Request to run Program X Managers read requests Program X Request to Started arte run program Specialized Concurrent Managers Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 31 Complex Run Program Request Request Table Request to Managers read ready requests run program Request Standard Program Y to run Started with Program Concurrent incompatibility Y Marks Manager rules programs Conflict ges vd Resolution Manager Request to Request Specialized run Run Alone to run Concurrent Program Z program Program Managers read ready requests Managers Started 23 Related Topics Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests page 6 1 Copying and Modifying Program Definitions page 6 44 Modifying an Incompatible Programs list page 6 47 Concur
278. e database instance on it goes down your concurrent manager migrates to its secondary node Your concurrent manager migrates back to its primary node when that node becomes available Nodes must be previously registered with Oracle E Business Suite using the Nodes window See Nodes page 7 74 Parallel Concurrent Processing Details System Queue If you are operating in a parallel concurrent processing environment and you want your manager to use a platform specific queue management system instead of generic concurrent processing queue management specify the queue or class name of that system For example you may choose a system queue name from a platform specific queue management system like NOS or IBM Load Leveler The primary system queue is the queue you associate with the primary node The secondary system queue is the queue you associate with the secondary node Important To ensure that your manager uses your platform specific queue management system you should start the concurrent managers in the proper mode Refer to platform specific documentation to determine if your platform supports interfacing with system queues For UNIX platforms refer to the appropriate Oracle E Business Suite installation Update For all other platforms refer to the appropriate Oracle E Business Suite installation guide Program Library Concurrent managers can run only those immediate concurrent programs listed in their program library They can al
279. e end date Once disabled a sequence assignment cannot be reactivated Select a sequence to assign to your document definition The sequence s application and the document s application must be the same Once you define a sequence assignment the sequence name cannot be updated later Document Sequences 14 13 If you want to disable the sequence assignment and assign a new sequence to the document definition Document Flexfield combination you must first enter an End Date to disable the current sequence assignment then second create a new record row for the new assignment Document Flexfield The Document Flexfield may consist of none one or two segments Set of Books Select the chart of accounts for your business that is affected by the documents you wish to number Method Select the method that your documents are entered automatic or manual Automatic is when a concurrent process e g an external program enters transaction data into an Oracle E Business Suite product which generates documents Manual is when a document is manually entered using a form in an application Once defined a Document Flexfield definition cannot be updated You may not define additional segments for the Document Flexfield Important To enable this descriptive flexfield use the Descriptive Flexfield Segments window Select the application Application Object Library and the title Document Flexfield Be sure to unfreeze the flexfield
280. e environment variables and startup parameters while the managers are running but your changes will not take effect until the concurrent managers are restarted To put changes into effect shut down the managers make the necessary modifications and restart the managers On Windows platforms the OracleConcMgr lt SID gt service where lt SID gt is the database lt SID gt and the value of the LOCAL variable spawns the concurrent manager programs The OracleConcMegr lt SID gt service is initially created by the Rapid Install program If you need to recreate the service use one of the following two methods From the command prompt C gt cd COMMON TOP admin install C gt adsvcm cmd NT User NT Password where NT User is the user that runs the concurrent manager service and NT Password is the password of the user that runs the service Invoke the GUI program ccmsetup exe located in FND_TOP bin and choose the option to create the service The following entries describe the concurrent manager startup parameters which are read by the concurrent manager service and passed to the concurrent manager programs The GUI program ccmsetup exe located in FND_TOP bin should be used to create and set these parameters in the Windows registry Note that the registry settings override defaults These parameters can also be used by the adcmctl cmd script see the Maintaining Oracle E Business Suite documentation set for more informati
281. e screen Example Sizing Program was last run on 02 SEP 03 Do you want to run the Sizing program again before running the report IN y Enter the Extent Allocation type A utoallocate or U niform Extent Size U U Enter Uniform Extent Size for the Tablespaces in KBytes 128 Option 2 Calculate Total Space Required by Each New Tablespace to Migrate Each Oracle E Business Suite Product Schema Choose Option 2 to calculate total space required by each new tablespace when migrating individual Oracle E Business Suite product schemas one at a time and to generate the report fndtrep2 txt The program prompts your for the following information Schema name enter the percent sign for all schemas Whether the sizing information is current or must be gathered before running the report If you selected Y for the previous option provide the extent management type for the tablespaces since the space requirements are dependent on this 3 14 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration e If Uniform Extent Management provide the uniform extent size for the tablespaces or choose the default value provided on the screen Example Enter the Schema name lt HR gt Sizing Program was last run on 02 SEP 03 Do you want to run the Sizing program again before running the report N Option 3 Calculate Total Space Required by Each Oracle E Business Suite Schema with Details for Each Objec
282. e sets of folders associated with them Source Type Either User or Responsibility Records entered in this window use the source type of User If one of the current user s responsibilities has default folders defined the default folders are listed with a source type of Responsibility User defaults override Responsibility defaults You cannot delete Responsibility default folders in this window Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 11 21 Responsibility The responsibility which uses this default folder definition To Assign Ownership of a Folder Follow these steps to assign ownership of a folder 1 Navigate to the Find Default Folders window Use Folders to view general information about folders 2 Select the folder s that requires a change of ownership 3 Choose Change Owner and enter the new owner for the selected folders or change the value in the Owner field to change the owner of a single folder Folder Set Every folder set is associated with a particular folder block and a user or responsibility can have one default folder within each folder set The folder set name generally describes the records shown in the block some blocks may have multiple sets of folders associated with them Public Whether this folder definition is public whether users besides the owner can use it Use this field to determine whether to make folder definitions generally available Anyone s Default Whether this folder definition is us
283. e to be numbered Sequences versus Assignments Defining a sequence is different from assigning a sequence to a series of documents e A sequence s definition determines whether a document s number is automatically generated or manually entered by the user e Asequence s assignment that is the documents a sequence is assigned to is defined in the Sequence Assignments form Defining Documents for numbering by Assigned Sequences You specify a combination of four rules that define any given document for assignment to a specific sequence name You can then assign a different numbering sequence to each document definition The four rules that when combined define what documents a selected sequence assigns numbers to are Application Category You select the application that generates the documents you wish to number For example to number sales invoices you select Oracle Receivables You select a document category to identify a logical subset of documents For example if you do not want to number all invoices in Oracle Receivables you can choose to number only the category of sales invoices A category identifies a table that stores transactions entered documents generated using an Oracle E Business Suite application The Category values you can choose from to define a Document Sequences 14 5 document are dependent upon the application you select Set of Books You select the chart of accounts for yo
284. eaning gt x description gt end if end OWN MEA DES LOO OWN MEA DES gt SECURI gt VIEW APPSNAM ER NING CRIPTION KUP_TYPE gt SECURI V ER NING CRIPTION 9 VIEW APPSNAME G TY GRO Fl TY GROUP As in the DOWNLOAD the UPLOAD statement for child entities may reference any attributes from the parent record UPLOAD FND LOOKU b egin if UPLOAD MODE fnd lookup values pkg E LOOKUP TYPI LOOKUP COD else fnd lookup values pkg LOOKRUP TYP LOOKUP COD P VALU Fl NLS x lookup type x lookup code X Security group x view application X owner x meaning x descrip tion gt gt gt gt gt x lookup type x lookup code X Security group gt gt x view application X owner gt x meaning gt x description gt x tag gt TAG end if end then TRANSLAT gt SEC gt VIE OWNER EANING DESCRIPTIO LOAD_ROW gt SEC gt VIE OWNER 2M DI ANING SCRIPTIO F n iy E URITY GRO UP W_APPSNAM N Fl Fl URITY GRO E W_APPSNAM N Fl A data file is a portable text file The data file created from a download using the above configuration file would include Loaders B 7 Beg
285. ears when you enter your parameter window You determine whether the default value is a constant or a context dependent value by choosing the default type Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 77 Your default value should be a valid value for your value set Otherwise you see an error message when you enter your parameter window on the Run Request window and your default value does not appear Valid values for each default type include Constant Enter any literal value for the default value Profile The default value is the current value of the user profile option you specify here Enter the profile option name not the end user name Segment The default value is the value entered in a prior segment of the same flexfield window Enter the name of the segment whose value you want to copy SQL Statement The default value is determined by the SQL statement you enter here Your SQL statement must return exactly one row and one column in all cases Validation Information Required If the program executable file requires an argument you should require it for your concurrent program Validation Information Enable Security If the value set for this parameter does not allow security rules then this field is display only Otherwise you can elect to apply any security rules defined for this value set to affect your parameter list Validation Information Range Choose either Low or High if you want to validate your parameter
286. ebug custom forms and programs Described in this chapter are the Forms Personalization Work Directory and Portlet Generator features In addition the CUSTOM library allows extension of Oracle E Business Suite forms without modification of Oracle E Business Suite code For information on the CUSTOM library see the Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide Form Personalization The Form Personalization feature allows you to declaratively alter the behavior of Forms based screens including changing properties executing builtins displaying messages and adding menu entries For each function a form running in a particular context based on parameters passed to it you can specify one or more Rules Each Rule consists of an Event an optional Condition the Scope for which it applies and one or more Actions to perform An Event is a trigger point within a form such as startup WHEN NEW FORM INSTANCE or when focus moves to a new record WHEN NEW RECORD INSTANCE There are standard events that almost every form sends and certain forms send additional product specific events The Scope is evaluated based on the current runtime context to determine if a Rule should be processed or not The Scope can be at the Site Responsibility User or Industry level Each Rule can have one or more Scopes associated with it The Condition is an optional SQL code fragment that is evaluated when the Event occurs if it evaluates to TRUE then the Acti
287. ectory To download files navigate to the Help Download page This page is listed under Help Administration available under the seeded System Administration responsibility Follow these steps to download a single help file 1 SelectSingle File Download 2 Enter search criteria for the file you want 3 Select the file you want from the search results and select Download Follow these steps to download multiple help files 1 Select Bulk Files Download 2 Enterinthe Target Directory and Filter Options as appropriate 3 Select Download Uploading Help Files Once you have customized the help files use the Help System Utility to upload the documents into the help system Your files are uploaded from the upload directory specified in the profile option Help Utility Upload Path Oracle E Business Suite Help 10 3 You can upload different types of files including e HTML files all HTML files must have a htm extension e GIF graphics files must have a gif extension e Adobe Acrobat files must have a pdf extension e Cascading Style Sheets must have a css extension Follow these steps to upload a single help file 1 Copy the customized file to a directory accessible from your desktop 2 Navigate to the Help Upload page This page is listed under Help Administration available under the seeded System Administration responsibility 3 Select Single File Upload 4 Specify the application under which this help file
288. ed as a default by a user ora responsibility If it is a default definition use Default Assignments to view the users and responsibilities for which it is the default folder definition Default Assignments The users and responsibilities that use this folder definition as a default To Delete a Folder Definition Follow these steps to delete a folder definition 1 Navigate to the Find Default Folders window Use Folders to view general information about folders 2 If you queried up multiple folders select the folder s to delete 3 Delete the folder Deleting folders deletes the folder definition along with any user and responsibility default assignments for the folder To Create and Assign a Folder in Restricted Mode 11 22 Use the steps below to create and assign a folder in a restricted mode When user opens a folder in restricted mode all folder functionality is disabled 1 Run the folder form and navigate to the folder block Hide or show fields as you wish Take care in choosing the appropriate fields as the Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration fields that are hidden will not be accessible for users or responsibilities of this folder block after it is assigned to them as a default folder in restricted mode 2 Save the folder 3 Assign the folder as a default folder to a responsibility or user 4 Setthe value of the new Behavior Mode poplist to Restrict fields and folder
289. ed by default The Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Migration Utility enables the following customizations e Changing tablespace names e Registering custom tablespace types e Registering custom object tablespace classifications Changing existing object classifications Migrating Custom or Third Party schemas Login to the Forms based version of Oracle E Business Suite with the System Administrator Responsibility Navigate to Security ORACLE Register and register 3 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration the external schema s if they are not already registered Set Privilege to Enabled Preventing Migration of Specific Schemas In some cases you may not want to migrate some of your schemas such as non Oracle schemas that are registered with Oracle E Business Suite To accomplish this you must disable those schemas by accessing System Administrator responsibility gt Security gt ORACLE gt Register and then selecting either External or Disabled for the schema in question Conversely if you want to flag specific schemas for migration you can enable them by accessing System Administrator responsibility gt Security gt ORACLE gt Register and then selecting Enabled Introduction to the Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Migration Utility The Tablespace Migration Utility is a menu based PERL program that enables you to estimate future space requirement for the tablespace
290. ee Concurrent Processing User Profile Settings Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance Note Some requests may have a required Style or Printer that you cannot change 4 When you are done with the Print Options choose Parameters to display the Request Parameters window Request Parameters Window The Request Parameters window lets you customize the parameter values of a specific request in a request set The fields at the top of the Request Parameters window list general information about the current request set and the request for which you can customize the parameter values The multi row portion of the window lists the parameters for that request 1 TheSequence field displays the order in which each request parameter appears when you run the request in the Submit Requests window lower numbers appear before higher numbers Only your system administrator can change a parameter s order 2 The Prompt field is a display only field that shows the request parameter s prompt 6 14 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 3 Check the Display check box to specify that you can see a request parameter at submission time or uncheck the check box to specify that a parameter should not be displayed at submission time 4 Check the Modify check box to specify that you can insert or change the value for a request parameter at submission time or uncheck the check box to specify that a
291. ee the environment variables and their values This section shows the ICX Forms Launcher profile option setting which should be set to the base URL for launching Oracle E Business Suite forms A List of Forms Servers is also shown with the Host Name Port and Log File location for each Oracle Forms server This section shows the following profile option settings Applications Web Agent Provides the base URL for the Apps Schema s WebServer DAD Oracle E Business Suite uses the value of this profile option to construct URLs for WWW type functions Attachments Export and other features Applications Servlet Agent This profile option must be set to the URL base for the servlet execution engine on Apache Oracle E Business Suite uses the value of this profile option to construct URLs for JSP and SERVLET type functions The syntax is http lt hostname gt lt port gt lt servlet_zone gt Application Framework Agent This profile option must point to the Apache Server A list of Web Servers is also shown with the Host Name Port and Log File location for each web server This section shows the following profile option settings TCF HOST and TCF Port These profile options identify the network location of the TCF Server The TCF Server supports various parts of the Oracle E Business Suite user interface by executing some of their associated server logic and providing access to the database 5 10 Oracle E Business Suit
292. efined For example if you want users of Oracle E Business Suite to be able to print to a newly purchased printer you e Register the operating system name of the new printer for example printer39 and select the printer type for example LN03 e If the correct printer type is not defined you must define the new printer type before you can register the printer Print Styles To generate a report the print style values for columns and rows are passed by the concurrent manager to Oracle Reports A print style determines the dimensions of your report or the number of rows and columns per page 9 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Printer Drivers A printer driver includes the initialization and reset strings that format and restart a printer You need a defined printer driver for each print style that you plan to use with a specific printer type on a specific platform Printing Setup Interrelationships Many printers can be registered as the same printer type e A printer type can support multiple print styles e lt A printer driver must be assigned to a printer type for each print style Many printer drivers can support the same print style e Many printer drivers can support the same printer type See Overview of Printers and Printing page 9 1 Printer Setup Information Is Cached On Demand Related Topics Printer setup information such as Printer Type definitions Print S
293. egories Window sssssssssssseee eene enne nnne nnn 14 10 Document Categories Block 14 10 Sequence Assignments Window eee eene nns 14 12 Sequence Assignments Blocks aiu nne ener eee fece eri petes e en ed 14 12 Assignment Region i uiii d e LT ibo iri gebe ed ode e sa ed Ma nua HR ATE Ld ga TR TR a Ria 14 13 Document Flextield iet aa a eaaa tme ei mdi hed eins 14 14 15 16 17 18 Logging Overview eodd aedes ede d aides de dale aaa whats de aere dde 15 1 How to Configure Logging eene en enn enn enn nnne enne nens 15 1 Logging Guidelines ue ee etie deb aede dede a agde eode 15 6 Developer Tools Developer Pools imeem d i d rect bete ette nea 16 1 Form Personalization sisi ie ete tee het e piede tite eite dete d dete bis 16 1 Work Directory ee ere eer ede nte teile i ees ond bra E erede ed its 16 2 Web Enabled PL SQL Window ssssssesessseeene eene nnne nennen nnne 16 3 PL SQL Object Block teinte rtt sea decet eet etas e er eap edel anes 16 3 Portlet Generator iocis iecit a aaa d M iae hip ni ir die Post e E AN aaa 16 3 Integration with Application Development Framework sse 16 8 Administering Process Navigation Overview of Process Navigation sssssssssssssseee eem ee eene nennen 17 1 What is Oracle Workflow iiss esce iet teret rtt sext tr nex re darte te ru Eaa Rak 17 1 Whatare Seeded Processes diee tdi rede neta dn e Rec nh seda ee
294. en assigned Regions can be defined and then assigned to one or more pages You can define regions that do not display Such regions serve as a way of navigating from one object to another Before performing this task define your objects To define a region 1 Navigate to the Regions folder window If you want to copy an existing region to then modify and save as a new region choose the Copy button Enter a new application name region ID and region name If you are creating a new region from scratch enter the ID for the region Enter a user friendly region name Enter the application associated with the region Select the object name associated with the region Select a region style Single row Multi row Oracle Self Service Web Applications D 11 10 If you selected Single row in the previous step enter the number of columns a field and its label to display in the region before the line wraps Optionally enter a free form description for the region Use the Region Items button to navigate to the Region Items window Creating Region Items Region items are attributes or object attributes that are placed within a region These are typically the attributes that you want to display in the region However there are exceptions to this Prerequisites to this task are Define attributes to associate with regions Define objects Define object attributes to associate with regions Define regions To create
295. ename glob in the current directory Enter all arguments on a single command line They may appear on separate lines here and in the examples that follow depending on the display medium Example 1 FNDGFU apps apps devdb 0 Y PROGRAM_NAME FND_HELP PROGRAM_TAG GL 100 CONTENT TYPE text html LANGUAGE US file1 htm file2 htm connects to apps appsedevdb e identifies uploaded files as part of Oracle General Ledger GL help e identifies the uploaded files customization level as 100 e identifies their MIME type as text html e identifies their language as US English US e uploads the two specified htm files in the current directory in UNIX Example 2 FNDGFU apps apps custdb 0 Y PROGRAM NAME END HELP PROGRAM TAG FEND 100 CONTENT TYPE image gif gif B 26 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration connects to apps apps custdb e identifies uploaded files as part of Application Object Library FND help e identifies the uploaded files customization level as 100 e identifies their MIME type as image gif e does not identify their language which defaults to userenv LANG e uploads all gif files in the current directory in UNIX Purging Generic File Manager Data To purge uploaded files from the Generic File Manager run the concurrent program Purge Obsolete Generic File Manager Data This concurrent program should also be used to periodically expunge expired data It is recommended that you sched
296. ent Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 11 11 ORACLE Users Window B Oracle Applications DE X File Edit View Foder Tools Window Help ORACLE Database Install User Name Password Privilege Group Description T EE CES EXE S f Use this window to register an ORACLE username with Oracle E Business Suite An ORACLE username grants access privileges to the ORACLE database Before registering an ORACLE username create the ORACLE username that matches your application needs this function is usually performed by a database administrator The ORACLE username must include the create session privilege The installation process always registers your ORACLE username so you need not register it unless you create a custom application using Oracle Application Object Library or if you wish to associate an additional ORACLE username with Oracle E Business Suite If you register an ORACLE username as a restricted ORACLE username you submit a concurrent request to set up read only privileges to the Oracle Application Object Library tables An enabled ORACLE username has all privileges to those tables A disabled ORACLE username has no privileges to those tables If you do not register and enable your ORACLE username or if you disable a registered ORACLE username your user cannot use Oracle Application Object Library features such as menus and flexfields You should not change the registration of any OR
297. ent manager is started on its defined primary node or if none exists the node that the ICM assigns to it In case of node or ORACLE instance failure all concurrent managers on that node migrate to their respective secondary nodes if defined A concurrent manager on its secondary node migrates back to its primary node once that node becomes available During migration the processes of a single concurrent manager may be spread across its primary and secondary nodes Internal Concurrent Manager The Internal Concurrent Manager can run on any node and can activate and deactivate Defining Concurrent Managers 7 45 concurrent managers on all nodes Since the Internal Concurrent Manager must be active at all times it needs high fault tolerance To provide this fault tolerance parallel concurrent processing uses Internal Monitor Processes Internal Monitor Processes The sole job of an Internal Monitor Process is to monitor the Internal Concurrent Manager and to restart that manager should it fail The first Internal Monitor Process to detect that the Internal Concurrent Manager has failed restarts that manager on its own node Only one Internal Monitor Process can be active on a single node You decide which nodes have an Internal Monitor Process when you configure your system You can also assign each Internal Monitor Process a primary and a secondary node to ensure failover protection Internal Monitor Processes like concurrent managers
298. ent manager only includes the programs you select You can also include or exclude all programs belonging to a specific application using the Program type by entering the application in the Application field and leaving the Name field empty Request Type of the program For example programs of a certain request type are excluded from running Or conversely a concurrent manager only includes programs with the request type you select User application username at sign on For example all programs submitted by a certain user are excluded from running Or conversely a concurrent manager includes only programs submitted by the user you select Defining Concurrent Managers 7 65 Work Shifts Window amp l Oracle Applications OF x File Edit View Folder Tool Window Help ORACLE Z Work Shifts Name Use this window to name and define your concurrent manager work shifts Define work shifts to specify when your concurrent managers can work For each work shift specify a time period covering a range of days or a particular date See Work Shifts Definitions page 7 3 Name The name of your concurrent work shift should be intuitive for instance Week Days Weeknights or Weekends From To Enter the times of day at which your concurrent shift begins ends The time format is HH24 MM For example if your work shift name is Week Days you could enter 09
299. ently valid To check the Server Security status for a database On UNIX java oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps STATUS DBC dbc file path On Windows jre classpath CLASSPATH oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps STATUS DBC dbc file path Important Check the Server Security status of your databases before you activate server security and ensure that all desired application servers have been registered 2 16 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Adding Updating or Deleting Server IDs Application servers can be registered as trusted machines with a database server This works by generating a large random ID number and storing that in both the application server and the database When the application server attempts to connect to the database it will supply its server ID and the database will verify that it matches a trusted machine The server ID is stored as a parameter in the DBC file for each application server It can also be defined as an environment variable The AdminAppServer utility is used to generate server IDs and then register them with a database server To add a server ID Server ID values are generated by the AdminAppServer utility and therefore cannot be supplied on the command line They will be added to the database automatically when the AdminAppServer is used to create a dbc file On UNIX java oracle apps fnd security AdminAp
300. environment this field displays Target node queue unavailable when the primary and secondary nodes or system queues are not available The actions you can choose for controlling a manager are Terminate When you terminate requests and deactivate the Internal Concurrent Manager all running requests running concurrent programs are terminated and all managers are deactivated Managers previously deactivated on an individual basis are not affected Defining Concurrent Managers 7 51 You can terminate requests and deactivate individual managers All running requests running concurrent programs handled by the manager are terminated Once deactivated a manager does not restart until you select the manager and choose the Activate button Deactivate When you deactivate the Internal Concurrent Manager all other managers are deactivated as well Managers previously deactivated on an individual basis are not affected You can deactivate individual managers Once deactivated a manager does not restart until you select the manager and choose the Activate button When you deactivate a manager including the Internal Concurrent Manager all requests concurrent programs currently running are allowed to complete before the manager s shut down Verify This choice appears only when you select the Internal Concurrent Manager The Internal Concurrent Manager periodically monitors the processes of each concurrent manager You can force
301. equence This field only applies to sequences with automatic or gapless numbering type Sequence numbers should not be greater than eight 8 digits If you leave this field blank the first document is automatically assigned a value of 1 Once a sequence is defined this initial value cannot be changed What is a Document Sequence page 14 1 Document Categories page 14 10 Sequence Assignments page 14 12 Document Sequences 14 9 Document Categories Window d Oracle Applications File Edit View Folder Tools ORACLE Description Table Name Define categories for your documents in order to divide your documents into logical groups which you can number separately by assigning different sequences A document sequence uniquely numbers each document the sequence is assigned to e Using the Sequence Assignments form you assign your sequence to number only documents that satisfy rules you define e Document category or type as it may be titled on some forms is one of the rules that define which documents a sequence assigns numbers to Each category identifies a table that stores documents resulting from transactions your users generate e When you assign a sequence to a category the sequence numbers the documents that are stored in the table Document Categories Block Name a document category and associate a table with the category When you enter this block Oracle automatically
302. er group may run a concurrent program assigned to another A similar situation arises when a user performs a transaction managed by a transaction manager that has a different resource consumer group than the user To resolve such conflicts Oracle E Business Suite uses a hierarchy In the case of a concurrent program the system first checks to see if the program has an assigned resource consumer group and if so uses that If not the system checks the concurrent manager running the program and uses its resource consumer group If the concurrent manager is not assigned to a resource consumer group the system uses the default group Default_Consumer_Group In the case of a transaction manager running a transaction program the system once again checks the resource consumer group assigned to the program if any and if there is none checks the transaction manager If the transaction manager has no assigned resource consumer group the system then checks the profile option value for the user whose session began the transaction If there is no resource consumer group defined the system uses the default resource consumer group For a user running a form the system first checks the profile option value for that user and uses that if it is defined Otherwise the system uses the default resource consumer group 11 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Oracle E Business Suite Password Management Changing passwords
303. er processor file descriptor limit FND IN USE CONNECTION TIMEOUT The maximum number of seconds a connection can be in use In order to avoid connections being locked up for too long the connection cache uses this parameter to forcibly close connections that 2 12 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration have been locked for longer than this specified limit If this parameter is unspecified connections in use will not be cleaned up This should be set to a number larger than the time taken to complete the largest transaction e FND_UNUSED_CONNECTION_TIMEOUT The maximum number of seconds an unused connection can remain in the cache The connection cache will close and remove from the cache any connection that has been idle for longer than this specified limit Important The following parameters are required APPS_JDBC_DRIVER_TYPE must be set to THIN DB_HOST and DB_PORT Administering dbc Files The dbc file is contained on the web applications server and holds information used by the database for authentication The web application server passes the information from the dbc file as well as login information to the database server to authenticate the user The authentication process is handled by the standard applications security feature The dbc files required by the application server security system are not part of the delivered product and must be created after installation The Java utility
304. erride the default setting of Courier font for French language reports to use Helvetica instead add the following to the end of the pasta cfg file FRENCH Font Default Plain printer Helvetica Font Default Bold printer Helvetica Bold Setup for Basic Printing with Pasta page 9 10 Defining Configuration Files for Specific Printers page 9 11 Modify Add Printer Type to Use Pasta page 9 12 Setting Margins page 9 13 Printing a Report Using the noprint Option page 9 14 Generating Other Formats Using the Preprocessing Option page 9 15 Font Source page 9 16 Configuration File Options page 9 18 Command Line Parameters page 9 24 Printers 9 17 Configuration File Options The configuration file pasta cfg governs many printing options The file is a normal ASCII text file that has a simple format described below The options are listed in the following two tables They are divided into Generic Options and Arabic Hebrew and Thai options For each option are listed the Key Name the Default Value if applicable the Description and the Equivalent Command Line Option if applicable Note For options that also have command line equivalents Oracle recommends that you set the value in the configuration file Generic Options Key Name Default Value Description Command Line Equivalent outputFormat ps Two output formats X are supported PostScript ps and text text When the output format is te
305. ers Block sss 7 50 The actions you can choose for controlling a manager are sssssssss 7 51 Reviewing a Specific Manager sssssssssssseseeeemeeenee ennt 7 53 Concurrent Processes Window eiae nennt tea ea deni a e E aad 7 54 Viewing Log Files mE Su ea d e EL oe 7 56 Concurrent Requests Window ee eene en enne 7 57 Request Diagnostics Window nennen nnns 7 58 Concurrent Managers Window ssssssssssssseeee eee eene ennemis 7 59 Concurrent Managers Blocks ineno anna a aE aaa a ea aeara aaa anaa e 7 59 Work Shifts Window cisien i ea opted needed e dre tait 7 62 Specialization Rules WNdOW s adie ed e sse een enne 7 64 Work Shifts Window pede eee te e eed a need epit e E 7 66 Combined Specialization Rules Window sssssssssseee eee 7 68 Combined Specialization Rules Block ssssssssseeeee 7 69 Specialization Rules Block cte 7 69 Concurrent Request Types Window ssssssssssse emere 7 71 Concurrent Request Types Block ssssssssssseseeeeeee eene 7 71 Viewer Options Window 0 ccc eee ee eer ener e ernie neater nne en araa a enata dianshi 1 72 Viewer Options Block vie peel Le i a ea 7 73 Nodes Window eae test te le ca ond te said cada peek Re date slid dae ed eei by 7 74 Nodes Block 2 Pitt teinte Titio iint ita t ba rr ERR LA ei ed eame 7 74 8 Setting Up and Starting Concurre
306. ery up the printer driver to which you want to add the PrintForm option 3 Editthe Arguments field for the printer driver to use the PrintForm in the appropriate directory For example if you place a PrintForm called logo ls pf in the FND_TOP resource US directory and you want to apply the PrintForm to the PASTA LANDSCAPE driver edit the Arguments field as follows Printers 9 27 pn PROFILES PRINTER f PROFILESS FILENAME cSPROFILES CONC_ COPIES 1 pf FND TOP resource US logo ls pf where FND TOP is the actual path for your FND_TOP For more information about this form see Printer Drivers Window page 9 53 Restart the Concurrent Manager You must restart the concurrent manager for this to take effect See Printer Setup Information is Cached on Demand page 9 9 Common UNIX Printing System CUPS Integration CUPS is a third party product that provides printing service to most PostScript printers and raster printers It is based on the Internet Printing Protocol IPP technology making it open to any system that supports IPP CUPS can run on various kinds of Unix systems such as Solaris HP UX AIX Tru64 and major Linux distributions CUPS is provided under the GNU GPL license For more details about CUPS refer to http www cups org Two integration scenarios are described in the following sections e All printers connected to a single CUPS server residing on the E Business Suite con
307. es sssssssssssee eee 11 1 ORACLE Sch mas risien eh ee epp re beret er ini DR Ue LT pain drop sevo 11 1 Registering an ORACLE Schemas ette pie tpe diee tete deese tige 11 2 Initialization Code giten eon tte tet a Eee Re dea getan 11 3 Resource Consumer Groups in Oracle E Business Suite sssssssssss 11 3 Assigning Resource Consumer Groups enn een enne 11 4 Hierarchy of Resource Consumer Group Assignments sss 11 4 Oracle E Business Suite Password Management ssssssssssssseee eee 11 5 ENDGPASS Utility niet gy ier t cb pen Li ie Sei aie i vat 11 5 ENDCGPASS Example vn tits erna a tm ee ee ee tani deren 11 7 AEFEPASSWD Utility itae itae citi pete mena pereat e EA reri atat 11 8 ATPPASSWI USABOeu5e inrer tree free ta et dote a n tee sua eun eu ete usa a Rd Dea 11 9 Using Case Sensitive Database Passwords sss 11 10 ORACLE Users WindOw iei etr e De basi addi cesa bx d pea A taces px oetdanbiatins 11 12 ORACLE Users Block itte tt e i c tb t pha Naa 11 13 Applications Window reed du deed e dee pe ase d ede edo eda 11 15 lise M ae 11 16 Abplications Block 6 aient minana a a tese ie cot taste shen beds 11 16 Network Test Window eme bee ated eiu ees 11 18 Administering Folders eee eee te cede ice n e a bte 11 20 Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite Oracle E Business Suite and Query Optimization ssssssssssss
308. es An executable program should be able to format report output for various print styles including these e Portrait 80 columns wide 66 lines per page e Landscape 132 characters wide 66 lines per page 62 lines per page on A4 style paper e Landwide 180 characters wide 66 lines per page 62 lines per page on A4 style paper Formatting Arguments If the program handles formatting for various print styles internally you can pass arguments from the printer drivers to the program to determine which print style to 8 12 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration use If the program does not contain print style formatting commands you can define the commands in a shell script that calls the program You then define the shell script as the printing program in a printer driver and pass arguments that determine the print style from the driver to the script The printer driver that calls the executable program or shell script must be able to pass the following arguments e Name of the destination printer e Number of copies to print e Banner on title page e Filename Initialization and Reset You do not have to add printer initialization and reset strings to your program if you can define these strings in the Printer Drivers form Character Mode Oracle Reports Commands We recommend that you design your executable programs to work with the standard Oracle Reports print drivers The following standard drivers
309. es that make up a flow Specifically you can specify e HTML page format headers text tables e Object content by associating with Applications Business Views or PL SQL e Business Flows among Objects hypertext links e Page Content fields selection criteria Web Applications Dictionary also serves as a real time execution engine to retrieve information from the database Oracle Self Service applications reference the data dictionary at run time to retrieve data from the database and generate dynamic HTML pages The Web Applications Dictionary provides a means of defining business flows which can then be web enabled All inquiry flows were built using Web Applications Dictionary These can be customized as needed The Web Applications Dictionary is part of Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 and is part of the AK Common Modules Once installed it is accessed in the same manner as all of the core Oracle E Business Suite See Web Applications Dictionary Overview page D 5 Displaying Information Accessed from Servlets and Java Server Pages When you invoke an OSSWA function that displays information as dynamically generated web pages the following sequence of events takes place D 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 1 The user clicks the hyperlink of a function on an OSSWA menu A URL embedded in the HTML source code is accessed from the browser that calls for a Java servlet 2 The Oracle
310. espace model OATM contains nine default tablespaces for applications objects in addition to Undo Temp and System database tablespaces Indexes on transaction tables are held in a separate tablespace dedicated for transaction table indexes whereas all other indexes are held in the same tablespace as the parent base table All Oracle E Business Suite product schemas now have a default tablespace set to point to the TRANSACTION_TABLES tablespace type for data objects and the TRANSACTION_INDEXES tablespace type for index objects The Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model uses Locally Managed Tablespaces and supports either Uniform or Autoallocate extent management Another configuration supported with Locally Managed Tablespaces User Extent Management is of relevance only in case of Dictionary Tablespaces that have been migrated over to Locally Managed Tablespaces Because migration to OATM is performed at the object level and not at the tablespace level User Extent Management is not relevant The default recommended configuration in OATM is Uniform Extent Management The migration utility recommends the default of 128k uniform extents which can be changed to suit the customer database Tablespace types are listed in the following table Tablespace Types Tablespace Type Tablespace Name Content Transaction Tables APPS_TS_TX_DATA Tables that contain transactional data Transaction Indexes APPS_TS_TX_IDX Indexes on transaction tables
311. ess Suite AccessGate My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 975182 1 Using AppsDataSource Java Authentication and Authorization Service and Utilities for Oracle E Business Suite Oracle Application Object Library added new standard Java datasource and Java Authentication and Authorization Service JAAS features plus extended error logging routines to Oracle E Business Suite in Patch 8571001 These features are meant for use with Java EE programs deployed in application servers on external nodes that is nodes other than those where Oracle E Business Suite middle tier is installed These are lightweight implementations that can be used on an external application server without needing to install an entire Oracle E Business Suite instance on the application server machine For more information see AppsDataSource Java Authentication and Authorization Service and Utilities for Oracle E Business Suite My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 974949 1 Using Oracle GoldenGate with Oracle E Business Suite for Operational Reporting You can use Oracle GoldenGate with Oracle E Business Suite for operational reporting in which selected tables are replicated from the primary Oracle E Business Suite database to a secondary duplicate instance This enables read intensive custom reports to be run without using resources on the primary Oracle E Business Suite database For more information see Deploying Oracle GoldenGate to Achieve Operational Reportin
312. ess Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration fine grained control and maximum flexibility over how the objects will be migrated If you need to use the OATM utility in a repeated fashion Step 8 Run Migration in Batch Mode gives you a greater level of automated control If you select OATM Batch Mode the OATM migration utility will first collect all the required information and then perform all necessary checks including checks for the existence of all required scripts invalid indexes database log mode and so on If errors are encountered during the check stage you are prompted to review the logs and correct any issues Any errors during background execution will be recorded in the status table and the process will be terminated Once errors are corrected you can proceed with batch mode migration by restarting the process Option 1 Run Migration in Batch Mode Menu option 8 Run Migration in Batch Mode has two submenus one for the invocation of the batch mode migration and the other for monitoring the progress of batch mode migration In batch mode OATM migration utility will perform the following a check for invalid indexes sizing a check for the disk space usage a check for relevant system parameters creation of new tablespaces generation of migration commands and execution of migration commands Based on the value of the AUTO_START_MIGRATION parameter migration will be either started automatically after preparatory ste
313. ess area e Computer desktop application usage and terminology If you have never used Oracle E Business Suite we suggest you attend one or more of the Oracle E Business Suite training classes available through Oracle University See Related Information Sources on page xix for more Oracle E Business Suite product information Deaf Hard of Hearing Access to Oracle Support Services To reach Oracle Support Services use a telecommunications relay service TRS to call Oracle Support at 1 800 223 1711 An Oracle Support Services engineer will handle technical issues and provide customer support according to the Oracle service request process Information about TRS is available at http www fcc gov cgb consumerfacts trs html and a list of phone numbers is available at http www fcc gov cgb dro trsphonebk html Documentation Accessibility Our goal is to make Oracle products services and supporting documentation accessible to all users including users that are disabled To that end our documentation includes features that make information available to users of assistive technology This documentation is available in HTML format and contains markup to facilitate access by xvii the disabled community Accessibility standards will continue to evolve over time and Oracle is actively engaged with other market leading technology vendors to address technical obstacles so that our documentation can be accessible to all of our customers For mo
314. ess of the machine from which you are running the command To resolve this issue run the STATUS command of AdminAppServer to ensure you are not trying to create a duplicate entry Delete the old entry if you want to replace it Retry supplying the correct value for SERVER ADDRESS Administering Server Security Oracle E Business Suite is deployed in a multi tier configuration with one database server and many possible middle tier application servers The application servers include Apache JSP Servlet Forms Discoverer and also some client programs such as Application Desktop Integrator Any program which makes a SQL Net connection to the Oracle E Business Suite database needs to be trusted at some level Oracle E Business Suite uses the Server Security feature to ensure that such SOL Net connections are coming from trusted machines and or trusted programs The Server Security feature of Oracle Application Object Library supports Basic Configuration Tasks 2 15 authentication of application server machines and code modules in order to access the database When Server Security is activated application servers are required to supply server IDs like passwords and or code IDs to access a database server Server IDs identify the machine from which the connection is originating Code IDs identify the module and patch level from which the connection is originating Code IDs are included in applications code by development The database server can be s
315. essing the header page when printing checks prevents a check from being overwritten and maintains the orderly sequence of check numbers Orientation Enter the orientation of your printed page for example portrait or landscape Related Topics Overview of Printers and Printing page 9 1 Printer Types Print Styles and Printer Drivers page 9 2 Printer Types field help page 9 47 Printers field help page 9 49 Printer Drivers field help page 9 53 9 52 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Printer Drivers Window File Edit View roller Tools Window Help ORACLE avolog2 986 Dea 4097312 ES Printer Drivers SRW Crier Ll L0 ol bAyV9 O Platform Driver Method Driver Method Parameters Ie Cammand E Spool File gram E Standard Input Arguments Initialization Use this window to define your printer driver and printer commands Important You should issue a Restart concurrent manager command for all currently active managers whenever you edit an existing Printer Type Print Style or Printer Driver Oracle E Business Suite ships printer drivers for the following print styles e Portrait e Landscape e Landwide A4 e Dynamic Portrait Oracle E Business Suite also ships printer drivers for specific printer types including the following e Apple Printers 9 53 e DEC LNO3 HP Laserjet II HP Laserjet III HP Laserjet 4 HP line printer
316. ession To switch to a different file path you must exit and restart Oracle E Business Suite To provide a visual indication that an alternate form is in use the developer of the form should specify a different version number for the form in the PRE FORM trigger This version number appears during runtime using Help gt About Oracle Applications For more information see the Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide Web Enabled PL SQL Window Use this form to maintain the FND ENABLED PLSQL runtime registry PL SQL Object Block Name Type Enabled The name of the PL SQL object The type of the PL SQL object The object may be a package package procedure or procedure Check this box to enable the PL SQL object and the Logging Service Portlet Generator The Portlet Generator tool lets you convert existing standalone Oracle Application Framework regions into portlets After you convert or portletize regions these portlets are available to be integrated into any compatible portal product such as Oracle Portal Oracle WebCenter and third party portals To be available for portletization a region must have the following properties Developer Tools 16 3 e Any region to portletize must have an Application Module AM defined and must have its standalone property set to true Aninline region must have an AM defined and have its standalone property set to true e A content region must have an AM defined Note
317. et to allow access only from specific machines and or by code at a desired patch level The application server security feature is not initially activated You should activate it by using the commands described in this section Application Server Security can be in one of three states e OFF Server security is not checked Any application server machine can access the database Code IDs are also not checked Use this option on test systems or if you have full control over the software on all machines which can physically access your database e ON Some level of trust is required to access the database Either the application server must be registered with the database or the code must pass a module and version ID known to be trusted Use this option only if you wish to maintain compatibility with application servers that you cannot yet patch to the code level required for best security e SECURE Full trust is required for access to the database Only registered application server machines may connect to the database and only trusted code modules may connect to the database This is the default setting for Release 12 Server Security Status You can check the Server Security status for a particular database using the STATUS command in the AdminAppServer utility and providing the dbc file corresponding to that database The STATUS command will display whether server security is turned on and whether the server ID in the dbc file is curr
318. eting No entry for Name field AND Exclude Program Oracle Inventory No entry for Name field Net Result The manager reads all requests to run concurrent programs except requests for programs for the application Oracle Sales amp Marketing and requests for programs for the application Oracle Inventory Using multiple Include actions Using multiple Include actions adds more requirements to a combined rule and excludes more kinds of requests You cannot use two Include actions for the same action type Each Include action is an exclusive statement for a particular type of action For example you cannot require a request to be for a program that connects to two different Oracle IDs Include Program Oracle Payables No entry for Name field AND Include Program Oracle Payables Confirm Receipt Batch Net Result The manager only reads requests to run a single program Confirm Receipt Batch and only if that program is from the application Oracle Payables 7 30 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Using Exclude and Include actions You cannot use Exclude and Include actions for the same type of action Each Include action is an exclusive statement for a particular type of action For example it does not make sense to require a request to be for a program that connects to the Oracle ID APPS and disallow a request to connect to another Oracle ID Exclude overrides Include When usin
319. existing dbc file STATUS check the serverID status for a database AUTHENTICATION toggle authentication mode Additional parameters depend on the operation These include DBC The dbc file to modified or used to connect to the database Used with UPDATE DELETE STATUS AND AUTHENTICATION SECURE_PATH Used with ADD This parameter specifies in which directory the dbc file should be created and defaults to the current directory if not provided This parameter should always point to FND_TOP secure DB_HOST Required The host machine of database DB_PORT Required The port of database The default is 1521 DB_NAME For thin drivers The database SID APPS_JDBC_DRIVER_TYPE THICK or THIN This parameter must be set to THIN GUEST_USER_PWD Any valid applications user This parameter defaults to the value of GUEST_USER_PWD profile if not provided If passed with no arguments to an UPDATE call it will refresh with the value from database GWYUID For thick drivers FNDNAM For thick drivers TWO TASK For thick drivers Name of database WALLET PWD Used with the TCF Socket Server in SSL mode SERVER ADDRESS Used with authentication SERVER DESCRIPTION Used with authentication FND MAX JDBC CONNECTIONS The maximum number of open connections in the JDBC connection cache This number is dependent on the amount of memory available number of processes specified in the init ora file of the database and the p
320. extent size you should not change the tablespace name and objects will remain in the respective tablespace with the originally selected extent size and no attempt will be made to migrate them Sizes of those tablespaces should be ignored in the sizing report and alter tablespace statements removed from the create tablespace script Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility 3 3 before the script is run From the main menu select option 7 Run Customization Steps Customization 1 Register new tablespace tablespace type 2 Change name of the existing tablespace 3 Register object classification 4 Change object classification Please select 2 Change name of existing tablespace Enter new tablespace name APPS TS_ Tablespace name for TRANSACTION TAB Enter tablespace type TRANSACTION 1 TX DATA 1MB TABLES ES changed to APPS TS TX DATA _1MB Do you want to continue changing tablespace names Y Enter tablespace type TRANSACTION INDEXES Enter new tablespace name APPS TS TX IDX 1MB The same steps should be performed for all tablespace types for which you want to change the uniform extent size When the customizations are complete please run the following steps as described in the chapter Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Migration Utility page 3 9 e Run the sizing process and create new tablespaces e Run migration command generation e C
321. f REPEAT DAYS parameter 1 parameter n Optional Your program specific parameters If a parameter includes spaces enclose that parameter in double quotes then in single quotes If a parameter contains a double quotation mark as part of the argument precede that mark with a backslash Copying and Modifying Program Definitions These sections explain how you can copy and modify concurrent program definitions Warning Do not overwrite program definitions for existing concurrent programs Copy the program rename it then make any desired modifications to the new program Related Topics Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests page 6 1 Copying and Renaming a concurrent program page 6 45 Defining Program Incompatibility Rules page 6 28 Alter Program Priority page 6 46 Modifying an Incompatible Programs list page 6 47 Concurrent Program Parameters page 6 47 Example of modifying a program s parameters page 6 54 Concurrent Programs page 6 65 Warnings for Modifying Program Definitions page 6 52 6 44 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Copying and Renaming a concurrent program You can copy your concurrent programs and modify them to create new programs with definitions that meet your needs You can modify how a concurrent program operates by changing the program s definition of e incompatible programs e parameters arguments e parameter value sets e printer print style
322. f individual messages by message NAME A runtime file is located in XAPPL TOP gt SAPPLMSG lt LANGUAGE gt msb where APPL TOP is the application basepath APPLMSG is an environment variable whose usual value is mesg and LANGUAGE is the NLS language code for example US or F A typical message file would be SFND TOP mesg US msb Runtime Attributes are NAME NUMBER TEXT The help that you get when you invoke the Message Dictionary Generator without any program arguments i e FNDMDGEN dbuser dbpassword 0 Y is FNDMDGEN Oracle ID password 0 Y language codename application shortname mode filename where mode is DB TO RUNTIME From Database to Runtime file msb Either language codename or application shortname can be wildcarded by passing the value ALL The following describes how wildcards are used From DB Messages come from the FND NEW MESSAGES table Wildcards match all the messages in the database To RUNTIME In the case of wildcards separate runtime files are created for each combination of language and application Loaders B 23 Generic File Manager Access Utility FNDGFU Usage The Generic File Manager GFM is a set of PL SQL procedures that leverages Oracle HTTP Server functionality to provide generic upload and download capabilities of unstructured data between a client usually a web browser and a database FNDGFU is an access utility that allows the u
323. f you run an Oracle Reports program and print the output file the SRW driver that is correct for the destination printer type is chosen by selecting the SRW driver associated with the printer driver Related Topics Overview of Printers and Printing page 9 1 Creating Custom Printer Drivers page 9 31 Print Styles field help page 9 50 Printer Drivers field help page 9 53 Hierarchy of Printer and Print Style Assignments A printer and a print style can be chosen and their identities can be included in a concurrent program s definition When a concurrent program is defined to send its output to a specific printer or is required to generate its output in a specific print style those values cannot be overridden by users or by report set default settings or by user profile default settings Often a default value can be set in more than one way This leads to a hierarchical relationship among the various default settings where one default takes precedence over another The diagram below illustrates the order of how printer or print style values are read by the concurrent manager when submitting a report program to run Important Defining a concurrent program with a default print style or requiring a concurrent program to output a specific print style does not make that style available at a printer You must assign the print style and its corresponding printer driver to each printer type you wish to print from The concurrent manager
324. fined and then assigned to one or more objects Note If you are updating existing attributes and you change a long label you are prompted if you want to change the label for all related object attributes and region items If you choose OK all related labels are changed To define attributes 1 Navigate to the Attributes folder window Do this by choosing the Create Attributes button from the Object Attributes folder window 2 Enteran attribute ID the internal name for this attribute 3 Enter an application to associate with the attribute 4 Enterauser friendly attribute name to be used in lists of values 5 Enteralong label for the attribute The default is the attribute name This is the attribute prompt in your web inquiry application 6 Optionally indicate how the text should appear on the browser bold italic and so on 7 Select a vertical alignment Top Center or Bottom 8 Select a horizontal alignment Left Center or Right Oracle Self Service Web Applications D 9 9 Enter the datatype for the attribute 10 Enter the display length for the attribute value 11 Optionally enter a free form description for the attribute Defining Unique Keys For each object a unique primary key must be defined A primary key ensures that each row of data can be uniquely identified and cannot be duplicated Prerequisites for this task are e Define objects e Define attributes e Define object attributes T
325. fining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 21 defining or editing request set definitions Report Parameters None Report Headings The report headings provide you with general information about the contents of the report Related Topics Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests page 6 1 Organizing Programs into Request Sets page 6 5 Concurrent Programs Report page 6 57 Organizing Programs into Request Groups This essay explains how you can organize your applications programs and reports into request groups It presents the following topics e Request Security Groups e Using Codes with Request Groups e Customizing the Submit Requests Window using Codes e Report Group Responsibilities report Defining a Request Group When defining a request group you can include e all the reports and concurrent programs owned by an application e individual reports and concurrent programs request sets which are collections of reports and concurrent programs that may be selected from an application user s request security groups request set stage functions which are used to calculate the status of stages within a request set 6 22 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Two Types of Request Groups A request group is used by Oracle E Business Suite at two different levels 1 Responsibility level When a request group is assigned to a responsibility it is referred to as a request secur
326. following command in SQL Plus select to char SYSDATE DD MON RRRR HH24 MI SS from dual to ensure the date with time returned are correct for the corporate time zone Applications Profiles and Preferences The profile option Server Timezone SERVER TIMEZONE ID should be set at site level to the standard corporate time zone the time zone in which the server has been set to run Caution This profile option should not be changed once set as existing data will not be updated Users may specify their preferred time zone at user level This is done by setting the Timezone preference in HTML based applications or by setting the Client Timezone profile option in Forms based applications As with most profile options the user will need to log out and log back in for the change to take effect The preferred time zone may be changed as often as needed The profile option Enable Timezone Conversions E 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration ENABLE_TIMEZONE_CONVERSIONS has a default value of No at site level This will cause the applications to continue showing all dates in the corporate time zone Setting this value to Yes will enable the automatic conversion of all date with time fields to the user preferred time zone Important Unless users are notified of this change they may think that they are still operating in the corporate time rather than local time or vice versa and conse
327. for the log file in this case is the log directory used by Jserv 1AS5 ORACLE HOME Apache serv logs OC4J Java System Properties To enable logging for OC4J add the following to the oc4j properties file corresponding to your OC4J Container This is the oacore container typically located in ORACLE_CONFIG_HOME j2ee oacore config AFLOG_ENABLED TRUE AFLOG LEVEL STATEMENT AFLOG MODULE AFLOG FILENAME path to apps log A convenient location for the log file in this case is the log directory used by Ebiz Rapid Install deployed OC4J 6LOG_HOME ora 10 1 3 j2ee oacore Using C Environment variables can be defined for controlling logging for each C process The following examples show how to turn on logging for all modules and levels using C Environment variables For this example we assume that the C process has write permission for the file path to apps log This file can be changed to any other file for which the C process has write permission If you plan to log to a file it is highly recommended that you explicitly override the default file aferror log by setting AFLOG FILENAME The default does not specify a full file path and may not be writable by the middle tier process in some cases 15 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration bin csh setenv AF setenv AF setenv AFI setenv
328. frequently helps ensure database security Oracle E Business Suite provides command line utilities FNDCPASS and AFPASSWD to set Oracle E Business Suite schema passwords These utilities change the password registered in Oracle E Business Suite tables and the schema password in the database The utilities can also change user passwords Note You cannot change a schema name such as APPLSYS or GL after a product is installed with FNDCPASS or AFPASSWD Important Ensure that the entire Oracle E Business Suite system has been shut down before changing any schema passwords All users should log out and the E Business Suite system should be down before running this utility If Oracle E Business Suite user passwords are being changed then the relevant users should not be logged in Important Before changing any passwords you should make a backup of the tables FND_USER and FND_ORACLE_USERID Oracle E Business Suite releases that use an Oracle 11g database may optionally employ case sensitive passwords This capability is enabled by setting the Oracle 11g database initialization parameter SEC CASE SENSITIVE LOGON to TRUE Note The transition to using case sensitive passwords must be managed carefully and take into account the important considerations described later in this chapter FNDCPASS Utility To change the APPS and APPLSYS type 2 schema password Use this command to change passwords for schemas that are used by shared compo
329. g Server Security On UNIX On Windows You can turn the server security feature to OFF ON or SECURE mode using the AdminAppServer utility When you turn off server security you will not change or delete your server IDs You can re enable server security without having to recreate server IDs for existing registered application servers To activate basic server security on UNIX enter on the command line java oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps AUTHENTICATION ON DBC dbc file path To activate full server security SECURE mode on UNIX enter java oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps AUTHENTICATION SECURE DBC dbc file path To deactivate server security on UNIX enter java oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps AUTHENTICATION OFF DBC lt dbc file path jre classpath CLASSPATH oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps AUTHENTICATION ON DBC dbc file path To activate full server security SECURE mode from the command line enter jre classpath CLASSPATH oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps AUTHENTICATION SECURE DBC dbc file path To deactivate server security from the command line enter jre classpath CLASSPATH oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps AUTHENTICATION OFF DBC lt dbc file path 2 18 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configura
330. g for Oracle E Business Suite My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 1112325 1 19 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration A Oracle Application Server with Oracle E Business Suite Introduction This appendix lists documents that describe the use of Oracle Application Server with an Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 environment Using Oracle Application Server 10g with Oracle E Business Suite Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 utilizes Oracle Application Server 10g as a core part of the technology stack In addition you can optionally deploy Oracle Discoverer Oracle Internet Directory Oracle Portal and Oracle Single Sign On with E Business Suite Release 12 Benefits of utilizing optional Application Server components include e Performance scalability and high availability via distributed architectures e The ability to connect a single Enterprise Portal to web providers running on multiple Release 12 instances e Uniform Single Sign On support for all Release 12 applications Bidirectional Oracle Internet Directory to FND_USER synchronization with selective cardinality of synchronization for individual user attributes e Link on the fly support for environments where the Single Sign On user IDs in Oracle Internet Directory differ from the Release 12 user IDs e One to many support for environments where a Single Sign On user ID may be associated with one or more Release 12 user ID
331. g multiple lines within a Combined Rule the Exclude action always overrides a Include action Include Program Oracle Payables Invoice Import AND Exclude Oracle ID APPS2 Net Result The manager reads requests to run the Oracle Payables Invoice Import program but will not run the program when it connects to the Oracle ID APPS2 The Exclude action overrides the Include action Specializing a manager to run one program submitted by one user You can define a combined rule that instructs a manager to only read requests to run a single program when submitted by a specific user Include User Sheryl AND Include Program Oracle Project Accounting Distribute Usage Costs Net Result The manager only reads requests submitted by Sheryl to run the Distribute Usage Costs program Restricting the programs a manager will run for a specific user You can define a combined rule that instructs a manager to ignore requests to run a certain programs when submitted by a specific user Include User Sheryl AND Exclude Program Oracle Project Accounting Expenditure Status Defining Concurrent Managers 7 31 Net Result The manager only reads requests submitted by Sheryl excluding requests to run the Oracle Project Accounting program Accounting Expenditure Status Specifying Oracle ID and excluding a program from a request type Include Request Type Oracle Project Accounting Expenditure Reports AND Include Oracle ID APPS2 AN
332. ge 6 65 Incompatible Programs Window page 6 74 Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 79 Data Groups Window E Oracle Applications File Edit View Folder Tool Window Help ORACLE za P sO emi I AoW Data Groups Data Group Description _ Application Oracle ID Description Copy Applications From Note Data groups are no longer supported This section is provided for reference only Use this window to define data groups A data group is a list of Oracle E Business Suite and the ORACLE usernames assigned to each application e Ifacustom application is developed with Oracle Application Object Library it may be assigned an ORACLE username registered with Oracle E Business Suite and included in a data group An ORACLE username allows access to an application s tables in an ORACLE database Alldata groups automatically include an entry for Application Object Library e Aconcurrent manager running reports or programs under Oracle E Business Suite refers to a data group to identify the ORACLE username it uses to access an 6 80 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration application s tables in the database e Transaction managers running synchronous programs can only run programs submitted from responsibilities assigned the same data group as the transaction manager If you create custom data groups you should create new transac
333. ger The short name for your transaction manager The application associated with the transaction manager The combination of an application and the short name you specify here uniquely defines the transaction manager Select a library of immediate transaction programs to make available to your manager Your manager can only run immediate transaction programs that are registered in the selected program library Transaction managers can run only those immediate transaction programs listed in their program library They can also run transaction programs that use any other type of transaction program executable Use the Work Shifts section to assign work shifts to your manager A work shift defines the dates and times the manager is enabled as well as the number of processes the manager can start running during the work shift Defining Concurrent Managers 7 11 Sleep Seconds Processes Nodes To add a work shift use the Add from Available Shifts button For each work shift listed the following is displayed The sleep time for a transaction manager determines how often a manager will check to see if it should shut down Tip Set the sleep time to be very brief during periods when the number of requests submitted is expected to be high The number of operating system processes you want your work shift to run simultaneously Each process can run a concurrent request For example if a work shift is defined with three 3 target
334. ger Reports except the program Account Analysis Preventing specific programs from running You can use an Exclude action more than once For example suppose your manager reads all requests to run concurrent programs for a particular application but you want to prevent your manager from running two specific programs You can Include Program Oracle General Ledger No entry for Name field AND Exclude Program Oracle General Ledger Consolidation Audit AND Exclude Program Oracle General Ledger Consolidation Rules Net Result The manager reads requests for any concurrent programs for the application Oracle General Ledger except for the programs Consolidation Audit and Consolidation Rules Specializing to run only specific programs at certain times Using multiple Include rules you can specialize a manager to run only specific programs Then when you define the manager s work shift you can control when the manager reads requests to run the specific programs Include Program Oracle Payables Invoice Aging Report OR Include Program Oracle Purchasing Receipt Accruals Net Result The manager only reads requests to run the Oracle Payables Invoice Aging Report or the Oracle Purchasing Receipt Accruals program Tip If you only wanted these two reports run during the night you can define the manager s work shift to run from 2 00am 6 00am 02 00 06 00 Tip When you first submit the requests to Defining Concurrent M
335. gers determine what drivers to use depending on what the print style is and what printer type the report is to be sent to You need to define a printer driver for each print style that you want to use with a specific printer type on a specific platform Sequence of Printing Events The concurrent manager associates a print style and a printer driver with the destination printer s printer type This combination of print style and printer driver is defined in the Printer Types form A printer driver tells the destination printer how to interpret the format An SRW Driver formats text and sets page breaks within an Oracle Reports file Sequence of Printing Events Example 9 4 The following is an example of the sequence of printing events 1 A user submits a request to run a report from the Run Reports form 2 Arequest to run the report is added to the requests table 3 Aconcurrent manager reads the request 4 The concurrent manager calls Oracle Reports to run the report and passes the SRW Driver name If Report Copies 0 and the Printer field is blank the Print Style s SRW Driver is used If Report Copies gt 0 and Printer is required then the Printer Driver s SRW Driver is used Note For concurrent requests running Oracle Report concurrent programs a printer needs to be identified or associated even when the number of copies is set to 0 The concurrent manager passes Print Style information Columns and Rows to Oracle Re
336. ges are grouped under the Functional Administrator and Functional Developer responsibilities Oracle Self Service Web Applications Some features of Oracle Self Service Web Applications OSSWA are supported for backward compatibility and described in an appendix Time Zone Support This appendix introduces the User Preferred Time Zone Support feature in Oracle E Business Suite Controlling Access to the Oracle Forms based Applications Diagnostics Menu The Diagnostics menu for Forms based applications in Oracle E Business Suite provides access to numerous functions including those used in diagnostics and customization This appendix describes how to control access to this menu and its entries using profile options and Oracle User Management Other Volumes for System Administrators Listed below are other volumes in the Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Documentation Set Please refer to the Preface for additional related guides Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security describes security 1 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration concepts setup tasks and maintenance tasks done in the following areas Oracle User Management Function Security in Oracle Application Object Library Data Security in Oracle Application Object Library User and Data Auditing Oracle Single Sign On Integration optional Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenan
337. gle application user You can even define a second higher priority username for a user to sign on with Defining Managers and their Work Shifts page 7 1 Work Shift Definitions page 7 3 Using Work Shifts to Balance Processing Workload page 7 5 Work Shift by Manager Report page 7 16 Work Shifts Report page 7 16 Specializing Managers to run only certain programs page 7 17 Grouping Programs by Request Type page 7 33 Administer Concurrent Managers page 7 50 Concurrent Managers page 7 59 Work Shifts page 7 66 Creating Services within Oracle Applications Manager Creating and Editing a Concurrent Manager General Enabled Manager Use this page to create a new concurrent manager Navigation Site Map gt Request Processing Managers under Application Services gt B Create New or B Edit You can define when a manager runs and how many programs the manager can start simultaneously when you assign work shifts to the manager Specify which programs a manager can start by defining specialization rules Enter the following information Check this box if the manager is enabled The name of the manager 7 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Short Name Application Cache Size Program Library Resources Group Rules The short name of the manager The application name does not prevent a manager from starting programs associated with other applications To restrict
338. got Password URL allows the user to have a password reset Language Picker e Corporate Policy message Oracle User Management must be installed for Register URL and Forgot Password URL to be enabled The ICX login page http server port OA HTML US ICXINDEX htm redirects the 2 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Passwords Language user to the central login page AppsLocalLogin jsp If in a previous release you customized the ICX login page previously with a custom logo you should make a copy of the new ICX login page and replace the existing image with your custom image in the copied file The location for the company logo is OA MEDIA FNDSSOCORP gif Ensure that the image is appropriately size Also you should change the text of the message FND ORACLE LOGO in Message Dictionary to the appropriate text The following login URL is supported but no new features are being added to it http server port OA HTML jtflogin jsp If the Oracle E Business Suite instance is Single Sign On enabled the servlet directs the user to the Single Sign On login page Note that in previous releases of Oracle E Business Suite user passwords were treated as case insensitive Now Oracle E Business Suite user passwords can optionally be treated as case sensitive depending on the mode you choose Case sensitivity in passwords is controlled by the profile option Password Case Option The current brow
339. gram exactly as you identified it in the Execution File field of the Concurrent Program Executable window plus an extension if necessary The following table lists the file extensions used for these programs and the directories where the programs should reside This does not apply to PL SQL stored procedures which are stored in the database The directories are under your custom application s TOP directory lt PROD gt _TOP If you use shared PL SQL libraries with your Oracle Reports programs and you want to include the libraries you write for your custom application place the libraries in the APPLPLS directory under your custom application s TOP directory Tool Extension Directory Comments SQL Plus and sql APPLSQL The program name is PL SQL case sensitive and must exactly match the Execution file you defined with Oracle Application Object Library 6 34 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Tool Extension Directory Comments Oracle Reports rdf APPLREP Oracle Application Object Library looks for the rdf file first It uses the rex file if it does not find the rdf file The program name is case sensitive and must exactly match the execution file name you defined with Oracle Application Object Library SQL Loader ctl APPLBIN Pro C Concurrent Programs When you write a concurrent program in Pro C copy the skeleton programs EXMAIN c and EXPROG c from the directory
340. gram whose completed concurrent requests you wish to report on Choose only an application name without a program name if you wish to run a report on all completed concurrent requests associated with an application Program Name Choose the name of a program whose completed concurrent requests you wish to report on You must enter a value for Program Application Name before entering a value for Program Name User Name Choose the name of an application user whose completed concurrent requests you wish to report on Start Date End Date Enter the start date and end date for your report Report Headings The report headings list the specified parameters and provide you with general information about the contents of the report Related Topics Reviewing Requests Request Log Files and Report Output Files Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance Defining Concurrent Managers 7 15 Managing Concurrent Processing Files and Tables Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance Using Time Based Queues page 7 7 Specializing Managers to run only certain programs page 7 17 Grouping Programs by Request Type page 7 33 Work Shift by Manager Report This report documents the work shifts assigned to each concurrent manager Use the report when defining or editing concurrent managers Report Parameters None Report Headings The report headings provide you with general information about
341. guide explains how to navigate enter data query and run reports using the user interface UI of Oracle E Business Suite This guide also includes information on setting user profiles as well as running and reviewing concurrent requests Oracle E Business Suite User Interface Standards for Forms Based Products This guide contains the user interface UI standards followed by the Oracle E Business Suite development staff It describes the UI for the Oracle E Business Suite products and how to apply this UI to the design of an application built by using Oracle Forms Oracle iSetup Developer s Guide This manual describes how to build test and deploy Oracle iSetup Framework interfaces Oracle iSetup User s Guide This guide describes how to use Oracle iSetup to migrate data between different instances of the Oracle E Business Suite and generate reports It also includes configuration information instance mapping and seeded templates used for data migration Oracle Workflow Administrator s Guide This guide explains how to complete the setup steps necessary for any product that includes workflow enabled processes It also describes how to manage workflow xxi processes and business events using Oracle Applications Manager how to monitor the progress of runtime workflow processes and how to administer notifications sent to workflow users Oracle Workflow Developer s Guide This guide explains how to define new workflow business p
342. guration File sse B 19 Request Groups Configuration File ccc eee eee meme ene B 20 Security Information Configuration File eme B 21 Message Dictionary Generator sss eene ene eeen eene ene B 22 Message Repositories iip sesi puhke e a e Seek tr RU Tee RAS EE Te datu d e Ya de cea de a B 22 BEC B 23 Generic File Manager Access Utility FNDGTFU sssssese eee B 24 Ur t sean caates B 24 Example of FNDGFU Upload sse nennen B 25 Purging Generic File Manager Data sss ene B 27 Purge Obsolete Generic File Manager Data sssssss eee B 27 Program Parameters ee Le adie Veste de di ede wai ded TL dde da A TE uia B 27 C Functional Administrator and Functional Developer Tasks Overview of Functional Administrator and Functional Developer Responsibilities C 1 D Oracle Self Service Web Applications Overview of Oracle Self Service Web Applications HTML based Applications D 1 Oracle Self Service Web Applications Architecture sssssssssseeeeeme D 1 Web Applications Dictionary Overview ssssssessssee eene D 5 Setting the Folder Mode ee edd bee petere deese e eism D 6 Web Applications Dictionary Tasks eee enne D 7 Defining Objects eeu ctt eR MP bU UM EEA D 7 Assigning Attributes to Objects nepis dhein anaiai nnan aai saa aaeei tenane na a
343. h Index page 10 8 e Customizing Help Navigation Trees page 10 8 e Customizing Help in a Global Environment page 10 16 Customizing help files involves utilities available under Help Administration from the seeded System Administration responsibility These utilities include the Help Builder and the Help Upload and Help Download functions Downloading and Uploading Help Files The Generic File Manager Access Utility FNDGFU is used for downloading and uploading help files For an overview of this utility see Generic File Manager Access Utility FNDGFU page B 24 Oracle E Business Suite help files are stored in the database The Oracle E Business Suite Help Administration pages of the Help System Utility are provided for retrieving and replacing them in the course of customization Setting Help System Utility Profile Options Before using the Help Download or Help Upload pages you should define the upload and download directory paths Oracle E Business Suite provides profile options for you to set these paths Use the profile option Help Utility Download Path to define the directory location to which the Help System Utility will download files Use Help Utility Upload Path to define the directory location from which your customized files will be transferred back into the Oracle E Business Suite Help System Identifying Help Files for Customization Help files are downloaded by file name To identify the specific file that you want to
344. h ongoing operation The tasks involved in these functions are described in the Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Documentation Set in these three volumes e Configuration e Security e Maintenance This Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration volume describes the tasks involved in setting up and configuring Oracle E Business Suite These tasks may be done once upon installation or may also be done as needed such as setting up a printer or customizing online help files Basic Configuration Tasks This chapter describes some of the recommended manual setup steps for Oracle Application Object Library This chapter can also be used as reference for maintaining an Oracle E Business Suite installation For complete instructions on setting up a new installation see Oracle E Business Suite Installation Guide Using Rapid Install Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and the Tablespace Migration Utility The Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model also called the Oracle Applications Tablespace Model or OATM has fewer consolidated tablespaces twelve including three system tablespaces temporary system and undo segments Locally managed tablespaces are also supported The Tablespace Migration Utility is a menu based Perl program that enables you to Introduction 1 1 estimate future space requirements for the tablespaces and to migrate to the Oracle E Business Suite database to OATM System
345. h process can run a concurrent request For example if a work shift is defined with three 3 target processes the manager can run up to three requests simultaneously 7 62 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Parameter Sleep Seconds Enter the parameter string for a service under Generic Service Management The value of this field is dependent on the service type definition These parameters are used only for managers that are services such as the OAM Generic Collection Service the OPP the Workflow services and so on The parameters are specific to each service For example the OPP service uses these parameters oracle apps fnd cp opp OPPServiceThread 2 0 max threads 5 This tells the service to use the class OPPServiceThread use 2 service threads and use a maximum of 5 request threads Enter the sleep time for your manager during this work shift Sleep time is the number of seconds your manager waits between checking the list of pending concurrent requests concurrent requests waiting to be started Tip Set the sleep time to be very brief during periods when the number of requests submitted is expected to be high Defining Concurrent Managers 7 63 Specialization Rules Window Include Exclude Type B Oracle Applications ofj x File Edit View Folder Tool Window Help ORACLE TONN See Aa TA Specialization Rules Application Specialization Rules Include Exclud T
346. haracter settings The execution file is a SOL script The execution file is a SQL Plus script The execution file is a C or Pro C program The execution file is a program written to run as a subroutine of the concurrent manager We recommend against defining new immediate concurrent programs and suggest you use either a PL SOL Stored Procedure or a Spawned C Program instead PL SQL Stored Function that can be uesd to calculate the completion statuses of request set stages 6 62 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Execution File Name Enter the operating system name of your execution file Some operating systems are case sensitive so the name entered here should match the file name exactly Do not include spaces or periods in the execution file name unless the execution method is PL SQL stored procedure or Request Set Stage Function The maximum size of an execution file name is 60 characters Subroutine Name Enter the name of your C or Pro C program subroutine here Do not use spaces or periods in this field Only immediate programs or spawned programs using the Unified C API use the subroutine field We recommend against defining new immediate concurrent programs and suggest you use either a PL SQL Stored Procedure or a Spawned C Program instead Stage Function Parameters The Stage Function Parameters button opens a window that allows you to enter parameters for the Request Set St
347. hat provide a starting point document owners edit the models instead of creating documents from scratch Tutor software includes tools for keeping documents up to date and distributing them on a need to know basis e Authoris the tool used by individual document owners to create and edit MS Word documents quickly and easily e Publisher is the tool used to 1 build desk manuals by job title 2 build student and instructor guides by job title or topic and 3 ensure document integrity through the generation of a wide range of cross reference reports Together these three components help companies overcome the operational challenges of documenting and maintaining business practices For more information please see the Tutor Author User Manual the Tutor Publisher User Manual and the Tutor Implementation Guide 10 18 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 11 Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties Overview of Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties Oracle E Business Suite database administration DBA combines the efforts of an Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator and an ORACLE database administrator ORACLE Schemas Upon installation of Oracle E Business Suite a number of schemas sometimes called ORACLE schemas are present in the database You do not need to create these schemas however you should change the default passwords These schemas come from different sources and can by de
348. hat provides a list of objects that generated an error during the migration process that includes the error details This option prompts you to enter the schema name and generates report fndtrep10 txt Example Enter the Schema name lt HR gt Phase 3 Post Migration Steps Caution When a standby database exists and or you want all transactions to be recoverable on a database tablespace or object wide level it is recommended that you check that all objects have appropriate values for the logging attribute before and after the OATM migration process to ensure that all transactions are logged and can be recovered through media recovery Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility 3 21 Step 6 Run Post Migration Steps Select Step 6 Run Post Migration Steps to determine which objects have not yet been migrated to OATM to enable constraints triggers policies and start queues and to re size old tablespaces The Run Post Migration Steps menu contains the following options 1 Run Audit Reports 2 Enable the Constraints Triggers and Policies and Start Advanced Queues 3 Re size Old Tablespaces 4 Generate script to drop empty tablespaces Note After running post migration steps you must perform a complete refresh of all materialized views This is a required manual step that is not included in the Tablespace Migration Utility menu Option 1 Run Audit Reports Select Option 1 to generate a report tha
349. he FNDPSTAX command line option as follows Fpcl cfg Pasta will look for pcl_ lt printer gt cfg first and if it is not found Pasta will use pcl cfg as the default These files must be placed under the FND_TOP resource directory The F command line parameter can be set in the Arguments field of the Printer Drivers window See Printer Drivers Window page 9 53 Printers 9 11 Related Topics Setup for Basic Printing with Pasta page 9 10 Modify Add Printer Type to Use Pasta page 9 12 Setting Margins page 9 13 Printing a Report Using the noprint Option page 9 14 Generating Other Formats Using the Preprocessing Option page 9 15 Font Source page 9 16 Language Specific Font Support page 9 17 Configuration File Options page 9 18 Command Line Parameters page 9 24 Modify an Existing Printer Type to Use Pasta If your printer is already assigned to a printer type that contains styles and drivers that you want to maintain you can add Pasta to the existing printer type To add Pasta to an existing printer type you must associate one of the Pasta printer drivers with a print style on the Printer Types window The seeded Pasta printer drivers are e PASTA_LANDSCAPE e PASTA_PORTRAIT e PASTA LANDWIDE e PASTA DYNAMIC You can associate a Pasta driver with an existing print style or you can create a new print style To create a new print style use the Print Styles window For more information on defining a print styl
350. he Global Configuration page Note Changes to the cache components definition s Time Out Type and Time Out After values will not be put into effect until after the middle tier is bounced Through the Global Cache Configuration page you can update the cache statistics and cache policy for all the cache components e Cache Statistics You can choose to enable statistics for all the cache components However doing so may affect the performance of the system You can also clear statistics for all the cache components e Cache Policy You can set the Global Idle Time profile option which refers to the duration after which any object is marked invalid You can also clear all cache components which removes all the cache components from the middle tier Changing the cache policy can affect performance Note Enabling or disabling the statistics collection of the cache components only affects the current Java Virtual Machine JVM To enable disable statistics collection in other JVMs bounce those JVMs The same is true for changes to the Global Idle Time profile option Functional Administrator and Functional Developer Tasks C 7 D Oracle Self Service Web Applications Overview of Oracle Self Service Web Applications HTML based Applications Important This information is provided for backward compatibility only The Oracle Self Service Web Applications including Self Service Expenses Self Service Human Resources Internet Pro
351. he Node Trust Level profile option for every Web server you may wish to set it to a default level of trust at the site level such as level 1 If no value is set for the Node Trust Level profile option for a Web server the Web server is assumed to have a trust level of 1 Administrative Restricting Access to a Responsibility To restrict access to a responsibility set the security based Responsibility Trust Level internal name APPL_SERVER_TRUST_LEVEL profile option value for that responsibility to be the number 1 2 or 3 Setting this profile value ensures that only Web servers with the same or greater privileged trust level may access that responsibility Like the Node Trust Level profile option the default value for the Responsibility Trust Level is 1 When fetching the list of valid responsibilities for a user Oracle E Business Suite checks to find only responsibilities with a Responsibility Trust Level value greater than or equal to the Web server s Node Trust Level In this way a responsibility with Basic Configuration Tasks 2 19 Responsibility Trust Level set to 1 would only be available if the Web server has the Node Trust Level set to 1 as well A responsibility with Responsibility Trust Level set to 2 would only be available if the Web server has Node Trust Level set to either 1 or 2 Oracle Application Object Library AOL J Setup Test Suite The AOL J Setup Test Suite consists of Java Server Pages JSPs and can be used to
352. he configuration file to determine how such rows are handled These download and upload capabilities allow profile value information that is defined in one database to be easily propagated to other databases This is useful for delivering Oracle E Business Suite seed data to customers as well as for copying customer profile definitions from a primary site to other sites The text file version of profile value data is also useful for bulk editing operations which can be accomplished more efficiently with a text editor than with a form Preservation of data FNDLOAD uses the OWNER and LAST UPDATE DATE attributes to determine whether to overwrite pre existing data The rules applied are 1 Iftheentity being uploaded is not present in the database a new entity is always inserted 2 Entities uploaded from a file with OWNER SEED never overwrite entities with OWNER CUSTOM in the database 3 Entities with OWNER CUSTOM uploaded from a file always update entities with OWNER SEED in the database B 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 4 If the owner of the entity is the same in the file and database the entity is updated only if the LAST UPDATE DATE in the file is later than the LAST UPDATE DATE in the database FNDLOAD Executable The Generic Loader is a concurrent program named FNDLOAD The concurrent executable takes the following parameters FNDLOAD apps pwd 0 Y mode configfile datafile entity
353. identifies the requests a customized standard submission form can select See Customizing the Submit Requests Window using Codes page 6 26 Requests Block Type Related Topics Specify the requests and request sets in the request group Choose program or set to add one item or choose application to include all requests in an application Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests page 6 1 Organizing Programs into Request Groups page 6 22 Using Codes with Request Groups page 6 23 Customizing the Submit Requests Window using Codes page 6 26 Report Group Responsibilities Report page 6 27 6 60 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Concurrent Program Executable Window E Oracle Applications File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help ORACLE avol za P 46 OD eal 4OOe 2 S Concurrent Program Executable Executable Short Name Application Description emnes Oracle Reports Execution File Name Subroutine Name stage Function Parameters Define a concurrent program executable for each executable source file you want to use with concurrent programs The concurrent program executable links your source file logic with the concurrent requests you and your users submit to the concurrent manager Important You cannot add new immediate programs to a concurrent manager program library We recommend that you use spawned concurrent programs instead Con
354. if a branch node is selected a branch node will be added beneath it It a leaf node is selected a leaf node will be added beneath it When adding a branch node as a sibling to an existing branch node be sure that the selected branch node is not expanded If the existing branch node is expanded the new node will be added as a child to the selected branch 3 Enter information for the new node in the Properties Pane and click Apply 4 Click Save to save your changes Adding nodes from one tree to another To add nodes from one tree to another 1 Open the tree for editing page 10 11 2 From the View menu select Find Trees 3 Inthe Find Trees window select Node from the Type poplist and enter search criteria for the nodes you want to add Click Find Nodes corresponding to the information you enter appear on the Trees tab of the main Help Builder window 4 Drag nodes from the Trees tab and drop them on the tree 5 Click Save to save your changes Changing the organization of a tree To change the organization of a tree Caution Changes made to nodes added from another tree are reflected in the original tree and all other trees that include them 1 Open the tree for editing page 10 11 2 To move a node drag the node from its current location and drop it at its new location in the tree 3 Todelete a node select it and click Delete on the toolbar or select 10 14 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s
355. ifications has exceeded modpercent are selected for statistics gathering Indexes of these tables are selected by default Table monitoring needs to be enabled before using this option GATHER EMPTY Statistics are gathered only for tables and indexes that are missing statistics LIST AUTO This option does not gather statistics It only provides a listing of all the tables that will be selected for statistic gathering if the GATHER AUTO option is used LIST EMPTY This option does not gather statistics It only provides a listing of all the tables that will be selected for statistics gathering if the GATHER EMPTY option is used Modpercent Applicable only to GATHER AUTO and LIST AUTO 12 14 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Exceptions Invalidate options This parameter specifies the percentage of modifications with respect to the total rows that have to take place on a table before it can be picked up for AUTO statistics gathering This flag indicates whether cursors dependent on the table being analyzed should be invalidated By default dependent cursors are invalidated This parameter is ignored if you are running a database prior to Oracle 9i Release 2 9 2 x ORA 20000 Schema does not exist or insufficient privileges ORA 20001 Bad input value GATHER_INDEX_STATS Procedure This procedure gathers statistics for the specified index Syntax Parameters FND STATS
356. ig to Manage System Configurations with Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 Knowledge Document 387859 1 on My Oracle Support For more information on Oracle Applications Manager see Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager page 5 1 From the Oracle Applications Manager Site Map AutoConfig is on the Administration tab under the System Configuration heading Click on the AutoConfig link to go to the tool s home page From the AutoConfig home page you can view details of a context file by clicking Show For example you can see Version Path Creation Date Last Updated By Status for example Write succeeded and Comments You can select a context file and choose Edit Parameters This is the only supported way to modify parameters that AutoConfig maintains if you edit any context files manually they will be overwritten the next time AutoConfig is run Under Edit Parameters choosing the Local tab will open a screen that shows environment related details including local host machine name virtual hostname used to connect local domain name and platform type Basic Configuration Tasks 2 23 You can select a context file and click on Show History to see details of any previous configurations The Custom tab under Edit Parameters allows you to add a new context variable not maintained by AutoConfig to the context file This is the only supported way to add customizations Related Topics Configuration Overview page 5 8
357. ignated as a required print style then other print styles may be selected either as a default for a report in a report set or at runtime when submitting the report if two conditions are satisfied e The print style complies with the concurrent program s minimum values for columns and rows entered on the Concurrent Programs form e The print style has been assigned to the destination printer s printer type entered on the Printer Types form The following table describes the print style assignment hierarchy Printers 9 41 Form Explanation Concurrent Programs System Administrator As System Administrator you can require a concurrent program to generate its output in a specific print style This setting cannot be overridden at runtime or when defining a report in a report set If a Print Style is entered in a program definition but is not required it serves as the first default setting to be read Request Set System Administrator As System Administrator you can assign a default print style to a report within a report set Request Set Application Users Users can assign a default print style to a report within a report set when they own the report set This default setting can be changed by the System Administrator System Administrator Printer and Print Style Settings Program Definitions Printers and Print Styles As System Administrator you can restrict programs to send their output files only to a spe
358. igration Utility 3 15 Option 1 Generate the Tablespace Creation Script Option 1 prompts you for the extent allocation type such as Autoallocate Uniform Extent and Uniform Extent Size which will be used for creating the new tablespaces The utility prompts for the name of the directory in which the datafile will be created For every tablespace created as part of OATM the utility prompts you for information such as number and size of the datafiles The utility will append a sequence number to the tablespace name and a dbf extension to generated the datafile name For example if you enter the datafile directory as u01 oradata and for transaction data tablespace APPS_TS_TX_DATA you enter the number of datafiles as 2 and size as 2000M the utility will create tablespace creation script with 2 datafiles for the tablespace named a01 oradata APPS_TS_TX_DATAO1 dbf and uOl oradata APPS TS TX DATAO2 dbf each of size 2000M To create datafiles of different sizes or in different locations you must modify the generated script crtts sql If you do not have limited disk space create all tablespaces with the estimated sizes listed in report 1 This will eliminate the need to extend the tablespaces as the migration proceeds If you do not have enough disk space to create all the tablespaces with the total size use the estimated values in report 2 Schema Name for reference If your operating system has a limit on the size of a dbf file e
359. ils region Token field Concurrent Program Executables Execution Method field Concurrent Programs Executable Information region Method field Some report programs are written to produce a precise output Changing the output definition could prevent the program from running or produce poor results Dynamic print style informs the program to generate its output based on output dimensions that may vary Special coding within a program is required to support the Dynamic print style Programs are defined to expect x number of parameters If you add a new parameter x 1 the program will ignore it Deleting a parameter can cause a program not to run Programs expect values of a certain type and length Programs may not operate if value set is changed Programs expect values of a certain type and length Program may not operate if expected token is not received Concurrent programs whose execution method is Immediate must be registered with the program library FNDLIBR Application developers can register programs with program libraries System Administrators cannot Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 53 Related Topics Copying and Modifying Program Definitions page 6 44 Concurrent Program Parameters page 6 47 Example of modifying a program s parameters page 6 54 Concurrent Program Details Report page 6 57 Example of modifying a program s parameters Consider the following exa
360. ime Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility 3 11 Example lt OATM Migration Configuration File gt lt OATM gt lt APPL_ TOP gt SENVS APPL TOP lt FND_ TOP gt SENVS lt FND TOP CONNECT STRING atgtsmqa CONNECT STRING gt APPS SCHEMA APPS APPS SCHEMA XAPPLSYS SCHEMA APPLSYS APPLSYS SCHEMA X ALLOC TYPE U ALLOC TYPE lt UES gt 1024 lt UES gt lt DBF_DIR gt slot05 oracle atgtsmqadata DBF DIR INDIVIDUAL DATAFILE SIZE 2000 INDIVIDUAL DATAFILE SIZE NUM WORKER 8 NUM WORKER MIGRATION SCHEMA MIGRATION SCHEMA lt AUTO START MIGRATION gt Y lt AUTO START MIGRATION gt lt OATM gt If an OATM configuration file is provided values specified in the configuration file can still be overridden by values provided interactively A summary of all provided information will be displayed and can be reviewed and corrected if needed Note Please note that the configuration file will not be modified accordingly by information entered interactively Values provided interactively will have an effect only for the OATM session when provided No new tags added to the configuration files will be recognized All values specified in the OATM configuration file above are just an example not Oracle recommended values Understanding the Tablespace Migration Utility M
361. in Entity Definitions DEFINE FND LOOKUP TYPE KEY VIEW APPSNAME VARCHAR2 50 KEY LOOKUP_TYPE VARCHAR2 30 BASE OWNER VARCHAR2 6 TRANS MEANING VARCHAR2 80 TRANS DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 240 DEFINE FND LOOKUP VALUE KEY LOOKUP CODE VARCHAR2 30 BASE END DATE ACTIVE VARCHAR2 10 D BASE OWNER VARCHAR2 6 ING VARCHAR2 80 I RIPTION VARCHAR2 240 BASE TAG VARCHAR2 30 END FND LOOKUP VALUE END FND LOOKUP TYPE End Entity Definitions BEGIN FND LOOKUP TYPE FND YES NO OWNER SEED EANING Yes or No Z iral BEGIN FND LOOKUP VALUE Y OWNER SEED MEANING Yes END FND LOOKUP VALUE BEGIN FND LOOKUP VALUE N OWNER SEED MEANING No END FND LOOKUP VALUE END FND LOOKUP TYPE Oracle Application Object Library Configuration Files Oracle Application Object Library provides several configuration files for the Generic Loader that you can use with your setup data These configuration files operate on the following data e Concurrent program definitions e Request groups e Lookup types and lookup values Profile options and profile option values e Flexfields setup data e Attachments definitions e Messages B 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configura
362. in Oracle E Business Suite FNDCPASS logon 0 Y lt system password gt ORACLE username new password Use the above command with the following arguments When specifying the ORACLE token FNDCPASS expects the next arguments to be an ORACLE username and the new password logon The Oracle username password system password The username and password for the SYSTEM DBA account username The Oracle username For example GL new password The new password For example the following command changes the GL user password to GL1 11 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration FNDCPASS apps apps 0 Y system manager ORACLE GL GL1 To change all ORACLE type 3 schema passwords Use this command to change the passwords of all schemas provided by Oracle Application products FNDCPASS lt logon gt 0 Y lt system password gt ALLORACLE lt new_password gt Use the above command with the following arguments When specifying the ALLORACLE token FNDCPASS expects the next argument to be the new password logon The Oracle username password system password The username and password for the SYSTEM DBA account new_password The new password For example the following command changes all ORACLE schema passwords to WELCOME FNDCPASS apps apps 0 Y system manager ALLORACLE WELCOME To change an Oracle E Business Suite user s password You can use this command to change
363. ination of application name plus program name uniquely identifies your concurrent program Update Annotation Optionally enter an annotation for the Integration Repository for the concurrent Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 83 Enabled Program Application Short Name Program Type program Indicate whether users should be able to submit requests to run this program and the concurrent managers should be able to run your program Disabled programs do not show up in users lists and do not appear in any concurrent manager queues You cannot delete a concurrent program because its information helps to provide an audit trail You see this longer more descriptive name when you view your requests in the Requests window If this concurrent program runs through Standard Request Submission you see this name in the Submit Requests window when you run this program The program s application determines what ORACLE username your program runs in and where to place the log and output files Enter a brief name that Oracle E Business Suite can use to associate your concurrent program with a concurrent program executable Available options are e Archive reserved for future use only e Autoconfig Type Cloning reserved for internal use only e Generic e Purge for concurrent programs listed in the Oracle Applications Manager dashboard used for purging data e Refresh e Truncate 6 84 Oracle E Business Suit
364. iness Suite product for example invoices generated by Oracle Receivables Using the Sequence Assignments window you assign your sequence to number only those documents that satisfy rules you define Document Sequences 14 7 A document sequence numbers documents generated by an Oracle application for example journal entries generated by Oracle General Ledger Document sequences ensure that every document your users create can be accounted for See Sequences Assignments page 14 12 Document Sequences Block Name Application Define the name type of numbering scheme effective dates and initial value for your document sequence Once entered sequence names cannot be changed Once selected the application associated with your sequence cannot be changed Audit records for your sequence are stored in the application s audit table titled Application Short Name_DOC_SEQUENCE_AUDIT For example the audit table for a sequence owned by Oracle Payables is AP_DOC_SEQUENCE_AUDIT Effective From To Type Enter the dates on which your document sequence takes effect is no longer enabled The Start on field automatically defaults to the current date and once a sequence is defined the start date cannot be changed If you leave the End on field blank your document sequence does not expire and if you enter an end date and define your sequence the end date cannot be modified later If there is no end date defined and there are no acti
365. ing Internal Monitor Internal Monitors monitor the Internal concurrent manager in a parallel concurrent processing environment If the Internal Concurrent Manager exits abnormally for example because its node or its database instance goes down an Internal Monitor restarts it on another node Transaction Manager Transaction managers handle synchronous requests from client machines Cache Size Concurrent Manager only Enter the number of requests your manager remembers each time it reads which requests to run For example if a manager s workshift has 1 target process and a cache value of 3 it will read three requests and wait until these three requests have been run before reading new requests In reading requests the manager will only put requests it is allowed to run into its cache For example if you have defined your manager to run only Order Entry reports then the manager will put only Order Entry requests into its cache If you enter 1 the concurrent manager must look at its requests list each time it is ready to process another request By setting the cache size at a higher number the concurrent manager does not have to read its requests list each time it runs a request However the manager does not recognize any priority changes you make for a particular request if it has already read that request into its cache Further even if you give a higher priority to a new request that new request must wait until the buffer is emp
366. ing 15 9 e Ina Forms based application navigate to Help menu gt Diagnostics gt Logging OAM gives you the capability to perform the following Search using various criteria Concurrent Program Request ID Session ID User ID and so on Drill down to view related logs e View log attachments e Add logs and attachments to the Support Cart Select valid values using Interdependent Lists of Values e Export Download Logs in CSV format Delete logs e Configure logs based on logging profiles e View a log summary e Drill down from the OAM Concurrent Processing Request page to the request log Access to the OAM Logging functionality is controlled using Oracle Application Object Library function security The seeded responsibilities System Administration and System Administrator have the logging functions assigned For other responsibilities use the following e Full access Search Configure Delete OAM_BF_SYSLOG_ALL_MENU Log Search All Functions Menu This menu contains e Search OAM BF SYSLOG READ ONLY MENU Log Search Read Only Menu e Delete OAM BF SYSLOG DELETE Log Delete function e Configure OAM BF SYSLOG CONFIG Log Setup function Oracle Forms Navigate to Help Diagnostics Logging 15 10 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 16 Developer Tools Developer Tools Oracle E Business Suite provides several tools to help developers create and d
367. ing down and restarting the database Thereafter new and changed database passwords will be case sensitive with the case of the password being preserved as it 11 10 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration was entered Existing database passwords will remain case insensitive until changed after which they will become case sensitive Once password case sensitivity has been enabled a DBA should immediately change passwords of the administrative accounts such as SYS and SYSTEM and may also wish to employ a password management policy profile to ensure system administrators change the Oracle E Business Suite database passwords within a reasonable time After being enabled password case sensitivity can subsequently be disabled by setting SEC_CASE_SENSITIVE_LOGON FALSE and shutting down and restarting the database In such a case all Oracle E Business Suite database passwords stored in the FND_ORACLE_USERID table must be reset or database authentication will fail It is therefore advisable to avoid disabling password case sensitivity if possible Additional Considerations for Oracle E Business Suite DBAs Be aware of the following points e An important exception to the standardization of mixed case passwords is the password for the APPLSYSPUB account which remains as always being in upper case e Passwords with special characters or multibyte characters are not supported with Oracle E Business Suite at pres
368. ing them to new owners determining which folder definitions should be public accessible by anyone and setting the AutoQuery behavior of the folders You can do different tasks depending on how you search for folders or folder assignments in the Find Default Folders window You can assign a default folder to a user or responsibility in restricted mode such that all folder functionality is disabled at runtime for the user In this way you can for example prevent users from seeing specific fields or control which records they can query This behavior is controlled by the Behavior Mode poplist value set when the folder is assigned You must have default folders before you perform these steps To Assign a Folder to a Responsibility Follow these steps to assign a folder to a responsibility 11 20 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 1 Navigate to the Find Default Folders window Use Default folder assignments by responsibility to view the responsibilities for which to assign default folders 2 You can assign default folders for each responsibility When users of this responsibility navigate to this folder block they see the default folder you specify unless it is overridden by a user level default From the Folder field enter the name of the default folder The name of the folder set to which the folder belongs is filled in automatically If you do not know the name of the folder enter the f
369. ink to an Application Development Framework ADF application from the Oracle E Business Suite home page regardless of how or if the ADF application integrates with Oracle E Business Suite data on the back end For more information on using ADF applications with Oracle E Business Suite see Using Oracle Application Framework OAF and Application Development Framework ADF My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 563047 1 Also see Integration with Application Development Framework page 16 8 Integrating Oracle E Business Suite with Oracle Access Manager using Oracle E Business Suite AccessGate Oracle E Business Suite supports authentication of application users using Oracle Access Manager through the Oracle E Business Suite AccessGate application Oracle E Business Suite AccessGate is a Java EE application that is deployed to a WebLogic Server instance and works in conjunction with Oracle Access Manager and Oracle Internet Directory OID to enable single sign on capabilities for your entire enterprise Integration of Oracle E Business Suite with Other Products 19 1 This application is currently targeted primarily at customers who have already deployed Oracle Access Manager in other organizations within the company and who wish to extend the authentication capabilities of Oracle Access Manager to Oracle E Business Suite instances More information can be found in Integrating Oracle E Business Suite with Oracle Access Manager using Oracle E Busin
370. inst a sample XML file ConvertToRAC xml which you modify to meet the particular requirements of your system In order to validate and test the settings specified for converting to Oracle RAC with rconfig rconfig should be run in Verify only mode prior to running the actual conversion This will perform a test run in which rconfig will validate parameter settings and report any issues that need to be resolved before the actual conversion is undertaken Establishing the Oracle E Business Suite Environment for Oracle RAC On the Oracle E Business Suite side a number of steps are needed to prepare the environment for Oracle RAC Follow the detailed instructions in the relevant knowledge document under My Oracle Support Knowledge Document Note 745759 1 Oracle E Business Suite and Oracle Real Application Clusters Documentation Roadmap In summary you need to 1 Run AutoConfig on the Applications database tier 2 Checkthe tnsnames ora and listener ora files in the SINST TOP ora 10 1 2 network admin and INST TOP ora 10 1 3 network admin context name 3 Ensure that the correct TNS aliases have been generated for load balance and failover 4 Ensure that all the aliases are defined using the virtual hostnames 5 Verify the dbc file located at SFND SECURE Ensure that the parameter APPS JDBC URL is configured with all instances in the environment and load balance is set to YES Configuring Parallel Concurrent Processing with
371. ion If the user selects an alternative language the login page is refreshed in that alternative language Logging in and logging back out will display a URL with the correct language value The URL can be bookmarked Important In Oracle E Business Suite Release 11 5 10 the language name icons could be hidden by setting a Local Login Mask profile option In Release 12 this profile option is no longer available To hide the language name icons use the Oracle Application Framework Personalization feature Login Page Language and Runtime Session Language Users must ensure that the language used for the login page is the language they want to use for their Oracle E Business Suite runtime session The runtime session will start in the language used in the login page After logging in users can if they wish change the runtime session language from the Preferences screen By default the ICX Language profile value is not used to determine the runtime session language when logging in through the login page However this behavior can be modified by setting the Applications Override SSO Server Language profile option ICX Language Profile Option The ICX Language profile option is used for the following e Default language to use for offline with other users on the system For example the language to use for an e mail notification to be sent to a user on the system and which may be read offline from the system e Default language to use for o
372. ion file to determine what data to access For information on specific configuration files consult the Open Interfaces Guide for your product group The following sections describe the operation of the Generic Loader Warning Use only the loader files provided by Oracle E Business Suite If you use files not provided by Oracle E Business Suite or modify the provided scripts you risk corrupting your database Oracle does not support the use of custom loader files or modified Oracle E Business Suite loader files The Generic Loader can download data from an application entity into a portable editable text file This file can then be uploaded into any other database to copy the data Conversion between database store and file format is specified by a configuration file that is read by the loader The Generic Loader downloads data from a database according to a configuration lct file and converts the data into a data file ldt file The Generic Loader can then upload this data to another database using a configuration file The loader operates in one of two modes download or upload In the download mode data is downloaded from the database to a text file in the upload mode data is uploaded from a text file to the database Data structures supported by the loader include master detail relationships and foreign key reference relationships In both downloading and uploading the structure of the data involved is described by Loaders B 1
373. ion in Oracle E Business Suite 12 3 program see BACKUP_TABLE_STATS Procedure Parameters Schema Name The name of the schema The value ALL means all Oracle E Business Suite schemas Table Name The name of the table Statistics ID An optional identifier to associate with these statistics within FND_STATTAB The default STATID is BACKUP Partition Name Name of the table partition If the table is partitioned and if the partition name is NULL then global and partition table statistics are exported Restore Table Statistics This concurrent program allows you to restore the previously backed up table statistics for a given statistics identifier commonly referred to as the STATID All index and column statistics associated with the specified table are restored as well For a detailed description of the procedure used by this concurrent program see RESTORE_TABLE_STATS Procedure Parameters Schema Name The name of the schema The value ALL means all Oracle E Business Suite schemas Table Name The name of the table Statistics ID An optional identifier to associate with these statistics within FND_STATTAB The default STATID is BACKUP Partition Name Name of the table partition If the table is partitioned and if the partition name is NULL then global and partition table statistics are imported Gather Schema Statistics This concurrent program gathers the specified schema level statistics Before gathering the statistics
374. ion shortname of application that owns the help file Custom Level Customization level of the node 100 is the default for customer use Levels under 100 are reserved for system use Oracle E Business Suite Help 10 15 Data Description Filename Icon Language Node Application Node Key Prompt Target Title Type Version If the node links to a help file the file name or a target name preceded by an symbol or an absolute URL Longer description of the node if the Prompt is terse Otherwise may simply repeat the Prompt Pre upload filename of the help file Not used Language code of help files covered by the node Application shortname of the application that owns this node If different from the value given for the ROOT this node and all the nodes it branches into have been grafted into the tree from another application String that uniquely identifies the node in this Node Application The node key can be generated automatically or typed into the field for a new node However once references to the node exist the node key cannot be changed The text that appears on the tree for this node Anchorname contained in the help file Do not precede with an sign in the Find Documents window Title of the help file ROOT Top most node of a navigation tree NODE Node that branches into other nodes but is not the ROOT If Data is not null it links to a help file as well DOCUMENT
375. istrator s Guide Configuration AFPASSWD Usage The AFPASSWD command is used with the relevant command line options to perform the desired action AFPASSWD c lt APPSUSER gt lt TWO_TASK gt f lt FNDUSER gt AFPASSWD c lt APPSUSER gt lt TWO_TASK gt o lt DBUSER gt AFPASSWD c lt APPSUSER gt lt TWO_TASK gt a AFPASSWD c lt APPSUSER gt lt TWO_TASK gt 1 ORACLEUSER lt TRUE gt FALSE AFPASSWD c lt APPSUSER gt lt TWO_TASK gt L lt TRUE gt FALSE AFPASSWD c lt APPSUSER gt lt TWO_TASK gt s lt APPLSYS gt These options have the following functions c APPSUSER TWO_TASK Specifies the connection string to use the Applications user and or the value of TWO TASK This option can be use in combination with others If it is not specified default values from the environment will be used Note The password will be prompted for and is not to be provided in the connection string f FNDUSER Changes the password for an Applications user A username that contains spaces must be enclosed in double quotation marks for example JOHN SMITH o DBUSER Changes the password for an Oracle E Business Suite database user Note This only applies to users listed in the FND ORACLE USERID table not database users in general a Changes all Oracle ALLORACLE passwords except the pa
376. it into parts The special syntax which is explained in detail below looks like this For more about widgets see lt A HREF widgets widgets gt All About Widgets lt A gt Oracle E Business Suite help files use this syntax and you can use it too in your custom help files Or if you prefer you can always use conventional hypertext links based on filename Linking Help Files includes the following topics e Special Link Syntax page 10 5 e Cross Application Links page 10 6 e Related Topics Links page 10 7 e Context Sensitive Help page 10 7 Special Link Syntax Links in Oracle E Business Suite help files point not at a particular filename but rather at one of the named anchors contained in the file The Oracle E Business Suite help system resolves anchorname to file dynamically every time a link is negotiated Information on which files contain which anchornames is put into the help system automatically on upload Authors must ensure that anchornames are unique across an application s help files to prevent duplicate links In return they need never worry about a change in filename breaking their links Named Anchors in Conventional HTML By named anchor is meant the following kind of HTML tag lt A NAME anchorname gt lt A gt Named anchors can be placed anywhere in the body of an HTML file and are typically used for links internal to the file in question A pound sign is placed before the anchorname i
377. ith its path in the Name field of the Printer Drivers form Arguments to the program may be entered in the form s Arguments field When the printer driver method is Subroutine the concurrent manager calls a predefined Oracle E Business Suite subroutine that passes a print command and arguments to the printer via the operating system The subroutine name is entered in the Program Name field of the Printer Drivers form The concurrent manager may provide values for four arguments to an operating system print command or custom print program e the name of the file to be printed e the operating system name of the target printer e the title of the file which appears on a header page if it is printed e the number of copies to be printed Printer Types Print Styles and Printer Drivers The commands that a printer can understand vary from one type of printer to another A printer type identifies a printer by manufacturer and model A print style tellsthe printer how a printed output should look A printer driver delivers commands that tell the printer how to output the specified print style The ability to print a report in a particular print style depends on the type of printer the report file is sent to For each print style that a particular type of printer can print a printer driver specific to the printer type and the operating system is required 9 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Printer Type
378. ity group and it defines the reports request sets and concurrent programs that a user operating under that responsibility can select from the Submit Requests Window 2 Formlevel When a request group is assigned a code that code can be passed as a parameter to the Submit Requests Window The code helps define the function that calls the Submit Requests Window The list of values for that unique Submit Requests Window lists the reports request sets and concurrent programs in the request group Request Security Groups Related Topics When a request group is assigned to a responsibility the request group is referred to as a request security group Any user signed on under a responsibility can run the reports and concurrent programs contained in their responsibility s request security group The Submit Requests standard submission form displays a list of all the reports and programs in the current responsibility s request security group Using Codes with Request Groups page 6 23 Customizing the Submit Requests Window using Codes page 6 26 Report Group Responsibilities Report page 6 27 Request Groups page 6 59 Using Codes with Request Groups Normally when a menu calls the standard request submission form that form can list the reports and concurrent programs contained in the report security group for the current responsibility Alternatively you can assign a code to a request group so that a customized standard submis
379. ke once a month However statistics on some volatile tables can be gathered as frequently as required Oracle E Business Suite provides a set of procedures in the FND STATS package to facilitate collection of these statistics FND STATS uses the DBMS STATS package to gather statistics Warning You should not run DBMS STATS directly Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite 12 1 FND STATS GATHER SCHEMA STATS uses a parameter called OPTIONS If set to GATHER AUTO this option allows FND STATS to determine automatically the tables for which statistics should be gathered based on the change threshold The Modifications Threshold can be adjusted by the user by passing a value for modpercent which by default is equal to 10 GATHER AUTO uses a database feature called Table Monitoring which needs to be enabled for all the tables A procedure called ENABLE SCHEMA MONITORING has been provided to enable monitoring on all tables for a given schema or all Applications schemas Gathering Statistics for the CBO Oracle E Business Suite provides concurrent programs that use the package FND STATS to gather statistics for your applications database objects For information on DBMS STATS see Oracle Supplied PL SQL Packages Manual The following concurrent programs are available for collecting and maintaining statistics e Gather Table Statistics e Backup Table Statistics e Restore Table Statistics e Gather Schema Statistics e Purge FND STATS
380. key attribute name gt lt datatype gt BASE TRANS CTX lt attribute name gt lt datatype gt DEFINE child entity D entity za Example DEFINE ENU z ID NUMBER MENU S USER MENU NAME VARCHAR2 80 S DESCRIPTION CLOB NE ENTRY S A S G SUBMENU S USER SUB MENU NAME EFERENCES MENU ARCHAR2 60 OB QAS J E DESCRIPTION DOCUMENT D ENTRY END MENU One or more KEY attributes defines the primary key of each entity BASE and CTX attributes are those that do not require translation TRANS attributes do Note that BASE and CTX attributes are treated identically That is CTX is just a synonym for BASE The CTX attribute type is provided merely to allow users to optionally differentiate between BASE attributes For example translators may wish to simplify their ldt files by stripping out the BASE attributes However they may also want to keep some BASE attributes for context By denoting some attributes as BASE and some as CTX they can control which attributes to remove Data types can be standard Oracle scalar types except that only VARCHAR2 size NUMBER and CLOB are currently supported An attribute can also be defined as a foreign key reference to another entity in your configuration file The foreign key entity must be a top level entity an
381. le Application Framework pages Ensure that you have the relevant profile options set appropriately Follow these steps to use the Tree mode 1 Log in to Oracle E Business Suite with the system administrator responsibility 2 From the Oracle E Business Suite Home page select Personalize Page 3 Select Apply in the Choose Personalization Context page 4 Under Personalization Structure expand the following nodes Table Layout topTableLayoutContainer gt Row Layout tableLayoutRow gt Cell Format worklistResponsibilityLeftCell gt Table Layout Home Contenttable Basic Configuration Tasks 2 5 Under the node Table Layout Home Contenttable gt Row Layout responsibilityRow click the Personalize icon Change the value for the Rendered property for the column Function Applications Home Page to false Select Apply Click on the Personalize icon for Table Layout Home Contenttable gt Row Layout appsNavTreeRow Change the value for the Rendered property for the column Function Applications Home Page to true Select Apply Select Return to Application Administering Oracle HTTP Server Oracle HTTP Server Powered by Apache provides the communication services within Oracle Application Server This facilitates deployment of HTML based applications within a multi tiered computing environment Oracle HTTP Server All incoming client requests to Oracle Internet Application Server A
382. le using the Concurrent Program Executables window You can define multiple concurrent programs using the same concurrent program executable See Concurrent Program Executables page 6 61 Executable Executable Options Some execution methods such as Oracle Reports support additional execution options or parameters You can enter such options in this field The syntax varies depending on the execution method If you define a concurrent program with the bitmapped version of Oracle Reports you can control the orientation of the bitmapped report by passing the ORIENTATION parameter or token For example to generate a report with landscape orientation specify the following option in the Options field ORIENTATION LANDSCAPE Do not put spaces before or after the execution options values The parameters should be separated by only a single space You can also specify an orientation of PORTRAIT You can control the dimensions of the generated output with the PAGESIZE parameter A specified lt width gt x lt height gt in the Options field overrides the values specified in the report definition For example ORIENTATION LANDSCAPE PAGESIZE 8x11 5 The units for your width and height are determined by your Oracle Reports definition You set the units in your Oracle Reports menu under Report gt Global Properties gt 6 66 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Unit of Measurement
383. lease 3 0 available in Knowledge Document 239196 1 on My Oracle Support Create the PrintForm Creating a PrintForm is a five step process 1 Createan image file using the supported editor of your choice 2 Convert the image file to a PostScript file ps 3 Convert the PostScript file to a PrintForm file pf to use as your template 4 Place the PrintForm file in the appropriate directory 5 Update printer driver information in the Printer Drivers window to use the PrintForm Create an image file The following editors can be used to create the image file that will become your PrintForm template e Oracle Reports e Microsoft Word Excel or Powerpoint with Adobe PDFMaker e Any Windows Application e Any Application that generates PDF When creating your image file ensure that the paper size margin settings and style of the document are appropriate for the report you are fitting the template to Note Even if you need only one type of image such as a company logo added to all your reports you must create one PrintForm for each print style that you plan to use such as portrait landscape and landwide with the appropriate placement of the image for the style Convert the image file to a PostScript file The PrintForm template file must be created from a PostScript file The PostScript file can be generated in one of the following ways 1 Generate a PostScript file from Oracle Reports 9 26 Oracle E Busines
384. leges for selected reports or programs Request Set Incompatibilities A request set is actually a concurrent program that submits requests to run each program in the request set You can allow incompatibility rules to govern your request set so that the request set does not run at the same time as other reports or concurrent programs You can also apply these rules to the stages that make up the request set Use the Concurrent Programs form to query the request set concurrent program and list those programs and or stages you want to define as incompatible with your request set See Concurrent Programs page 6 65 All concurrent programs that run request sets are titled Request Set lt name of request set gt Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 19 Related Topics In the Concurrent Programs form if you query a request set concurrent program on the basis of the program s name you must enter in the Name field the words Request Set before the name of a concurrent program Request Set to perform a query on all request set programs When you list a program as incompatible with your request set the program will not run simultaneously within the same conflict domain as the request set or any of the reports within the set See Defining Program Incompatibility Rules page 6 28 Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests page 6 1 Defining Program Incompatibility Rules page 6 28 Concurrent Programs page 6 65 Sha
385. let Generator page 16 3 Functional Developer Responsibility From the Functional Developer responsibility you can create and or manage the following features From the Security tab e Objects e Permissions and Permission Sets For more information on objects and permissions see Overview of Oracle E Business Suite Security Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security and Overview of Data Security Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security From the Core Services tab e Lookups C 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration e Messages e Profiles e Functions e Menus e Cache Components For more information on using the Lookups and Messages windows refer to the online help as well as the Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide For more information on Profiles see Overview of Setting User Profiles Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance For more information on functions and menus see Overview of Oracle E Business Suite Security Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security For more information on the Cache Components see the Oracle E Business Suite Java Caching Framework Developer s Guide available from My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 1087332 1 Oracle Application Framework Release Notes Release 12 1 3 Oracle Application Personalization Framework Personalization allows you to declaratively tai
386. llowing 3 WEBAPPS if you are using Oracle Self Service Web Applications 4 CONFIGURATOR if you are using Oracle Product Configurator For MODI Web Applications example if you are using the Product Configurator set E CONFIGURATOR Note The MODE parameter can be set at either the site or user level If your site uses both Product Configurator and Self Service Web Applications set MODE at the user level according to how each user uses these windows Dictionary Tasks This section contains tasks using the Web Application Dictionary Defining Objects You must define an object for each database view to be used in your flow This function registers the view in the Web Application Dictionary Note You can only define one object per database view Before defining an object create views to use in your web inquiry To define an object 1 Inthe Web Application Dictionary navigate to the Objects folder window 2 Enteran object name 3 Select an application Oracle Self Service Web Applications D 7 Select a database object i e a database view Choose the Object Attributes button to define the attributes for the database object Choose the Unique Keys button and define the primary and unique keys for the database object Enter the primary key Save your work Choose the Foreign Keys button to define foreign keys for the database object Assigning Attributes to Objects Associate defined at
387. lock Type Enter a name for a printer type Example printer types might be LINE for a line printer or LNO3 for an LN03 model printer You select this printer type when you register a printer using the Printers window Printer Drivers Block Use this block to assign print styles and printer drivers to your printer types The Style button opens the Printer Styles window The Driver button opens the Printer Drivers window Related Topics Overview of Printers and Printing page 9 1 Printer Types Print Styles and Printer Drivers page 9 2 Setting up Your Printers page 9 8 Printers page 9 49 Print Styles page 9 50 Printer Drivers page 9 53 9 48 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Printers Window s Oracle Applications File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help ORACLE e olmcGagienmgism ei Description E ua D Printer Types e Register printers with Oracle E Business Suite by entering the operating system s name for the printer and assigning it a printer type e You must register a printer before you can print reports from it using Oracle E Business Suite e You can only register a printer with a previously defined printer type Use the Printer Types window to define printer types e You can specify the default printer to which a user submits reports by setting the Printer user profile option Printers Block
388. lor the UI look and feel layout or visibility of Oracle Application Framework based HTML based pages to suit business needs or user preferences Durability of Oracle Application Framework personalizations is largely attributed to the declarative architecture and the object oriented approach underlying the implementation of the page Declarative UI component definitions are stored in the form of metadata in a database repository Personalizations are translated into offsets from the base metadata definition and stored separately At runtime the applicable personalizations metadata is uploaded from the repository and layered over the base metadata definition to produce the net effect Product upgrades and patches affect only the base metadata definition so customer personalizations continue to function properly as applicable For more information on personalization in Oracle Application Framework see the Oracle Application Framework Personalization Guide Oracle Application Framework Personalization Guide as well as My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 1087332 1 Oracle Application Framework Release Notes Release 12 1 3 Oracle Application Framework comes with an administration user interface for personalizations which is available under the Functional Administrator responsibility This interface contains the following two pages that can be used to personalize the pages of Oracle Application Framework based applications at various personalizatio
389. loyed in a multi tier configuration the security model includes authentication of application servers to the database servers they access When this layer of security is activated the application server passes server IDs similar to passwords to the database server If the database server recognizes the server ID it grants access to the database The server IDs are created using a Java script called AdminAppServer The application server security system is by default not activated if it you must activate it after installation if required The application servers are not assigned server IDs and the database servers do not check for server IDs Using the AdminAppServer Utility The Java script AdminAppServer is used to create dbc files and to enable or disable application server security Prior to running AdminAppServer you must ensure that e JDBC classes are in the CLASSPATH and LD_LIBRARY_PATH e JAVA_TOP is in the classpath For UNIX platforms the script is run as java oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer parameters For Windows platforms the script is run as jre classpath CLASSPATH oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer parameters The first parameter must be the connection string followed by the command string for example apps apps dbname ADD The following commands are supported e ADD create a new dbc file e UPDATE update an existing dbc file Basic Configuration Tasks 2 11 DELETE delete an
390. lt behavior FULL This mode does not overwrite any history information History records are created for each run and are identified by the Request ID If a Request ID is not provided one is generated automatically If this mode is used the Purge FND STATS History Records concurrent program should be run periodically to purge the FND STATS HIST table NONE This mode does not generate any history information If this mode is used the run cannot be restarted This flag indicates whether cursors dependent on the index being analyzed should be invalidated By default dependent cursors are invalidated STATS UMBER D EFAULT NULL UMBER DEFAULT NULL VARCHA g VARC R2 DEFAULT NULL HAR2 DEFAULT NULL BOOLEA DEFAULT TRUE y VARC hmode VARCHAR2 invalidate VARCHAR2 DEFAULT Y Parameters ownname tabname percent HAR2 DEFAULT DEFAULT Di EFAULT LASTRUN Owner of the table Name of the table The sampling percentage If left blank the default value of 12 16 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration degree partname backup_flag cascade granularity Hmode 10 is used The valid range is from 0 to 100 The degree of parallelism to be used for gathering statistics If a degree is not provided it defaults to the minimum of parallel_max_servers and cpu_
391. ly for indexes that are fragmented when the index columns are inserted updated or deleted frequently Real Application Cluster RAC Support OATM facilitates Real Application Cluster RAC support because of its reduced number of tablespaces RAC is an Oracle database feature that harnesses the processing power of multiple interconnected computers where all active instances can concurrently execute transactions against a shared database disk system The new tablespace model is critical when implementing RAC on Linux where currently there is a limitation of 255 raw devices Additional Benefits OATM provides the following additional benefits e Facilitates administration and configuration ease e Increases block packing to reduce the overall number of buffer gets OATM Tablespaces The advantages of OATM s product tablespaces are best understood in terms of the tablespace model that preceded it This model contained two tablespaces for each Oracle E Business Suite product One tablespace was allocated for tables and one for indexes In this model the standard naming convention for tablespaces contained the product s Oracle schema name with a suffix of either D for Data tablespaces or X Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility 3 5 for Index tablespaces For example the tablespaces APD and APX were the default tablespaces for Oracle Payables tables and indexes respectively In contrast to the previous tabl
392. m Administrators e Assign a request security group to a responsibility when defining that responsibility A responsibility without a request security group cannot run any requests using the Submit Requests window e Can add any request set to a request security group Adding a private request set to a request security group allows other users to run that request set using the Submit Requests window Users e Can create their own private request sets using the Request Sets window In a private request set users can include only the requests you assign to their request security group Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 59 e Cannot update another user s private request set using the Request Sets window e Cannot delete a private request set if it is assigned to a request security group Request Groups Block Group Application Code Use the request group s name to assign the request group to a responsibility on the Responsibilities window An application name and request group name uniquely identify a request group Select the name of the application you wish to associate with your request group An application name and a request security group name uniquely identify a request security group This application name does not prevent you from assigning requests and request sets from other applications to this request group Assign a code to this request group Some products use the request group code as a parameter that
393. managers you must start the Oracle E Business Suite TNS listener on all nodes The TNS listener must be started by the applmgr user For UNIX You can start the concurrent managers from by running the script startmgr from the operating system command line To start the concurrent manager from the operating system prompt use the following syntax startmgr sysmgr lt APPS username gt lt APPS password gt mgrname name PRINTER lt printer gt mailto lt useridl userid2 gt N restart N lt minutes gt logfile lt filename gt sleep lt seconds gt pmon lt cycles gt quesiz lt cycles gt diag Y N All parameters are optional You can pass parameters to the script in any order These parameters can also be used by the adcmctl sh script see the Maintaining Oracle E Business Suite documentation set for more information Parameters The following entries describe the concurrent manager startup parameters The default values apply if you do not specify different values in the startmgr script on the 8 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration command line when you run startmgr or in your environment sysmgr mgrname PRINTER mailto restart logfile sleep pmon quesiz diag APPS schema name should be set to the APPS schema user ID and password You will be prompted for the password if you omit the parameter and use the default value The defa
394. meters Use this window to define and modify your concurrent programs Session Control Build the execution file for your concurrent program Use the Concurrent Program Executables window to define a concurrent program executable for your operating system program Concurrent Programs Block Program The combination of application name plus program name uniquely identifies your concurrent program You see this longer more descriptive name when you view your requests in the Requests window If this concurrent program runs through Standard Request Submission you see this name in the Submit Requests window when you run this Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 65 Short Name Application Enabled program Enter a brief name that Oracle E Business Suite can use to associate your concurrent program with a concurrent program executable The program s application determines what ORACLE username your program runs in and where to place the log and output files Indicate whether users should be able to submit requests to run this program and the concurrent managers should be able to run your program Disabled programs do not show up in users lists and do not appear in any concurrent manager queues You cannot delete a concurrent program because its information helps to provide an audit trail Executable Executable Name Select the concurrent program executable that can run your program You define the executab
395. mple enter JSMITH PURGE Concurrent Programs To modify the JSMITH PURGE program s parameters select the Parameters button 6 54 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Related Topics Form Used Task Concurrent Programs Parameter Window Request Set Reports Set Standard Request Submission program form For example the Run Reports form Reports Run Modify the following seven parameters so they do not display user JSMITH cannot see nor change the program s default values Oracle ID Program Application Program Manager Application Manager Responsibility Application Responsibility Modify the following three parameters so they do not display user JSMITH cannot see nor change the default values you set Set the parameters to the following Type Constant defaults Entity Request Mode Age User Name JSMITH Leave the following two parameters unchanged so they display Mode Value will require JSMITH to enter a value and Report is set to a default value of Yes Mode Value Report Create a request set with one program in it the JSMITH PURGE program Enter JSMITH in the Owner field If this request set is not assigned to any report security group only JSMITH will be able to run the JSMITH PURGE program When first submitting the JSMITH PURGE program to run navigate to the Resubmission Options region and enter for example 5 and Days in the Inte
396. mple of when and how to modify a concurrent program s parameters If one user submits a large number of concurrent requests on a daily basis for example an Oracle Bill of Materials or Oracle Purchasing supervisor you can create a streamlined purge program that only purges that user s concurrent processing records You can run this program as System Administrator and have it automatically resubmitted on a specific time interval You could also create a request set containing this one program and define the user as the owner of the request set Then if you do not assign the request set to any report security group only the user owner can run the program This way the user can be responsible for purging their own records The System Administrator s Purge Concurrent Request and or Manager Data program contains twelve parameters You can copy rename and modify the program so it displays only three parameters with only one parameter requiring user entry See Purge Concurrent Request and or Manager Data Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance The table below summarizes the steps to follow in our example Form Used Task Concurrent Programs Concurrent Programs Query the Application Object Library Define program named Purge Concurrent Request and or Manager Data and press Copy Select both Copy Arguments and Copy Incompatible Programs Enter a new name for the program you are going to copy for exa
397. ms one action When using more than one rule the rules are evaluated as follows Include rules are evaluated together using OR statements as the binding logic For example If you use the rules e Include X e Include Y The result of the rules allows the manager to run either X OR Y but does not require that both programs be run Exclude rules are evaluated together using AND statements as the binding logic For example If you use the rules e Excludel e Exclude 2 The result of the rules prohibits the manager from running programs 1 AND 2 together or separately Include rules are evaluated first then Exclude rules are evaluated Include rule s and Exclude rule s are evaluated together as an AND statement For example Include X OR Y AND Exclude 1 AND 2 An Exclude rule overrides an Include rule Specialization rule actions their binding logic and examples are presented in the following two tables See Specialization Rule Logic Examples page 7 18 Specialization Rule Logic Examples 7 18 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Include Rules Result Include X Run only program X Include X Run program X OR OF Include User Sam Run requests by User Sam Net result Run everyone s requests for program X and run all of Sam s requests Exclude Rules Exclude 37 Exclude 37 AND Exclude User Sam Result Do not run program 37 Do not run
398. n levels without modifying any code e Application Catalog Functional Administrator and Functional Developer Tasks C 3 e Import Export The Application Catalog page is useful for managing several personalizations across pages and applications especially where the administrator does not have a responsibility that can access the page directly You can change the layout of a page by adding rows and columns to the customizable regions You can also change the layout direction and order of contents inside these regions You can update different elements and you can also add create or remove the contents from different regions Note To rearrange contents across different regions you must first remove them from their current location and then add them inside the new destination region To activate inactive or delete specific personalizations or manage the translation of the personalizations made for the page in question navigate to the Manage Personalization Levels page Depending on the type of page you selected to personalize configurable or non configurable you are automatically directed to one of the following two personalization launch pages Page Layout Personalization Configurable page This launch page provides a boxed preview of the flexible layout structure within your page and displays controls that take you to different pages or flows where you specify and apply your actual personalizations Important Page La
399. n Rules page 7 17 Defining Combined Specialization Rules page 7 27 Concurrent Managers field help page 7 59 Defining Combined Specialization Rules A combined specialization rule combines more than one action to generate a single rule The actions are combined as AND statements so that the rule is defined as Action 1 AND Action 2 AND Action 3 AND so on You can create combined rules and use them with several managers instead of duplicating a complex rule each time There are two kinds of Actions you may use to build a combined rule Exclude and Include Each action is defined by one line within the rule Combining the specialization lines or individual actions defines the overall combined rule An Exclude action overrides a Include action For example you can define an Exclude application program x action and a Include user Yvonne Jones action Combining these two actions generates the combined rule read all requests from user Yvonne Jones except requests to run program x See Combined Specialization Rules page 7 68 Combined specialization rule actions their binding logic and examples are presented in the following table Combination Rule Include Lines Result Include Program X Run only program X Include Program X Run program X AND and Defining Concurrent Managers 7 27 Combination Rule Include Lines Result Include User Sam Run requests by User Sam Net result Run only Sam s req
400. n a PCP RAC environment optionally specify the target node on which requests for this program will run If no specification is made for the concurrent program the request will be picked up by any manager able to run it If the target node is down any available manager will pick up the request for processing and log a message to FND_LOG_MESSAGES Use this region to specify options for the database session of the concurrent program when it is executed Consumer Group Optionally specify the resource consumer group for the concurrent program See Resource Consumer Groups in Oracle E Business Suite page 11 3 Rollback Segment Optionally specify a rollback segment to be used with the concurrent program This rollback segment will be used instead of the default and will be used up until the first commit Important If you specify a rollback segment here your concurrent program must use the APIs END CONCURRENT AF COMMIT and END CONCURRENT AF ROLLBACK to use the specified rollback segment See Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide Optimizer Mode Optionally specify an optimizer mode You can choose ALL ROWS FIRST ROWS Rules or Choose You would specify an optimizer mode only for a custom program that may not perform well with the default cost based optimizer CBO and needs tuning You can use a different optimizer mode until your program is tuned for CBO This region provides statistics on earlier requests for a defined concurrent
401. n by passing the program set name as parameters The parameters window pops up on navigation to the form when called with a program report set name The form exits after the user acknowledges the displayed request ID for the submitted request Restrict Requests To A List of Requests You can call Submit Requests form to submit one or more requests for a single program set by passing the program set name as parameters The parameters window pops up on navigation to the form and the user can submit one or more requests for the program that was passed as a parameter Requests for other 6 24 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration programs cannnot be submitted in this case Pass Parameters Used in Value Set Parameters You can pass additional parameters to the Submit Requests form that can be referenced in the value sets to validate the request parameters Pass Manufacturing ORG Parameters You can pass 5 ORG related parameters and refer to them in the value set Alternatively you can bring up a ORG LOV on navigation to the Submit Requests form that populates the ORG parameters which can be referenced in the value sets Complete List of All Submit Request Paramters Below is the comprehensive list of parameters supported by the Run Requests SRS form and additional information about their usage REQUEST_GROUP_CODE REQUEST_GROUP_APPL_SHORT_NAME used with REQUEST_GROUP_CODE CONCURRENT_PROGRAM_NAME PRO
402. n concepts and features in Oracle E Business Suite see My Oracle Support Knowledge Documents 393861 1 Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 Globalization Guide and 393320 1 Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 Internationalization Update Notes Also see Oracle E Business Suite Concepts Guide Language Values for User Sessions Language Values for User Sessions using AppsLocalLogin jsp This section describes how the language is determined for a user s session and other interactions with the system Login Page Language If the language is a licensed Oracle E Business Suite language the initial login page language is determined from one of the following sources in the order shown e A language value passed on the AppsLocalLogin jsp URL e The language used in an earlier login session e The browser language If the language is not a licensed Oracle E Business Suite language the initial login page Administering Globalization 18 1 is in the Oracle E Business Suite base language Note The default for Single Sign On SSO SSO logins will fall back to browser language preferences in order The default for non SSO logins will fall back to the base language if the first language preference is not available The user can change the login page language selection by choosing one of the other language name icons on the login page The language name icons on the login page represent the active languages in the Oracle E Business Suite installat
403. n that if you have been using the Concurrent Conflicts Domain profile option for your custom programs you may need to switch the incompatibility type to Domain specific to keep the expected behavior Also the two user level constraints set by the Concurrent Active Request Limit and Concurrent Sequential Requests profile options are now enforced globally across all conflict domains 6 28 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Request Sets Incompatibilities Allowed Related Topics When you define a request set or request set stage that allows incompatabilities you create a concurrent program that runs the reports in your request set or stage according to the instructions you entered Using the Concurrent Programs window when you list programs as incompatible with a request set those programs are prevented from starting until all the reports in the set or stage have completed running To define incompatibility rules for a request set and request set stage e Fora request set check the Allow Incompatibility check box on the Request Set window e For a request set stage check the Allow Incompatibility check box on the Stages window e Navigate to the Incompatible Programs block in the Concurrent Programs form and list those programs that your request set or stage is incompatible with All concurrent programs that run request sets are titled Request Set lt name of request set gt while all concurren
404. n the link that points at it Oracle E Business Suite Help 10 5 For example you would use HTML like the following to allow users to jump forward to a section with the anchorname of widgets For more about widgets see lt A HREF widgets gt All About Widgets lt A gt below lt A NAME widgets gt lt A gt lt H2 gt All About Widgets lt H2 gt Extended to Support Interdocument Links Oracle E Business Suite help files extend this conventional HTML syntax to create links not only within but also between help files To link to a file that contains a particular named anchor you simply place an at sign before the anchorname To link to the precise spot within the file where this anchor appears you append a pound sign followed by the anchorname just as you would in conventional HTML This results in the following special syntax lt A HREF anchorname anchorname gt link text lt A gt For example to link to the file that contains the widgets anchor illustrated above at the point in the file that this anchor occurs you would use HTML like the following For more about widgets see lt A HREF widgets widgets gt All About Widgets lt A gt If you simply want to link to the top of the file that contains this anchor you can omit the pound sign segment widgets Links in Oracle E Business Suite help files rarely omit the pound sign segment This means that however topics are rearranged within or among
405. nager process can run one concurrent request start one concurrent program Typically the number of actual processes equals the number of target processes the maximum number of requests a manager can run However the number of actual processes may be less than the number of target processes due to manager deactivation or manager migration Processes Target This field displays the maximum number of manager processes that can be active for this manager Requests Running Requests Pending Typically when there are requests pending this number should be the same as the number of actual processes However if there are no pending requests or requests were just submitted the number of requests running may be less thanthe number of actual processes Moreover if a concurrent program is incompatible with another program currently running it does not start until the incompatible program has completed In this case the number of requests running may be less than number of actual processes even when there are requests pending Controlling a Specific Manager Status This field displays the status of a manager after you have chosen a specific action for it using the top row of buttons near the bottom of the window You can control concurrent managers individually or collectively by controlling the Internal Concurrent Manager This field is blank when managers have been activated by the Internal Concurrent Manager Ina parallel processing
406. ncompatibilities 6 19 role of application name in request types 7 71 run alone programs 6 28 running alone 6 65 6 65 setting default values 6 48 spawned vs immediate 7 2 subroutines 6 61 viewing 6 65 warnings about modifying 6 44 6 48 Concurrent requests request types 7 71 role of application name in request types 7 71 submitting using CONCSUB 6 39 time taken to run 7 15 viewing output 7 72 viewing request parameters 6 48 Concurrent request type 7 33 Configuration logging 15 6 Configuring Oracle E Business Suite 2 1 Conflict domains defining 6 82 explained 6 29 Consumer groups Resource consumer groups 11 3 Context sensitive help link syntax 10 7 Controlling access to reports or programs Report Groups 6 2 CREATE_STAT_TABLE Procedure CBO 12 8 Custom concurrent programs 6 32 Custom help context sensitive links 10 7 global environment 10 16 Help Builder 10 9 help navigation trees 10 8 updating the search index 10 8 Custom help files linking help files 10 5 Custom reports context sensitive help 10 7 D Database Resource Manager 11 3 Data Groups Application Object Library requirement 6 81 defining 6 80 DBC files 2 13 Debugging 15 6 Default folders 11 20 Default parameters Shared parameters 6 14 Developer tools 16 1 Diagnostics menu F 1 DISABLE SCHEMA MONITORING procedure CBO 12 12 Document sequences active sequence definitions 14 6 application 14 5 14 12 assigning
407. ncurrent manager you assign one or more work shifts to it Work shifts determine when the manager operates You define work shifts using the Work Shifts form Disabling a work shift If you define a period of time as a work shift but do not necessarily want to use the work shift you can Defining Concurrent Managers 7 3 e Not assign the work shift to a concurrent manager e Assign the number of target processes for the work shift as zero 0 on the Define Manager form Delete a work shift assignment using the Define Manager form Work Shifts and Hours of the Day Work shifts can run twenty four hours a day from midnight till the next midnight In military time this is defined as e 12 00am 00 00 00 e 11 59 59pm 23 59 59 Using work shifts to run through midnight The military time clock for a twenty four period starts and stops at midnight If you do not want a work shift to run twenty four hours a day but you do want to run programs continuously past 12 00 am you must define two work shifts e The first work shift stops at 23 59 11 59pm e The second work shift starts at 00 00 12 00 am For example you want to run some data intensive programs during the night when most of your employees are away from the job site You define two work shifts which you assign to this manager e The first work shift starts at 20 00 8 00pm and stops at 23 59 11 59pm e The second work shift starts at 00 00 12 00am a
408. ncurrent managers use concurrent conflicts domains to determine which concurrent programs cannot run at the same time For example 6 82 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration e When concurrent program A is defined as incompatible with concurrent program B then A and B cannot run at the same time using the same concurrent conflict domain If for example the programs A and B are assigned to the concurrent conflicts domains Standard when they are submitted then programs A and B will not run together at the same time To define a conflict domain 1 Enter a unique Domain name The name you enter here may be used as a value for a parameter in the Submit Requests window 2 Enteraunique Short Name for your domain Limit the Short Name to 8 characters 3 Optionally you can provide a description for your domain Related Topics Overview of Applications DBA Duties page 11 1 ORACLE Usernames Overview page 11 1 ORACLE Users page 11 12 Applications page 11 15 Concurrent Programs HTML UI Search for Concurrent Programs Use this page to search for defined concurrent programs From this page you can create a new concurrent program or update an existing one Create Concurrent Program The following are prerequisites to defining a concurrent program e Build the execution file for your concurrent program e Define a concurrent program executable for your operating system program file The comb
409. nd stops at 05 00 5 00am Overlapping Work Shifts Priority Levels If you assign overlapping work shifts to a concurrent manager the work shift with the more specific time period takes effect for the overlapping time period For example a work shift for July 4 overrides a work shift from 9 00 am to 5 00 pm on Monday through Friday The following table presents a descending list of priority levels for overlapping work shifts A work shift with a specific date and range of times has the highest priority The Standard work shift has the lowest priority 7 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Priority Work Shift Definition Example 1 Specific date and range of April 15 2000 8 00am 5 00pm times 2 Specific date and norange of April 15 2000 times 3 Range of days and range of Monday Friday times 8 00am 5 00pm 4 Range of days and no range Monday Friday of times 5 Range of times and no date 8 00am 5 00pm and no range of days 6 Standard work shift No date Standard work shift is 365 days or time defined days a year 24 hours a day Overlapping Work Shifts with the same priority Related Topics When you have overlapping work shifts that have the same level of priority the work shift with the largest target processes takes effect For example you have two work shifts with a range of days and a range of times You have a Weekday work shift from 9 00 am to 5 00 pm on Monday through F
410. ne a concurrent program you can list those programs you want it to be incompatible with You can also list the program as incompatible with itself which means that two instances of the program cannot run simultaneously You can also make a program incompatible with all other concurrent programs by defining the program to be run alone There are two types of program incompatibilities Global incompatibilities and Domain specific incompatibilities You can define a concurrent program to be globally incompatible with another program that is the two programs cannot be run simultaneously at all or you can define a concurrent program to be incompatible with another program in a Conflict Domain Conflict domains are abstract representations of groups of data They can correspond to other group identifiers such as sets of books or they can be arbitrary You define a concurrent program to be run alone or to be incompatible with specific concurrent programs by editing the concurrent program s definition using the Concurrent Programs window See Concurrent Programs page 6 65 Program incompatibility and run alone program definitions are enforced by the Conflict Resolution Manager CRM Note The concept of Global incompatibilities was introduced with Patch 2364876 With this patch all pre existing incompatibilities are converted to the type Global unless both of the programs have a conflict domain parameter registered This may mea
411. nents of Oracle E Business Suite FNDCPASS logon 0 Y lt system password gt SYSTEM username new password Use the above command with the following arguments When specifying the SYSTEM token FNDCPASS expects the next arguments to be the APPLSYS username and the new password Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 11 5 logon The Oracle username password system password The username and password for the SYSTEM DBA account username The APPLSYS username For example applsys new_password The new password This command does the following 1 Validates APPLSYS 2 Re registers password in Oracle E Business Suite 3 Changes the APPLSYS and all APPS passwords for multi APPS schema installations to the same password Because everything with a Privilege Level set to any of E U D in the FND ORACLE USERID table must always have the same password FNDCPASS updates these passwords as well as APPLSYS s password For example the APPS password will be updated when the APPLSYS password is changed 4 ALTER USER is executed to change the ORACLE password for the above ORACLE users For example the following command changes the APPLSYS password to WELCOME FNDCPASS apps apps 0 Y system manager SYSTEM APPLSYS WELCOME To change an Oracle E Business Suite schema password type 3 other than APPS APPLSYS Use this command to change the password of a schema provided by an individual product
412. ness Suite Developer s Guide for more information Activity Summarizer For internal use only The Activity Summarizer is a PL SQL subprogram summarizing about the purgable data in application tables for a concurrent program of type Purge It returns a list of table names and rows to be purged Oracle developers register the PL SOL procedure as summarizer procedure for the concurrent program Refresh Portlet For internal use only 6 86 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Concurrent programs that produce data for a portlet can call a function to refresh the portlet s data The value for Refresh Portlet indicates when the function should be called Allow Multiple Pending Requests If this box is checked multiple pending requests are allowed otherwise only one pending request is allowed Use in SRS Check the SRS Standard Request Submission box to indicate that users can submit a request to run this program from a Standard Request Submission window If you check this box you must register your program parameters if any in the Parameters window accessed from the button at the bottom of this window Allow Disabled Values If you check the Use in SRS box you can also check this box to allow a user to enter disabled or outdated values as parameter values Many value sets use special table columns that indicate whether a particular value is enabled using ENABLED_FLAG START_DATE_ACTIVE and END_
413. nfiguration Properties section above for details on how and when the modified values come into effect Purging Log Messages You should periodically delete old log messages to account for the space limitations of the database table In addition you should periodically rotate log files There are several ways to purge log messages They are described below Using a Concurrent Program The concurrent program Purge Debug Log and System Alerts Short name FNDLGPRG is the recommended way to purge messages This program purges all messages up to the specified date except messages for active transactions new or open alerts active ICX sessions concurrent requests and so on This program is by default scheduled to run daily and purge messages older than 7 days Internally this concurrent program invokes the FND LOG ADMIN APIs which are described later in this document Using Oracle Applications Manager Navigate to System Alerts and Metrics from the Navigate to drop down list on the Applications Dashboard Then click Logs Using the Oracle CRM System Administrator Console Navigate to Settings System Debug Logging Using PL SQL You can use the FND LOG ADMIN PL SQL package to delete log messages 15 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration For example S ET SERVEROUTPUT ON declare Hoa UJ del rows NUMBER EGIN el rows fnd log admin delete all BMS OUTPU
414. ng with all its arguments is entered in the Arguments field of the Printer Drivers form The concurrent manager can call a custom print program and pass arguments to the program The name of a custom print program is entered in the Program Name field and any arguments to be passed to the program are entered in the Arguments field of the Printer Drivers form The concurrent manager can call a predefined Oracle E Business Suite subroutine that passes a print command and arguments to the printer via the operating system A subroutine is predefined by Oracle E Business Suite and the name is entered in the Program Name field of the Printer Drivers form The arguments field is disregarded when the driver method is Subroutine However the concurrent manager reads the Initialization and Reset escape sequences On UNIX systems the subroutine method unlike the command method does not start an operating system shell along with the print command The Program driver method allows customers to define their own custom print programs For example your company might want to write a custom program that opens a file allows the file to be edited and saved under a second filename then sends the second edited file on to the printer by issuing the print command This method of Printers 9 33 issuing print commands is called a filter Location for Custom Print Programs To call a custom print program using the Printer Drivers form the program
415. ngual With Oracle Web Application Dictionary you can e Develop applications for the web without programming e Generate the application web pages at runtime e Register your application definition in an active data dictionary e Customize and extend existing applications and maintain your customizations e Seamlessly integrate Oracle E Business Suite data and company intranet content e Completely reconcile company transactions through a web inquiry interface e Graphically illustrate your application data relationships using Object Navigator Oracle Self Service Web Applications D 5 Definitions Object Attribute Object Attribute Region Region Item Below are some terms used with the Web Applications Dictionary A database view A reusable field used in a web inquiry application For example customer name and customer number are both attributes An attribute is not associated with data For example the customer name attribute can be reused anytime a customer name field is displayed on a web inquiry screen A reusable field that results when you associate an attribute with an object A logical grouping of data For example customer information can be grouped in one region and shipping information can be grouped in another region A region also represents a section of a web page A reusable field that results when you associate an attribute or object attribute with a region Optional Web Application Dictionary Window
416. nister Concurrent Managers form Related Topics Concurrent Managers page 7 59 Administer Concurrent Managers Window B Oracle Applications ioj x File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help ORACLE ca o IG E IE a a E Z Administer Concurrent Managers Processes Requests os ce GJ Target Running Pending Status Potorat Manager fa Confit Resolution Manag Receivables Tax Manager CRP Inquiry Manager l Scheduler Prereleaser Ma Inventory Manager NV Remote Procedure Ma i 3 3 3 Name C RP Manager M Shipping Transaction Hon PA Streamline Manager _ PO Document Approval J T O 2 71 E l I View the status of your concurrent managers including any transaction managers and if you wish change the status of any manager by issuing a control command For example you can deactivate a manager that is currently active then view its new status after the change takes effect Use the Refresh button to refresh the data shown Administer Concurrent Managers Block Node In a parallel concurrent processing environment a manager s processes are targeted to run on this node 7 50 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration If a concurrent manager is defined to use a platform specific system queue this field displays the name of the queue to which the manager submits its processes Processes Actual Each ma
417. nistration user interface which is available under the Functional Administrator responsibility This interface contains the following three pages that can be used to implement tuning of the memory management policies and perform administrative operations e Overview page Tuning page e Global Configuration page As a general rule cache administration should not be required unless there are some Functional Administrator and Functional Developer Tasks C 5 performance problems The Caching Framework Overview page provides a Cache Usage Summary listing the following e Total Cache Components All registered cache components in the system This includes the cache components that have statistics enabled e Global Idle Time A global setting for the elapsed time since an object was accessed last This value applies to cache components that rely on the default Idle Time and will not override the Idle Time setting of the individual cache components e Cache Components with Statistics Enabled All registered cache components in the system that have statistics enabled On the Tuning page you can search for cache components and then measure the Caching Framework performance by enabling statistics for frequently used components The statistics provided include hits misses the hit misses ratio and invalidation count for each cache component You can also clear collected statistics and clear the cache Tip A cache miss is when a reque
418. node on which you run the adcmctl sh script If it has a different assigned node it will migrate to that node if available After the Internal Concurrent Manager starts up it starts all the Internal Monitor Processes and all the concurrent managers It attempts to start Internal Monitor Processes and concurrent managers on their primary nodes and resorts to a secondary node only if a primary node is unavailable Shutting Down Managers You shut down parallel concurrent processing by issuing a Stop command in the OAM Service Instances page or a Deactivate command in the Administer Concurrent Managers form All concurrent managers and Internal Monitor processes are shut down before the Internal Concurrent Manager shuts down Terminating Concurrent Processes You can terminate running concurrent processes for a concurrent manager on the local node or on remote nodes by issuing an Abort command from the OAM Service Instances page or a Terminate command from the Administer Concurrent Managers form Migrating Managers Most process migration occurs automatically in response to the failure or subsequent availability of a primary node However you may migrate processes manually by Defining Concurrent Managers 7 49 changing the node assignments for a concurrent manager or Internal Monitor Process using the Concurrent Managers form To put your changes into effect issue a Verify command against the Internal Concurrent Manager from the Admi
419. ns and 66 lines Landwide e 80 columns and 66 lines Portrait e 132 columns and 62 lines A4 Your list is limited to those styles that meet your program s columns and row length requirements 6 88 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Onsite Setting General Style Required If your program requires a specific print style for example a checkwriting report use this check box to enforce that print style The following fields are typically specific to the installation Enter the following Priority You can assign this program its own priority The concurrent managers process requests for this program at the priority you assign here If you do not assign a priority the user s profile option Concurrent Priority sets the request s priority at submission time Printer If you want to restrict your program s output to a single printer enter the name of the printer to which you want to send your output If your program has minimum or maximum columns or rows defined your list of values is limited to those printers that can support your program s requirements Users cannot override your choice of printer from the Submit Requests or Requests windows Template The default layout template for the program Values for this field are available only if the concurrent program has been registered as a data definition with XML Publisher and templates have been loaded to the Template Manager For more informa
420. ns entered in the Concurrent Managers form The default value is 1 diag Y tells all concurrent managers to produce diagnostic Setting Up and Starting Concurrent Managers 8 5 output regularly The default value diag N prevents large log files Example startmgr sysmgr apps apps mgrname std PRINTER hqseql V mailto jsmith restart N logfile mgrlog sleep 30 pmon 5 quesiz 2 For Windows The OracleConcMegr lt SID gt service is launched from the Control Panel Services applet It can also be launched from the command line using the following command C gt net start OracleConcMgr lt SID gt e Concurrent managers inherit directory privileges from the user who installs and starts them If you plan to install and start the managers from a login other than the main applications login applmgr ensure that the login has the appropriate directory privileges The Windows account that starts the concurrent manager service must be the same one that installed it Startup parameter values apply in this order e Values set in the registry through the use of ccmsetup e Default values This means that values set in the registry override the default values You cannot change startup parameters while the managers are running To put changes into effect shut down the managers make the necessary modifications and restart the managers Restarting the Concurrent Managers You must restart the concurrent
421. ns success status code 0 If your script traps an error use the UNIX exit command exit 1 to return failure status code 1 to the concurrent manager running the program Log and Out Files Use names in FCP LOG and FCP OUT This way log and output report files can be viewed online Testing Your Program You should test using the lt name gt prog file to make sure your script behaves correctly Submitting Concurrent Requests CONCSUB Syntax You can test your concurrent program by submitting the program using the CONCSUB utility from the operating system You can submit a concurrent request to run any concurrent program by running the CONCSUB program with the following syntax CONCSUB APPS username gt lt APPS password responsibility application short name gt responsibility name username WAIT N Y n seconds gt CONCURRENT lt program application short name gt lt program name gt PROGRAM NAME lt description gt EPEAT TIME lt resubmission time gt INTERVAL lt number gt INTERVAL UNIT lt resubmission unit gt INTERVAL TYPE lt resubmission type gt r END lt resubmission end date and time gt S LANGUAGE language of the request S TERRITORY territory of the request gt START date IMPLICIT lt type of concurrent request lt parameter 1 lt parameter n gt
422. nstructed Oracle provides powerful tools you can use to create store change retrieve and maintain information in an Oracle database But if you use Oracle tools such as SQL Plus to modify Oracle E Business Suite data you risk destroying the integrity of your data and you lose the ability to audit changes to your data Because Oracle E Business Suite tables are interrelated any change you make using an Oracle E Business Suite form can update many tables at once But when you modify Oracle E Business Suite data using anything other than Oracle E Business Suite you may change a row in one table without making corresponding changes in related tables If your tables get out of synchronization with each other you risk retrieving erroneous information and you risk unpredictable results throughout Oracle E Business Suite When you use Oracle E Business Suite to modify your data Oracle E Business Suite automatically checks that your changes are valid Oracle E Business Suite also keeps track of who changes information If you enter information into database tables using database tools you may store invalid information You also lose the ability to track who has changed your information because SQL Plus and other database tools do not keep a record of changes xxiii 1 Introduction Introduction to This Manual A system administrator is involved in setting up an Oracle E Business Suite installation controlling access and ensuring smoot
423. nsure you enter a value less than this when prompted Example Enter the Extent Allocation type A utoallocate or U niform Extent Size U KKEKKKKKK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KKK KK KK KK KK KKKK KK KK Sk kk Sk Sk Sk Ck Sk Mk Gk ko KK KK KK The utility will append a sequence number to the tablespace nam and a dbf extension to generate the datafile names Datafile size should not be greater than OS file size limit Pleas dit the generated script to change the file name siz KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK KKK ko ko ke ko ko ko ko ko kocko ko Enter the absolute path for the datafiles directory u01 oradata Enter the Number of Datafiles for Transaction data tablespace 1 2 Enter the Datafile Size for Transaction data tablespace MB 2000 Enter the Number of Datafiles for Transaction index tablespace 1 2 Enter the Datafile Size for Transaction index tablespace MB 2000 Enter the Number of Datafiles for Reference tablespace 1 1 Enter the Datafile Size for Reference tablespac MB 2000 Enter the Number of Datafiles for Interface tablespace 1 1 Enter the Datafile Size for Interface tablespac MB 1700 Enter the Number of Datafiles for Summary tablespace 1 2 Enter the Datafile Size for Summary tablespace MB 2000 Enter the Number of Datafiles for Nologging tablespace 1 Enter the Datafile Size for Nologging table
424. nt Managers Concurrent Man agelts scettr ste vane cce epe erkannt ode eer deter deduce 8 1 Setting Up Concurrent Managers een enne enne 8 1 Starting the Concurrent Managers sssssssssssseeee en eene nen enn enne nns 8 4 Restarting the Concurrent Managers eene eene nenne 8 6 Shutting Down the Concurrent Manager Service Windows sss 8 7 Removing the Concurrent Manager Service Windows sse 8 8 File Conventlons zs net in EURO ott mei utet 8 8 Directory Ptivileges eee eee etat eite bett 8 9 Pritingas limestone ottenuti fot int tete A epa de 8 11 9 Printers Printers and Prin ng enacted peccet pieni ceat carte eeu ado 9 1 VerVI6Ws c tone dei icine Sovant aa mitt under tomiE iesi leot rA Ducis e cutee dna IE POS 9 1 Printer Types Print Styles and Printer Drivers sss 9 2 Sequence of Printing Events peris eee teat eiut epeti iere pesetas hi tene niece 9 4 Setting Character Mode vs Bitmap Printing sss 9 5 Setting Up Your Printers iniecto pied ed rh d P te ER De erba 9 8 Printing Setup Interrelationships eii e e qe eto ee seed etes 9 9 Printer Setup Information Is Cached On Demand sse 9 9 Printer Set p with Pasta coerente etie ie andre nhan 9 10 Verve A een D EA Na TE a A lamp AEE saut Ee an 9 10 10 viii Setup for Basic Printing with Pasta eren ennt 9 10 Defining Configuration Files for Spe
425. nt Style Enscript Arguments Explanation Result Portrait fCourier10 Font is Courier 10 80 characters portrait point Landscape r fCourier8 r rotates the printers 132 characters output 90 degreesto landscape print in landscape mode Font is Courier 8 point Landwide r fCourier6 r rotates the printer s 180 characters output 90 degrees to landscape print in landscape mode Font is Courier 6 point A4 fCourier10 Font is Courier 10 132 characters point landscape A4 paper Example Using Enscript to Print Postscript In this example the enscript command followed by its arguments is entered in the Arguments field of the Printer Drivers window and the Driver Method is set to Command 9 44 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Printer Drivers window Arguments field enscript r fCourier8 B PS PROFILI ESS PRINTER PROFILESS FILE NAME The following table explains the syntax for the enscript command Syntax Explanation r fCourier8 B P PROFILES PRINTER PROFILES FILENAME Enscript argument Rotates the printer s output 90 degrees to print in landscape mode Enscript argument f selects the font in this example the font is Courier with a point size of 8 Enscript argument Omits page headings Enscript argument P precedes the name of the printer which the output is sent to Concurrent manager token PROFILES
426. ntegrate business flows for any type of service across multi vendor application systems Others e Applications Manager Log Site Map Monitoring The Monitoring section links you to features to help you monitor your Oracle E Business Suite Availability Use these links to navigate to pages on the availability of these components e Hosts e Database e Web components e Internal Concurrent Manager e Request Processing Managers Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager 5 5 e Transaction Managers e Forms e Workflow e Business Flows Performance Use these links to see information regarding performance of these components SQL Activity e Forms Sessions e Forms Runtime Processes e Concurrent Processing Reports e Concurrent Processing Charts e Workflow Current Activity Use these links to view activity information for their respective areas e System Alerts e Database Sessions Invalid Objects e Forms Runaway Processes e Forms Sessions e Forms Runtime Processes e Application Services e Activity Monitors e Concurrent Requests e Critical Activities Logs 5 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Configuration Changes From the Overview link you can navigate to the Configuration Overview page Usage Use these reports to learn more about application usage and concurrent processing Custom Reporting Utilities The SQL Extensions page enables you to run seeded and custom s
427. nvironment where personalizations are exported to and imported from We recommend you set this profile to the APPL_TOP staging area and at the site level SAPPL_TOP lt CompanyIdentifier gt lt CustProductShortName gt lt ProductVersion gt md s webui See Deploying Personalizations Oracle Application Framework Personalization Guide for more information Caching Framework Caching provides a powerful flexible easy to use mechanism for storing database results and other Java objects in memory for repeated usage This mechanism minimizes expensive object initializations and database round trips thereby improving application performance Application data is cached using component caches Each component cache is identified by aname The objects contained in a component cache are generally of the same type and share the same caching attributes Each component cache has an associated cache loader class The loader class has the logic for loading the cached object in case of a cache miss When an object is requested from a component cache if the object is found it is returned from the cache Otherwise the loader is used to load the object place it in the cache For additional information on the Caching Framework see the Oracle E Business Suite Java Caching Framework Developer s Guide available from My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 1087332 1 Oracle Application Framework Release Notes Release 12 1 3 Caching Framework comes with an admi
428. o Responsibilities Based on User s Web Server sussse 2 19 Oracle Application Object Library AOL J Setup Test Suite sseeeee 2 20 Using Oracle Application Framework sss meme 2 22 AutoConfig and Oracle Applications Manager eee 2 23 3 Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility Introduction to Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model sess 3 1 Advantages of Migrating to OATM ssssssssssssee eem emen nennen nennen nnne 3 1 OATM Tablespaces on ttt ne tite ia Lr e EADEM o LL EX HELL RR ee EL ERR A ELI dg 3 5 Customizations and Extensions ssssssssssssssesenemeenm een eeeenreen nennen enne 3 8 Introduction to the Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Migration Utility 3 9 4 5 6 Planning for Migration uode edd e deed deett e pede e dee ren dinner tere 3 9 Setting Up the Tablespace Migration Utility sss 3 10 Phase 1 Prepar tory Steps icem bet tpi ei a sein ii due eite fuas 3 13 Phase Migration Steps eios ere etd andre 3 18 Phase 3 Post Migration Steps eee ee eem nemen enne 3 21 System Administration Setup Tasks Setup Tasks for the Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator sssss 4 1 Set p Checklistor aer eaa pena Lee e eie le ee 4 1 Setup Steps nimi e dedit fen ed te HR RE p HARE I BT Pala edo d uii dde esI
429. o a different language users stay in that language until they follow a link back out to their original language This can be either a link they encounter within a help file or a link from the navigation tree which remains in their original language throughout Using Oracle Tutor Oracle Tutor is a documentation tool designed to help companies create and maintain their end user process documentation Oracle Tutor defines end user process documentation as policies and procedures instructions and support documents Oracle Tutor also provides a system for e distributing process documentation to employees by job role e customizing Oracle E Business Suite online Help integrating process documentation with Oracle E Business Suite courseware e building customized Oracle E Business Suite training materials based on job title or topic e auditing process documentation to ensure accuracy and effectiveness Oracle Tutor is comprised of three components e the documentation methodology e model documents Oracle E Business Suite Help 10 17 e software The Tutor method defines all aspects of the documentation process the content and format of the different document types as well as the relationship between documents the process by which documents are created and maintained and the methods by which documents are distributed and used for training and reference purposes Tutor model documents are complete process documents and courseware t
430. o automatically save the output from this program to an operating system file when it is run This value becomes the default for all requests submitted for Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 87 this program The output of programs with Save set to No is deleted after printing If this is a Standard Request Submission program users can override this value from the Submit Requests window Print If you enter No your concurrent program s output is never sent to the printer Format Select the output format from the following The format that you select here is used by the concurrent manager to determine how to display your report output You must ensure that the output format you choose matches the format generated by your report unless the report is an Oracle Reports report in which case the format you select determines the output generated e HTML e PCL HP s Printer Control Language e PDF e PS Post Script e Text Important If you choose HTML or PDF as the output type with Oracle Report programs you must use an appropriate printer driver that handles HTML or PDF files Columns Rows Enter the minimum column and row length for this program s report output Oracle E Business Suite uses this information to determine which print styles can accommodate your report Style The print style you select depends on your system and printer setup Print styles include e 132 columns and 66 lines Landscape e 180 colum
431. o define a unique key 1 Inthe Web Application Dictionary navigate to the Unique Keys window by choosing the Unique Keys button from the Objects folder window 2 Enteraname for the unique primary key 3 Enter at least one unique key column sequence The sequence determines the order the specified columns are evaluated Defining Foreign Keys The combination of primary keys and foreign key relationships determine the navigation through your web flow That is if your flow must have navigation from one region to another based upon the same object a foreign key must be defined for that object The prerequisites of this task are e Define objects e Define attributes e Define object attributes e Define Unique Key s D 10 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration To define a foreign key 1 10 Defining Regions In the Web Application Dictionary navigate to the Foreign Keys window by choosing the Foreign Keys button from the Objects folder window Enter the foreign key Select the parent object database view Enter the referenced key This is the unique or primary key of the parent object Optionally enter a description for the relationship Optionally enter the inverse relationship Optionally enter a description for the inverse relationship Enter the foreign key column Enter the referenced key column Repeat the last two steps until all referenced key columns have be
432. o support special features such as these print through the standard printing subroutine and printer drivers defined in the Oracle E Business Suite database This makes the most efficient use of machine resources Upgrading Existing Executable Programs Because printing through the standard printer subroutine uses machine resources more effectively than printing through executable programs we recommend the following if you used executable printing programs in the previous release of Oracle E Business Suite e If predefined printer drivers can replace the executable program simply register the drivers along with the printer types in the Printer Types form For example Oracle E Business Suite provides a print style Landscape and the printer driver LANDSCAPESUB They perform the same function as the program land which enables DEC LNO3 printers to print 132 characters per line e fno predefined drivers will work you may be able to create a customized driver that can replace the executable You create drivers with the Printer Drivers form e If you cannot replace the executable with a simple printer driver definition you can Setting Up and Starting Concurrent Managers 8 15 continue to use the executable by registering it or the shell script that calls it with Oracle E Business Suite Writing an Executable Program Executable printing programs can format report output through escape sequences or a printer programming language Creating them
433. oPrint option to y or use the np no print command line option if you do not want Pasta to send the PDF file to the printer Printers 9 15 Use the outFile option to define the destination on the middle tier for the output file You can use inputfile in the outFile option Pasta will replace it with the actual input file name without the path specified by the f input file command line option 1 Using the basic Pasta setup procedure define a printer in the Printers window called PDFfile Assign the Pasta Universal Printer type to the printer For more information about defining a printer see Setup for Basic Printing with Pasta page 9 10 2 Create a configuration file for the PDFfile printer called pasta PDFfile cfg For more information about defining a configuration file see Defining Configuration Files for Specific Printers page 9 11 3 In the pasta_PDFfile cfg file enter the following for the preprocess option preprocess ps2pdf infile outfile noPrint y outFile lt APPLTMP gt inputfile pdf Related Topics Modify Add Printer Type to Use Pasta page 9 12 Setting Margins page 9 13 Printing a Report Using the noprint Option page 9 14 Font Source page 9 16 Language Specific Font Support page 9 17 Font Source If your printer does not have the necessary fonts installed Pasta embeds the required glyphs as a small font in your report from the font files If you do not want to use the fonts pro
434. ocess for each individual manager The following table compares the Internal manager control states displayed by the Administer Concurrent Managers form with their corresponding operating system command Not all arguments are shown From the Administer Concurrent Managers From the Operating System not all Form arguments shown Activate concurrent manager STARTMGR syntax may vary with platform Verify concurrent manager status CONCSUB FND VERIFY Deactivate concurrent manager CONCSUB FND DEACTIVATE Terminate requests and deactivate manager CONCSUB FND ABORT Starting the Internal Concurrent Manager from the Operating System To start the Internal Concurrent Manager use the shell script adcmctl sh This command starts the Internal Concurrent Manager which in turn starts any concurrent managers you have defined Alternatively to start the concurrent managers you can invoke the STARTMGR command from your operating system prompt You must have write privileges to the out and log directories of every application so that the concurrent managers can write to these directories You can start the concurrent managers with many different options An option on some operating systems is to send an electronic mail note to a given user when the concurrent managers shut down See your installation guide for a discussion of this command Use the STARTMGR command e during installation of Oracle E Business Suite e after you shut d
435. ocument Sequence page 14 1 Defining Document Categories page 14 4 Document Sequences 14 3 Defining Document Categories Document categories organize documents into logical groups A document category also called a document type is one of the rules you use to define which documents a sequence assigns numbers to You can separately number each document category by assigning a different sequence to each category A document category identifies the database table that stores documents resulting from transactions your users enter When you assign a sequence to a category the sequence numbers the documents that are stored in a particular table Use categories to more precisely classify your documents For example you can categorize accounts receivable invoices into several different categories such as Chargebacks Deposits Guarantees Debit Memos Credit Memos Sales Invoices Customer Service Invoices Similarly you can categorize accounts payable or purchase invoices into several different categories such as Standard Expense Report Prepayment Interest Credit Memo Debit Memo 14 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Related Topics What is a Document Sequence page 14 1 Defining a Document Sequence page 14 1 Assigning a Document Sequence page 14 5 Assigning a Document Sequence Before you can assign a sequence to number documents you must define which documents ar
436. of the user profile Concurrent Priority However when the user submits a request for a particular concurrent program you want that request to have a higher priority You assign that program a priority of 10 When the user requests that program to run it receives the higher priority defined on the Concurrent Program window rather than the 6 46 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration user s standard priority and is processed ahead of other requests When the users requests other concurrent programs that do not have a specified priority those requests use the user s Concurrent Priority profile value Related Topics Copying and Modifying Program Definitions page 6 44 Concurrent Programs page 6 65 Modifying an Incompatible Programs List A concurrent program s definition may include a list of incompatible programs When a program is listed as incompatible with another program the two programs cannot run simultaneously in the same conflict domain See Defining Program Incompatibility Rules page 6 28 You can view which programs are incompatible with a concurrent program from the Incompatible Programs block on the Concurrent Programs window The programs listed cannot run simultaneously within the same conflict domain as the concurrent program whose definition you are viewing To modify the list of incompatible programs you can either Add new programs to the list The Scope field refers to whether you w
437. ofile Enable Configurable Homepage FND_CONFIG_HOMEPAGE_ENABLED is retained for backward compatibility with Release 12 1 2 Note To disable the feature the profile values should be set as follows 2 22 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration e FND Slideout Menu FND SLIDEOUT MENU Disabled e FND Disable Navigator and Favorites Rich Menu FND DISABLE NAVIGATOR AND FAVORITES RICH MENU TRUE The profile FND Slideout Menu is retained for backward compatibility on Release 12 1 2 Note Inline Attachments can only be enabled if the accessibility mode is set to None using the profile option Self Service Accessibility Features Inline Attachments are disabled if accessibility is set to Screen Reader Optimized mode or Standard Accessibility mode See the Oracle E Business Suite User s Guide for more information on accessibility AutoConfig and Oracle Applications Manager Oracle Applications Manager OAM provides access to the AutoConfig configuration management tool via the AutoConfig tab in the Site Manager screen Previous configuration settings can easily be compared with the current settings allowing changed settings to be identified and rolled back as necessary The configuration editor also helps you add custom variables to the context files to allow AutoConfig and AutoPatch to preserve your system configuration customizations For more information on AutoConfig see Using AutoConf
438. ogram s definition by adding new or deleting existing parameters or changing a parameter s value set can prevent the program from running See Warnings for Modifying Program Definitions page 6 52 Not Displaying Parameters Using the Concurrent Programs form or the Request Set form you can set a parameter so it does not display to an end user Because parameters that do not display cannot be modified setting a parameter to not display isa good security measure guaranteeing a desired default value is used e means you should enter a valid default type and value at either the program s definition or if the program is part of a request set at the request set s definition Warning Set defaults for required parameters before setting the Display field to No Otherwise the Submit Requests form returns an error when attempting to submit the program If you define a parameter to not display then the parameter does not appear when the program is run using the Submit Requests form nor does it appear in the Request Set form If you define a parameter to not display using the Request Set form then the parameter does not appear on the Submit Requests form when the program is run as part of a request set Viewing displayed parameters after a request is submitted After a request is submitted to run a concurrent program the program s parameters may be displayed in the Details block of the Concurrent Requests form When a parameter is set
439. older set first then view the folders that belong to that set After you save a default folder definition for a folder set that folder set no longer appears in the list of values Folder Set Every folder set is associated with a particular folder block and a user or responsibility can have one default folder within each folder set The folder set name generally describes the records shown in the block some blocks may have multiple sets of folders associated with them To Assign a Folder to a User Follow these steps to assign a folder to a user 1 Navigate to the Find Default Folders window Use Default folder assignments by user to view a list of eligible users 2 You can assign default folders for each responsibility When users navigate to this folder block they see the default folder you specify From the Folder field enter the name of the default folder The name of the folder set to which the folder belongs is filled in automatically If you do not know the name of the folder enter the folder set first then view the folders that belong to that set After you save a default folder definition for a folder set that folder set no longer appears in the list of values Folder Set Every folder set is associated with a particular folder block and a user or responsibility can have one default folder within each folder set The folder set name generally describes the records shown in the block some blocks may have multipl
440. omplete post migration steps and drop old tablespaces that have no remaining segments I O Characteristics of an Object OATM takes into account the following object I O characteristics of an object size e life span e access methods locking granularity 3 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Automatic Segment space Management Automatic segment space management is a simpler and more efficient way of managing space within a segment It completely eliminates any need to specify and tune the PCTUSED FREELISTS and FREELISTS GROUPS storage parameters for schema objects created in the tablespace Automatic segment space management delivers better space utilization than manual segment space management and is self tuning because it scales with the increasing number of users and instances For a Real Application Cluster RAC environment automatic segment space management enables dynamic affinity of space to instances which avoids the hard partitioning of space inherent with using free list groups Reclaims Space After Migration The tablespace migration utility migrates objects from the existing dictionary managed tablespaces to locally managed tablespaces with automatic segment management and either uniform or Auto allocate extent management As a result space is better utilized and less wasted Migration of table and index segments from one tablespace to another also reclaims unused space especial
441. on Database Connection Server Startup Schema Name The APPS schema name should be set to the APPS user ID Password This is the password to the Oracle E Business Suite account in the database TNS Aliasname This is the database lt SID gt Use this Account Check the Use this Account box to specify the OS account NT User and NT Password that runs the CCM 8 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Startup Options Shutdown Sleep Restart Queue Size PMON cycle Printer Name Enable Distributed Concurrent Processing Deactivate Normal Terminate Abort Processes service If you do not check this box the system account launching the service will not have permission to access network resources Number of seconds integer the internal concurrent manager waits between times it looks for Queue Controlled in statuses Deactivate Abort Verify Activate requests The default value is 60 Number of minutes integer the internal concurrent manager waits before attempting to restart after abnormal termination The default value prevents the manager from restarting after abnormal termination The default value is N Number of pmon cycles integer the internal concurrent manager waits between times it checks for normal changes in concurrent manager operation Normal changes include the start or end of a work shift and changes to concurrent manager definitions entered in th
442. on 18 3 Index 4 Incompatible programs Concurrent programs 6 28 Internal concurrent manager CONCSUB command 7 39 7 40 CONCSUB hiding password 7 43 CONCSUB using to shut down 7 42 control states 7 36 enforces incompatibility rules 6 31 explained 7 2 internal monitors 7 46 operating system control 7 39 parallel concurrent processing 7 45 PMON cycle 7 36 shut down from operating system 7 42 starting from operating system 7 39 STARTMGR command 7 39 J Java Authentication and Authorization Service JAAS 19 1 Javascript defined D 2 L Languages 18 1 Loaders B 1 Local Login Mask profile Option 2 4 Log files parallel processing on multiple nodes 7 46 Logging configuration 15 1 15 6 C environment variables 15 1 Java system properties 15 1 middle tier properties 15 1 profile options 15 1 disabling 15 6 in high volume scenarios 15 6 messages purging 15 6 15 8 viewing 15 9 overview 15 1 startup behavior 15 1 Logging to Screen 15 1 15 6 with CRM Technology Foundation 15 1 with Oracle Application Framework 15 1 Logical databases define for custom applications 6 56 explained 6 55 program incompatibility rules 6 55 Standard logical database method 6 56 Login page configuration 2 1 Message Dictionary Generator B 22 MIME types for viewing reports 7 72 MLS function 6 61 6 65 Mode D 6 Multi language function MLS function 6 65 Multilingual external do
443. on and the short name you define for your internal monitor uniquely identifies the monitor For an Internal Monitor the program library is FNDIMON Use the Work Shifts section to assign work shifts A work shift defines the dates and times the manager is enabled as well as the number of processes the manager can start running during the work shift To add a work shift use the Add from Available Shifts button For each work shift listed the following is displayed The sleep time for your manager during this work shift Sleep time is the number of seconds your manager waits between checking the list of pending concurrent requests concurrent requests waiting to be started Tip Set the sleep time to be very brief during periods when the number of requests submitted is expected to be high The number of operating system processes you want your work shift to run simultaneously Each process can run a concurrent request For example if a work shift is defined with three 3 target processes the manager can run up to three requests simultaneously If you are operating in a parallel concurrent processing environment and you want your manager to operate on a specific node select the name of the node The primary node if available is the node your concurrent manager operates on If the Defining Concurrent Managers 7 13 primary node or the database instance on it goes down your concurrent manager migrates to its secondary node Y
444. on the date range otherwise if it is REQUEST records are purged based on the Request ID From Value Start Date or Request ID To Value End Date or Request ID FND_STATS Package The FND_STATS package provides procedures for gathering statistics for Oracle E Business Suite database objects It also provides procedures for backing up the current statistics into the table FND_STATTAB and restoring them back if desired This package also allows users to specify the degree of parallelism That helps speed up statistics gathering for large objects FND_STATS can also maintain a history of its actions in a table called FND_STATS_HIST The data in this table is used to provide restart ability and can also be queried to find out the time taken to gather statistics on each object FND_STATS relies on the Oracle supplied package DBMS_STATS to perform the actual statistics gathering For more information on DBMS_STATS refer to the Oracle database Tuning and Supplied Packages Reference manuals CREATE_STAT_TABLE Procedure This procedure creates the table that is required for backing up the statistics There are two versions of this procedure The first one does not need any arguments and creates the table with the default name FND_STATTAB in the schema corresponding to the FND product The second version allows you to provide the schema name table name and the tablespace for the statistics table
445. onfiguration The bandwidth test or more accurately throughput test examines the data transfer rate and shows how many bytes per second your network transferred between the client application server and database server Running a Test Click the Run Test button to perform the test You can provide notes to indicate the conditions for each test you run Evaluating the Test Results If one test result varies significantly from the other trials discard that information Use the Clear Old Test Data button to purge previous test results from your database The results of both the latency and throughput tests are displayed in the Results block e Latency Results displays the minimum average and maximum round trip time for a single round trip from a PC client to the server e The Bandwidth window shows the throughput results and displays the minimum average and maximum data rate in bytes per second For comparison the sample data fields show the results of tests completed at Oracle Headquarters in Redwood Shores California Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 11 19 Administering Folders B Oracle Applications File Edit View Folder Tool Window Help ORACLE AVS SIOZ Sle Op eri 459721 gee Find Folders Default folder assignments by user Folders Administer folders by assigning default folder definitions either to a specific user or to a responsibility Manage folder definitions by assign
446. ons then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other measures to ensure the safe use of this software Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software in dangerous applications This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and services from third parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services Contents Send Us Your Comments Preface 1 Introduction Introduction to This Mantal cccccccccececcececeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseseseeaeseaeseseaeaaaaaaaasaaaeasasaeaes 1 1 Other Volumes for System Administrators 1 4 2 Basic Configuration Tasks Oracle E Business Suite Setup Steps eene enne 2 1 Configuring the Login Page for Oracle E Business Suite sss 2 1 Personalizing the Oracle E Business Suite Home Page sess 2 5 Administering Oracle HTTP Server sss eee enne 2 6 AdninAppsServer Utlity 5 otiose ile etat HERR nha saat dase dade 2 11 Administering Server Security eee eee nnns 2 15 Restricting Access t
447. ons are processed Each Action consists of one of the following Developer Tools 16 1 e setting a Property such as making a field Required or hiding a Tab page e executing a Builtin such as GO BLOCK DO KEY or EXECUTE FUNCTION displaying a Message enabling a Special menu entry Once Rules are defined when the target function is run then the Rules are automatically applied as events occur within that form Although the Form Personalization feature is declarative the intended audience is a person familiar with Oracle Forms including the PL SOL programming language and the Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide Additionally any change made could interfere with the base code of a form the code that Oracle ships Please refer to Form Personalizations in Oracle E Business Suite Knowledge Document 395117 1 on My Oracle Support for more information Work Directory The Work Directory feature enables a developer support consultant or other technical specialist to test modifications to forms and concurrent programs in Oracle E Business Suite without affecting users of the same code tree Using the Work Directory a user can be logged into an Oracle E Business Suite system but access a version of a form or concurrent program that is not within the standard PROD TOP directory For example an on site developer can test out a new version of a custom form without affecting other testing on the system You can use the Work
448. ont Support page 9 17 Configuration File Options page 9 18 Command Line Parameters page 9 24 Setting Margins The margins on your printed output are determined by the margin settings in the pasta cfg file and the printable area defined by your printer In order to set your margins properly you must know the printable area for your specific printer and adjust the margin parameter settings in the pasta cfg file accordingly The margin parameters are leftMargin rightMargin topMargin and bottomMargin Printers 9 13 For example suppose you want to set the left margin to one inch If the printable area for your printer begins at 25 inches from the left then you must set the leftMargin option to 75 in the pasta cfg file For more information on setting options in the Pasta configuration file see Configuration File Options page 9 18 Refer to your printer s documentation for information on its printable area Related Topics Setup for Basic Printing with Pasta page 9 10 Defining Configuration Files for Specific Printers page 9 11 Modify Add Printer Type to Use Pasta page 9 12 Printing a Report Using the noprint Option page 9 14 Generating Other Formats Using the Preprocessing Option page 9 15 Font Source page 9 16 Language Specific Font Support page 9 17 Command Line Parameters page 9 24 Printing a Report Generated Using the noprint Option When you use the noprint printer option to generate a report you can s
449. ooks parameter Important Note that if you later change the value of a parameter that contains a shared parameter label you change only the value for that instance of the parameter and not the value for all other occurrences of that labelled parameter We recommend that if you make a parameter with a shared parameter label modifiable that you also display the parameter so you can always see what the parameter s current value is This helps reinforce the understanding that a later value change to one labelled parameter cannot propagate a value change to all other similarly labelled parameters 6 Optionally enter a Default Type and Value for the parameter 7 Save your work 8 Go back to the Stage Requests window and repeat Steps 9 through 11 to add more Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 15 Linking Stages requests to the request set stage You can select a request more than once if you want to run the same request with different default parameter values To start a new stage return to the Stage window and choose New Record from the File Menu Follow this procedure to link stages 1 Enter the Start Stage The stage you enter here is the first stage submitted for the request set Enter the stages you want to run following the first stage in the Success Warning and Error columns To ensure that a particular stage follows the preceding stage regardless of the completion status enter the desired stage in all
450. opy the customized driver to FND_ TOP APPLREP Tip Use the executable program name and print style letter as the driver name For example use HPLJ3P prt for portrait style printing with the executable program HPLJ3 When you print in portrait style with this program the concurrent managers pass the HPLJ3P prt driver to Oracle Reports as DESFORMAT HPLJ3P For more information see the Oracle Reports Developer documentation Registering Executable Programs When you have created your executable programs and optionally your Oracle Reports drivers register them in the Printer Drivers form Define a printer driver and corresponding print style for each print style that your executable program supports Complete the following steps to register an executable program for a printer driver 1 Navigate to the Printer Drivers form and create a new printer driver name Also add the user name description and platform Setting Up and Starting Concurrent Managers 8 17 2 In the SRW Driver field enter the name without the prt extension of a standard or customized Oracle Reports driver All drivers must be in the directory ZFND_TOP APPLREP 3 Enter Program as the driver method 4 Enter No in the Spool File field 5 Enter No in the Standard Input field 6 Inthe Program Name field enter the name of the executable program or the command file that calls it Include the full path name if this file is not in the FND_TOP bin
451. or example fnd common e Set the logging level according to the appropriate level of detail Recall that EVENT messages report key progress events while EXCEPTION ERROR and UNEXPECTED messages report failures For maintenance purposes you should periodically rotate log files and purge old messages from the database table Updating Configuration Properties If you have configured logging using Middle tier properties you need to restart the affected processes for any changes to be picked up If you have configured logging using FND Log Profiles you need to request the user to log in again no restart is needed If you have configured logging using Logging to Screen the update is immediate No Logging 15 7 re login or restart is needed How to Completely Disable Logging Use the following procedure to completely disable logging e If logging is configured using middle tier properties then set the AFLOG_ENABLED middle tier properties to FALSE in all appropriate middle tier configuration files for example jserv properties and or startup scripts e If logging is configured using Oracle Application Object Library profiles in the database then use the logging setup screen in Oracle Applications Manager to turn off logging for all applications responsibilities and users For details see the Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance or the Oracle Applications Manager online help See the Updating Co
452. or that item to a role Then assign that role to the user Example Granting access to the Examine menu item only For example say you want to give a certain user full access to the Examine menu item only You want to make the other menu items that are controlled by the profile Utilities Diagnostics inaccessible to that user 1 Ensure that the profile option Hide Menu Entry is set to No because that profile controls whether the Diagnostics menu is visible at all items will be unavailable Ensure that the Utilities Diagnostics profile is set to No so that the other menu Grant the seeded permission set FND Diagnostics Examine Menu to a role Controlling Access to the Oracle Forms based Applications Diagnostics Menu F 5 4 Assign the role to the user The user should then be able to access the Examine menu item but not the other items controlled by the Utilites Diagnostics profile Related Topics Overview of Access Control with Oracle User Management Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security F 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration A AccessGate 19 1 AdminAppServer utility 2 11 Administer Folders 11 20 Administering Oracle E Business Suite security 2 15 AFPASSWD utility 11 5 ANSI dates in time zones E 2 AOL Setup Test Suite 2 20 Apache 2 6 Application registering 11 15 Application basepath 11 16 11 16 Application
453. our concurrent manager migrates back to its primary node when that node becomes available Nodes must be previously registered with Oracle E Business Suite using the Nodes window in Oracle E Business Suite Create a New Work Shift Use this page to define work shifts for your services Define work shifts to specify when your services can work Navigation Site Map Administration gt Service Instance type under Application Services gt Create Service gt Workshifts region B Add from Available Shifts gt B Create New Site Map gt Work Shift Library under Application Services gt Create New e Name The name of your work shift should be intuitive for instance Week Days Weeknights or Weekends e Description Add a description for your work shift e Schedule For each work shift specify a time period covering a range of days or a particular date Specify if you are scheduling by day or by date e Day Enter the first and last days of this shift For instance if your shift name is Week Days you could enter Monday in the Days of Week From field and Friday in the Days of Week To field If you enter a value in the Days of Week From field you must enter a value in the Days of Week To field e Date Enter a date here to create a date specific work shift Date specific work shifts override work shifts that do not specify a specific date If you want to enter a value in this field specify a date you
454. over Sensitivity for Work Shifts Nodes can become overloaded when a middle tier node fails and service instances on that node failover to their secondary nodes The Load Distribution feature allows the System Administrator to control the allocation of resources during normal processing The Failover Sensitivity feature allows Work Shifts to failover with fewer target processes than on the original node This lessens the impact on the existing resources allocated on the secondary node The number of failover target processes is entered as part of the standard Work Shift settings in the Service Instance Definition When failover occurs the ICM uses the Failover Processes value in place of the normal running processes value as it iterates through service instances to perform queue sizing 7 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Related Topics Defining Managers and their Work Shifts page 7 1 Work Shift Definitions page 7 3 Using Time Based Queues page 7 7 Work Shift by Manager Report page 7 16 Work Shifts Report page 7 16 Work Shifts page 7 66 Using Time Based Queues You can create several time based queues by defining managers to run programs based on how long those programs have typically run in the past That is you can specialize managers to segregate requests according to how long those requests take to run To do this use the Completed Concurrent Requests Report in the System Administrator
455. own the concurrent managers Defining Concurrent Managers 7 39 e after MIS restarts the operating system e after the database administrator restarts the database The STARTMGR command takes up to ten optional parameters e Each parameter except PRINTER has a default e You can modify the STARTMGR command and your environment to set your own defaults Enter the following command at your system prompt to start the Internal Concurrent Manager startmgr optional parameters You can pass the parameters in any order For example startmgr sysmgr username password mgrname std printer hqseql mailto jsmith restart N logfile mgrlog sleep 90 pmon 5 quesiz 10 The startmgr script accepts an Oracle username password as the sysmgr parameter Alternatively you could pass an Oracle E Business Suite username password as an appmgr parameter If no sysmgr or appmgr parameter is provided on the command line startmgr will prompt you for the Oracle password See Setting Up Concurrent Managers page 8 1 Viewing the Internal Concurrent Manager startup parameters The Internal Concurrent Manager s log file displays startup parameter values executed by the STARTMGR command An example is shown below You cannot change the parameter values logfile fnddev fnd 6 0 log FND60 mgr path is port specific PRINTER hqunx138 mailto appldev restart N diag sleep 60 default pmon 20 default quesiz 1 default
456. owser client and the web server Oracle Workflow Workflows can be defined for business flows so users can be sent automatically all the information they need to make a decision and have other business processes run automatically based upon their responses Workflows are defined using the Workflow Builder a Windows GUI interface that enables users to design the business process the activities items messages and lookup Oracle Self Service Web Applications D 3 lists and roles the approval chain This workflow is then integrated into the business transaction process For Web Employees it is integrated with the requisition approval process Notifications generated in the workflow chain can be viewed with the Oracle Self Service Web Applications or a Workflow supported email system Oracle Self Service Human Resources includes a predefined workflow process to generate offer letters All workflow processes are customizable For more information see the Oracle Workflow documentation Web Applications Dictionary This is an Oracle Forms based data dictionary used to define flow content When users query for data information is displayed on a web page complete with hypertext links that enable the user to drill down to more detailed information The pages that are linked in this way constitute a flow alternatively referred to as an inquiry Using the Web Applications Dictionary you specify the content of and links between the pag
457. pServer apps apps ADD SECURE PATH S FND TOP secure DB HOST database host DB PORT database port DB NAME database sid On Windows jre classpath CLASSPATH oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps ADD SECURE PATH SFND TOP secure DB HOST database host DB PORT database port DB NAME database sid To update a server ID You can update an application server s server ID at any time From the command line enter On UNIX java oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps UPDATE DBC dbc file path APPL SERVER ID On Windows jre classpath CLASSPATH oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps UPDATE DBC By providing the APPL SERVER ID argument you will force a new server ID to be generated and added to your DBC file If the APPL SERVER ID argument is not provided AdminAppServer will take care of syncing up the server ID s of your dbc file and your database automatically if required Basic Configuration Tasks 2 17 To delete a server ID Server IDs can be deleted This must be done using the AdminAppServer utility as follows On UNIX java oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps DELETE DBC dbc file path APPL SERVER ID On Windows jre classpath CLASSPATH oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps DELETE DBC Activatin
458. param where apps pwd 0Y mode lt configfile gt lt datafile gt lt entity gt lt param gt File Specifications The APPS schema and password in the form username password Gconnect string If connect string is omitted it is taken in a platform specific manner from the environment using the name TWO TASK Concurrent program flags UPLOAD or DOWNLOAD UPLOAD causes the datafile to be uploaded to the database DOWNLOAD causes the loader to fetch rows and write them to the datafile The configuration file to use usually with a suffix of Ict but not enforced or supplied by the loader The data file to write usually with a suffix of ldt but not enforced or supplied by the loader If the data file already exists it will be overwritten The entity ies to upload or download When uploading you should always upload all entities so specify a to upload all entities Zero or more additional parameters are used to provide bind values in the access SOL both UPLOAD and DOWNLOAD Each parameter is in the form NAME VALUE NAME should not conflict with an attribute name for the entities being loaded The configuration file and data file parameters are specified in one of two ways lt application short name dir file ext For example Gfnd 120 1loader fndapp lct Gpo install data poreq ldt Loaders B 3 Alternatively the parameters can be specified as such lt nati
459. parameter cannot be changed at submission time 5 Use the Shared Parameter field to set a default value for a parameter that occurs in more than one report or program of a request set Once you enter the same parameter label in the Shared Parameter field for each occurrence of the same parameter the value that you assign to the first occurrence of the parameter becomes the default value for all subsequent occurrences of the parameter The shared parameter label simply enables you to set an initial default value for all occurrences of the same parameter so you can avoid typing the same value all over again for every occurrence of the parameter For example suppose you define a request set that includes three reports and all reports include a parameter called Set of Books You want the Set of Books parameter to default to the same value in all reports To accomplish this enter a label called Book in the Shared Parameter field for the first occurrence of this parameter You can also assign a value in the Default Value field of this parameter now or wait until you run the request set to assign a default value when the parameter first appears Enter the label Book in the Shared Parameter field of all other occurrences of the Set of Books parameter in your request set When you submit this request set from the Submit Requests window every parameter that you label Book defaults to the value you assign to the first occurrence of the Set of B
460. parameters 6 14 Standard Submission form customizing 6 2 6 23 example customizing 6 26 explained 6 1 list 6 23 System Administrator report set privileges 6 18 System configuration 15 6 T Thai calendar support 18 4 Transaction Managers 7 2 U UCP See Oracle Universal Connection Pool Index 8 User Preferred Time Zone Support E 1 UTFS 18 4 V VERIFY STATS procedure CBO 12 22 Viewer Options window 7 72 Ww Web Applications Dictionary defined D 3 overview D 5 tasks D 7 Web browser architecture D 3 Web Enabled PL SOL Window 16 3 Work Directory 16 2
461. pe report Request Run Alone Indicate whether your program should run alone relative to all other programs in the same logical database If the execution of your program interferes with the execution of all other programs in the same logical database in other words if your program is incompatible with all programs in its logical database including itself it should run alone You can enter any specific incompatible programs in the Incompatible Programs windows Request Enable Trace Turns on SQL tracing when program runs Request Restart on System Failure Use this option to indicate that this concurrent program should automatically be restarted when the concurrent manager is restored after a system failure Request NLS Compliant This box is checked if the program allows for a user to submit a request of this program that will reflect a language and territory that are different from the language and territory that the users are operating in For example users can enter orders in English in the United Kingdom using the date and number formats appropriate in the United Kingdom then generate invoices in German using the date and number formats appropriate to their German customers If this box is left blank then a user can associate any installed language with the request but the territory will default to the territory of the concurrent manager environment Note that this option should be set only by the developer of the
462. pecialization Line Exclude line the rule establishes an manager is excluded AND condition from and reads AND EXCLUDE FEWER REQUESTS Combined Rule INCLUDE With each additional Each line within a Specialization Line Include line or rule establishes an additional AND condition requirement the AND INCLUDE manager reads FEWER REQUESTS Specializing Managers to run only certain programs page 7 17 Examples Using Specialization Rules page 7 22 Defining Combined Specialization Rules page 7 27 Using Combined Rules page 7 29 Concurrent Managers field help page 7 59 Combined Specialization Rules field help page 7 68 Grouping Programs by Request Type As System Administrator you may want to group similar programs together You do this by defining request types and assigning them to the programs that users request in Oracle E Business Suite You can define concurrent managers that only run programs that belong to a particular request type Using request types to specialize concurrent managers can help optimize the processing of Oracle E Business Suite by letting certain types of programs run without having to wait for other types of programs to finish processing Using request types saves you time when you create a concurrent manager s specialization rules Defining Concurrent Managers 7 33 Using Request Types Specializing a concurrent manage by request type involves three steps 1 Define a Request Type u
463. please check enqueue dequeue status of queue SYSTEM TBLMIG MESSAGEQUE by querying the following select NAME ENQUEUE ENABLED DEQUEUE ENABLED from dba queues where owner SYSTEM and name TBLMIG MESSAGEQUE Option 3 Execute Migration Commands for CTXSYS Schema The CTXSYS schema is not an APPS schema and in order to be included in the migration process the CTXSYS schema has to be registered in the following manner Login to the Forms based version of Oracle E Business Suite with the System Administrator Responsibility Navigate to Security gt ORACLE gt Register and register the CTXSYS schema if it is not already registered Then Set Privilege to Enabled CTXSYS schema objects are not classified by default and will be migrated to Transaction Tables and Transaction Index tablespaces for CTXSYS tables and indexes respectively Using Oracle Tablespace Migration Utility customizations steps it is possible to classify CTXSYS objects to be migrated to the desired tablespace or tablespace type Select Option 3 to migrate CTXSYS schema objects to the correct tablespace You are prompted for the number of parallel processes as input This option executes the generated commands from FND TS MIG CMDS table which generates the following events in sequence 1 Allconstraints triggers policies are disabled first and then the queues are stopped 2 The Java program oracle apps fnd tsmig T
464. pload of files from the local file system to the GFM database file system It supports simple uploads of single files as well as bulk uploads of many files FNDGFU also offers a download option that provides a convenient and quick means of retrieving the contents of large objects LOBs if the file identifier is known This utility is used in uploading help files for the Oracle E Business Suite online help system For information on downloading and uploading Oracle E Business Suite help files see Downloading and Uploading Help Files page 10 2 To delete files loaded to the database run the Purge Obsolete Generic File Manager Data concurrent program FNDGEFU is located in the FND_TOP bin directory Putting this directory on your path will allow you to invoke FNDGFU easily Upload files to the GFM To upload files using FNDGFU use the following syntax FNDGFU logon param filenames where logon Specifies a standard Oracle logon string of the form username password To specify a particular database append an sign and the database SID database param Includes the following parameters in any order as appropriate PROGRAM NAME name specifies the name of the program on whose behalf the LOB is to be maintained PROGRAM TAG name specifies the program tag which is a string used by the GFM client program to further categorize the LOB LANGUAGE language code specifies the language of the file PLS_CAL
465. portrait style printing with the executable program HPLJ3 When you print in portrait style with this program the concurrent managers pass the HPLJ3P prt driver to Oracle Reports as DESFORMAT HPLJ3P Registering Executable Programs When you have created your executable programs and optionally your shell scripts and Oracle Reports drivers register them in the Printer Drivers form 1 Navigate to the Printer Drivers window and create a new printer driver name Also add the user name description and platform In the SRW Driver field enter the name without the prt extension of a standard or customized Oracle Reports driver All drivers must be in the directory FND_TOP APPLREP Enter Program as the driver method Enter No in the Spool File field Enter No in the Standard Input field In the program name field enter the name of the executable program or the shell script that calls it Include the full path name if this file is not in the FND_TOP bin directory Add the arguments that Oracle E Business Suite passes to the program or shell script The driver must pass the following to the executable program e Name of the destination printer e Number of copies to print e Banner on title page e Filename e Add the initialization and reset strings to the appropriate fields if the program does not send these strings to the printer Printing For Windows This section contains printer reference material specific to the Win
466. ports overrides SRW Driver width and height if the report is to be printed 5 Areportis created using Oracle Reports The concurrent manager attaches Printer Driver information to the file It prepends the initialization string and appends the reset string The concurrent manager also passes suppress header option information from the Printer Styles form 6 The concurrent manager issues an operating system print command with the Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration arguments Destination Printer Filename including path Number of Copies to print and Filename for the Title on the banner page Related Topics Overview of Printers and Printing page 9 1 Printer Types Print Styles and Printer Drivers page 9 2 Setting Character Mode vs Bitmap Printing page 9 5 Setting up Your Printers page 9 8 Fast Track Printing with Pasta page 9 10 Customizing Printing Support in Oracle E Business Suite page 9 31 Postscript Printing in UNIX page 9 43 Setting Character Mode vs Bitmap Printing Running Character mode Oracle Reports Concurrent Programs Character mode Oracle Reports programs take their page dimensions and orientation from the print style associated with the request to run the program Some print styles are predefined and a System Administrator can define additional styles if necessary After you create an Oracle Reports program you create a corresponding concurrent program exec
467. ps are completed the default or the process will wait for your input before proceeding with migration execution in case you want to perform some checks back up the database and so on Each step will be started automatically once the previous step is finished and will be running in the background Option 2 Run Migration Monitor The overall migration status report covers all OATM process phases that is the creation of tablespaces generation of migration commands and execution of migration commands For all migration steps status details such as the parameters passed and the name of the log files are reported as well as the migration progress based on the total number of the migration commands number of successfully executed commands and number of commands that failed during execution Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility 3 25 4 System Administration Setup Tasks Setup Tasks for the Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator This section contains an overview of each task you need to complete before you can use Oracle E Business Suite products Setup Checklist After you log on to Oracle E Business Suite as a system administrator complete the following steps to set up your Oracle E Business Suite instance Create Accounts for Implementors to Complete Setting Up page 4 2 Create New Responsibilities Optional page 4 2 Create Additional Users page 4 2 Set Up Oracle Applications Manager pag
468. ptional Optionally define settings for globalization formerly internationalization features These include but are not limited to the following features Modify Language Prompts Optional If you want to modify the field name displayed in the Translations window you should change the Description value for the language you want to modify in the Languages window Modify Territory LOV Values Optional If you want to modify the territory value displayed in LOVs you should change the Description value for the territory you want to modify in the Territories window Specify Preferences for Oracle Workflow Notifications Required The SYSADMIN user is the default recipient for some types of notifications in Oracle E Business Suite such as error notifications You need to specify how you want to receive these notifications by defining the notification preference and e mail address for the SYSADMIN user By default the SYSADMIN user has a notification preference to receive e mail notifications To enable Oracle Workflow to send e mail to this user navigate to the Users window and assign SYSADMIN an e mail address that is fully qualified with a valid domain However if you want to access notifications only through the Oracle Workflow Worklist Web page then you should change the notification preference for SYSADMIN to Do not send me mail in the Preferences page In this case you do not need to define an e mail address 4 4 Oracle E Busines
469. purge the FND_STATS_HIST table NONE This mode does not generate any history information If this mode is used the run cannot be restarted This flag indicates whether cursors dependent on the index being analyzed should be invalidated By default dependent cursors are invalidated GATHER ALL COLUMN STATS Procedure This procedure gathers column statistics i e creates histograms on all columns that are seeded in the END HISTOGRAM COLS belonging to the specified schema Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite 12 19 Syntax FND STATS GATHER ALL CO UMN STATS ownname percent degree hmode invalidate Parameters ownname percent degree Hmode Invalidate VARC NUMB NUMB VARC VARC HAR2 t ER D EFAULT NULL ER D EFAULT NUL HAR2 HAR2 ANALYZE ALL COLUMNS Procedure This procedure has been made obsolete 4 DEFAULT LASTRUN DEFAULT Y Schema for which seeded histograms have to be created ALL means all Applications schemas The sampling percentage If left blank the default value of 10 is used The valid range is from 0 to 100 The degree of parallelism to be used for gathering statistics If a degree is not provided it defaults to the minimum of parallel max servers and cpu count This parameter controls the amount of history records that are created LASTRUN History records for each index are maintained
470. quently enter or interpret data erroneously Note the behavior of the existing profile Concurrent Multiple Time Zones CONC MULTI TZ This was an older feature to handle batch processing Setting this profile to Yes alters the default value that appears for the Scheduled Start Date in the Submit Requests screen to SYSDATE 1 With the new user preferred time zone feature enabled this profile is no longer needed and should have a value of No Environment Variable FORMS APPSLIBS This environment variable controls multiple aspects of Oracle Forms in the Oracle E Business Suite environment and must be left unchanged from the installed setting Launching Forms based Applications The time zone feature is only available in Oracle Forms based user interfaces within Oracle E Business Suite when the user logs in through the Personal Home Page or the Navigator portlet Direct launching of Forms for example by typing a URL into the browser address line is supported only for bootstrap purposes and will not enable the time zone feature or other features such as language settings and date formats Time Zone Support E 5 Controlling Access to the Oracle Forms based Applications Diagnostics Menu Controlling Access to the Oracle Forms based Applications Diagnostics Menu The Diagnostics menu is one of several menus available in Oracle Forms based applications in Oracle E Business Suite These menus allow the user to invoke stand
471. queries for any existing document categories 14 10 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Application Code Name Description Table Name Related Topics Once a category is defined you cannot change the choice of application Only tables belonging to the selected application can be assigned to a category Category code must be unique within an application Once a category is defined you cannot update its code You can update the name if you wish For example if the category name is predefined you can change the name to a more familiar value You can update the description if you wish For example if the category description is predefined you can change the description to a more familiar value Select the name of the table that stores the documents you want to identify by your category e When the sequential numbering feature checks for completeness or generates a report it locates the category s documents in the table Only tables belonging to the application associated with the category can be chosen e Oncea category is defined you cannot change the choice of table What is a Document Sequence page 14 1 Document Sequences page 14 7 Sequence Assignments page 14 12 Document Sequences 14 11 Sequence Assignments Window Oracle Applications olx File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help ORACLE SE Sequence Assignments Document
472. quests submitted by a user e All requests submitted by a user for a given application e All requests belonging to a program submitted by a user e All requests belonging to a request set submitted by a user irrespective of the constituent programs owning application to another user or a group of users via a role System administrators can create new instance sets based on their needs They can grant access to requests of a particular program set submitted by all users to a specific set of users For example say a given application s administrators group want to track all requests of a particular type or program submitted by business users Then the following approach to grant specific programs requests to a group of users can be used 1 Createan instance set that selects all the requests belonging to the particular program irrespective of which user submitted it For example amp TABLE ALIAS request id in select cr request id from fnd concurrent requests cr fnd concurrent programs cp where cr concurrent program id cp concurrent program id and cr program application id cp application id and cp concurrent program name amp GRANT ALIAS PARAMETER1 If you want to grant access to a set of programs instead of a single program amp GRANT ALIAS PARAMETERT can be replaced with a subquery that returns all the programs in a particular request group 2 Create a grant to grant this instance set to an exis
473. r concurrent managers so that they run all requests requests submitted by a particular user requests submitted by a particular application or other constraints or any combination of these constraints If you are using Parallel Concurrent Processing in a cluster massively parallel or homogeneous networked environment you should register your Nodes and then assign your concurrent managers to primary and secondary nodes You can spread your concurrent managers and therefore your concurrent processing across all available nodes to fully utilize hardware resources Use the Define Concurrent Manager form to define new concurrent managers System Administration Setup Tasks 4 3 Define Request Sets Optional A request set is a group of reports or programs which you submit with one request To define and maintain request sets use the Request Sets form Users can also define their own request sets Set Up AuditTrail Optional If you want to keep track of the changes made to your data by application users you should set up AuditTrail for the relevant tables Defining AuditTrail for your site involves defining Audit Groups which are groups of tables and columns for which you intend to track changes You then define Audit Installations to instruct AuditTrail which ORACLE IDs you want to audit Finally you run the Audit Trail Update Tables Report which allows your AuditTrail definitions to take effect Define Globalization Options O
474. r printer operating system names refer to the Printing section of Oracle E Business Suite Installation Guide Using Rapid Install For more information on setting up your printers see Printers and Printing page 9 1 Specify Your Site level and Application level Profile Options Use the System Profile Values form Profile gt System to set site level and other profile optons Optionally set your Site Name profile option to your site name Many profile options are set by AutoConfig and their values can be reviewed in Oracle Applications Manager For more information see Oracle E Business Suite Maintenance Utilities Define Your Concurrent Managers Optional Concurrent Processing is a feature of Oracle E Business Suite that lets you perform multiple tasks simultaneously Oracle E Business Suite Concurrent Processing lets you run long data dependent functions at the same time as your users perform online operations Concurrent managers are components of concurrent processing that monitor and run your time consuming tasks without tying up your computers Oracle E Business Suite automatically installs one standard concurrent manager that can run every request You may want to take advantage of the flexibility of concurrent managers to control throughput on your system You can define as many concurrent managers as you need Keep in mind however that each concurrent manager consumes additional memory You can specialize each of you
475. r program It must be the short name that you enter in the Concurrent Programs window when defining a concurrent program Optional A descriptive name for your program The program field on the View Requests form displays this as the user friendly program name The concurrent program short name passed to CONCSUB is often hard for end users to understand so the PROGRAM_NAME parameter allows you to pass a more easily remembered name for your concurrent program If you do not specify a PROGRAM_NAME the View Requests form displays the user friendly program name specified in the Concurrent Programs window You may also use the PROGRAM_NAME parameter to indicate the batch that your request processes for programs that process a set of data where there could be several requests for a given program that are active at the same time Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 41 REPEAT_TIME Optional The time of day to resubmit the request The format for the time is HH24 MI or HH24 MI SS For example REPEAT_TIME 14 30 resubmits your request daily at 2 30 p m Important Do not use REPEAT_TIME with other resubmission parameters except for the optional parameters REPEAT_END and START REPEAT_ INTERVAL Optional The interval between resubmission a positive integer or real number Use this parameter along with REPEAT_INTERVAL_UNIT to specify the time between resubmissions REPEAT INTERVAL UNIT Optional The unit of time used for the inter
476. r responsibility s request security group Use the Request Set form to create and edit request sets Request Set Stages This section describes how request set stages are defined and organized Organizing Request Sets into Stages Request sets are divided into one or more stages which are linked to determine the sequence in which requests are run Each stage consists of one or more requests that you want to run in parallel at the same time in any order For example in the simplest request set structure all requests are assigned to a single stage This allows all of the requests to run in parallel Request Set with a Single Stage Request Set Stage 1 request 1 request 2 request 3 To run requests in sequence you assign requests to different stages and then link the stages in the order you want the requests to run Request Set with a Sequence of Stages Request Set Stage 1 Stage 2 Stage 3 request 1 request 2 request 3 The concurrent manager allows only one stage in a request set to run at a time When one stage is complete the following stage is submitted A stage is not considered to be complete until all of the requests in the stage are complete One advantage of using stages is the ability to run several requests in parallel and then move sequentially to the next stage This allows for a more versatile and efficient 6 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration request
477. r s Guide Configuration re migration steps to create new tablespaces with the desired uniform extent size and migrate objects to those new tablespaces The OATM Migration Utility supports all possible configurations of locally managed tablespaces You have the flexibility to override the default recommendation of uniform extent size with Auto Allocate extent management as per your requirements Uniform extent size is also configurable Note The Oracle database server does not as yet support altering the extent management type or uniform extent size after the locally managed tablespaces have been created Therefore if the originally used extent management type or uniform extent size needs to be modified re creation of the tablespaces and re migration of objects is the only available option Re migration steps Use the customization option to change names of existing OATM tablespaces as listed in the following table Tablespace Type Old Tablespace Name New Tablespace Name Transaction Tables APPS_TS_TX_DATA APPS_TS_TX_DATA_1MB Transaction Indexes APPS_TS_TX_IDX APPS TS TX IDX 1MB Reference APPS TS SEED Interface APPS TS INTERFACE APPS TS INTERFACE 1MB Summary APPS TS SUMMARY APPS TS SUMMARY 1MB Nologging APPS TS NOLOGGING Advanced Queuing AQ APPS TS QUEUES Media APPS TS MEDIA APPS TS MEDIA 1MB Archive APPS TS ARCHIVE APPS TS ARCHIVE 1MB Please note that for the types of tablespaces for which you do not wish to modify the uniform
478. r values from the concurrent manager Enabled Disabled parameters do not display at request submission time and are not passed to your execution file Argument Detail You specify information about your parameter almost exactly as you define a flexfield segment Validation Information Value Set Enter the name of the value set you want your parameter to use for validation You can only select from independent table and non validated value sets The maximum size of your value set is 240 characters Important If you are using a value set of dates this value set should have a format type of either Standard Date or Standard DateTime if you are using the Multilingual Request feature Validation Information Default Type If you want to set a default value for this parameter identify the type of value you need Valid types include Constant The default value can be any literal value Profile The default value is the current value in the user profile option defined in the Default Value field Use the profile option name not the end user name You do not need to include PROFILE SQL Statement The default value is determined by the SQL statement you defined in the Default Value field Segment The default value is the value entered in a prior segment of the same parameter window Validation Information Default Value You can enter a default value for the parameter This default value for your parameter automatically app
479. racle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration e Debugging is required for all request responses within a specific session Pinpointing an Error to a Specific User You can use Oracle Application Object Library profiles to enable logging for the specific user responsibility and application that were active when the error occurred Ask the user to log in again for the profile changes to take effect Remember to return the profiles to their usual values after debugging has been completed If you suspect that certain code is causing the problem then use hierarchical module filters to restrict which messages are logged For example fnd common Set the logging level according to the appropriate level of detail Recall that EVENT messages report key progress events while EXCEPTION ERROR and UNEXPECTED messages report failures For High Volumes For high load high volume scenarios you can log middle tier messages to a local file which is faster than logging to a remote database To do so define the AFLOG FILENAME property to write all middle tier logging to a local file Be sure to limit the number of generated messages e Use Oracle Application Object Library FND Profiles to restrict logging according to e Specific users e Specific responsibilities e Specific applications e If you suspect that certain code is causing the problem then use hierarchical module filters to restrict which messages are logged F
480. racle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility 3 9 e perform test runs to determine the amount of down time required to perform a comprehensive migration of all schemas e secure twice as much disk space as your existing space to perform the a single comprehensive migration of all schemas and to be operational using the new model Setting Up the Tablespace Migration Utility Setting up the Tablespace Migration Utility When you first install the Tablespace Migration Utility it does the following e Copies the PERL menu script fndtsmig pl to the FND TOP bin directory e Copies the SOL scripts for the Tablespace Migration utility to FND_TOP patch 120 sql directory e Copies the PLS files for the Tablespace Migration utility to the FND_TOP patch 120 sql directory and creates packages in the database e Compiles the Java files into the packages oracle apps fnd tsmig in END TOP java apps zip file e Creates and seeds the following tables e FND TABLESPACES e FND OBJECT TABLESPACES e FND TS SIZING e FND TS MIG CMDS e FND TS MIG RULES e FND TS PROD INSTS Invoking the Tablespace Migration Utility Main Menu 3 10 Invoke the Tablespace Migration Utility main menu by performing the following 1 Run the fndtsmig pl PERL script perl FND TOP bin fndtsmig pl 2 Provide the following information when prompted to access the Tablespace Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configu
481. rameter indicates whether the TITLE parameter is a message name or a hardcoded string The default value is Y which indicates that TITLE is a message name Optional Related Topics Customizing the Submit Requests Window page 6 24 Organizing Programs into Request Groups page 6 22 Using Codes with Request Groups page 6 23 Report Group Responsibilities Report page 6 27 Request Groups page 6 59 Report Group Responsibilities Report This report lists those responsibilities which have access to a report or a request set Use this report when granting access privileges to reports and request sets either by assigning reports and request sets to request security groups or when assigning owners to a request set Report Parameters Application Name Choose the application name associated with the report or request set Report Name Request Set Name Either choose the name of a report or request set Related Topics Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests page 6 1 Organizing Programs into Request Groups page 6 22 Request Groups page 6 59 Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 27 Defining Program Incompatibility Rules This essay explains how you can define incompatibility rules for your concurrent programs and reports Incompatible and Run Alone Programs When a concurrent program is incompatible with another program the two programs cannot access or update the same data simultaneously When you defi
482. ration Migration Utility main menu e OATM configuration file e APPL_TOP e FND TOP fnddev fnd 12 0 e Database Connect String dummy atgtsqa e Password for your SYSTEM ORACLE Schema e Password for your SYS ORACLE Schema e Oracle Application Object Library Schema name APPS e Password for APPS e APPLSYS Schema Name APPLSYS Information can be provided in an interactive manner or by providing an OATM configuration file with all information already specified An OATM configuration file has the following format with the following valid tags PPL TOP valid APPL TOP value or SENV ND TOP valid FND TOP value or SENV PPS SCHEMA valid apps schema name PPLSYS SCHEMA valid applsys schema name LOC TYPE UNIFORM AUTOALLOCATE valid integer uniform extent size pecie A E p m mu n BF DIR valid directory for generated database file NDIVIDUAL DATAFILE SIZE maximum datafile size UM WORKER integer number of concurrent workers IGRATION SCHEMA or comma separated list of schemas ONNECT STRING database connect string UTO START MIGRATION should migration be started automatically after preparatory steps are completed Y default N ENVS is a reserved word for the OATM configuration file If SENV is used as a value for a specific token then that token s real value will be derived from the customer s environment dynamically during the runt
483. re information visit the Oracle Accessibility Program Web site at http www oracle com accessibility Accessibility of Code Examples in Documentation Screen readers may not always correctly read the code examples in this document The conventions for writing code require that closing braces should appear on an otherwise empty line however some screen readers may not always read a line of text that consists solely of a bracket or brace Accessibility of Links to External Web Sites in Documentation Structure xviii This documentation may contain links to Web sites of other companies or organizations that Oracle does not own or control Oracle neither evaluates nor makes any representations regarding the accessibility of these Web sites Introduction Basic Configuration Tasks Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and Migration Utility System Administration Setup Tasks Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests Defining Concurrent Managers Setting Up and Starting Concurrent Managers Printers 10 Oracle E Business Suite Help 11 Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 12 Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite 13 Oracle E Business Suite and Oracle Real Application Clusters 14 Document Sequences 15 Logging 16 Developer Tools 17 Administering Process Navigation 18 Administering Globalization 19 Integration of Oracle E Business Suite with Other Products A Oracle Application
484. rent Programs page 6 65 Custom Concurrent Programs This section provides information for system administrators on custom concurrent programs It explains certain procedures and conventions for creating customized concurrent programs e Log and Output Filenames page 6 33 e Oracle Tool Concurrent Programs page 6 34 e Pro C Concurrent Programs page 6 35 e Host Language Concurrent Programs page 6 38 e Submitting Concurrent Requests CONCSUB page 6 39 For information on creating custom concurrent programs see the Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide For information on setting up the development environment see the Oracle E Business Suite Concepts Guide 6 32 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Log and Output Filenames Log and output files must have specific names and locations for users to review the files online If you use the Oracle Application Object Library routine fdpwrt to write to files the concurrent managers automatically name the files according to the operating system s naming conventions This method of writing to files is completely portable You do not have to rewrite your programs to name your log and output files differently if you port your application to another platform Standard Names Standard names for log and output files are listed in the following table File Type Location Filename Log Default I request ID gt req lt PROD gt _TOP APPLLOG
485. rget Nodes Using the Services Instances page in Oracle Applications Manager OAM or the Administer Concurrent Managers form you can view the target node for each concurrent manager in a parallel concurrent processing environment The target node is the node on which the processes associated with a concurrent manager should run It can be the node that is explicitly defined as the concurrent manager s primary node in the Concurrent Managers window or the node assigned by the Internal Concurrent Manager If you have defined primary and secondary nodes for a manager then when its primary node and ORACLE instance are available the target node is set to the primary node Otherwise the target node is set to the manager s secondary node if that node and its ORACLE instance are available During process migration processes migrate from their current node to the target node Control Across Nodes Using the Services Instances page in Oracle Applications Manager or the Administer Concurrent Managers form you can start stop abort restart and monitor concurrent managers and Internal Monitor Processes running on multiple nodes from any node in your parallel concurrent processing environment You do not need to log onto a node to control concurrent processing on it You can also terminate the Internal Concurrent Manager or any other concurrent manager from any node in your parallel concurrent processing environment 7 48 Oracle E Business Suite Sys
486. riday with 4 target processes You also have a Lunch work shift from 11 00 am to 1 00 pm on Monday through Friday with 8 target processes The Lunch work shift takes effect from 11 00 am to 1 00 pm Mon Fri because it has the larger number of target processes Defining Managers and their Work Shifts page 7 1 Using Work Shifts to Balance Processing Workload page 7 5 Using Time Based Queues page 7 7 Using Work Shifts to Balance Processing Workload Part of a manager s definition is how many operating system processes it can devote to reading requests For each of these processes referred to as a target process a manager Defining Concurrent Managers 7 5 can start one concurrent program For each work shift you assign to a manager you define a number of target processes By using work shifts with different numbers of target processes you can modify your concurrent processing workload according to the day time of day and even specific dates The figure below illustrates how by using three work shifts a manager can be defined to run three programs concurrently from 6 00am 6 00pm and six programs concurrently from 6 00pm 6 00am Modifying Process Workload Over Time 12am 6am 12pm pm 11 59pm 00 00 06 00 12 00 18 00 23 59 LM Day work shift target processes 3 Night work shift target processes 6 l i Graveyard work shift l target processes 6 pau i Fail
487. ring Parameters in a Request Set Parameters also referred to as arguments are values that define aspects of a program s execution You can share a parameter and its entered value among some or all of the requests in your request set You identify a parameter as shared by giving it a label Then for each concurrent program in your request set you can assign the same label to a parameter for that program Among the programs in your request set the parameters for each program share or accept a common value The first time you enter a value for any of the shared parameters that value becomes the shared parameter s value This is useful because you only have to enter a value once rather than for each program in the request set Behavior of Shared Parameters Selecting a value for a shared parameter provides a default for subsequent occurrences of the parameter Changing a shared parameter s value provides a new default for subsequent occurrences of the parameter but does not affect prior requests in the set Once all the shared parameters contain values changing the value for a shared parameter has no effect on the other shared parameters Important Do not hide shared parameters Do not set shared parameters to Display No which prevents modifying the value or Modify No This prevents updates to shared parameters which are not propagated to other reports in the set from generating unwanted inconsistencies 6 20 Oracle E Busine
488. rintCommand outFile noPrint duplex embednumcopies copysort heightScaleRate N A N A N A default 1 0 Specific print command for Windows platform If you want to save the output file use this option to define the ouput file name and its destination on the middle tier mon Set this option to y if you do not want Pasta to produce printed output Specifies duplex printing Options are y n or default uses the printer side setting mon Set this option to y to embed the number of copies to be printed ina PostScript file Using this option will eliminate the header page normally printed between reports If you set embednumcopies to have the copies collated by setting mom this option to y Adjusts the space between lines y you can choose to N A np N A N A N A 9 20 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Key Name Default Value Description Command Line Equivalent widthScaleRate pagewidth pageheight topMargin bottomMargin rightMargin leftMargin Font lt Face gt lt Style gt fontsize 1 0 8 27 11 64 25 25 25 25 N A 7 8 for landscape 10 0 for portrait Adjusts the space between characters Adjusts the page width Adjusts the page height Adjusts the top margin Adjusts the bottom margin Adjusts the right margin Adjust
489. rity Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security From the Core Services tab e Lookups e Messages Profiles and Profile Categories e Functions e Menus Functional Administrator and Functional Developer Tasks C 1 e Caching Framework For information on Lookups see Application Utilities Lookups and Oracle Application Object Library Lookups Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide For information on Messages see Overview of Message Dictionary Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide For information on Profiles see Overview of Setting User Profiles Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance For information on functions and menus see Overview of Oracle E Business Suite Security Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security For information on the Caching Framework see the section Caching Framework page C 5 and the Oracle E Business Suite Java Caching Framework Developer s Guide available from My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 1087332 1 Oracle Application Framework Release Notes Release 12 1 3 From the Personalization tab e Application Catalog e Import Export For more information on Personalization see the section Oracle Application Personalization Framework page C 3 For more information on File Manager see the section Generic File Manager Access Utility FNDGFU page B 24 For more information on Portletization see the section Port
490. rname password and e mail address from the Metalink Credentials page These credentials will be used when querying My Oracle Support through Knowledge Base links Also you should ensure that the following profile options are set appropriately for your proxy server e Applications Proxy Bypass Domains e Applications Proxy Port e Applications Server Side Proxy Host and Domain Business Flows Setup Enable or disable monitoring of business flows Click the Metrics Refresh link to schedule requests for the OAM KBF Metrics Rollup Program to update the setup status of your business flows Knowledge Base The Knowledge Base provides a catalog of useful documents relevant to managing your system 5 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Concurrent Requests From this page you can enable alerting for concurrent requests that have been running or pending for a long time You can specify the thresholds for which request must reach before alerts are raised Specifically you can enable the system to do the following e Raise a general alert for any long running requests for any concurrent program e Raise an alert for a long running request for a specific program Specify the concurrent program s you want to monitor e Raise a general alert for any long pending requests for any concurrent program e Raise an alert for a long pending request for a specific program Specify the concurrent program s yo
491. rocesses and customize existing Oracle E Business Suite embedded workflow processes It also describes how to define and customize business events and event subscriptions Oracle Workflow User s Guide This guide describes how users can view and respond to workflow notifications and monitor the progress of their workflow processes Oracle Workflow API Reference This guide describes the APIs provided for developers and administrators to access Oracle Workflow Oracle Workflow Client Installation Guide This guide describes how to install the Oracle Workflow Builder and Oracle XML Gateway Message Designer client components for Oracle E Business Suite Oracle XML Publisher Report Designer s Guide Oracle XML Publisher is a template based reporting solution that merges XML data with templates in RTF or PDF format to produce a variety of outputs to meet a variety of business needs Using Microsoft Word or Adobe Acrobat as the design tool you can create pixel perfect reports from the Oracle E Business Suite Use this guide to design your report layouts This guide is available through the Oracle E Business Suite online help Oracle XML Publisher Administration and Developer s Guide Oracle XML Publisher is a template based reporting solution that merges XML data with templates in RTF or PDF format to produce a variety of outputs to meet a variety of business needs Outputs include PDF HTML Excel RTF and eText for EDI and EFT transaction
492. rocesses as input This option executes the generated commands from FND TS MIG CMDS table which generates the following events in sequence 1 Allconstraints triggers policies are disabled first and then the queues are stopped 2 Java program oracle apps fnd tsmig TSMigration is executed to migrate all the tables with LONG and LONG RAW columns along with their indexes A log file for the migration of tables with LONG is generated as fndmlong lt timestamp gt log 3 A sequential process is started that executes the script fndemseq sql to move all the objects generated with execution mode as sequential A log file for the sequential process is generated as fndemseg lt timestamp gt log 4 Multiple processes are started to execute the SOL script fndemcmd sql to migrate the objects generated with execution mode as parallel A log file is generated as fndemcmd lt timestamp gt log Example Are you sure you want to migrate all schemas N y Enter the maximum number of parallel processes 4 10 Starting the Migration process for all schemas Please wait Migration processes for tables with LONG and LONG RAW columns started Please monitor the log file SAPPL TOP admin log fndmlong20050120230037 10g for errors Sequential migration process started Please monitor the log file SAPPL TOP admin log fndemseq20050120230038 10g for errors Parallel migration processes started Please monitor the log file SAPPL TOP admin log fndemcmd20050120
493. rocessing Parallel concurrent processing provides Oracle E Business Suite users with the following benefits e High performance the ability to run concurrent processes on multiple nodes to improve concurrent processing throughput Defining Concurrent Managers 7 43 Fault Tolerance the ability to continue running concurrent processes on available nodes even when one or more nodes fails e Adaptability the ability to integrate with platform specific batch queue and load balancing systems to maximize concurrent processing performance on a particular platform Single Point of Control the ability to administer concurrent managers running on multiple nodes from any node in a cluster massively parallel or networked environment Parallel Concurrent Processing Environments Parallel concurrent processing runs in multi node environments such as cluster massively parallel and networked environments In these environments each node consists of one or more processors CPUs and their associated memory Each node has its own memory that is not shared with other nodes And each node operates independently of other nodes except when sharing a resource such as a disk With parallel concurrent processing one or more concurrent managers run on one or more nodes in a multi node environment You decide where concurrent managers run when configuring your system You can define any set of concurrent manager specialization rules and apply
494. rolling Concurrent Managers page 7 35 Overview of Parallel Concurrent Processing page 7 43 7 58 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Concurrent Managers Window B Oracle Applications File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help ORACLE ZAIM AECT IE PEA S Concurrent Managers Short Name WE Concurrent Manager Data Group Consumer Group EMEN Cache Size Parallel Concurrent Processing Details Node System Queue Platform Primary Program Library Name Application Specialization Rules Work Shifts Use this window to define your concurrent managers You can determine when a manager runs and how many programs a manager can start simultaneously when you assign workshifts to the manager Determine which programs a manager can start by defining specialization rules Concurrent Managers Block The combination of an application and the name you define for your manager uniquely identifies the manager Application The application name does not prevent a manager from starting programs associated with other applications To restrict a manager to only running programs associated with certain applications go to the Specialization Rules window Type Once you define a concurrent manager you cannot update this field There are several types of managers Defining Concurrent Managers 7 59 Concurrent Manager Concurrent Managers start concurrent programs runn
495. rpreter The Perl Interpreter is embedded within the Oracle HTTP Server removing the necessity to spawn an external interpreter as well as providing a caching mechanism such that modules and scripts need only be loaded or compiled once Oracle E Business Suite does not currently utilize mod_perl The Oracle HTTP Server is powered by a standard version of Apache A number of books have been published describing the operation of the Apache server To further add to your knowledge of the Apache server you may wish to consult one of these Note Refer to the Oracle HTTP Server documentation for a more detailed description of the operation and configuration of the Oracle HTTP Server The information in this section is supplementary to that provided in the Oracle HTTP Server books Oracle E Business Suite Installation Guide Using Rapid Install should be consulted for additional information on directory structures and file locations referred to in this guide Apache Configuration Files Location Apache is configured through directives contained in one or more configuration files The directives necessary for operating Apache within the Oracle environment will be entered into the configuration files during the install process It should not be necessary to modify these files unless the system is being re configured Warning An invalid directive entered into a configuration file will prevent Apache from starting An incorrect definition provided
496. rrent Manager it issues commands to deactivate all active managers Managers that were deactivated on an individual basis are not affected If you terminate requests and deactivate the Internal Concurrent Manager it issues commands to all other managers to terminate their requests and deactivate Requests that are currently running are immediately stopped and marked for resubmission when the managers are activated Verify Concurrent Manager Status The Internal Concurrent Manager continuously monitors each concurrent manager s operating system process This process monitoring is referred to as the Internal Concurrent Manager s PMON cycle The length of the PMON cycle is one of the arguments passed by the STARTMGR command which starts up the Internal Concurrent Manager You can instruct the Internal Concurrent Manager to immediately verify the operating status of your individual concurrent managers or to perform a PMON check Startup Threshold for Concurrent Managers Concurrent Managers are started from a Service Manager which in turn is started by the Internal Concurrent Manager You can set a threshold for the number of requests the Internal Concurrent Manager will make to start a concurrent manager after it fails to start During each ICM PMON cycle the managers are verified and the system attempts to place a lock on each specific manager If a manager is not up as expected then the ICM 7 36 Oracle E Business Suite System Administra
497. rval field Copying and Modifying Program Definitions page 6 44 Concurrent Program Parameters page 6 47 Control the Behavior of Request Parameters page 6 48 Concurrent Program Details Report page 6 57 Conflict Domains A conflict domain is a set of related data stored in one or more ORACLE schemas and linked by grants and synonyms Do not confuse logical databases with your ORACLE database The ORACLE database contains all your Oracle E Business Suite data with each application s data usually residing in one ORACLE schema You can think of a Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 55 logical database as a line drawn around a set of related data for which you wish to define concurrent program incompatibilities In other words logical databases determine which concurrent programs cannot run at the same time Logical Databases and Program Incompatibilities When an ORACLE schema is identified as belonging to a logical database concurrent program incompatibility rules are enforced when concurrent programs connect to the ORACLE schema By checking for incompatibilities between programs running concurrently accessing the same data Oracle E Business Suite ensures that data retrieved by one program is not incorrect or adversely affected when retrieved by another program Example Program Incompatibilities An example of a concurrent program that is incompatible with other concurrent programs is Oracle General Ledger s
498. s Recommended Default Site Level Settings For normal operations we recommend that you configure your system as follows e Enabled On Logging Level UNEXPECTED e Log Repository Database e Module Filter Caution If you set the default site level logging level to STATEMENT or PROCEDURE a decrease in system performance could result Under that configuration the large amount of generated log messages might significantly slow down the system Furthermore if the site level logging level is set to a low severity for a long time then the FND_LOG_MESSAGES table could potentially run out of space Recommended Settings for Debugging If you need to lower the logging level in order to gather information about a system error use the following recommended configurations As stated above the default logging level should be UNEXPECTED This maintains optimum system performance Using Logging to Screen For Java based pages that are based on the Oracle CRM Technology Foundation or the Oracle Application Framework if you have access to the browser that is displaying the generated HTML you can use the Logging to Screen feature to view further details if an error is reported See Using Logging to Screen page 15 1 This lightweight mechanism works best in cases where e You are interested in Java layer messages only e Debugging of is required for a particular request response For example a JSP request from a browser 15 6 O
499. s Oracle Application Server with Oracle E Business Suite A 1 Integration with third party single sign on services e g Netegrity Entrust and LDAP V 3 directories e g SunONE iPlanet Microsoft Active Directory Integration with third party and legacy applications via Oracle Integration A detailed description of Oracle Single Sign On integration options with Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 can be found in the Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security For information on using OracleAS 10g with Oracle E Business Suite refer to the following knowledge documents on My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 376811 1 Integrating Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 with Oracle Internet Directory and Oracle Single Sign On Knowledge Document 380483 1 Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 Additional Configuration and Deployment Options Knowledge Document 380484 1 Using Oracle Portal 10g with Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 Knowledge Document 380486 1 Installing and Configuring Web Cache 10g and Oracle E Business Suite 12 Knowledge Document 373634 1 Using Discoverer 10 1 2 with Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 A 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration B Loaders Generic Loader Overview The Generic Loader FNDLOAD is a concurrent program that can move Oracle E Business Suite data between database and text file representations The loader reads a configurat
500. s Print Styles Printer Drivers PRINTER TYPE PRINT STYLE Manufacturer Output format Model PRINTER DRIVER Commands specific to printer type and operating platform to achieve print style The printer type is the printer manufacturer and model Two examples are a DEC LN03 printer and an HP Laserjet III printer A Print style defines the page format for a printer such as the number of lines per page the width of each line and whether a header page should be printed Each printer type can have one or more associated print styles Print styles allow you to set up report dimensions on a variety of printers You can tailor your page setups while providing consistent looking reports from printer to printer For example users may wish to print a menu report with a wider left margin to allow for hole punching the paper As System Administrator you register this new style which users can then access if the printer type supports it At report submission time users select the style in which to output the report e Only styles available on the destination printer are displayed e Some concurrent programs predefine either the printer or the print style and these values cannot be changed To print in a particular style from a particular printer type you define a printer driver Printers 9 3 A printer driver is the mechanism that delivers a report s output along with its commands to the target printer Concurrent mana
501. s The steps above show one way of creating a flow using the Web Application Dictionary However there are additional optional screens that are provided as well specifically the Assign Regions screen and its related screen You can use the Assign Regions screen to assign an object attribute to many regions at once You can optionally navigate to this screen from the Object Attributes window using the Multiple Assignments button Important The Attribute Values window is not applicable to the Web Application Dictionary The Attribute Navigation button in the Regions window causes the Attribute Values window to be displayed Setting the Folder Mode Three Common Modules folder windows display different fields depending if you use Oracle Product Configurator Oracle Self Service Web Applications or both Use the D 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration MODE parameter in the Form Functions window to set which mode to use Product Configurator or Applications for the Web Self Service Web Applications If your site uses only one mode set the MODE parameter at the site level If your site uses both modes set the MODE parameter at the user level To set the folder mode 1 Log in to Oracle E Business Suite choose the System Administrator responsibility and Open the Form Functions window 2 For the Object Workbench Define Regions and Define Attributes window set the MODE parameter to one of the fo
502. s Oracle XML Publisher can be used to generate reports based on existing Oracle E Business Suite report data or you can use Oracle XML Publisher s data extraction engine to build your own queries Oracle XML Publisher also provides a robust set of APIs to manage delivery of your reports via e mail fax secure FTP printer WebDav and more This guide describes how to set up and administer Oracle XML Publisher as well as how to use the Application Programming Interface to build custom solutions This guide is available through the Oracle E Business Suite online help Integration Repository The Oracle Integration Repository is a compilation of information about the service endpoints exposed by the Oracle E Business Suite of applications It provides a complete catalog of Oracle E Business Suite s business service interfaces The tool lets users easily discover and deploy the appropriate business service interface for integration with any system application or business partner The Oracle Integration Repository is shipped as part of the E Business Suite As your instance is patched the repository is automatically updated with content appropriate for the precise revisions of interfaces in your environment Do Not Use Database Tools to Modify Oracle E Business Suite Data Oracle STRONGLY RECOMMENDS that you never use SQL Plus Oracle Data Browser database triggers or any other tool to modify Oracle E Business Suite data unless otherwise i
503. s if a NULL profile option value exists in the loader data file indicated by the absence of a value row or the value was then a NULL value was inserted into the database Now if a NULL value exists in the loader data file the corresponding value is deleted from the database upon uploading The following table lists the entities sub entities if any and download parameters for Loaders B 19 this configuration file Entity Sub entities if any Download Parameters PROFILE FND_PROFILE_ PROFILE NAME OPTION VALUES APPLICATION SHORT NA ME The entity definition is DEFINE PROFILE KEY PROFILE NAME VARCHAR2 80 CTX OWNE VARCHAR2 7 CTX APPLICATION SHORT NAME VARCHAR2 50 TRANS USER PROFILE OPTION NAME VARCHAR2 240 TRANS DESCRIPTION VARCHAR2 240 BASE USER CHANGEABLE FLAG VARCHAR 1 BASE USER VISIBLE FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE READ ALLOWED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE WRITE ALLOWED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE SITE ENABLED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE SITE UPDATE ALLOWED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE APP ENABLED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE APP UPDATE ALLOWED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE RESP ENABLED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE RES
504. s page 10 2 Help System Root determines which Contents navigation tree appears when the online help first launches At the site level this should be set to fnd library To have an application s navigation tree appear in context sensitive help set this profile at the application level to lt application short name gt lt root node key For example set it to lt ap contents gt for the Oracle Payables main tree Help Localization Code used to group and differentiate help documentation within a language Customizing Oracle E Business Suite Help This section describes how you can create and upload custom Oracle E Business Suite help files for the online help system Oracle E Business Suite help files are formatted as HTML allowing easy modification using commercial HTML text editors You can also add customized files of your own to the help system Oracle E Business Suite Help 10 1 If you have licensed Oracle Tutor you can use it to edit your Oracle E Business Suite help files See Using Oracle Tutor page 10 17 Caution With each new release of Oracle E Business Suite and each patch you accept you may need to reapply your changes to any updated help files you have modified if you want access to the latest information Customizing Oracle E Business Suite Help includes the following topics e Downloading and Uploading Help Files Help System Utility page 10 2 e Linking Help Files page 10 5 e Updating the Searc
505. s Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 2 Convert any Windows application file such as Microsoft Word or PowerPoint to PostScript using the Adobe Generic Printer Driver save to file option 3 Convert any PDF file to PostScript using a third party utility such as Xpdf available for Windows and Unix platforms Note For information about downloading and using Xpdf see http www foolabs com xpdf Convert the PostScript file to a PrintForm file Use a Pasta command line parameter to convert the PostScript file to a PrintForm pf file During this process comments are added to the PostScript file The syntax for the command line is as follows FNDPSTAX pform PostScript template file gt ps lt PrintForm file gt pf For more information about Pasta command line parameters see Command Line Parameters page 9 24 Deploying the PrintForm to Oracle E Business Suite consists of the following steps 1 Place the PrintForm in the APPL TOP 2 Update the printer driver information 3 Restart the Concurrent Manager Place the PrintForm in the appropriate directory You can place the PrintForm file anywhere under APPL TOP in the Concurrent Processing node but Oracle recommends that you put the file under the FND_TOP resource lt lang gt directory where lang is the language code such as US for English or KO for Korean Update the printer driver information 1 Navigate to the Printer Drivers form 2 Qu
506. s Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 5 Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager Oracle Applications Manager OAM allows administrators to manage Oracle E Business Suite systems from an HTML console Utilities available from OAM include Oracle Workflow Manager Patch Wizard and Concurrent Processing monitoring tools With Oracle Applications Manager system administrators can view information on general system activity including the statuses of the database concurrent managers and other services concurrent requests and Oracle Workflow processes OAM provides a summary of configuration changes infrastructure usage performance required maintenance activities potential security issues status of business flows and diagnostic test results In addition they can manage downtime and patching System administrators can also start or stop services and submit concurrent requests Using Oracle Workflow Manager administrators can control Workflow system services such background engines the Notification Mailer agent listeners queue propagation and purging obsolete Workflow data OAM utilities are generally available from two main screens the Applications Dashboard and Site Map See Applications Dashboard Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance and The Site Map page 5 4 for more information on these Refer to the following documentation for
507. s Tab as appropriate The bottom right pane is the Properties Pane This area displays the properties of the item root node or document currently selected Those properties with enabled fields can be updated Help Builder Menus Help Builder has the following menus Oracle E Business Suite Help 10 9 File Menu The File Menu provides the following functions New Open Save Reload Print Exit Edit Menu Creates a new root node Selecting this option will open the Root Node Properties window for you to enter the appropriate values for your new root node Opens a tree Selecting this option will open the Find Trees window for you to enter selection criteria to find the appropriate tree Saves the current changes Reloads the current tree to apply all changes throughout the tree hierarchy Prints the current tree pane Exits the Help Builder The Edit Menu provides the following functions New Node Cut Copy Paste Delete Properties Creates a new node beneath the selected node on the tree If the selected node is a document a document node is created If the selected node is a branch node a branch node is created Cuts the selected item document or branch node Copies the selected item document or branch node Pastes an item beneath the currently selected node on the tree If the node selected is a document the item will be pasted beneath it on the tree If the node selected is a
508. s and to migrate the Oracle E Business Suite database to OATM Log files are available for user viewing and are created in the working directory from which your run the PERL program The Log file name and location are displayed once you choose the required option The Tablespace Migration Utility enables you to perform either a single comprehensive migration of all schemas or a phased schema by schema migration To minimize downtime Oracle recommends that you perform the single comprehensive migration of all schemas however this requires a sufficient amount of down time and available disk space If you do not have sufficient down time or disk space to accomplish this then you can run the phased schema by schema migration Once you migrate an object from its existing tablespace to OATM this process cannot be reversed Oracle does not support the rollback of schemas migrated to OATM in a phased schema by schema migration The only method for achieving this result is to recover the migrated schemas from a backup Note Once you initiate migration of one or more schemas to OATM it is not possible to perform additional migrations from a different PERL menu You must wait until one migration is completed before beginning another Planning for Migration Sizing Requirements Whenever possible Oracle recommends the following e perform a single comprehensive migration of all schemas instead of performing a phased schema by schema migration O
509. s how to treat line breaks for a text document This parameter is ignored for nontext content The following values are valid LF Line breaks will be represented using n in the downloaded output This is the default mode if the LINE_BREAK parameter is omitted CRLF Line breaks will be left in the canonical format Specifies the file into which to download If omitted downloaded contents are streamed to the standard output The FNDGFU utility can be used to upload new or changed help files Use the Loaders B 25 following arguments to upload help files FNDGFU lt apps pwd gt 0 Y PROGRAM NAME FND HELP PROGRAM TAG application custom level CONTENT TYPE mime type LANGUAGE language code filenames where lt apps pwd gt is the APPS schema username password To specify a particular database append an sign and the database SID database lt application gt is the Application short name lt custom_level gt is the files customization level Use the number 100 or above for customized help files To replace previously uploaded files use the same customization level when uploading the new files To override previously uploaded files without deleting them from the database use a higher customization level lt mime_type gt is the files MIME type lt language_code gt is the files language code lt filenames gt is a space separated list of files to upload or a fil
510. s the left margin Specify the TrueType font file name The Face must be either Default or the actual font face name such as Helvetica The Style must be either Plain Bold Italic or BoldlItalic Font size in points If this is not set the font size is calculated automatically W N A N A N A N A N A S Printers 9 21 Key Name Default Value Description Command Line Equivalent boldfontsize Size in points Default Font size for bold font bs value from the in points This option fontsize parameter is used mostly when Font Default Bold is used for specifying a barcode font psEmbeddedFontTyp type3 default type42 A type of font that e will be embedded in PostScript tabsize 8 Pasta replaces a tab N A with the number of spaces specified in this option errorlogfile standard error Set this option to el output have Pasta create a log file Arabic Hebrew and Thai Options Key Name Default Value Description Equivalent Command Line Option thai space compensa n In the Thai language N A tion some characters are combined into one glyph If this option is set to y Pasta will align your report by adding spaces at the end of the column that includes combined characters 9 22 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Related Topics Key Name bidi_algorithm direction dolayout doshaping numerals Default Valu
511. s to select only those reports or concurrent programs belonging to a request group that you have assigned a code to To do this you register a form function that references the Submit Requests Window and you pass certain arguments to the function Then you construct your menu to include this form function For more information see the Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security Using a Request Group Code as an argument The following table describes the parameters passed to associate a request group with the Submit Requests Window and to customize the title of that form Text is entered in the Parameters field of the Form Functions form Parameter Syntax followed by Example REQUEST GROUP CODE Request Group Code REQUEST GROUP CODE OE CONC PROGRAMS REQUEST GROUP APPL SHORT NAME Application short name REQUEST GROUP APPL SHORT NAME OE TITLE Application short name Message Name TITLE FND SRS NEWTITLE Explanation This parameter passes the request group s code Required This parameter identifies the short name for the application associated with the request group Required This parameter identifies a message whose contents define the title as well as the application short name of that message Optional 6 26 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Parameter Syntax followed by Example Explanation LOOKUP YIN LOOKUP Y This pa
512. s window Then when you define a concurrent manager using the Define Concurrent Manager window you can define the manager to run Allow or not run concurrent programs based on their request type For example you could define a request type as end of month reports assign that request type to several concurrent programs then define a concurrent manager to only run end of month requests Concurrent Request Types Block Name and describe each type of concurrent request you want to define The combination of application name plus request type uniquely identifies your concurrent request type Defining Concurrent Managers 7 71 Related Topics This application name does not prevent you from assigning this request type to concurrent programs associated with other application names Specializing Managers to run only certain programs page 7 17 Grouping Programs by Request Type page 7 33 Concurrent Managers field help page 7 59 Combined Specialization Rules field help page 7 68 Viewer Options Window r Options _ File Format T PostScript Y v x v text html FIF Allow Native Client Encoding Description Browser application vnd hp PCL Printer Control Language application pdf Browser application postscript Browser text plain Browser text xml Browser 3 D j lt ua D il Use this form to define
513. scribed as being of the following types 1 Schemas that exist in every Oracle database whether used by Oracle E Business Suite or not ex SYS SYSTEM 2 A small set of schemas used by shared components of Oracle E Business Suite for example APPLSYSPUB APPLSYS APPS 3 A large set of schemas provided by the individual products of Oracle E Business Suite for example ABM AHL ZSA ZX 4 Asetofschemas that belong to optional database features or third party products these fall into three subtypes 1 Used by and patched with Oracle E Business Suite for example CTXSYS PORTAL30 2 Used by Oracle E Business Suite but patched only with the RDBMS for example MDSYS ORDSYS 3 Notused by Oracle E Business Suite for example SCOTT Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 11 1 At no time do any of the schemas provided with Oracle E Business Suite relate to a particular Oracle E Business Suite user All types of schemas are used during runtime operations of Oracle E Business Suite and the schemas of type 2 3 amp 4 1 are accessed during initial installation and patching For schema passwords Oracle E Business Suite concerns itself with mainly three passwords for its schemas 1 A password for APPLSYSPUB also known as the GATEWAY user The default password is PUB 2 A password shared between APPLSYS and APPS also known as FNDNAM The default password is APPS 3 A password for all of the product specific ba
514. scribes language value behavior when logging into Oracle E Business Suite from non Oracle E Business Suite based login systems For Oracle E Business Suite the language used in such a non Oracle E Business Suite system cannot be relied on to determine the runtime session language for the Oracle E Business Suite session That language may not be an Oracle E Business Suite supported active language and it may not be the preferred language of the user for the runtime Oracle E Business Suite session Therefore the ICX Language profile value for the user determines the Oracle E Business Suite runtime session for that user Once the Oracle E Business Suite runtime session is initiated the user can use the Preferences page to change the runtime session language for the session The user can also choose to change his saved ICX Language profile value For an Oracle E Business Suite environment integrated with Oracle Portal the Oracle E Business Suite session will inherit the portal language if the session is launched from Oracle Portal If the portal language is not supported or enabled in Oracle E Business Suite the Oracle E Business Suite session language will fall back to the Oracle E Business Suite base language Language Values for Oracle Workflow Notifications Oracle Workflow email notifications use the user level language set in the Preferences page and also stored in the ICX Language profile option Administering Globalization 18 3 Date
515. se can update the definition 10 Enable access to your process Enable access to your process Before a process may be accessed in the Navigator you must complete the following two steps Create a new function for your process in the Form Functions window and add your process to a responsibility by adding the function you just created to the responsibilities top menu in the Menus window Create a function for your process Use the following procedure to create a function 1 As the System Administrator navigate to the Form Functions window Application gt Function Enter a Function Name for your process using the format lt app gt _ lt processname gt Where app can be any application short name and lt processname gt is the internal name you entered when you created your process activity Enter a User Function Name The name you enter here appears in the Navigator Enter PROCESS as your function type 17 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration In the tabbed region Form use the following format to enter a value in the Parameters field lt itemtype gt lt processname gt Save your work No other fields are required to create your process function Add your function to a menu In order for a user to access a process in the Navigator the process must be added to a menu referenced by the user s responsibility To determine the menu referenced by a particular responsibility u
516. se schemas type 3 The default password for these schemas is same as the schema name Important You should change these passwords upon installation Note that the Oracle database schemas and passwords connect to the ORACLE database while application usernames and passwords access Oracle E Business Suite Related Topics ORACLE Users Schemas Window page 11 12 Applications Window page 11 15 Registering an ORACLE Schema The installation process automatically registers Oracle E Business Suite ORACLE schemas so you only need to register any additional ORACLE schemas that you need using the ORACLE Users window You must register an ORACLE schema with Oracle E Business Suite if e you create a custom application using Oracle Application Object Library e you want to associate an additional ORACLE schema with an Oracle E Business Suite product Important Before you can register an ORACLE schema your database administrator must first create an ORACLE schema that connects to the ORACLE database You then use the ORACLE Users window to register your ORACLE schema 11 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Reregistering ORACLE schemas You should also reregister ORACLE schemas associated with custom applications built using Oracle Application Object Library each time you upgrade Oracle Application Object Library Initialization Code You can add in custom initialization SQL code to be executed when
517. se the Responsibilities window Security gt Responsibility gt Define 1 As the System Administrator navigate to the Menus window Application gt Menu Use the Find window to access the desired menu In anew row use the LOV to select the function you created for your process in the Functions field You may optionally enter a description for the function DO NOT enter any other fields The Sequence field is automatically populated and the Navigator Prompt and Submenu fields must remain empty Save your work Access the Seeded Processes from the Database To access the seeded processes use the following procedure 1 Run the Oracle Workflow Builder from you client Select Open from the File menu Choose Database For User enter the FNDNAM of your database For Password enter the FNDNAM password of your database For Connect enter the alias for your database which should be entered in your tnsnames ora file under the following directory on your client Local drive i e C orant network admin Note If you are using Windows 95 then the orant should be replaced with orawin in the directory structure above In the Show Item Types window select the item type s associated with the seeded Administering Process Navigation 17 5 processes you wish to view To select more than one item type hold down your control key as you select the item types Choose Show and then choose OK Find the Form Function Name Use
518. seeeene 12 1 Gathering Statistics for the CBO sssssssssssssssee eene nennen nre 12 2 Gather Table Statistics iernii ani pei bad eei n tice ied cea dide di HR exiis 12 2 Backup Table Statislics deinde ed ted e ec de atre det ser ter dut adul 12 3 Restore Table Statistics nime ete re ee babe vie L esa a haee cote banat 12 4 Gather Schema Statistics cee ere ee entire ce nennen nennen rennen nnns 12 4 Gather Column Statistics adn aae ai emen enn enne enn enne 12 7 Gather All Column Statistics mem eme nemen 12 7 Purge FND STATS History Records sss eee emen 12 7 END STATS Pack ge enin uie hm eta e era niea dir Tau y 12 8 CREATE STAT TABLE Procedure eaii eetere EE E 12 8 BACKUP TABLE STATS Ad irte i en gecde ed eteped e al de die ode cr ta e doe dede 12 9 BACKUP SCHEMA STATS Procedure sansene ar eene nee 12 9 RESTORE SCHEMA STATS Procedure 12 10 RESTORE TABLE STATS Procedure sse a tnnt 12 10 RESTORE COLUMN STATS Procedure sssssssseee eene eene 12 11 ENABLE SCHEMA MONITORING Procedure eem 12 12 DISABLE SCHEMA MONITORING Procedure ssssssse eee 12 12 GATHER SCHEMA STATS Procedure ssssssssssseeeeeeeenren eene 12 12 GATHER INDEX STATS Procedure eene 12 15 GATHER TABLE STATS Procedure eesessseeeeeeet nennen tette ttn 12 16 GATHER COLUMN STATS Procedure sssssssssseee eee eene eene 12 18 GATHER
519. ser language if it exists in the applications database also is used for the login page The user can choose a different language on the login page if the Language Picker is enabled and refresh the page to have it appear in that language If the current browser language does not exist in the Oracle E Business Suite installation the language set in the site level setting of the ICX LANGUAGE profile option is used to render the login page A user can override the value of the ICX LANGUAGE profile option for a given session only Oracle Applications Manager Oracle Applications Manager uses this central login page as well to authenticate users Basic Configuration Tasks 2 3 Customizing the Oracle E Business Suite Login page Customized Login Page ORACLE E Business Suite Login Username example michael james smith Password example 4u99v23 Login Cancel f TIP Forgot your password 44 011 EISH English Corporate Policy Message Copyright 2004 Oracle Corporation All rights reserved User interface features can be turned on or off using the profile option Local Login Mask FND 550 LOCAL LOGIN MASK For the Login page to show one of more of these optional attributes just add the numeric values of all desired attributes and set the value of the profile option to that value e Username Hint 01 e Password Hint 02 e Cancel Button 04 e Forgot Password URL 08 e Register URL
520. ses Oracle Application Object Library routines to print reports This requires fewer machine resources than printing through a customized executable program or a shell command such as lp or lpr When you use the subroutine there may be options available through the descriptive flexfield at the bottom of the form These options vary by platform and may include the following mail Notify user by electronic mail when report finishes printing e Mail Notify user by electronic mail when report finishes printing e Priority Set the priority for reports in the print queue Check your installation update for any additional options available on your platform Executable Printing Programs Oracle E Business Suite supports the use of executable programs for printing However we recommend that you use executable programs only to provide features unavailable through Oracle E Business Suite printer drivers such as e Interpreting special characters in the text passed to the printer For example you need a program to interpret 8 bit characters sent to a 7 bit compatible printer Setting Up and Starting Concurrent Managers 8 11 Interpreting arguments passed by Oracle E Business Suite For example you need a program to perform different actions based on different output filenames If you do not need to support special features such as these print through the standard printing subroutine and printer drivers defined in the Oracle E Business Suite da
521. short name For more about widgets in Oracle Payables see lt A HREF AP widgets widgets gt All About Widgets lt A gt When used in this fashion application short names are case insensitive Note These application help directories are merely virtual directories recognized by the Oracle E Business Suite help system when used in URLs All files are actually stored in the database with application short name being one attribute among many associated with them Oracle Payables official short name is SQLAP This has been shortened to AP for the virtual directory used in the Oracle E Business Suite help system Similarly Oracle General Ledger s official short name of SOLGL has been shortened to GL and Oracle Assets short name of OFA has been shortened to FA Related Topics Links Links are not limited to a single target in the Oracle E Business Suite help system You can point your links at multiple topics and files by using the following syntax lt A HREF Qanchornamel anchorname2 anchorname3 Related Topics lt A gt When a user negotiates the link a page headed Related Topics appears containing a list of the page titles corresponding to these anchornames with each title linked to the file in question To include cross application links simply prefix the application short name and a colon to the anchorname lt A HREF anchornamel shortname anchorname2 anchorname3 gt Related Topics lt A gt Con
522. sid env name env value SECURE PATH S FND TOP secure For Windows platforms jre classpath CLASSPATH oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps apps dbname ADD DB HOST database host name DB PORT database port DB NAME database sid env_name env_value SECURE PATH S FND TOP secure GWYUID FNDNAM and GUEST USER PWD will be defaulted if not provided explicitly dbc files should be located in SFND TOfP secure so SECURE PATH should always be set to that or this should be run directly out of of the F ND_TOP secure area Updating a dbc file or Server ID When updating the dbc file you can change as many parameters as you want including the server ID but you must enter at least one Settings that you do not update retain their value To update a dbc file or server ID Enter from the command line UNIX java oracle apps fnd security AdminA ppServer apps apps dbname V UPDATE DBC FND_TOP secure file dbc APPL SERVER ID env namez env value Windows jre classpath CLASSPATH X oracle apps fnd security AdminAppServer apps appsedbname V UPDATE DBC FND_TOP secure file dbc APPL SERVER ID env namex env value If APPL SERVER ID is not passed AdminAppServer will attempt to synchronize the current server ID value in the dbc file and the database generating a new one if neither contains a value at all Passing in APPL SERVER ID by itself will force a brand new application server ID
523. sing the Concurrent Request Types form 2 Assign the Request Type to each concurrent program you want to identify as a member of this request type using the Concurrent Programs form 3 Select the Request Type when you specialize a concurrent manager using the Concurrent Managers form Examples of using Request Types Some example request types you may want to define are Quick Overnight Month End Reports Related Topics For concurrent programs that take a relatively short time to run For concurrent programs that take a long time to run which you typically schedule to run during the late night or early morning hours For concurrent programs that generate reports you run at the end of each month For example if you run ten report programs at the end of each month you could define a request type called Month End Reports and assign it to your ten report programs Then you can use specialization rules to define a concurrent manager that only runs requests of type Month End Reports This way you do not have to specify your ten different report programs when you define your concurrent manager You can also easily assign the ten programs to more than one manager Overview of Concurrent Processing Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance Using Time Based Queues page 7 7 Completed Concurrent Requests Report page 7 15 Specializing Managers to run only certain programs page 7
524. sing the request set wizard You can use the Request Set Wizard button in the Request Set window to start the wizard The wizard takes your input and creates the request set as follows Run in Parallel Creates one stage containing all of the requests you wish to run in parallel Run Sequentially Creates a separate stage containing the request or requests for each step in the sequence and link in the appropriate order Run Sequentially but abort on Sets up your sequence the same as it did for Run Error Sequentially but when it links the stages it does not enter a follow up stage as a link in the Error completion status field Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 9 Stage Evaluation Function The completion status of a stage is determined by a predefined function The Oracle E Business Suite Standard Stage Evaluation function uses the completion status of the requests it contains Use this function to determine the status of a stage Request Set Completion Status When a stage completes with a status for which there is no link defined the request set ends The completion status for the request set is determined by one of the following methods e Using the completion status of the last stage run in the request set This method is used by default The user can override the default behavior by defining a specific stage within the set to be critical If the request set has a single critical stage defined and then runs this
525. sion form only displays a list of concurrent programs contained in that particular request group A request group code is simply an argument that is passed from a menu to a customized standard submission form To summarize e Request group codes provide a form based method of controlling user access to Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 23 concurrent programs and reports e A code can be assigned to a request group e You can use the code as an argument passed from a menu to the standard submission form e When a menu that calls the standard submission form uses the code that form lists only those programs in the request group identified by the code Related Topics Organizing Programs into Request Groups page 6 22 Customizing the Submit Requests Window page 6 24 Customizing the Submit Requests Window using Codes page 6 26 Request Groups page 6 59 Customizing the Submit Requests Window You can customize the Submit Request window in several ways Rename the Window Title You can change the title to reflect the requests available in the window See Customizing the Submit Requests Window using Codes page 6 26 Restrict Requests Available to A Request Group You can restrict the reports and programs available to those in a specified request group See Customizing the Submit Requests Window using Codes page 6 26 Restrict Requests to a Single Request You can call Submit Requests form for a single request submissio
526. so run concurrent programs that use any other type of concurrent program executable as long as the specialization rules include them Defining Concurrent Managers 7 61 Immediate concurrent programs must be registered in a program library by an applications developer using Oracle Application Object Library Transaction Managers can only run programs listed in their program library Defining Manager Operations The two buttons near the bottom of the window display additional windows for defining when your manager operates and if you wish specializing your manager to run only certain kinds of programs Specialization Rules You define what kinds of requests the manager reads by defining specialization rules for your manager Work Shifts You define when the manager operates by assigning one or more work shifts to your manager With each work shift you can vary the number of programs the manager can run simultaneously Work Shifts Window Work Shifts Manager Application Work Shifts v Processes Sleep Work Shift Description Parameter Seconds 60 Assign work shifts to a concurrent manager A work shift defines the dates and times the manager is enabled For each work shift you define the number of processes the manager starts running Work shifts are defined using the Work Shifts form See Work Shifts page 7 66 Processes Enter the number of operating system processes you want your work shift to run simultaneously Eac
527. space MB 60 Enter the Number of Datafiles for Archive tablespace 1 Enter the Datafile Size for Archive tablespace MB 1400 Enter the Number of Datafiles for Queue tablespace 1 Enter the Datafile Size for Queue tablespace MB 150 Enter the Number of Datafiles for Media tablespace 1 Enter the Datafile Size for Media tablespace MB 200 Option 2 Create New Tablespaces Select option 2 to create new tablespaces by executing the script crtts sql that was 3 16 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration generated in the previous step This script does not check the operating system limitation for the maximum size of a file Step 3 Generate Migration Commands Select Step 3 Generate Migration Commands to generate migration commands for your schemas The Generate Migration Commands menu contains the following options Caution You should not generate migration commands if migration is already in progress OATM utility will prevent the generation of migration commands while generation of the commands or migration process is already in progress Oracle does not recommend manually updating table FND_TS_MIG_CMDs especially while you are generating or executing migration commands 1 Invalid Indexes Report 2 Generate Migration Commands for all Schemas 3 Generate Migration Commands for a List of Schemas Option 1 Invalid Indexes Report Please correct drop these before generating migration
528. ss Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Example Shared Parameter Value We ve created a request set containing two reports a Concurrent Programs Report and the Concurrent Program Details Report The two reports and their parameters are listed in the table below REPORT PARAMETERS Concurrent Programs Report Application Name Concurrent Program Detail Report Application Name Program We identify the parameter Application Name as a parameter shared between the two reports We want to enter a value only once that is when the Report Parameters window appears for the first report in the set requiring us to enter Application Name To identify a shared parameter we give it a name in this example applname and enter it as a Shared Parameter for each report Report Parameters peduence Shared Default 34 Prompt Display Modify Parameter Type Value Application Name Yes Yes applname Report Parameters pequence Shared Default Prompt Display Modify Parameter Type Value Application Name Yes Yes applname 2 Program Yes Yes Related Topics Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests page 6 1 Control the Behavior of Request Parameters page 6 48 Concurrent Programs page 6 65 Request Sets Report This report documents request set definitions including the set s owner program incompatibilities as well as printer and print style information Use this report when De
529. ssignment s end date must not be before the current date e A sequence definition and its dates of effectivity are defined on the Document Sequences form When you define a document sequence you give the sequence a name and define how the sequence numbers each document by e Choosing whether numbers are automatically generated in sequence or entered 14 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Related Topics manually by the user e Entering the initial value or first number in the sequence What is a Document Sequence page 14 1 Defining a Document Sequence page 14 1 Defining Document Categories page 14 4 Document Numbering vs Document Entry page 14 7 Document Numbering vs Document Entry Do not confuse the type of document numbering a sequence employs which can be automatic or manual with the method of entering documents which is also defined as either automatic or manual Document Sequences Window E Oracle Applications File Edit View Folder Tool Window Help Saase EINE TESNE SE Document Sequences Effective Message z Application Type Valuq 18 JAN 2001 Automatic Name From j ae REESE NEN JL J J a Za Ges cx ee A je EG ro m fe e eg NS A Name a new document sequence and define how the sequence numbers each document A document sequence uniquely numbers documents generated by an Oracle E Bus
530. sswords of APPS APPLSYS APPLSYSPUB to the same password in the same way as the ALLORACLE mode does in FNDCPASS l Locks individual ORACLE USER users except required schemas TRUE LOCK FALSE UNLOCK L Locks all Oracle ALLORACLE users except required schemas TRUE LOCK FALSE UNLOCK s APPLSYS Changes the password for the APPLSYS user and the APPS user This requires the execution of AutoConfig on all tiers Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 11 9 e h Displays help Using Case Sensitive Database Passwords Scenarios To help meet increasing and often mandatory requirements for complex passwords Oracle Database 11g supports case sensitive passwords via a strong industry standard 160 bit SHA 1 hashing algorithm Traditionally Oracle Application the Library has had no provisions for supporting case sensitive database passwords All database passwords are treated as uppercase and stored and validated as such regardless of how the database password is presented Oracle E Business Suite Release now supports Oracle Database 11g case sensitive database passwords to enable the use of more secure application schema passwords This feature is available for any Oracle E Business release that uses an Oracle 11g database There are two main scenarios Mixed case feature disabled default For new database accounts or changed database passwords Oracle automatically records the case in which the p
531. sted object from a cache component is not found in the cache To reduce the misses value for a particular cache component update the Time Out Type and Time Out After values of the cache component definition An object is marked invalid when the object has been idle beyond the idle timeout period or the object was updated making the copy in the cache invalid When an object is invalid any subsequent get operations on the object gets a new copy of the object from the database Time Out Type Choose either Idle Time recommended or Time to Live Both values refer to the duration after which the object is marked invalid e Idle Time Starts from the last time the object was requested from the cache Choose this value when the primary consideration is the memory This option prevents infrequently used objects from being cleaned up from the cache e Time to Live Starts from the time the object is loaded into the cache Choose this value when the primary consideration is data consistency This option guarantees that the values are refreshed after the specified time interval regardless of the usage Time Out After This refers to the Time Out Type We recommend choosing Global ldle Time e Global Idle Time The component cache gets a timeout value that is equal to the global idle time specified The current default is 15 minutes This value can be C 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration changed on t
532. stem Administrator s Guide Configuration Rule Action Type Example Explanation INCLUDE INCLUDE EXCLUDE EXCLUDE EXCLUDE EXCLUDE Request Type User Combined Rule ORACLE ID Program Request Type Oracle Inventory Overnight Reports Tim Oracle General Ledger Month End Reports APPS2 Application Object Library Purge Audit Tables Oracle Purchasing Weekend Programs Manager only reads requests to start programs belonging to the request type Overnight Reports Manager only reads requests to start programs submitted by the application user Tim Manager reads all requests to start programs except those defined by the Combined Rule Month End Reports Manager reads all requests to start programs except those that connect to the APPS2 Oracle ID Manager reads all requests to start programs except requests for the program named Purge Audit Tables Manager reads all requests to start programs except those belonging to the request type Weekend Programs Defining Concurrent Managers 7 21 Related Topics Rule Action Type Example Explanation EXCLUDE User Margaret Manager reads all requests to start programs except those submitted by the application user Margaret Specializing Managers to run only certain programs page 7 17 Examples Using Specialization Rules page 7 22 Defining Combined Specialization Rules page 7 27
533. stem print command Oracle Reports and Report Generation Oracle Reports includes page break carriage return line feed text bold on off and text underline on off instructions within the output file The values are retrieved from a SQL ReportWriter SRW driver file When the report is generated for online viewing Oracle Reports uses the SRW driver named by the print style in the Print Styles form When the report is to be printed Oracle Reports uses the SRW driver named by the Oracle E Business Suite printer driver in the Printer Drivers form Printers 9 1 The dimensions of a report are determined by the columns and rows values in the print style defined using the Print Styles form These values override the width and height values in an SRW driver file Concurrent Manager Issues or Calls a Print Command When a report program finishes running the concurrent manager prepends an initialization string and appends a printer reset string to the output file Both strings are defined using the Printer Drivers form An Oracle E Business Suite printer driver is invoked by issuing a print command or by calling a print program or subroutine When the printer driver method is Command the concurrent manager can issue an operating system print command and arguments entered in the Arguments field of the Printer Drivers form When the printer driver method is Program the concurrent manager can call a custom print program named along w
534. t Choose option 3 to calculate total space required by each Oracle E Business Suite schema with details for each object and to generate the report fndtrep4 txt The program prompts your for the following information e Schema name enter the percent sign for all schemas e Whether the sizing information is current or must be gathered before running the report e If you selected Y for the previous option provide the extent management type for the tablespaces since the space requirements are dependent on this e If Uniform Extent Management provide the uniform extent size for the tablespaces or choose the default value provided on the screen Example Enter the Schema name HR Sizing Program was last run on 02 SEP 03 Do you want to run the Sizing program again before running the report N Option 4 Display Sizing Exception Report Choose option 4 to generate report fndtrep5 txt listing all the objects for which sizing estimation generated an error The program prompts you for the schema name Enter the percent sign for all schemas Example Enter the Schema name lt gt Step 2 Create New Tablespaces Select Step 2 Create New Tablespaces to create the OATM tablespaces to which you will migrate your database objects The Create New Tablespaces menu contains the following options 1 Generate the Tablespace Creation Script 2 Create New Tablespaces Oracle E Business Suite Tablespace Model and M
535. t Name FND Q Type advancedTable v Leo Gear Name Region Path AdvancedSummaryRN oracle apps fnd oam pa Start Of Popup O eee c t enort webui AdvancedSearchPG Advanced MidTierSummaryRN SessionSummaryRN o About this Page Privacy Si Username Application Responsibility Time Time Fic To create a portlet from a region choose the portletization icon for that region in the search results list or select the Portletize link for the region in the page where the region appears Developer Tools 16 7 Application ShortName Type Portletize edSummaryRN fnd advancedTable AF Region Name AdvancedSummaryRN Function Name ADVANCED_SUMMARY_PORTL User Function Name Advanced Summary Portlet Description Advanced Summary Portlet Responsibility Q Menu End Of Pop The Create Portlet pop up window automatically generates an internal function name a user function name for display in user interfaces and a description for the portlet based on the region name You can optionally enter different values for the function name user function name and description if you want The Portlet Generator also validates whether the automatically generated function name already exists for another portlet If so you must enter a unique function name before you can save the portlet definition You must select the responsibility through which users can access the portlet After you select the responsibility the Create Portlet window
536. t be supplied to the print program When the Driver Method is set to Command enter the full command and its Printers 9 55 Initialization Reset Related Topics arguments Enter the initialization string that must be sent to the printer before the printer driver can begin printing Enter the reset string that returns the printer to its ready state when printing is complete The double brackets identify a descriptive flexfield that you can use to add data fields to this form without programming This descriptive flexfield allows you to define special commands specific to your printer driver and or the platform it runs on Overview of Printers and Printing page 9 1 Printer Types Print Styles and Printer Drivers page 9 2 Creating Custom Printer Drivers page 9 31 9 56 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 10 Oracle E Business Suite Help Setting Oracle E Business Suite Help Profile Options Oracle E Business Suite Help uses several profile options in the profile category Help System Applications Help Web Agent set this profile option if you want to have online help launched on a web server other than that specified by the Apps Servlet Agent profile Help Utility Upload Path used in uploading help files See Downloading and Uploading Help Files page 10 2 Help Utility Download Path used in downloading help files See Downloading and Uploading Help File
537. t programs that run request set stages are titled Request Set Stage lt name of stage gt Request Set lt name of request set gt In the Concurrent Programs form if you query a request set or stage concurrent program on the basis of the program s name you must enter in the Name field the words e Request Set or Request Set Stage before the name of a concurrent program e Request Set 76 to perform a query on all request set and stage programs Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests page 6 1 Request Set Incompatibilities page 6 19 Modifying an Incompatible Programs list page 6 47 Data Groups page 6 80 Concurrent Programs page 6 65 Concurrent Conflict Domains If two programs are defined as incompatible with one another the data these programs cannot access simultaneously must also be identified In other words to prevent two programs from concurrently accessing or updating the same data you have to know where in terms of data they are incompatible A Conflict Domain identifies the data where two incompatible programs cannot run simultaneously Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 29 Conflict Domains In Oracle E Business Suite data is stored in database tables that belong to a particular application Each table may also contain information used to determine what conditions need to be met to access the individual records These conditions may consist of one or more of the following data groupings e SOB
538. t provides a list of objects that have not been migrated to the correct tablespace This option prompts you to enter the schema name and generates the report fndtrep6 txt Example Enter the Schema name HR Option 2 Enable the Constraints Triggers and Policies and Start Advanced Queues Select Option 2 to enable all the constraints triggers policies and start queues and to generate the log file fndenabl lt timestamp gt log is generated This option prompts you to enter the schema name Example Enter the Schema name HR Option 3 Re size Old Tablespaces Select Option 3 to reduce the size of the old tablespaces This option queries the data dictionary for all data files of the previous tablespaces to determine the level at which they can be re sized and generates the resize commands in a script resizdb sql This script is then executed to resize the data files Option 4 Generate Script to Drop Empty Tablespaces Select Option 4 to generate a script to drop empty tablespaces This option queries the data dictionary for all the previous tablespaces to determine it they still contain segments For all the old tablespaces with no remaining segments a drop tablespace including contents and datafiles statement is generated in a script fndtsdrp sql When 3 22 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration executed this script drops all empty pre OATM tablespaces including data files No
539. t sequences can also provide an audit trail For example a document sequence can provide an audit trail from the general ledger into the subsidiary ledger and to the document that originally affected the account balance Document sequences generate audit data so even if documents are deleted their audit records remain Related Topics Defining a Document Sequence page 14 1 Defining Document Categories page 14 4 Assigning a Document Sequence page 14 5 Document Numbering vs Document Entry page 14 7 Defining a Document Sequence To define a sequence you select a sequence name and an application to own the sequence e A sequence can number documents stored in database tables belonging to its Document Sequences 14 1 owning application e Audit records for a sequence are stored in the application s audit table titled Application Short Name_DOC_SEQUENCE_AUDIT For example the audit table for a sequence owned by Oracle Payables is AP_DOC_SEQUENCE_AUDIT Important Your database administrator must grant access to an application s audit table for all ORACLE usernames associated with responsibilities that will use the sequence responsibilities that access forms using the sequence You can set start and end dates for when the sequence is available The start date defaults to the current date By default there is no end date so the sequence definition does not expire You can choose whether a sequence numbers documents au
540. t to build a new catalog file called Library Name gt c under lt PROD gt _TOP APPLLIB You should compile the Library Name gt c file after the request completes Sample program libraries such as prgcat c and prglib c are located under FND_TOP APPLUSR Tip For ease of maintenance define your concurrent program executables as spawned Compiling C and Pro C Programs Your environment for compiling custom code depends on the file FND_TOP usrxit devenv If you change this file you should reread it by logging in again so that the changes take effect You compile your C or Pro C programs into object modules using FND_TOP usrxit Makefile You then link your programs using adrelink We do not support both compiling and linking executables using a single makefile or utility To compile the C program example c use the following syntax In all the examples you should run the commands from the directory in which your files are located make f SFND_TOP usrxit Makefile example o To compile the Pro C program proexamp pc use the following syntax make f SFND TOP usrxit Makefile proexamp o To compile the four C and Pro C programs a c b c c pc d pc all of which are in the current directory use the following syntax make f FND TOP usrxit Makefile a o b o c o d o Linking Spawned Concurrent Programs as Stand alone Programs If you want your spawned concurrent program to run as a stand alone program perform the follo
541. t to run the program from the Submit Requests window You should provide a default type and value for any non displayed parameter For a parameter in an Oracle Reports program the keyword or parameter appears here The value is case insensitive For other types of programs you can skip this field Enter the display length in characters for the parameter value description Your window may show fewer characters of your description than you specify here if there is not enough room determined by the sum of your longest prompt plus your display size for this parameter plus seven However your window does not display more characters of the description than you specify here Enter the field length in characters for this parameter The user sees and fills in the field in the Parameters window of the Submit Requests window You should ensure that the total of the value set maximum sizes not the display sizes for all of your parameters plus the number of separators you need number of parameters minus one does not add up to more than 240 If your program values concatenated length exceeds 240 you may experience truncation of your data in some forms The default is the name of the parameter Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 93 Prompt A user sees the prompt instead of the parameter name in the Parameters window of the Submit Requests window Concatenated Description Size Enter the display length in characters for the parame
542. tabase This makes the most efficient use of machine resources Upgrading to Existing Executable Programs Because printing through the standard printer subroutine uses machine resources more effectively than printing through executable programs we recommend the following if you used executable printing programs in the previous release of Oracle E Business Suite e If predefined printer drivers can replace the executable program simply register the drivers along with the printer types in the Printer Types window For example Oracle E Business Suite provides a print style Landscape and the printer driver LANDSCAPESUB They perform the same function as the program land which enables DEC LNO3 printers to print 132 characters per line e fno predefined drivers will work you may be able to create a customized driver that can replace the executable You create drivers with the Printer Drivers form e If you cannot replace the executable with a simple printer driver definition you can continue to use the executable by registering it or the shell script that calls it with Oracle E Business Suite Writing an Executable Program Executable printing programs can format report output through escape sequences or a printer programming language Creating them requires a thorough knowledge of both printer operation and a computer programming language Follow the guidelines in this section if you need to create an executable printing program Printer Styl
543. te Oracle E Business Suite and Query Optimization Oracle E Business Suite Release 12 uses cost based optimization in order to choose the most efficient execution plan for SQL statements Using this approach the optimizer determines the most optimal execution plan by costing available access paths and factoring information based on statistics for the schema objects accessed by the SOL statement Oracle E Business Suite requires several database initialization parameters to be set correctly in order to ensure optimal performance Refer to My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 396009 1 and ensure that you have configured the parameters according to this note For the query optimizer to produce an optimal execution plan the statistics in the data dictionary should accurately reflect the volume and data distribution of the tables and indexes To this end database statistics should be refreshed periodically However that does not necessarily imply that you should gather statistics frequently Systems that are close to going live typically experience inserts of a large amount of data as data from legacy systems is migrated In that scenario the statistics would probably need to be refreshed quite frequently for instance after each major load as large loads could change the data distribution significantly Once the system reaches steady state the frequency of statistics collection at the schema database level should be reduced to something li
544. te Please ensure that there is no residual data in the tablespaces to be dropped prior to running the drop tablespace script to avoid irrevocable loss of data Step 7 Run Customization Steps Select Step 7 Run Customization Steps if you wish to customize tablespaces tablespace types and object classifications as required If you choose run customization steps you should do so before performing any of the other steps for migrating your database objects to OATM The Run Customization Steps menu contains the following options 1 Register new tablespace tablespace type 2 Change name of the existing tablespace 3 Register object classification 4 Change object classification Option 1 Register new tablespace tablespace type Select Option 1 to register any custom tablespace types that are not available by default with OATM If the tablespace type or tablespace name is already registered message will be displayed stating that it already exists Example Enter the tablespace type CUSTOM TABLESPACE TYPE Enter the tablespace name CUSTOM TABLESPACE Tablespace CUSTOM TABLESPACE registered Do you want to continue registering tablespaces Y Selecting the default Y prompts you to enter next tablespace type name pair Selecting N returns you to the previous menu Option 2 Change name of the existing tablespace Select Option 2 Change name of the existing tablespace to update
545. te with a status of Success then the status for the stage is Success If one or more requests complete with a status of Error then the status of the stage is Error For a stage s status to be Warning one or more of the requests must have a status of Warning and no request may have a status of Error Linking of Stages There are no restrictions on linking stages within a request set Any stage may be linked to any other stage including itself Two or more links can point to the same stage For example Stage 1 can link to Stage 2 if the completion status of Stage 1 is Success or Warning and link to Stage 3 if the status is Error 6 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Request Set with Multiple Links to Stages Request Set Success 5 Warning CW Start Stage Error E Links can point to any stage in the set The Request Set is considered complete when astage ends and there are no more links to follow You determine the end of a request set by not specifying a followup stage for each completion status You can end a request set after any stage in the request set When any stage completes with a status that does not link to another stage the request set ends You can use the linking of stages to control your request set In previous releases you had three options run in parallel run sequentially and run sequentially but abort on Error All of these are easy to recreate u
546. tem Administrator responsibility Define your grant Functional Administrator responsibility 1 Enter a Name and Description optional for the grant 2 Enter the Security Context for the grant 3 Under Data Security choose Concurrent Programs or Request Sets as the object Click Next 4 For the Object Data Context select Instance Set for the Data Context Type Choose either Programs that can be accessed or Request Sets that can be accessed as appropriate Click Next 5 Review the Instance Set information Under Instance Set Details enter the request group and its application Specifically enter the request group name as Parameter 1 and the application short name as Parameter 2 6 Choose Request Operations as the permission set under Set Click Next 7 Review the grant information and save your work Note that there are two seeded grants for all users to account for request group assignments that already exist for legacy responsibilities These are Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 3 e Programs Grant Defaults e Request Sets Grant Defaults Viewing Requests You can control users access to viewing requests with RBAC Note In previous releases the Concurrent Report Access Level profile was used to control privileges to report output files and log files generated by a concurrent program This profile is no longer used Seeded instance sets allow administrators to grant e All re
547. tem Administrator s Guide Configuration In an environment enabled with parallel concurrent processing primary node assignment is optional for the Internal Concurrent Manager The Internal Concurrent Manager can be started from any of the nodes host machines identified as concurrent processing server enabled In the absence of a primary node assignment for the Internal Concurrent Manager the Internal Concurrent Manager will stay on the node host machine where it was started If a primary node is assigned the Internal Concurrent Manager will migrate to that node if it was started on a different node If the node on which the Internal Concurrent Manager is currently running becomes unavailable or the database instance to which it is connected to becomes unavailable the Internal Concurrent Manager will be restarted on a alternate concurrent processing node If no primary node is assigned the Internal Concurrent Manager will continue to operate on the node on which it was restarted If a primary node has been assigned to the Internal Concurrent Manager then it will be migrated back to that node whenever both the node and the instance to which the Internal Concurrent Manager connects to from that node becomes available Starting Up Managers You start up parallel concurrent processing as you would ordinary concurrent processing by running the adcmctl sh script from the operating system prompt The Internal Concurrent Manager starts up on the
548. ter value description The user sees the parameter value in the Parameter Description field of the Submit Requests and View Requests forms The Parameter Description field concatenates all the parameter values for the concurrent program Tip We recommend that you set the Concatenated Description Size for each of your parameters so that the total Concatenated Description Size for your program is 80 or less since most video screens are 80 characters wide 6 94 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 7 Defining Concurrent Managers Defining Managers and their Work Shifts in the Oracle Forms UI This section explains how you can define concurrent managers and specify when a manager is enabled A concurrent manager is itself a concurrent program that starts other concurrent programs running When an application user submits a request to run a program the request is entered into a database table that lists all of the requests Concurrent managers read requests from the table and start programs running See Concurrent Managers page 7 59 In this section we explain how to specify when a manager is enabled how to use managers to balance your applications processing workload across different time periods and how to associate a library of immediate concurrent programs to be called by your manager Defining new managers You can define as many concurrent managers as you want When you define a manager you
549. text Sensitive Help When you ask for help in Oracle E Business Suite the topic for your current window opens If you ask for help from a report parameters window your help file opens to a discussion of that report Oracle E Business Suite help files contain special anchornames to enable these context sensitive links When calling help from an Oracle E Business Suite Forms based window Oracle E Business Suite looks for an anchorname based on the form name and the window name combined as follows lt A NAME form name window name 2 A You can override the form name portion of the anchorname by specifying a HELP TARGET parameter in the parameter field of the Form Functions window Use the syntax HELP TARGET alternative form name See Form Functions Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security Oracle E Business Suite Help 10 7 When calling help from an Oracle Application Framework HTML based window from the global Help button the anchorname follows this syntax lt A NAME appShortName packageFunctionalComponent pageName A For more information on coding for the global Help button refer to the documentation listed in the Oracle Application Framework Release Notes Release 12 1 3 My Oracle Support Knowledge Document 1087332 1 When calling help from a report parameter window Oracle E Business Suite looks for an anchorname constructed as follows lt A NAME SRS concurrent program shortn
550. th Oracle E Business Suite Many printing options can be defined using the Pasta configuration file pasta cfg You no longer need to maintain multiple drivers and styles for each printer Pasta is provided as an executable named FNDPSTAX Related Topics Setup for Basic Printing with Pasta page 9 10 Setup for Basic Printing with Pasta The following setup can be used to enable any PostScript printer to print text or PostScript reports in the following styles Landscape Landwide Portrait or Dynamic Use the Printers window to register your printer 1 Enter your printer s name as defined in the operating system and applications 2 Select Pasta Universal Printer from the list of values for the printer Type You are now ready to print text and PostScript reports from your PostScript printer using the default Pasta configuration For more information on the Printers window see Printers Window page 9 49 For more information on setting options in the Pasta configuration file see Configuration File Options page 9 18 Related Topics Defining Configuration Files for Specific Printers page 9 11 Modify Add Printer Type to Use Pasta page 9 12 Setting Margins page 9 13 Printing a Report Using the noprint Option page 9 14 9 10 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Generating Other Formats Using the Preprocessing Option page 9 15 Font Source page 9 16 Language Specific Font Support page 9
551. the APPS accounts the applsys password must be identical to the password for the APPS accounts APPS APPS2 APPS3 The uniform passwords enable the different sets of books to operate correctly ORACLE Users Block Password Enter the password of your ORACLE username Your password is not displayed If you are registering a change to an existing ORACLE password make the password change in the database immediately AFTER you register the password change in Oracle E Business Suite Until you register the password changes in Oracle E Business Suite and implement them in the database responsibilities using this ORACLE username cannot connect to the database Warning If you are changing the password to the applsys ORACLE username which contains the Oracle Application Object Library tables you must not change the passwords to any other ORACLE Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 11 13 usernames at the same time As soon as you change and save the password you should immediately log out of the Oracle E Business Suite make the applsys password change in the database and then sign on again before you do anything else You should also ensure that no other users are logged on to the Oracle E Business Suite while you are changing the applsys password Using FNDCPASS is the preferred method for changing passwords Note that FNDCPASS automatically updates all instances of the password for you Privilege Enter the type of privilege to th
552. the MIME types for the output formats of your concurrent requests These MIME types are used in viewing reports For each file format you can associate one or more MIME types A user can use one MIME type to view reports of a certain format For example a user can view all text format reports in Microsoft Word The MIME types for supported formats for a particular user are set by several profile options They are e Viewer Application for HTML e Viewer Application for PCL e Viewer Application for PDF e Viewer Application for PostScript e Viewer Application for Text 7 72 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration This MIME type is sent to a browser window when the user views a report of that file format Viewer Options Block Associate one or more MIME types with each supported file format By defining viewer options you can specify the application or applications that are available for displaying files of each format File Format The file format MIME Type The MIME type to use for the file output Allow Native Client Encoding If this box is checked the Report Viewer will convert the output file into the character set specified by the FND Native Client Encoding profile option Related Topics Defining the Reports Viewer Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Maintenance Reviewing Requests Request Log Files and Report Output Files Oracle E Business Suite System
553. the application middle tier as the OS user who owns the application tier files 2 Source your lt APPL_TOP gt lt SID_hostname gt env file to set your APPL_TOP variables 3 Navigate to the INST_TOP ora 10 1 3 and source the lt SID_hostname gt env file Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration to set your 10 1 3 ORACLE_HOME variables When working with wallets and certificates you must use the 10 1 3 executables 2 Create a Wallet 1 Verify the location of the Web SSL directory grep s_web_ssl_directory CONTEXT_FILE 2 Navigate to this directory which will have Apache and opmn subdirectories 3 Change to the Apache subdirectory 4 Backup any existing wallets demo certificates are included in Release 12 5 Create your new wallet orapki wallet create wallet auto login pwd password wallet note the tells orapki that you want to create the wallet in the current directory You can also specify the full path to any directory where you wish to create a wallet 1 auto login tells orapki that you want to create cwallet sso which is an obfuscated copy of ewallet p12 With auto login enabled processes submitted by the OS user who created the wallet will not need to supply the password to access the wallet 6 You should now see two wallet files in your directory cwallet sso and ewallet p12 3 Add your self signed certificate to the wallet 1 Enter
554. the contents of the report Related Topics Defining Managers and their Work Shifts page 7 1 Work Shifts Report page 7 16 Work Shifts Report This report documents all of your work shift definitions Use this report when defining or editing concurrent manager work shifts Report Parameters None Report Headings The report headings provide you with general information about the contents of the report Related Topics Defining Managers and their Work Shifts page 7 1 Work Shift Definitions page 7 3 7 16 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Work Shifts Report page 7 16 Work Shift by Manager Report page 7 16 Work Shifts field help page 7 66 Specializing Managers to Run Only Certain Programs This essay explains how you can specialize managers to run only certain programs Introduction to Specialization Rules Related Topics Every time your users request a concurrent program to be run their request is inserted into a database table Concurrent managers read requests from this table and start running programs if the manager is defined to read the particular request Without specialization rules a manager reads requests to start any concurrent program Using specialization rules you can specialize a manager to read only certain kinds of requests to start concurrent programs for example only requests to start Oracle General Ledger programs or only requests to start programs req
555. the following procedure to find the form function name 1 Log into Oracle E Business Suite and navigate to the form of interest Choose About Oracle Applications from the Help menu Scroll down to Form Information and make note of the form name Now log into Oracle E Business Suite using the Implementation System Administration responsibility and navigate to Application Form Within the Form window query for the form name you just made a note of in the Form field Make note of the value in the User Form Name field once your query completes Close the Form window and navigate to Application Function Within the Function window query for the User Form Name value that you just made a note of in the Form field The value that is returned in the Function field is the form function name that you need to associate a Process Navigator process step to a form 17 6 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 18 Administering Globalization Overview of Globalization Support This chapter describes some of the features of globalization formerly internationalization support in Oracle E Business Suite Topics covered in this chapter include language values used in user sessions behavior of month name abbreviations and multilingual external documents In addition the Oracle E Business Suite windows for Languages Natural Languages and Territories are described For additional information on globalizatio
556. the username of the System Administrator Set WAIT to Y if you want CONCSUB to wait until the request you submitted completes before CONCSUB returns you to the operating system prompt Set WAIT to N the default value if you do not want CONCSUB to wait You can also enter an integer value of n seconds for CONCSUB to wait before it exits When used WAIT must be entered before CONCURRENT The application shortname of the program For the DEACTIVATE ABORT and VERIFY programs the application shortname is FND To submit the Shutdown All Managers concurrent request use the program DEACTIVATE To submit the Shutdown Abort Managers concurrent request use the program ABORT To submit the Verify All Managers Status concurrent request use the program VERIFY Defining Concurrent Managers 7 41 Example Syntax using CONCSUB CONCSUB lt Username Password gt SYSADMIN System Administrator SYSADMIN CONCURRENT FND DEACTIVATE CONCSUB lt Username Password gt SYSADMIN System Administrator SYSADMIN CONCURRENT FND ABORT CONCSUB lt Username Password gt SYSADMIN System Administrator SYSADMIN CONCURRENT FND VERIFY Using CONCSUB to shut down your managers Use CONCSUB to shut down the concurrent managers e before MIS shuts down the operating system e before the database administrator shuts down the database e when you want concurrent manager and concurrent program definitions to take effe
557. them across nodes in any way desired For example three Oracle General Ledger concurrent managers could be spread across three nodes Or an Oracle Payables concurrent manager and an Oracle General Ledger concurrent manager could run simultaneously on the same node The following are examples of environments in which parallel concurrent processing can run Cluster Environments In a cluster environment multiple computers each representing a single node share a common pool of disks With parallel concurrent processing in a cluster environment a single ORACLE database resides in the common disk pool while multiple instances of Real Application Clusters RAC run simultaneously on multiple nodes in the cluster Multiple concurrent managers are also distributed across the nodes in the cluster Massively Parallel Environments In a massively parallel environment multiple nodes are housed in a single computer All nodes share access to a common pool of disks The IBM SP 2 for example is a massively parallel computer With parallel concurrent processing in a massively parallel environment separate RAC 7 44 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration instances run simultaneously on multiple nodes with multiple concurrent managers also distributed across nodes Networked Environments In networked environments multiple computers of the same type are connected via a local area network LAN to a single
558. ther Oracle E Business Suite login methods besides the login page For example the language to use for the session language when logged in through JDeveloper e Session language when the Applications Override SSO Server Language profile option is set to Override SSO Server Language The ICX Language profile is normally not set at user level when a given user initially 18 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration starts using Oracle E Business Suite Regardless of whether a value exists for the profile at user level the language chosen on the login page the runtime session value is not automatically saved to the ICX Language profile value for the user The user can either specifically set a value for the ICX Language profile at user level after logging in or continue to inherit the value from the higher profile value levels A value always exists for the ICX Language profile at site level Preferences Page Language Support The current values for the runtime session language and the saved ICX Language profile value for the user are displayed on the Preferences page The following updates are allowed Change only the runtime session language Change only the saved ICX Language profile value for the user Change both the runtime session and the ICX Language profile values to either the same values or different values Language Value from Login External to Oracle E Business Suite This section de
559. ther Products Integration of Oracle E Business Suite with Other Products sesssssssss 19 1 A Oracle Application Server with Oracle E Business Suite B xii Introd ction ince re e IU ve de nen i ee exe a ol ce pee akin d det A 1 Using Oracle Application Server 10g with Oracle E Business Suite A 1 Loaders Generic Loader noon oe eee Ut ttu aed dc te reet B 1 OVeEVIe W doe teras tee inti ete incu ite Due of tm oe istoc A tae e ier S cba B 1 ENDLOAD Executable x tette piede eimi tee B 3 Confie ratior FIle ose eere utt pete e eet lta ES tie ee dud uten B 4 D ta Eile z 6dtet ceti te e doe send tel der Tore itera dr Vu dee a de ete ut ue d B 7 Oracle Application Object Library Configuration Files ssssseeee B 8 Attachments Setup Data Configuration File B 9 Concurrent Program Configuration File sss eee B 11 Flexfields Setup Data Configuration File B 14 Flextield Valte Sets iicet eren he te ie temstadtocenngsicdeusntead GER eee aedi B 14 Desctiptive Elexfields c om ede d bt ee Eds B 14 Key lex fields pli ch dL d tuo deu unte B 15 Folders Configuration File inerte e eee bid e aee ede tbid a iun B 15 Lookups Configuration File eee eerte siena rco v se da e e da Ra ra B 18 Messages Configuration File ssssssssssssseeeenenen emere nennen B 19 Profile Options and Profile Values Confi
560. this process monitoring or PMON activity to occur by choosing the Verify button Another result of selecting this choice is that the Internal Concurrent Manager rereads concurrent program incompatibility rules Restart This choice appears only when you select an individual manager When you restart a concurrent manager the manager rereads its definition You should restart a manager when you have made the following changes using the Define Concurrent Manager form and you wish those changes to take effect e Change work shift assignments e Modify the number of Target Processes e Ina parallel concurrent processing environment change node or system queue information 7 52 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Fixed Activate Reviewing a Specific Manager View details of a concurrent manager s operation Related Topics Processes Requests This choice appears only when a manager has been down due to an underlying issue beyond the concurrent manager startup threshold and the Internal Concurrent Manager has stopped attempting to restart it After the underlying problem has been fixed this choice is available so that you can indicate that it has been fixed and the ICM should try to restart the concurrent manager again When you activate the Internal Concurrent Manager you activate all other managers as well except those managers that were deactivated on an individual basis You cannot
561. this program are submitted they run on this instance if possible Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 73 Incompatible Programs Window Application Name Scope pa Oracle Applications File Edit View Fodar Tools Window Help avol zS P e OHA 40S Es Incompatible Programs Program Application Application Name Identify programs that should not run simultaneously with your concurrent program because they might interfere with its execution You can specify your program as being incompatible with itself Although the default for this field is the application of your concurrent program you can enter any valid application name The program name and application you specify must uniquely identify a concurrent program Your list displays the user friendly name of the program the short name and the description of the program Enter Set or Program Only to specify whether your concurrent program is incompatible with this program and all its child requests Set or only with this program Program Only 6 74 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Type Enter Domain or Global If you choose Domain the incompatibility is resolved at a domain specific level If you choose Global then this concurrent program will be considered globally incompatible with your concurrent program regardless of which domain it is running in Rel
562. three columns To stop the request set if a stage ends in Error leave the Error column blank Any time you do not specifically indicate which stage should follow for a completion status the request set will exit on that completion status In the example shown in the table below the request set will always exit if any stage returns a completion status of error In addition stages C and D will terminate the request set regardless of their completion status If Stage A returns a status other than Error Stage B will be submitted Finally when Stage B completes with a status of Success it is followed by Stage C or if the status is Warning Stage D will follow Choose Done The following table shows an example of linking stages as in step 2 above Display Name Success Warning Error Sequence Stage A Stage B Stage B Stage B Stage C Stage D Stage C Stage D Restarting Request Sets If a request set completes with a status of Error the Restart button on the Oracle 6 16 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Applications Manager View Completed Requests page is enabled The system also automatically captures records and saves the information of the first stage that fails so that when the user clicks on the Restart button the request set can restart from that point Once the stage has been identified the request set program submits the stage program in resubmit mode In this mode the progr
563. till have the option of printing it later using Pasta Before running the report associate the noprint printer with the Pasta Universal Printer Type in the Printers form Note You must restart the concurrent manager for this to take effect See Printer Setup Information is Cached on Demand page 9 9 Related Topics Setup for Basic Printing with Pasta page 9 10 Defining Configuration Files for Specific Printers page 9 11 Modify Add Printer Type to Use Pasta page 9 12 Setting Margins page 9 13 Generating Other Formats Using the Preprocessing Option page 9 15 Font Source page 9 16 Language Specific Font Support page 9 17 Configuration File Options page 9 18 9 14 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Command Line Parameters page 9 24 Generating Other Formats Using the Preprocessing Option Pasta can use a preprocessing option to invoke any executable that supports an input file and an output file filter program Pasta will invoke the filter program to preprocess the Pasta output before passing it to the printing command By using the preprocessing option you can generate output formats other than the formats that Pasta currently supports For example by invoking products such as Adobe Acrobat Distiller Server or Ghostscript you can generate PDF output or PCL output Important Ensure that the executable for the preprocess program is placed in your path The preprocessing command is
564. ting role for example lt Application gt Administrator role and assign the program name to grant Use the Concurrent Requests data object in creating this grant 6 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration 3 Ensure that the role is assigned to all users that should have access to these requests Limiting Active Requests by a User As System Administrator you can limit the number of requests that may be active status of Running for an individual user This ensures that a user cannot monopolize the request queue For example if a user with an Active Request Limit of 5 submits 20 requests only 5 requests will be run at the same time The remaining requests will be run when the number of active requests for the user drops below 5 Use the Profile Options window to set the Concurrent Active Request Limit profile To set a global limit for all users set this option at the site level You can then modify limits for individual users by setting this profile option at the User level Organizing Programs into Request Sets Reports and concurrent programs can be assembled into request sets Request sets define run and print options and possibly parameter values for a collection of reports or concurrent program End users with the appropriate privileges and System Administrators can define request sets A System Administrator has request set privileges beyond those of an end user Request sets can be run from
565. tion Related Topics Field in Document Sequences form EXAMPLE 1 Sequence with Automatic Numbering EXAMPLE 2 Sequence with Manual Numbering Sequence NAME Owning APPLICATION EFFECTIVE DATE START EFFECTIVE DATE END Numbering TYPE INITIAL VALUE MESSAGE AUTOPAY ORACLE PAYABLES Sequence can number documents stored in an Oracle Payables database table CURRENT DATE amp TIME Default value Field left blank Sequence does not expire AUTOMATIC Unique numbers are automatically generated in sequence GAPLESS No omissions or gaps in numbers are possible due to a rollback if the document creation is unsuccessful 1 Default value User could enter their own initial value for example 5700 YES When a document that is automatically numbered is created a message displays the sequence name and the sequence value document number ADJUSTMENTS ORACLE RECEIVABLES Sequence can number documents stored in an Oracle Receivables database table OCT 01 94 User defines sequence Adjustments not to be available until Oct 1 1994 DEC 31 94 User defines sequence Adjustments to no longer be available after Dec 31 1994 MANUAL User must enter a unique number before transaction can be completed and document is generated User may skip or omit numbers Not Available when numbering type is Manual Not Available when numbering type is Manual What is a D
566. tion Restricting Access to Responsibilities Based on User s Web Server Oracle E Business Suite has the capability to restrict access to a responsibility based upon the Web server from which the user logs in This capability is provided by tagging Web servers with a server trust level The server trust level indicates the level of trust associated with the Web server Currently three trust levels are supported 1 administrative 2 normal and 3 external Web servers marked as administrative are typically those used exclusively by system administrators These servers are considered secure and may contain highly sensitive information Servers marked as normal are those used by employees within a company s firewall Users logging in from normal servers have access to only a limited set of responsibilities Lastly servers marked as external are those used by customers or employees outside of a company s firewall These servers have access to an even smaller set of responsibilities Setting the Server Trust Level for a Server To assign a trust level to a Web server set the Node Trust Level profile option The Node Trust Level profile option uses the Server profile hierarchy type meaning that the value of the profile depends on the particular middle tier server accessing the profile This profile option can be set to either 1 2 or 3 with the following meanings e 1 Administrative e 2 Normal e 3 External To avoid having to set t
567. tion e Security information Attachments Setup Data Configuration File Use the file afattach lct for loading attachments setup data The following table lists the entities sub entities if any and download parameters for this configuration file Entity Sub entities if any Download Parameters FND ATTACHMENT END ATTACHMENT BLOC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS KS SHORT NAME END ATTACHMENT BLOC FUNCTION NAME K_ ENTITIES FUNCTION_TYPE FND_DOC_CATEGORY_US AGES The entity definitions are Loaders B 9 DEFINE FND ATTACHMENT FUNCTIONS KEY FUNCTION NAME VARCHAR2 30 KEY FUNCTION TYPE VARCHAR2 1 KE APP SHORT NAME VARCHAR2 50 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 BASE SESSION CONTEXT FIELD VARCHAR2 61 BASE ENABLED FLAG VARCHAR2 1 DEFINE FND ATTACHMENT BLOCKS KEY BLOCK NAME VARCHAR2 30 CTX OWNER VARCHAR2 7 BASE QUERY FLAG VARCHAR2 1 BASE SECURITY TYPE VARCHAR2 50 BASE ORG CONTEXT FIELD
568. tion managers for the applications that use transaction managers Consult your product documentation to determine if your application uses transaction managers Each responsibility within Oracle E Business Suite is assigned a data group During the installation or upgrading of Oracle E Business Suite a standard data group is defined pairing each installed application with an ORACLE username note a standard data group is defined for each set of books You cannot change or delete the predefined values for Application or ORACLE username in a Standard data group However you may e Modify the Tool ORACLE username and description associated with an Application ORACLE username pair e Add new Application ORACLE username pairs to the group Data Groups Block Data Group Create a new data group or modify an existing data group You cannot change or delete the predefined values for Application or ORACLE username in a Standard data group However you may modify the Tool ORACLE username and description or add new Application ORACLE username pairs to a Standard group A data group is uniquely identified by its name You cannot create a data group with a name already in use Once saved data group names cannot be edited Application ORACLE ID Pairs Block Application Pair applications with ORACLE usernames When you copy a data group each application its assigned ORACLE username and if present its Tool ORACLE username and
569. tion Controlling Oracle Component Workflow Builder Component s Process The diagram that appears in Process activity and process Process description Step Step description Form associated with a step the Process Navigator A description of the displayed process An icon in the process which takes you directly to an Oracle E Business Suite form when you double click on it A description of the selected process step The Oracle E Business Suite form that appears when you double click on a step in a Process Navigator process diagram Process activity Notification activity Message Form type Message attribute Note The following procedures do not address most of the functionality of Oracle Workflow Builder but are tailored to creating processes for the Process Navigator The Oracle Workflow Builder is a tool used to design workflow processes Workflow processes can range from routing documents through an approval process to setting up your Oracle E Business Suite See the Oracle Workflow documentation for more information Creating Process Navigator Processes To create a new process for the Process Navigator you must first create the necessary components in Oracle Workflow Builder The components you create make up the 17 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration process definition which is then saved to the database or to a flat file The Process Navigator then rea
570. tion on XML Publisher and the Template Manager see the Oracle XML Publisher documentation At the time of request submission the default template is presented to the user The user can override this value when submitting the request Retain for This field indicates how many days the system should retain data for a request of this concurrent program after the request completes The system will retain this data for this period even if the Purge Concurrent Request and or Manager Data program is run during this time Security Group This field is for HRMS security only See Customizing Reporting and System Administration in Oracle HRMS Log Level for Failure The log level is used in diagnostics If a request to run this concurrent program fails the failure may be recorded in a log file with the specified log level Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 89 Target Settings Session Controls Statistics Enable Trace Turns on SQL tracing when program runs Enable Time Statistics Enables the collection of timed statistics such as CPU and elapsed times by the SQL trace facility as well as the collection of various statistics in the dynamic performance tables Delete Log File By default a log file is created for each concurrent request If such log files are not necessary for requests for this concurrent program you can specify that the log file is automatically deleted for each request of this program If you are o
571. tion tier operating system time zone to match the standard corporate time zone Profile Server Timezone SERVER TIMEZONE ID must be set at site level and must be set to the same standard corporate time zone as the database Profile Client Timezone CLIENT TIMEZONE ID must be set at user level This is applicable to Oracle Forms based Uls Preference Timezone must be set at user level This is applicable to HTML based Time Zone Support E 3 Time Zone File UIs e Profile Enable Timezone Conversions ENABLE_TIMEZONE_CONVERSIONS must be set to Yes or Y at site level e Profile Concurrent Multiple Time Zones CONC MULTI TZ must be set to No or N at the site level e Environment variable FORMS APPSLIBS must be set in the Forms tier e Forms must be launched through the Personal Home Page or Navigator portlet These requirements are discussed in more detail below The database must be started using the timezlrg dat file which contains the time zone definitions that are used within Oracle E Business Suite To do this in a UNIX environment issue a command such as setenv ORA TZFILE SORACLE HOME oracore zoneinfo timezlrg dat before starting the database The database must also be started in the standard corporate time zone To set this in a UNIX environment issue a command such as setenv TZ Timezone Code For example America Los Angeles You can verify your setup by running the
572. tional parameter conflict domain parameter is used The conflict domain may be set automatically based on such variables as a login ID set of books or the organization the user is working in The conflict domain parameter may in some cases be selected in the parameters field of the Submit Requests form Once the parameter is determined the Conflict Resolution Manager CRM uses the domain to ensure that incompatible programs do not run simultaneously in the same domain 6 30 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Enforcing Incompatibility Rules Concurrent managers read requests to start concurrent programs running The Conflict Resolution Manager checks concurrent program definitions for incompatibility rules If a program is identified as Run Alone then the Conflict Resolution Manager prevents the concurrent managers from starting other programs in the same conflict domain When a program lists other programs as being incompatible with it the Conflict Resolution Manager prevents the program from starting until any incompatible programs in the same domain have completed running The figures below illustrate the role of the Conflict Resolution Manager when enforcing program incompatibility rules In a simple example without incompatibilities a user submits a request to run a program This request is then added to the request table which contains a list of requests Managers then read requests from this tabl
573. tions Diagnostics Menu F 1 as needed basis by the system when the user selects the submenu item If the menu item is not available to the user the message Function not available to this responsibility Change responsibilities or contact your System Administrator The following flowchart illustrates how the menu items are secured ZO N Execute menu Utilities Diagnostics profile option value default value No ide Diagnostics Ment Entry profile option value o code No null cr undefined d Is security function for the item set Yes Hide the Diagnostics menu item so itis not displayed at all Execute menu code Lock all submenu items and display menu Seeded Security Functions and Permission Sets The following table lists the seeded securing functions and their corresponding Diagnostic menu items Note that there are read only functions for some menu items Securing Function Securing Function Internal Menu Name Runtime Menu Name User Friendly Name Name FND DIAGNOSTICS FND Diagnostics DIAGNOSTICS Diagnostics _EXAMINE Menu Examine EXAMINE Examine FND DIAGNOSTICS FND Diagnostics DIAGNOSTICS Diagnostics EXAMINE RO Menu Examine EXAMINE Examine F 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Securing Function Securing Function Internal Menu Name Runtime Menu Name User Friendly Name Name FND DIAG
574. tly interpreting the control characters used to set page breaks and format text as bold or underlined in Oracle Reports files For example you may need to change the control characters that instruct the printer to set a page break on an LN03 on an XYZ LaserInk new page L E If you need to change formatting control characters for page breaks underlined text or bold text in Oracle Reports e Copy the prt file SRW driver and rename the copy e Modify the new file with new control characters e Place the modified copy of the SRW driver file in FND_TOP APPLREP e Associate the new driver with a print style and or printer driver definition Important Copy the SRW driver prt file and rename it before starting any text editing SRW Drivers Print Styles and Printer Drivers When the concurrent manager calls Oracle Reports to run a report the SRW driver name is passed as a parameter to Oracle Reports The SRW driver is not required because some customers might be using styles or printer drivers for non Oracle Reports programs 9 38 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration The SRW driver name you enter in the Print Styles and Printer Drivers forms is used in slightly different ways depending on whether you are printing or simply viewing the report If you run an Oracle Reports program without printing the output file the SRW driver associated with the report s print style is used I
575. tomatically or accepts numbers manually entered by a user Automatic Gapless and Manual Numbering Automatic numbering assigns a unique number to each document as it is generated Automatic numbering is sequential by date and time of creation Gapless numbering also automatically generates a unique number for each document but ensures that the document was successfully generated before assigning the number With Gapless numbering no sequence numbers are lost due to incomplete or failed document creation Important We recommend that you choose this type only when gapless numbering is essential as it may affect the performance of your system Manual numbering requires a user to assign a unique number to each document before it is generated With manual numbering numerical ordering and completeness is not enforced Users can skip or omit numbers when entering the sequence value Automatic Numbering Initial Value and Message Display If you define a sequence to automatically number documents you can e Enter an initial value for your sequence The default is 1 e Choose whether you want to display a message when a document is generated telling the user the name of the sequence and the sequence value document number Two examples of sequence definitions one with automatic numbering and the other with manual numbering are represented in the table below 14 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configura
576. tor s Guide Configuration submits a request to start it However a manager may have an underlying issue such as a configuration issue or corrupted executable that prevents it from starting By setting a maximum number of attempts the ICM will make to start a manager over a set time you can prevent the ICM from continuously making futile attempts to start these managers After the underlying problem is fixed you can restart the manager from the Administer Managers window The startup threshold is defined by two profile options e CONC Manager Startup Threshold Limit This value determines the number of attempts to restart a manager before the system will stop and alert the system administrator The default value of this profile is 10 attempts e CONC Manager Startup Threshold Time minutes This value determines the length of time the attempts will be made to restart a manager If the Threshold Limit as defined above is reached within this time limit the attempts will stop until the underlying issue has been addressed The default value of this profile is 60 minutes 1 hour If a manager has failed to start after the specified number of attempts cycles the manager will not be checked You can fix the underlying problem and after it is addressed you can go to the Administer Managers window select the manager and click the Fixed button The concurrent manager startup threshold can be disabled by setting the profile option
577. tributes with one or more objects database views to create object attributes Note Uniform Resource Locator URL attributes must be object attributes Note If you are updating existing assignments and you change a long label you are prompted if you want to change the label for all related object attributes and region items If you choose OK all related labels are changed Prerequisites to this task are Define objects Define the attributes to assign to objects To assign attributes to objects 1 Navigate to the Object Attributes folder window Select an existing attribute name to assign to an object Optionally select a database view column name corresponding to the object attribute Enter a long label for the object attribute The default is the label used when the attribute was defined but can be overridden D 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Note The remaining data in the Object Attributes folder window defaults from when you defined the attribute You may override these defaults 5 Choose the Create Attributes button to create additional attributes When you close the Attributes window you are prompted to add the attributes you just created to your object attributes To assign multiple regions 1 Choose the Multiple Assignments button 2 Enter all the regions that you want the current object attribute assigned to Defining Attributes Attributes can be de
578. tting cannot be overridden at runtime or when defining a report in a report set 9 40 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Form Explanation Request Set System Administrator As System Administrator you can assign a default printer to a report within a report set Request Set Application Users Users can assign a default printer to a report within a report set when they own the report set This default setting can be changed by the System Administrator Personal Profile Values Application Users Users can assign a default printer for all their reports using their Personal Profile Values form This assignment overrides the default Printer profile option set by the System Administrator System Profile Values System Administrator As System Administrator you can assign a default printer to an installation site Oracle application responsibility or user Users can override this setting at runtime Hierarchy of Print Style Assignments As System Administrator you can require concurrent programs and reports to generate their output in a specific print style Requiring a program s or a report s output to be in a specific print style prevents report set or user runtime print style choices Requirements for alternate print styles All concurrent programs whose execution method is Oracle Reports require a print style to be selected when the program is defined When the print style is not des
579. ty and the manager returns to look at the requests list That request may have to wait a long time if you set the buffer size to a high number You should use cache size to tune your concurrent managers to work most efficiently for you site s needs If your organization tends to reprioritize jobs going to a certain manager that manager should have its buffer size set fairly low Tip Enter a value of 1 when defining a manager that runs long time consuming jobs and a value of 3 or 4 for managers that run small quick jobs Data Group Transaction Manager only The data group the transaction manager uses to connect to the database Transaction managers only run programs submitted from responsibilities that use the same data group as the transaction manager 7 60 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Note Data groups are no longer supported by Oracle E Business Suite This section is provided for reference only Resource Consumer Group The resource consumer group for the manager For more information on resource consumer groups see Resource Consumer Groups in Oracle E Business Suite page 11 3 Parallel Concurrent Processing Details Node If you are operating in a parallel concurrent processing environment and you want your manager to operate on a specific node select the name of the node The primary node if available is the node your concurrent manager operates on If the primary node or th
580. tyle definitions and Printer Driver definitions are read into memory cached the first time the information is required to print a program s output The cache area that holds printer setup information is private to the concurrent managers Printer setup information remains cached in memory until the concurrent managers are restarted when the values are erased and new values are cached Important You should issue a Restart concurrent manager command for all currently active managers whenever you edit an existing Printer Type Print Style or Printer Driver unless the type style or driver has not been referred to or cached yet See Controlling Concurrent Managers page 7 35 Overview of Printers and Printing page 9 1 Printer Types Print Styles and Printer Drivers page 9 2 Customizing Printing Support in Oracle E Business Suite page 9 31 Creating Custom Printer Drivers page 9 31 Printers 9 9 Printer Setup with Pasta Overview Pasta is an Oracle E Business Suite utility that converts text report files to PostScript and also enables the printing of custom PostScript reports from Oracle E Business Suite The reports can then be directed to any PostScript printer Setting up your system to use Pasta is much simpler than the standard Oracle E Business Suite printer setup procedure The Printer Type Printer Driver and SRW driver files are provided The only setup required to begin printing is the registration of the printer wi
581. u design your executable programs to work with the standard Oracle Reports print drivers The following standard drivers are located in the FND_TOP APPLREP directory 8 16 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration e D prt Portrait style e L prt Landscape style e W prt Landwide style e Avprt A4 style The program should not misinterpret the commands for bold on bold off and page size that the standard drivers imbed in Oracle E Business Suite reports If necessary you can create customized Oracle Reports drivers as described in the next section Location of Program When you have compiled and linked the source code or written a command file move the program to the APPLBIN subdirectory under the top directory of your custom development area Keep copies of the source file in your custom development area as a backup Creating Customized Character Mode Oracle Reports Print Drivers The Oracle Reports print drivers set the font styles for italics underlining and bolding If your executable printing program cannot use the standard Oracle Reports drivers create a customized driver for each print style you will use with the program To create a customized driver copy L prt P prt A prt or W prt from FND_ TOP APPLREP to your custom development area Modify a standard driver as needed for your executable printing program Give the customized driver a new filename but keep the prt extension Then c
582. u want to monitor Signon Audit Setup From this page select the Enable Auditing button to set the Sign On Audit Level profile option to FORM which enables Forms monitoring Selecting the Disable Auditing button sets this profile option to NONE Use the Enable Alerting Disable Alerting buttons to control whether an alert should be raised if the Sign On Audit Level profile option is set at a value other than FORM Dashboard Setup Wizard Metrics Services Select the Update button to configure how data for the following are collected Specify how you want metrics to be collected for the following e Activity e Configuration Changes last 24 hours e System Alerts e Web Components Status e User Initiated Alerts Specify which services you want to monitor For a given service you can specify if you Introduction to Oracle Applications Manager 5 3 want to collect data for it and whether you want to be alerted if the service is ina specified status The Site Map The Site Map lists the features and applications available in the Oracle Applications Manager Features are grouped into the following categories Administration Monitoring Maintenance and Diagnostics and Repair Site Map Administration System Configuration These features provide detailed information on the configuration of your system You can update many of your configuration settings from these links also e Hosts For each of your hosts you
583. udit Reports the manager will not read requests to run the program even though it has been specifically identified by an Include rule The Exclude rule overrides the Include rule Specializing to only run a Program against specific Oracle IDs In the following example a manager can be specialized to only run a program against a specific Oracle ID This is useful when there are multiple installations of an Oracle Application Include Program Oracle Payables Invoice Aging Report AND Exclude Oracle ID APPS2 Net Result The manager only reads requests to run the Oracle Payables program Invoice Aging Report when the program does not connect to the Oracle ID APPS2 The Exclude action overrides the Include action However when the Invoice Aging Report runs against another Oracle ID for example APPS then this manager will read requests to run the program Distinguishing a Program from a Request Type You can specialize a manager to read requests to run all the programs belonging to a Request Type except for individual programs you wish to identify Include Request Type Oracle General Ledger Reports AND Exclude Program Oracle General Ledger Account Analysis Net Result If the Account Analysis program belongs to the request 7 24 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration type Oracle General Ledger Reports then this manager will run every program in the request type Oracle General Led
584. ue entered No default entered No default entered Parameter does not require a value Parameter is displayed Display set to Yes Parameter is displayed Display set to No Parameter not displayed Yes Default Type and Value cannot be modified Yes a Default Type and Value can be entered No Default Type and Value are not entered Parameter requires a value Parameter is displayed Parameter is not displayed Parameter not displayed Value can be modified Value cannot be modified Default values can be changed by the user Default values can be changed by the user No default value is displayed Warnings for Modifying Program Definitions The following table lists warnings for modifying program definitions 6 52 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Action Form Used Warning Changing the number of columns or rows in a report program Setting print style to Dynamic Changing the number of parameters in a program definition Changing Value Sets Changing tokens Defining a concurrent executable or program s execution method as Immediate Concurrent Programs Report Information region Concurrent Programs Report Information region Style field Concurrent Programs Parameters window Concurrent Programs Argument Details region Value Set field Concurrent Programs Argument Deta
585. ues If the Default Type or Default Value for a parameter is incorrect when the program is being set to run using the Submit Requests form a window displays along with an error message If the parameter is not displayed you receive an error message You cannot update a field that is not displayed Warning Be careful when entering the default type and default value because these values are not validated with the value sets for your parameters If you enter incorrect values they do not appear as defaults when you run this request set using the Submit Requests form Preventing modification of parameter values in a Request Set If a parameter is displayed in the Request Set form and there is no default value provided by the program s definition you can define a default value or have the parameter inherit a shared value and then prevent end users from modifying that value Set the Modify field in the Request Set form to No if you want to show the value for a parameter but not allow changing it when the request set is run using a Standard Submission form You can set a value for the parameter using a default value or a 6 50 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration shared parameter If the Display field is set to No the Modify field automatically defaults to No and you cannot update it Caution Set defaults for required parameters before turning Modify to No Otherwise the Submit Requests form returns an
586. uested by the user Fred See Concurrent Managers page 7 59 A special type of specialization rule is the combined specialization rule that can combine more than one action to define a single rule See Combined Specialization Rules page 7 68 Defining Specialization Rules page 7 17 Examples Using Specialization Rules page 7 22 Defining Combined Specialization Rules page 7 27 Controlling Concurrent Managers page 7 35 Concurrent Managers field help page 7 59 Defining Specialization Rules A specialization rule associates an action with a type of request There are two kinds of actions Include and Exclude e Include defines a manager to only read requests of the type specified e Exclude defines a manager to read all requests except the type specified Requests to run concurrent programs may be allowed or disallowed on the basis of the ORACLE ID of the request s Set of Books for multiple installs or Organization if you are using multiple organizations Defining Concurrent Managers 7 17 the program itself or the program s application the request type of the program the user who submitted the request a combined rule which combines more than one action to generate a single rule The combined rule applies its actions to one or more types of request For example a combined rule can exclude an action from an Oracle ID and exclude another action from a specific program Using more than one rule Each rule perfor
587. uests for program X Combination Rule Exclude Lines Result Exclude Program 37 Exclude Program 37 AND Exclude User Sam Do not run program 37 Do not run program 37 and Do not run requests by User Sam Net result Do not run anyone s requests for program 37 and do not run Sam s requests Combination Rule Include and Exclude Lines Result IncludeUser Sam AND Exclude Program 37 Include Program Application General Ledger AND IncludeUser Sam Run requests by User Sam and Do not run program 37 Net result Run all of Sam s requests except requests to run program 37 Run General Ledger Programs and Run requests by User Sam and 7 28 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Related Topics Combination Rule Include and Exclude Result Lines Exclude Program 37 Do not run program 37 AND and Exclude Program 38 Do not run program 38 Net result Run Sam s requests for programs from the application General Ledger except programs 37 and 38 Specializing Managers to run only certain programs page 7 17 Defining Specialization Rules page 7 17 Using Combined Rules page 7 29 Differences Between Specialization and Combined Rules page 7 32 Concurrent Managers field help page 7 59 Combined Specialization Rules field help page 7 68 Using Combined Rules Using combined rules you can precisely specialize a man
588. uite Security Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security Create Additional Users You should use the procedure outlined in Step 1 to create additional application users When you define a new user you assign one or more responsibilities and a password that the user changes after the initial logon You can use the LOV in the Responsibility field to get a list of the standard responsibilities for each application you specify You can assign multiple responsibilities to a user See Overview of Oracle E Business Suite Security Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Security Set Up Oracle Applications Manager Oracle Applications Manager OAM allows you to configure and maintain many components of the Oracle E Business Suite system For information on setting up OAM see Oracle Applications Manager Setup page 5 2 Set Up Your Printers Read the Setting Up Your Printers page 9 8 page to learn how to set up your printers You must define any printer types used at your site that are not shipped with Oracle 4 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration E Business Suite then register each printer with its name as determined by your operating system For every custom printer type or specialized print style you define use the Printer Drivers form to assign a printer driver to use with each print style used by a printer type If you need more information on how to find you
589. uite System Administration predefines two managers for you e The Internal Concurrent Manager which functions as the boss of all the other managers The Internal Concurrent Manager starts up verifies the status of resets and shuts down the individual managers You cannot alter the definition of the Internal Concurrent Manager e Amanager named Standard The Standard manager accepts any and all requests it has no specialization The Standard manager is active all the time it works 365 days a year 24 hours a day Warning You should not alter the definition of the Standard concurrent manager If you do and you have not defined additional managers to accept your requests some programs may not run Use the Standard manager as a safety net a manager who is always available to run any request Define additional managers to handle your installation site s specific needs Transaction Managers While conventional concurrent managers let you execute long running data intensive application programs asynchronously transaction managers support synchronous processing of particular requests from client machines A request from a client program 7 2 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration to run a server side program synchronously causes a transaction manager to run it immediately and then to return a status to the client program Transaction managers are implemented as immediate concurrent programs At runtime
590. uld be a functional name followed by the word Process Enter a description for your process The description appears when a user selects a process in the Process Navigator For Oracle Workflow Builder Release 2 5 and higher the description is limited to 240 characters 8 Draw the Process Diagram Once you create a process activity you can draw the Administering Process Navigation 17 3 process diagram that is associated with it The process diagram is what appears when you display a process in the Process Navigator Note The Performer type of the Notification Activity you include in a process diagram for the Process Navigator must be set to the item attribute USER NAME Save your changes When you save your work to a database you actually save everything in the current data store that has been modified When you save your work to a flat file you actually save everything in the current data store to the file Note It is highly recommended that for new processes created for the Process Navigator that you always save a copy of your workflow process definition as a flat file and check that file into a source control system to maintain a working version of your process definition Then when you want to update your definition in the database you can pull up the flat file and save it directly to the database Avoid using the process definition stored in your database as your source controlled version as others with access to the databa
591. ule this program to run every day or so using the default parameter values Purge Obsolete Generic File Manager Data To purge uploaded files from the Generic File Manager run the concurrent program Purge Obsolete Generic File Manager Data This concurrent program should also be used to periodically delete obsolete data It is recommended that you schedule this program to run every day or so using the default parameter values Program Parameters Expired Program Name Program Tag Enter Y if you want to purge expired data only Enter N if you want the purge to include all data The default is Y Enter the program name s to process Leave blank to process all programs Enter the program tag s to process Leave blank to process all program tags Loaders B 27 C Functional Administrator and Functional Developer Tasks Overview of Functional Administrator and Functional Developer Responsibilities Oracle E Business Suite ships two responsibilities that provide access to a subset of system administrator tasks These tasks are primarily those setup tasks using Oracle E Business Suite HTML based pages Functional Administrator Responsibility From the Functional Administrator responsibility you can create and or manage the following features From the Security tab e Grants e Permissions and Permission Sets For more information on using grants and permissions see Overview of Oracle E Business Suite Secu
592. ult value is FNDNAM Name of the internal concurrent manager alphanumeric characters only The default value is std Name of the printer to which the concurrent managers send request output where the requests are submitted from within a concurrent program if the submitting program parent request does not have a printer associated with it List of users who receive mail when the internal concurrent manager stops running The default value is the user who starts managers Number of minutes integer the internal concurrent manager waits before attempting to restart after abnormal termination The default value is N The default value prevents the manager from restarting after abnormal termination The name of the internal concurrent manager s log file The default value is lt mgrname mgr gt Number of seconds integer the internal concurrent manager waits between times it looks for Queue Controlled in statuses Deactivate Abort Verify Activate concurrent requests The default value is 60 Number of sleep cycles integer the internal concurrent manager waits between times it checks for concurrent managers that have failed while running a concurrent request The default value is 20 Number of pmon cycles integer the internal concurrent manager waits between times it checks for normal changes in concurrent manager operation Normal changes include the start or end of a work shift and changes to concurrent manager definitio
593. ur business that is affected by the documents you wish to number You may optionally enable this rule through the Document Flexfield Method You select the method that your documents are entered automatic or manual You may optionally enable this rule through the Document Flexfield Automatic is when a concurrent process such as an external program is set up to enter transaction data into an Oracle E Business Suite product Manual is when a document is manually entered using a form in an application Assignment of Sequences to Document Definitions For each unique document definition there can only be one active sequence assignment A document definition consists of the Application Category and the optional Document Flexfield segments Set of Books and Method Important When assigning sequences to a document definition each active sequence can be assigned to only one unique combination of application and category i e application table Active Assignments and Active Sequences An active sequence assignment does not have a post dated end date That is the assignment s end date is not before the current date e An active sequence assignment either has no end date or an end date that is not before the current date e A sequence assignment and its dates of effectivity are defined on the Sequence Assignments form A sequence definition must be active as well That is the sequence definition s end date as opposed to its a
594. urce consumer group defines a set of users who have similar resource usage requirements An overall resource plan specifies how resources are distributed among the different resource consumer groups Oracle E Business Suite allows the system administrator to assign individual Oracle Oracle E Business Suite DBA Duties 11 3 E Business Suite users to resource consumer groups In addition concurrent programs and concurrent managers can be assigned to resource consumer groups Note These resource consumer groups apply to CPU resources only For additional information see the Oracle database documentation Assigning Resource Consumer Groups The system administrator can assign a user to a resource consumer group by setting the value of the user profile option FND Resource Consumer Group for that particular user The user can see this profile option but cannot update it The system administrator can assign a concurrent program to a resource consumer group in the Parameters window of the Define Concurrent Program form See Concurrent Programs Parameters Window page 6 76 The system administrator can assign a concurrent manager to a resource consumer group in the Define Concurrent Manager form See Concurrent Managers Window page 7 59 Hierarchy of Resource Consumer Group Assignments Conflicts can arise between the resource consumer groups associated with a single session For example a concurrent manager assigned to one resource consum
595. urge the FND STATS HIST table NONE This mode does not generate any history information If this mode is used the run cannot be Query Optimization in Oracle E Business Suite 12 17 restarted Invalidate This flag indicates whether cursors dependent on the index being analyzed should be invalidated By default dependent cursors are invalidated GATHER_COLUMN_STATS Procedure This procedure should be used for gathering the Column Statistics i e creating a histogram on a given column There are two versions of this procedure The first one gathers statistics on all columns seeded in the FND_HISTOGRAM_COLS for the given appl id If NULL all seeded histograms are created The other version gathers column statistics for the specified column Syntax FND STATS GATHER COLUMN STATS appl id NUMBER DEFAULT NULL percent NUMBER DEFAULT NULL degree NUMBER DEFAULT NULL backup flag VARCHAR2 DEFAULT NULL Errors OUT Error Out hmode VARCHAR2 DEFAULT LASTRUN invalidate VARCHAR2 DEFAULT Y FND STATS GATHER COLUMN STATS ownname VARCHAR2 tabname VARCHAR2 colname VARCHAR2 percent NUMBER DEFAULT NULL degree NUMBER DEFAULT NULL hsize NUMBER DEFAULT 254 backup flag VARCHAR2 DEFAULT NULL partname VARCHAR2 DEFAULT NULL hmode VARCHAR2 DEFAULT LASTRUN invalidate VARCHAR2 DEF
596. urrent programs are currently enabled nand which programs are disabled Use this report to record the execution method argument method run alone status standard submission status request type and print style information associated with your concurrent programs Defining Concurrent Programs and Requests 6 57 Report Parameters Application Name Choose the application name associated with the concurrent programs whose program information you wish to report on If you do not enter an application name the report will return values for all concurrent programs Report Headings The report headings display the specified report parameters and provide you with general information about the contents of the report Related Topics Overview of Concurrent Programs and Requests page 6 1 Concurrent Program Details Report page 6 57 Concurrent Programs page 6 65 6 58 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Request Groups Window B Oracle Applications ioj x File Edit View Folder Tools Window Help ORACLE e 1mnmgEILZOSS9Z as Request Groups Group Application Code Description Application Use this window to define a request group A request security group is the collection of requests request sets and concurrent programs that a user operating under a given responsibility can select from the Submit Requests window Syste
597. user selecting Terminate in the Concurrent Requests form This field displays a number generated by the individual concurrent manager that identifies the process This field cannot be updated This number may be referenced if an operating system process ID is not available Defining Concurrent Managers 7 55 You can use this number to view the log file associated with the process This is the same log file you view when you select Manager Log from the View field of the Concurrent Requests form e At the operating system level locate yourself in the log directory FND_TOP APPLLOG e For concurrent managers use w lt number gt mgr e For Internal Monitor processes use i lt number gt mgr Manager Identifiers Oracle This field displays the ORACLE process ID associated with the manager process This field cannot be updated Manager Identifiers System This field displays the operating system process ID associated with the manager process This field cannot be updated Request Identifiers Running Please note the following about this field e Normally this field is blank as the run time of a request is typically very short e Fora terminated manager the ID of the request being processed at the time of termination is displayed Request Identifiers System This field displays the operating system process ID for a spawned concurrent process Viewing Log Files Use the three buttons near the bottom of the window to vie
598. utable with the Oracle Reports execution method You then define a concurrent program for that executable registering any parameters and incompatible programs You also enter the minimum column and row length orientation and print style Printers 9 5 Running Character Mode Oracle Reports Programs Oracle Reports System Administration Application Application oo Oracle Reports Define Executable Define Concurrent Program Program Define report program Enter name of Register parameters execution file and incompatible programs Set execution method Enter values for to Oracle Reports minimum and maximum columns and rows Request to Run Define Print Style Define report onentation Enter number of Program columns and rows Define units of and orientation measure and page size Running Bitmap Oracle Reports Concurrent Programs Bitmap Oracle Reports programs are defined similarly in Oracle Reports and in the Concurrent Program Executable form To run an Oracle Reports program in bitmap mode query the concurrent program s definition in the Concurrent Programs form and choose PostScript in the Format field Bitmap Oracle Reports programs take their page dimensions and orientation from the program s definition note when printing a bitmap report a print style is still required If you wish to override the program s definitions you can enter values in the Execution Options field for ORIENTATION and PAGESIZE When entering
599. utput files and printer drivers that instruct the various printer types how to output the selected print style Use the Printer Types form to query the combinations of print style and printer driver that support each type of printer you have Printers 9 31 Important Predefined printing components may have to be modified for different printer types and or operating platforms For example if a blank page is being printed after each printed page the number of rows defined for the print style may need to be reduced or an escape sequence that is being interpreted differently creating a page eject command may have to be rewritten Verify and if necessary Customize Printer Driver Definitions Upon installation for any printer type you are using verify your printer driver definitions particularly the following Initialization string Print a short report to verify the page s printing orientation If you want to change the printer s default font for the report you would include that information in the Initialization string Reset string Print two short reports with different printing orientations for example one that is landscape and another that is portrait to verify the printer is resetting itself properly Arguments Print a short report to verify the arguments to the operating system s print command or a custom print program are being interpreted correctly If you need to define a new print style verify the printer
600. val between resubmissions The available units are MINUTES HOURS DAYS or MONTHS Use this parameter along with REPEAT INTERVAL to specify the time between resubmissions For example setting REPEAT INTERVAL 12 and REPEAT INTERVAL UNIT HOURS resubmits your request every twelve hours The default value is DAYS Important Do not use REPEAT INTERVAL and REPEAT INTERVAL UNIT with REPEAT TIME REPEAT INTERVAL TYPE Optional Whether to time the resubmission interval from the requested start time of the request or from its completion Set this parameter either to START or END The default value is START Important Use REPEAT INTERVAL TYPE only if you use REPEAT INTERVAL REPEAT END Optional The date and time to stop resubmitting the concurrent request Use one of the following for the format of the end date DD MON RR HH24 MI SS as in 07 APR 02 18 32 05 or 6 42 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration NLS_LANGUAGE NLS_TERRITORY START IMPLICIT REPEAT_DAYS DD MON RRRR HH24 MI SS as in 07 APR 2002 18 32 05 Note that because this date format includes a space you must enclose the date in double quotation marks and single quotation marks You can also specify just the date DD MON RR Or DD MON RRRR Optional The NLS language for the request Optional The NLS territory for the request Optional A start date and time for your program in this format DD MON RR HH
601. value against the value of another parameter in this structure Parameters with a range of Low must appear before parameters with a range of High the low parameter must have a lower number than the high parameter For example if you plan two parameters named Start Date and End Date you may want to force users to enter an end date later than the start date You could assign Start Date a range of Low and End Date a range of High In this example the parameter you name Start Date must appear before the parameter you name End Date If you choose Low for one parameter you must also choose High for another parameter in that structure and vice versa Otherwise you cannot commit your changes Window Information Display Indicate whether to display this parameter in the Parameters window when a user submits a request to run the program from the Submit Requests window 6 78 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration You should provide a default type and value for any non displayed parameter Window Information Display Size Enter the field length in characters for this parameter The user sees and fills in the field in the Parameters window of the Submit Requests window You should ensure that the total of the value set maximum sizes not the display sizes for all of your parameters plus the number of separators you need number of parameters minus one does not add up to more than 240 If your program
602. values in the Define Alerts form 6 56 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Concurrent Program Details Report This report documents concurrent program definitions including executable file information execution method incompatible program listings and program parameters If a concurrent program generates a report column and row information as well as print output and print style are also documented Use this report when considering concurrent program modifications such as modifying program incompatibility rules Report Parameters Caution If you do not enter any parameters the report returns values for all concurrent programs and may be very lengthy Application Name Program Choose the application name associated with the concurrent program whose program definition details you wish to report on Choose only an application name without a program name if you wish to run a program definition details report on all concurrent programs associated with an application Choose the name of a concurrent program whose program definition details you wish to report on You must enter a value for Application Name before entering a value for Program Report Headings The report headings display the specified report parameters and provide you with general information about the contents of the report Concurrent Programs Report page 6 57 Concurrent Programs Report This report shows which conc
603. ve assignments for a sequence you can disable the sequence by entering the current date as the end date Once disabled a sequence cannot be reactivated Once defined you cannot change the type of document numbering sequence Automatic Sequentially assigns by date and time of creation a unique number to each document as it is generated Manual Manual numbering requires a user to assign a number to each document before it is generated You must enter unique values However please note that numerical ordering and completeness is not enforced Important The Automatic By User type is currently not supported and is reserved for future use 14 8 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Message Initial Value Related Topics Warning The Gapless Numbering type is valid only in the context of certain localizations We recommend that you choose this type only after consulting with Worldwide Support as it may affect the performance of your system Check the Message check box if you want each document to display a message in the message line near the bottom of the screen informing the user of the sequence name and value number This check box only applies to sequences with the automatic type of numbering Messages appear only on form displays and are not written to a request s log file Once a sequence is defined the message choice cannot be changed Enter a value for the first document in your s
604. ve path gt For example mydata ldt c NloaderNconfigNcfg102 1ct Examples An example of downloading is FNDLOAD apps apps devdb 0 Y DOWNLOAD testcfg lct out ldt FND APPLICATION TL APPSNAME FND This command does the following connects to apps appsedevd e downloads data using the configuration file testcfg Ict e writes data to data file out ldt e downloads the END APPLICATION TL entity with APPSNAME parameter defined as value FND An example of uploading is FNDLOAD apps apps custdb 0 Y UPLOAD fndapp lct fnd1234 1dt This command does the following connects to apps apps custdb e uploads data using the configuration file in fndapp lct from data file in fnd1234 1dt The contents of the entire data file is uploaded Configuration File Operation of the Generic Loader is controlled by the specified configuration file The configuration file contains the following e DEFINE block DOWNLOAD block e UPLOAD block The contents of the configuration file specify the structure of the data and the access methods to use to move the data between the data file and a database B 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration DEFINE Block The DEFINE block specifies the structure of the datafile records The define block format is identical to that already generated by existing Oracle Application Object Library loaders The structure of this section is DEFINE lt entity gt KEY lt
605. vers window and the actual output for the report In addition the following table lists arguments and their contents in the cases of an original print request and reprint requests Argument Syntax Original Print Request Reprint Value Retrieved Value Retrieved PROFILE ORIGREQID Request ID Original request ID PROFILE ORIGUSERNAM User name Original user name E PROFILE REPREQID 0 zero Reprint request ID PROFILE REPUSERNAME NULL Reprint request user name Printers 9 35 Argument Syntax Original Print Request Reprint Value Retrieved Value Retrieved PROFILE OUTFILENAME Output file path and filename Output file path and filename Note that the file here contains only the report output PROFILE OUTFILEHOST Host name Host name Using Standard Input When Standard Input is set to Yes the printer driver accepts standard input so you can feed a report s output directly to the printer from standard input Two examples of using standard input are e when you run a pipe in UNIX such as cat myfile lpr rather than lpr myfile the output file is sent to the stdin standard input the UNIX command lpr which accepts standard input when a filename is not specified The Standard Input field should be set to No when the Driver Method is set to Program or Subroutine Unless the program accepts standard input the Standard Input field should always be set to No Important When Standard
606. vided by Oracle you can specify the font you want by using the font name option in the pasta cfg file You can use any TrueType fonts on your middle tier or if your printer has a font installed suitable for the language of your report you can utilize the printer font The form of the pasta cfg option is Font Default lt Style gt lt TrueType font file name gt or Font Default lt Style gt printer lt Printer font file name gt Example using TrueType font file Font Default Plain FND TOP gt lt APPLRSC gt ADUO ttf Font Default Bold lt FND_TOP gt lt APPLRSC gt ADUOB ttf 9 16 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Related Topics Example using Printer Font Font Default Plain printer Courier Font Default Bold printer Courier Bold Setup for Basic Printing with Pasta page 9 10 Defining Configuration Files for Specific Printers page 9 11 Modify Add Printer Type to Use Pasta page 9 12 Setting Margins page 9 13 Printing a Report Using the noprint Option page 9 14 Generating Other Formats Using the Preprocessing Option page 9 15 Language Specific Font Support page 9 17 Configuration File Options page 9 18 Command Line Parameters page 9 24 Language Specific Font Support Related Topics The default pasta cfg file contains font settings for languages You override the default setting in the language specific section of the pasta cfg file For example if you want to ov
607. w log files Log files record information that may be helpful when diagnosing problems Request Log Choose this button to view the log file of the process associated with the running request Internal Manager Log Choose this button to view the Internal Concurrent Manager s log file Manager Log Choose this button to view the log file of the concurrent manager who started running the request 7 56 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Concurrent Requests Window d Oracle Applications File Edit View Folder Toolz Window Help ORACLE EIE e a e Aa S Concurrent Requests EAUX Ener Ele Internal Manager irl ap283sun Concurrent Requests LJ Position Request ID Program Requestor ucc EU nre DOOD EE DE OT EY Phase Status View all running and pending requests for a selected manager whose name and node are identified near the top of the window Defining Concurrent Managers 7 57 Request Diagnostics Window s Oracle Applications File Edit View Folder Tool Window Help ORACLE te O1O 2 KE mh EFE 2s Es Request Diagnostics Request ID Phase Status Name This window informs you when the request completed or if it did not complete shows you a diagnostic message indicating why Related Topics Concurrent Manager field help page 7 59 Defining Managers and their Work Shifts page 7 1 Cont
608. wing steps before compiling your stand alone executable For custom concurrent programs you define under your custom application as recommended you should copy the sample mk file from FND_TOP usrxit to your lt PROD gt _TOP APPLLIB directory Modify your copy according to the instructions contained in the file This is the file adrelink uses to link your stand alone executables Then enter the following commands SFND TOP fndenv Move to the directory in which your source files are kept 6 36 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration cd lt source directory gt make f SFND_TOP SAPPLLIB Makefile source file gt o Here lt source file gt is the name of the file containing your program and lt directory gt is the directory where the source file is located You can then link your stand alone executable and place the executable in the APPLBIN directory under the TOP directory for your custom application adrelink force y appl short name program name gt In this relink command appl short name is the application short name of the application your program belongs to and program name gt is the program name Linking your Immediate Concurrent Program To create a program library you link your compiled library catalog with your program object files using an Oracle Application Object Library link procedure Important Oracle provides information on immediate concurrent progr
609. xt you can specify the output character set by the Oracle character set name for example text WE8ISO8859P1 If you use auto as the output character set text auto Pasta uses the appropriate character set according to the NLS_LANGUAGE value in the FND_LANGUAGES table 9 18 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Key Name Default Value Description Command Line Equivalent textAutoCharset preprocess printCommand The default value is taken from the FND_LANGUAGES table N A N A When the outputFormat is set to text auto Pasta uses a default character set for each language based on the language and character set mappings in the FND LANGUAGES table To override the default setting for a language use the textAutoCharset option in the Language Specific section of the pasta cfg file For example to override the default character set for Japanese to use JA16EUC instead enter the following Japanese textAutoCharset JA1 6SJIS Use this option to convert the output file Enter a preprocessing command to invoke any executable that supports an input file and an output file filter program Pasta will invoke the filter program before passing the file to the printing command Specific print command for Unix platform N A N A N A Printers 9 19 Key Name Default Value Description Command Line Equivalent ntP
610. your Oracle application during upgrades you must rename or recreate the request set using a different name before you upgrade If you modify a predefined request set without changing the name your modifications are overwritten when you upgrade your Oracle E Business Suite Creating Request Sets Follow this procedure to create a request set 1 Navigate to the Request Set window Enter a Name for your request set Enter a Set Code for your request set This name is used internally to reference your request set Enter the Application with which you want to associate your request set Enter a Description of your request set if you like The Owner field defaults to your username and can only be changed by your system administrator Enter the Active Dates From and To fields to define an effective period when you and others can run the request set If the current date is outside the range you define the request set will not be available in the Submit Requests window Note that the request set will not be available on the date specified in the To field 6 12 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Defining Stages Check the Print Together check box to send all your requests to the printer together when they complete or uncheck the check box to send each request one at a time to the printer as it completes Check the Allow Incompatibility check box to allow your system administrator to specify programs
611. yout Personalization Configurable page This launch page provides a boxed preview of the flexible layout structure within your page and displays controls that take you to different pages or flows where you specify and apply your actual personalizations e Mandatory user entered parameters e Flow business logic e Limited access to specific users e Multi organization access control These parameters might not be available and the page might fail with unexpected errors You should instead access the Personalization UI for your configurable page using the global Personalize Page link on the page itself when the Personalize Self service Defn profile option is enabled Page Hierarchy Personalization Non configurable page This launch page displays the entire structure of the selected page in a hierarchy table HGrid rather than as a C 4 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration visual boxed layout The Import Export page allows you to both export meta data to XML files and import XML files into a MDS repository Both administration level and user level personalizations may be extracted from one database and loaded into another This allows you the freedom to create and test personalizations in a test database before deploying the personalizations to a production instance Use the FND Personalization Document Root Path FND_PERZ_DOC_ROOT_PATH profile option to define the root path of the current deployed e
612. ype Application Program Program J E gt EE eS st a SS Es a Sa es EN a P E MEER LE END e 7 a Q e 1E i E A E DBG gt Specialize your manager to run only certain kinds of requests Without specialization rules a manager accepts requests to start any concurrent program Select from the poplist whether or not to include or exclude those requests that are based on the rule to run Select the type of specialization rule you want to assign to your manager Based on the rule s action you selected allow or disallow requests can be run by your manager according to a e Combined Rule For example only requests that satisfy the combined rule you select are allowed to be run by your manager Or conversely requests that satisfy a certain combined rule are excluded from running Combined specialization rules which combine more than one logical statement are 7 64 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration defined using the Combined Specialization Rules form See Combined Specialization Rules page 7 68 ORACLE ID For example programs with a certain ORACLE ID are excluded from running Or conversely a concurrent manager only includes programs with a specific ORACLE ID Program For example only the program you select is excluded from running Or conversely a concurr
613. ystem shell that runs the application and uses the CGI to deliver data to the application An Apache module that routes all servlet requests to the Apache JServ Servlet engine The servlet engine provides the runtime environment to execute servlets The servlet engine executes from within a Java Virtual Machine JWM running on the same node or a different node to the Apache HTTP Server Each JVM has one servlet engine but the number of servlet engines is not proportional to the number of JServ processes As the mod jserv and Apache JServ servlet engines are different processes potentially running on different machines a protocol called Apache JServ Protocol AJP is used for communication For more information on the AJP Protocol refer to http java apache org jserv protocol AJPv11 html Web Applications Dictionary Web Browser An active data dictionary that employs the Oracle Forms based interface The data dictionary stores specific information about Self Service Web Applications data including prompts language navigation and security The client user interface component The browser you use must support tables and frames and be Javascript enabled The embedded Javascript coding provides a mechanism for client side caching of user entered data during a transaction and simple client side validation of user entered data Execution of simple Javascript code logic at the client side results in reduced network traffic between the web br
614. zes this feature the MLS function can be used to determine which installed languages are needed for the request Beginning with Release 12 1 MLS functions can support multiple territories and numeric character sets as well as multiple languages See Oracle E Business Suite Developer s Guide Note If your program has an MLS function associated with it and the Use in SRS box below is not checked then the MLS function will be ignored Request Use in SRS Check this box to indicate that users can submit a request to run this program from a Standard Request Submission window If you check this box you must register your program parameters if any in the Parameters window accessed from the button at the bottom of this window 6 68 Oracle E Business Suite System Administrator s Guide Configuration Request Allow Disabled Values If you check the Use in SRS box you can also check this box to allow a user to enter disabled or outdated values as parameter values Many value sets use special table columns that indicate whether a particular value is enabled using ENABLED_FLAG START_DATE_ACTIVE and END_DATE_ACTIVE columns These value sets normally allow you to query disabled or outdated values but not enter them in new data For Standard Request Submission this means that a user would not normally be allowed to enter disabled values as report parameter values when submitting a report even if the report is a query only ty

Oracle E-Business Suite System Administrator`s Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents